1414 Ps1 Ta1 NC PWD SPC Prm0 00001 Pape Soe Specifications 20230622 Rs02

Ontario Line
North Civil Works

Pape Segment Support of Excavation
Schedule 9 – Technical Specifications
RFP-2022-CCPC-416
Issued for Tender

June 1, 2023
OL North Civil Works Schedule 9 - Specification and Drawings
Pape Segment Support of Excavation Section 00 01 07
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Seals Page
June 2023 Page 1 of 4
Engineer of Record
Section No. Section Name Engineer of Record
00 10 00 General Instructions
00 11 00 Summary of Work Division 00 Specification
00 12 00 Mobilization and Demobilization Sections concerning
Procurement and
00 15 00 Temporary Facilities Contracting
00 17 00 Materials and Equipment Requirements are not
00 17 30 Project Specific Conditions sealed
01 55 26 Traffic Control Stephan Schmidle
01 53 13 Temporary Bridges Craig Fairclough

03 10 00 Concrete Forming
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing
03 21 21.11 Glass Fibre Reinforced Polymer Reinforcement Bar
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
03 37 13 Shotcrete
05 05 19 Post-Installed Anchors for Concrete
05 12 00 Structural Steel
31 51 00 Tieback and Tie Anchors
31 53 00 Struts and Walers
31 53 99 Struts Temperature Control System

01 71 23.16 Construction Surveying Murray Shantz
02 22 00 Existing Conditions Assessment Robert Moen

31 09 13 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring
26 56 00 Temporary Street Lighting Nicholas Pereira


01 56 33 Temporary Barrier and Enclosures Rob Gould
07 10 00 Waterproofing System
31 23 16 Shaft Excavation
31 43 00 Jet Grouting
31 56 00 Slurry Walls
02 41 13 Site Demolition Muhammad Zubair

02 41 16 Structure Demolition
02 42 00 Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials
02 71 00 Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials
Abatement Plan Requirements
02 81 00 Hazardous Materials
02 81 50 Management of Toxic Waste Precautions
02 82 00.01 Asbestos Abatement - Minimum Precautions
02 82 00.02 Asbestos Abatement - Intermediate Precautions
02 82 00.03 Asbestos Abatement - Maximum Precautions
02 83 10 Leadbase Paint Abatement - Minimum Precautions
02 83 11 Leadbase Paint Abatement - Intermediate Precautions
02 83 12 Leadbase Paint Abatement - Maximum Precautions
02 84 00 Polychlorinated Biphenyl Remediation
02 87 13.13 Precautions for Mould Remediation - Minimum
Precautions
02 87 13.14 Precautions for Mould Remediation - Medium
Precautions
02 87 13.15 Precautions for Mould Remediation - Maximum
Precautions
22 01 00 Mechanical Systems
26 01 00 Electrical Systems
31 05 17 Aggregates
31 11 00 Tree clearing and Grubbing

26 05 26 Primary Grounding System Amir Tashakori
31 14 13 Soil Stripping and Stockpiling Mohamed Hosney

31 20 01 Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal
31 23 00 Excavation and Fill
31 23 19 Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal
31 22 13 Grading Saidal Akbari

31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
32 12 16 Asphalt Paving Reinstatement
33 00 00 General Utilities
33 05 16 Maintenance Holes and Catch Basin Structures
33 42 11 Story Utility Drainage Piping
33 44 51 CCTV Inspection of Pipeline
OL North Civil Works Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Table of Contents
Section No Section Name Rev. No. Rev. Date

DIVISION 00 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
00 01 07 Seals Page Rev 0 Jun-2023
00 01 10 Table of Contents Rev 0 Jun-2023
00 10 00 General Instructions Rev 0 Jun-2023
00 11 00 Summary of Work Rev 0 Jun-2023
00 12 00 Mobilization and Demobilization Rev 0 Jun-2023
00 15 00 Temporary Facilities Rev 0 Jun-2023
00 17 00 Material and Equipment Rev 0 Jun-2023
00 17 30 Project Specific Conditions Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 53 13 Temporary Bridges Rev 0 Jun-2023
01 55 26 Traffic Control Rev 0 Jun-2023
01 56 33 Temporary Barrier and Enclosures Rev 0 Jun-2023
01 71 23.16 Construction Surveying Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

02 22 00 Existing Conditions Assessment Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 23 03 Noise Monitoring Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 23 06 Vibration Monitoring Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 23 23 Noise and Vibration Instrumentation Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 41 13 Site Demolition Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 41 16 Structure Demolition Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 42 00 Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 71 00 Designated Substances and Hazardous Materials Abatement Rev 0 Jun-2023
Plan Requirements
02 81 00 Hazardous Materials Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 81 50 Management of Toxic Waste Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 82 00.01 Asbestos Abatement - Minimum Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 82 00.02 Asbestos Abatement - Intermediate Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 82 00.03 Asbestos Abatement - Maximum Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 83 10 Leadbase Paint Abatement - Minimum Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 83 11 Leadbase Paint Abatement - Intermediate Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023

02 83 12 Leadbase Paint Abatement - Maximum Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 84 00 Polychlorinated Biphenyl Remediation Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 87 13.13 Precautions for Mould Remediation - Minimum Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 87 13.14 Precautions for Mould Remediation - Medium Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023
02 87 13.15 Precautions for Mould Remediation - Maximum Precautions Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 03 CONCRETE
03 10 00 Concrete Forming Rev 0 Jun-2023
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing Rev 0 Jun-2023
Appendix A: SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change
03 21 21.11 Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer Reinforcement Bars Rev 0 Jun-2023

03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete Rev 0 Jun-2023
03 37 13 Shotcrete Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 05 STEELWORK
05 05 19 Post-Installed Anchors for Concrete Rev 0 Jun-2023
05 12 00 Structural Steel Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 10 00 Waterproofing System Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING
22 01 00 Mechanical Systems Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL
26 01 00 Electrical Systems Rev 0 Jun-2023
26 05 26 Primary Grounding Rev 0 Jun-2023
26 56 00 Temporary Street Lighting Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK
31 05 17 Aggregates Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 09 13 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring Rev 0 Jun-2023

31 11 00 Tree clearing and Grubbing Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 14 13 Soil Stripping and Stockpiling Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 20 01 Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 22 13 Grading Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 23 00 Excavation and Fill Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 23 16 Shaft Excavation Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 23 19 Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 25 00 Erosion and Sedimentation Control Rev 0 Jun-2023
Schedule(s):
31 25 00 Schedule E1 – ESC Inspection and Photograph Checklist Rev 0 Jun-2023

31 25 00 Schedule E2 – ESC Inspection Log Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 43 00 Jet Grouting Rev 0 Jun-2023
31 51 00 Tieback and Tie Anchors Rev 0 Jun-2023

31 53 00 Struts and Walers Rev 0 Jun-2023

31 53 99 Strut Temperature Control System Rev 0 Jun-2023

31 56 00 Slurry Walls Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 12 16 Asphalt Paving Reinstatement Rev 0 Jun-2023
DIVISION 33 UTILITIES
33 00 00 General Utilities Rev 0 Jun-2023
33 05 16 Maintenance Holes and Catch Basin Structures Rev 0 Jun-2023
33 42 11 Storm Utility Drainage Piping Rev 0 Jun-2023
33 44 51 CCTV Inspection of Pipeline Rev 0 Jun-2023
END OF SECTION
Ontario Line North Civil Works
Technical Specifications
Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting
Requirements
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 General Instructions
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Section specifies the general instructions for the execution of the
Work.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

(a) Schedule 4 – Review Procedures
(b) Schedule 7 – Schedule of Values
(c) Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

(a) Qualifications:
(i) Ensure that persons (trades workers) performing work that the
Trades Qualification and Apprenticeship Act (TQAA) sets out
certification requirements for, are properly qualified under the
TQAA.
(ii) Ensure these trades workers can, upon request, provide written
proof of TQAA trades qualification, such as a certificate of
qualification or apprenticeship contract, to Metrolinx, the Metrolinx
Representative or AHJ.
1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

(a) No measurement and payment will be undertaken for this specific
Section. Work related to this Section shall be incidental to the Work.
PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
EXECUTION
3.1 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE

(a) Storage of materials and equipment and Contractor’s temporary office
must be contained within designated Site area(s).
3.2 SETTING OUT OF WORK

(a) Setting out of Work is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
(b) Lay out Work in accordance with Section 01 71 23.16 and Drawings,
including providing benchmarks, control points, and replacing any
missing and/ or damaged control points and stakes.
(c) Verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions indicated, and report
errors or inconsistencies to the Metrolinx Representative before
commencing Work or as soon as discovered.
(d) Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the position, lines,
levels, dimensions, and alignment of all parts of the Work and for the
provision of all necessary instruments and labour therewith. Contractor
shall carefully preserve and protect all benchmarks, control points,
stakes, legal monuments, and other features used in setting out the
Work. If at any time during the progress of the Work, any error or
omissions are discovered on the position, lines levels, dimensions, and
alignment of any parts of the Work, the Contractor shall, at its own
expense, promptly rectify such errors to the satisfaction of the Metrolinx
Representative.
(e) The Metrolinx Representative may perform periodic checks of the
Contractor’s layout or measurement of the Work. Checking by the
Metrolinx Representative of any position, lines levels, dimensions and
alignment of any parts of the Work shall not in any way relieve the
Contractor of his responsibility of the correctness thereof.
(f) Carry out all measuring and surveying of the Work necessary to confirm
the quantities for payment of each item in Schedule 7 – Schedule of
Values, and any other subsequently appended quantities that arise due
to Changes to the Agreement.
3.3 CUTTING, FITTING AND PATCHING

(a) Execute cutting, fitting, and patching required to ensure quality,
aesthetics and proper integration of the Work.
(b) Where new Work connects with existing and where existing Work is
altered, cut, patch, and make good to match existing Work.
(c) Make cuts with clean, true, smooth edges. Make patches inconspicuous
in final assembly.
3.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

(a) Preconstruction Meeting:
(i) After Notification of Award, the Metrolinx Representative will
arrange and chair a preconstruction meeting. The Contractor and
major Subcontractors shall be represented by senior field staff. The
Metrolinx Representative will invite other interested parties, whose
coordination is required during construction, to attend. The
Metrolinx Representative will prepare and issue an agenda prior to

the meeting. Topics for discussion will include methods and means
by which full cooperation and coordination of all participants can be
achieved during construction. The Metrolinx Representative will
minute the meeting and distribute copies to each participant.
(b) Planning and Progress Review Meetings (PPR):
(i) The Metrolinx Representative will conduct, chair and minute
Planning and Progress Review (PPR) meetings on a weekly or bi-
weekly basis throughout the construction period and will inform all
parties concerned in advance, stating the time and venue of the
meetings.
(ii) These meetings will be 1 hour and 30 minutes, or less as required.
The Metrolinx Representative, acting reasonably, may schedule
additional meetings as required.
(iii) The Contractor shall be represented by senior field staff
(Contractors Representative) with the authority to commit the
Contractor to agreed decisions. The same personnel shall attend
the PPR meetings throughout the Contract period.
(iv) Subcontractors, Suppliers and others may be invited to attend PPR
meetings in which their aspects of the Work are discussed.
(v) The Metrolinx Representative shall invite parties from various
departments, at their discretion.
(vi) The Metrolinx Representative will prepare and issue a preliminary
agenda for each PPR meeting. The Contractor may propose
agenda topics prior to the meeting. Metrolinx Representative will
issue the agenda at the PPR meeting. Meeting attendees may
introduce additional relevant topics at the PPR meeting.
(vii) The Metrolinx Representative will distribute copies of the minutes
to all participants.
(viii) Neither the discussions taking place during PPR meetings nor any
of the corresponding meeting minutes’ contents shall constitute a
Notice of Dispute or a Notice of Delay for the purposes of the
Agreement.
(ix) The following topics shall be included in the agenda of each
meeting, notwithstanding the requirements set out in the
Agreement:
A. Schedule:
(1) Compliance and updates.
(2) Early notice of at-risk schedule items.
(3) Look ahead schedule.

B. Progress and Reporting:
(1) Community liaison issues.
(2) Health and safety.
(3) Quality management.
(4) Environmental management.
(5) Utilities coordination.
(6) PLAA.
(7) Construction progress planning.
C. Status Reports:
(1) Requests for information.
(2) Submittals.
(3) Contract changes.
(4) Hold and witness points.
(5) Inspection and testing.
D. Other Items:
(1) Potential issues or disputes.
(2) Design activities with potential impacts to the project
scope.
(3) Any other business.
(c) Payment Meetings:
(i) The Metrolinx Representative will conduct, chair and minute
payment meetings monthly, or as directed by Metrolinx
Representative, and will inform all parties concerned in advance,
stating the time and venue of the meetings.
(ii) The Contractor shall be represented by senior staff with the
authority to commit the Contractor to decisions agreed upon. The
same personnel shall attend the meetings throughout the Contract
period.
(iii) The meeting shall be held promptly after the Contractor has
submitted its monthly payment application.
(d) TTC Technical Meetings
(i) See Appendix B of Schedule 4 - Review Procedures.
3.5 ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS

(a) The Metrolinx Representative may furnish additional Drawings to assist
proper execution of Work. These Drawings will be issued for clarification
only. Such Drawings shall have the same meaning and intent as if they
were included in Schedule 9 – Specification and Drawings.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Summary of Work
GENERAL
1.1. SCOPE
(a) This Section, along with any references to certain elements of the Work
made hereunder, outlines the main tasks to be carried out by Contractor
to execute the Work required under the Agreement, and is not intended
to represent or imply the total scope requirements and details relevant to
the subject(s) referenced.
(b) The Contractor shall review and understand this Section in conjunction
with the Agreement, all of its Schedules, and all other documents listed
in Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings, in their entirety, to
ascertain the total scope requirements and activities required in the
delivery of the Work under this Agreement.
1.2. RELATED REQUIREMENTS

(a) Schedule 4 – Review Procedure
(b) Schedule 5 – Quality Management
(c) Schedule 7 – Schedule of Values
(d) Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings:
(e) Schedule 14 – Record Provisions
(f) Schedule 16 – Other Contractors
1.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

(a) Refer to Schedule 7 – Schedule of Values.
1.4. DEFINITIONS
(a) “ESB” – Emergency Services Building. Headhouse structure that
provides access to the tunnel from ground surface for emergency
services personnel. The ESB will contain ventilation fans and equipment
to provide ventilation and smoke extraction as part of the FLS design.
(b) “Ground Instrumentation” as defined in Schedule 9 – Specifications and
Drawings, Section 31 09 13 - Geotechnical Instrumentation and
Monitoring.
(c) “Instrumentation and Data Management System” (IDMS) means a web
accessible data management platform that provides access to all data in
a both graphical format and numerical format that allows for online
interpretation of that data.
(d) “Jet grouting” as defined in Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings,
Section 31 43 00 – Jet Grouting.
(e) “Pape Station” means the existing TTC subway station located between
Danforth Avenue, Gertrude Place and east of Pape Avenue.
(f) “Risk Management Plan” (RMP) means a document that defines how the
Project's risk management process will be executed and includes the
funds, tools and approaches that will be used to perform risk
identification, assessment, mitigation and monitoring activities.
(g) “Risk Register” means a tool used in the risk management of the Project
used to identify potential risks. The Risk Register serves as a repository
for all risks identified and includes additional information about each risk,
their rating, existing control measures and risk mitigation measures.
(h) “Sammon Avenue Headhouse” means the proposed headhouse
structure of the future Ontario Line Emergency Services Building (ESB)
adjacent to the intersection of Pape Avenue and Sammon Avenue, which
is to be constructed by others.
(i) “Slurry Walls” as defined in Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings,
Section 31 56 00 - Slurry Walls.
(j) “Support of Excavation” as defined in Schedule 9 – Specifications and
Drawings, Section 31 56 00 - Slurry Walls.
(k) “Temporary Bridge” as defined in Schedule 9 – Specifications and
Drawings, Section 01 53 13 – Temporary Bridges.
(l) “Tie Anchors” as defined in Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings,
Section 31 51 00 – Tiebacks and Tie Anchors.
(m) “Tiebacks” as defined in Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings,
Section 31 51 00 – Tiebacks and Tie Anchors
(n) “TTC Bus Loop” means the existing TTC bus loop that encompasses the
main TTC headhouse immediately to the north of the existing Pape
Station and immediately to the east of Pape Avenue.
1.5. MAIN ELEMENTS OF THE SCOPE OF WORK

(a) Contractor shall carry out all works including, but not limited to
engineering, procurement, fabrication, erection, assembly, construction,
transportation, shipping, customs clearance, supervision, quality
management, health and safety management, environmental
compliance, testing and handover of Work required under the
Agreement. The following list outlines a non-exhaustive summary of such
requirements:
(b) General – Administrative: Contractor shall:
(i) Fulfill its scheduling requirements stipulated under Schedule 6 –
Work Schedule Requirements;
(ii) Provide Construction Certificates and Submittals in a timely

manner for review in accordance with the Submittal requirements
stipulated in the Agreement in general, and under Schedule 4 –
Review Procedure.
(iii) Prepare and implement a Quality Management Plan, in addition to
other requirements specified under Schedule 5 – Quality
Management.
(iv) Coordinate the Work with Other Contractors, stakeholders, third
parties, Utility Owners and AHJ who are working in or adjacent to
the Work Site or who are responsible for assets, works, and/or
utilities interfacing with Contractor’s Work including, but not limited
to, those in Schedule 16 – Other Contractors.
(v) Fulfill progress monitoring and reporting requirements including,
but not limited to, those in Schedule 17- Work Report
Requirements.
(vi) Develop and implement an Environmental Management System,
including installing, maintaining and monitoring of environmental
impact mitigation measures, in addition to other requirements
specified under Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations.
(vii) Engage a Geotechnical Instrumentation specialist to supply and
install geotechnical instrumentation in accordance with the
Drawings and Specifications. Take control of preinstalled
instrumentation and perform monitoring of all site instrumentation
including instrumentation installed on or within third party
structures and instrumentation installed on or within Existing TTC
Infrastructure. Provide an instrumentation data management
system for hosting and accessing instrumentation monitoring data.
(viii) Prepare and implement a Communications and Community
Engagement and Stakeholder Relations Plan, in addition to other
requirements specified under Schedule 11 – Communication and
Public Engagement Protocols.
(ix) Prepare and implement a Project-specific Safety Work Plan, in
addition to other requirements specified under Schedule 19 –
Construction Safety.
(x) Provide Project Documentation in accordance with the
requirements of Schedule 14 – Record Provisions
(xi) Recruit, train, certify and obtain all necessary qualifications for
Contractor’s staff as applicable. Contractor shall retain and share
evidence of completion of training and other
certifications/qualifications of its employees when requested by

Metrolinx at Metrolinx’s discretion.
(xii) Develop a Contractor’s Risk Management Plan and corresponding
Risk Register. Actively participate in Metrolinx facilitated risk
management activities and regular risk monitoring meetings related
to the Work, by identifying and advising Metrolinx of project risks,
developing and implementing risk mitigation measures, performing
risk assessments and developing further risk treatment as
required. Collaboratively participate in the allocation of project risks
into risk response categories. Perform cost and schedule impact
evaluation for project risks.
(c) General – All Sites: Contractor is responsible for:
(i) Fulfilling the ‘Constructor’ role for the Work Sites in accordance
with requirements of Schedule 19 – Construction Health and
Safety and OHSA.
(ii) Procurement, shipment, transportation, supply and installation of
all the temporary and permanent materials for the Project.
(iii) Implementing erosion and sediment control and environmental
protection measures at the Work Sites.
(iv) Implementing vegetation, tree and invasive species removal at the
Work Sites.
(v) Survey work for activities relating, but not limited to, the following:
A. all existing structures and assets;
B. pre-construction surveys and building condition assessments,
including CCTV;
C. surveys to aid the construction Works;
D. instrumentation monitoring;
E. post-construction surveys, including CCTV; and
F. any other surveys that are necessary for Contractor to fulfill its
obligations stipulated under the Agreement.
(vi) Implementation and maintenance of traffic management measures
including partial road and sidewalk closures, detours, and driveway
and bus stop relocations.
(vii) Support, protection and relocation of Municipal and third-party
utilities as required to facilitate the construction of the Work.
(viii) Designing, supplying, installing, and removing all material and

equipment necessary for temporary services including but not
limited to; power, lighting, water and sanitary services.
(ix) Temporary grading & installation of Site drainage infrastructure.
(x) Installation of Geotechnical Instrumentation within the Sites.
Monitoring of Geotechnical Instrumentation and building monitoring
points within and outside of the Sites, with integration of the data
into the Instrumentation and Data Management System. (IDMS).
(xi) Design, installation and maintenance of dewatering systems,
groundwater control systems and water treatment systems at the
Sites
(xii) Obtain all necessary permits needed to complete the Work in
accordance with the requirements stipulated under the Agreement
in general, and under Schedule 1 – Appendix A – Permits,
Licenses, Approvals and Agreements – in particular.
(d) Pape Station Support of Excavation Site Summary of Work: Contractor is
responsible for completing the following non-exhaustive list of Works in
accordance with the requirements of the Agreement:
(i) Property demolition of 24 residential properties and 14 low rise
commercial properties acquired by Metrolinx.
(ii) Relocation of Municipal sewer utilities along Lipton Avenue,
Gertrude Place and Danforth Avenue.
(iii) Construction of a Temporary Bridge (road & pedestrian decking) to
facilitate the construction of the South Shaft and North Shaft
adjacent and under the road corridors at Gertrude Place and
Danforth Avenue.
(iv) Support and protection of telecommunications lines running along
Danforth Ave and supported in place by a Temporary Bridge
structure during and following SOE construction.
(v) Jet Grouting works beneath the Existing TTC Infrastructure at
Pape Station, adjacent to the SOE Head Walls (beneath Lipton
Avenue) and at the TBM break-in / break-out locations (beneath
Danforth Avenue and Gertrude Place).
(vi) Installation of Slurry Walls as the SOE and ground water cut-off
system to create a South Shaft and a North Shaft in the future
Pape Station footprint.
(vii) Excavation of material and disposal off-site to an appropriate
receiving facility.
(viii) Installation of tensioned Tiebacks and Tie Anchors.
(ix) Installation, temperature control and monitoring of pre-loaded

struts and walers within the SOE shaft sites.
(x) Construction of a reinforced concrete SOE base slab with
waterstops at construction joints within the SOE shaft sites.
(xi) Completion of all Works within the TTC Zone of Influence for the
existing Pape Station and Line 2 shall be in accordance with the
TTC Technical Review Requirements included in Schedule 4 –
Review Procedures, Appendix B, Attachment 2.
(e) Sammon Avenue Headhouse Support of Excavation Summary of Work
(i) Property demolition of two residential properties and one low rise
commercial property on Pape Avenue acquired by Metrolinx at
Sammon Avenue Shaft Site.
(ii) Installation of a Slurry Wall system as the SOE and ground water
cut off to create a shaft for the future Sammon Avenue Headhouse
structure.
(iii) Excavation of material and disposal off-site to an appropriate
receiving facility.
(iv) Installation of pre-loaded struts and walers within the SOE shaft.
(v) Construction of a reinforced concrete baseslab with waterstops at
any construction joints within the SOE shaft.
1.6. WORK HANDOVER

(a) The Contractor shall Commission and Handover the Work in accordance
with the requirements of Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning Program
and Handover.
1.7. WORK BY OTHERS

(a) The following works will occur within, or in the vicinity of, the Site area
but do not form part of the works to be carried out under this Agreement
(See Schedule 16 – Other Contractors for further details):
(i) Pape Station
A. Underpinning and the associated pipe canopy, and
compensation grouting beneath the TTC structure
B. The permanent works for the new OL Pape Station.
C. The TTC headhouse modifications, bus canopy demolition and
the new fan shaft works.
D. Relocation of dry utilities in the Site footprint.
E. The de-tensioning of tiebacks and removal of bracing.
(ii) Sammon Avenue Headhouse

A. Permanent works for Sammon Avenue headhouse.
B. The Sequential Excavation Method (SEM) cavern excavation
for the crossover within the running tunnels
C. Protection-in-place of the utilities above and in the vicinity of
the future mined crossover cavern.
D. Jet grouting works for TBM break-in and TBM break-out.
1.8. WORK SITE LOCATION

(a) The Work Site includes the following locations, the boundaries and
availabilities of which are defined in Schedule 12 - Lands:
(i) Pape Station shaft sites: The overall Site area bound between
Danforth Avenue on the south and Gertrude Place on the north,
and directly above the future Ontario Line alignment corridor. The
Site is located where the 38 existing properties are to be
demolished. The overall Site area is approximately 12,000m2.
Additional temporary Work Site areas will be required to undertake
jet grouting works and demolition of 10 Gertrude Place.
(ii) Sammon Avenue Headhouse shaft site: The Site on the south-east
corner of the intersection of Pape Avenue and Sammon Avenue.
The Site area is approximately 1950m2.
PRODUCTS
1.9. NOT USED
EXECUTION
1.10. NOT USED
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Mobilization and Demobilization
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Section specifies the requirements for Mobilization and
Demobilization.

(a) Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning Schedule and Handover
(b) Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings:
(c) Schedule 19 – Construction Safety
1.3 DEFINITIONS
(a) Mobilization and Demobilization: means the mobilization and
demobilization of the Contractor’s forces and equipment, supplies,
appurtenances and the like, manned and ready for completing the Work
required under the Agreement, and the subsequent demobilization and
removal from the Site of said equipment, materials appurtenances and
the like upon completion of the Work. Mobilization will not be considered
as work in fulfilling the Agreement requirements for commencement of
the Work.

(a) Measurement:
(i) Measurement for the following items shall be by lump sum:
A. Mobilization.
B. Demobilization.
(b) Payment:
(i) Payment shall be made for the following items:
A. Mobilization – Item A.0.1.
B. Demobilization – Item A.0.2.
(c) Costs associated with mobilization and demobilization shall include costs
such as visas, medicals, alcohol & substance test and testing, flights,
orientation, induction time, third party certification, all required training, all
site-specific training, and submission of all documentation required prior to
mobilization.
(d) The lump sum Mobilization payment (Item A.0.1) shall be made upon
completion of all activities listed below:
(i) Contractor submission of insurance certificates in accordance with

the Agreement and Schedules.
(ii) Performance Bonds, Letter of Credit (LOC), and Parent Company
Guarantees as applicable in accordance with the Agreement.
(iii) Following the Metrolinx Representatives review and acceptance of
the following submittals:
A. All premobilization documentation set out in the Agreement.
B. All premobilization environmental and safety documentation,
including but not limited to, the documentation required in
accordance with Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations &
Schedule 19 – Construction Safety.
C. All premobilization documentation, including but not limited to,
Schedule 1 – Permits License Approvals and Agreements and
Schedule 11 - Communications and Public Engagement
Protocol.
D. All premobilization workforce services documentation including
but not limited to the documentation set out in Schedule 6 –
Work Schedule Requirements.
E. All premobilization quality assurance documentation including
but not limited to the documentation set out in Schedule 5 –
Quality Management Systems
(iv) Completion of all other activities set out in this Section, except
those related to Demobilization.
(v) The Mobilization payment specified above (Item A.0.1) shall not be
paid in increments. The total Mobilization payment will be paid
upon completion of all activities and acceptance of all
documentation set out above.
(e) Demobilization milestone payments shall be made upon completion of
the activities listed below;
(i) Removal from the Site of all construction equipment provided by
the Contractor.
(ii) Dismantlement and removal of all temporary buildings and
associated utilities or services erected by the Contractor as part of
the Work, or as amended thereto. Removal of all excess
construction materials, debris, and the like as determined by the
Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) Removal of all personnel from the Site.
(iv) Reinstatement of the Site on completion of the Works to the

standard specified in the Agreement.
(v) Upon review and acceptance of all final submittals, including
material lists, Handover documentation, all as built records, ITP &
testing records in accordance with Schedule 4 – Review
Procedures, Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning Program and
Handover and Schedule 14 – Record Provisions.
(vi) Completion of all other activities on the Work Site.
(f) The Demobilization payment item (Item A.0.2) may be paid in increments
depending on the Contractor’s Project Work Schedule and Handover
support activities required of the Contractor. The total lump sum payment
will be paid upon completion of all activities and submission of all
documentation set out above. The Contractor shall submit
documentation to verify the activities above are complete, as requested.
PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
(a) Contractor shall:
(i) Familiarize its staff and subcontractors with the Site, the location of
the Work and any limitations and constraints.
(ii) Before commencing Work, obtain all required access, road
occupancy and Contractor PLAA before entering onto land
impacted by the Work and ensure their validity throughout the
duration of Work.
(iii) Commence Mobilization after the Effective Date unless otherwise
required by the Agreement and directed by the Metrolinx
Representative.
(iv) Transport personnel, equipment, supplies and materials to the Site,
including Contractor’s offices, buildings, and other temporary
facilities.
(v) Obtain all required permits for transportation of the Contractor’s
Equipment.
(vi) Obtain all required permits for the Contractor’s and Project offices,
buildings, and other temporary facilities.
(vii) Abide by all codes and regulations for use of existing infrastructure
adjacent to the Site, such as, but not limited to existing roads and
bridges. The Contractor will be held liable for any damages to
adjacent site infrastructure. The Contractor shall ensure that their
forces are in compliance with all bridge clearances, loading
requirements and access conditions.
(viii) Confirm and comply with all roadway, bridge loading and restricted
height clearances.
(ix) Ensure that equipment and materials are mobilized and
demobilized in accordance with all local, provincial, and federal
regulations and acts related to transportation and safety.
(x) Mobilize and demobilize equipment by means of access routes
shown on the Drawings or as indicated by the Metrolinx
Representative in accordance with Section 00 17 30.
(xi) Upon completion of the Work, restore all access areas to the same
condition as prior to the start of the Work, unless indicated
otherwise in Schedule 9 – Specifications and Drawings.
(xii) Conduct, complete and document trainings required to ensure all
of Contractor’s (and its Subcontractor’s) staff are qualified,
competent, knowledgeable and skilled enough to perform the Work
in accordance with the health, safety, environmental, quality,
schedule and technical requirements of the Agreement.
3.2 MOBILIZATION
(a) Mobilization is deemed to include the provision of the following:
(i) Contractor PLAAs required to commence Work.
(ii) Site Specific Safety Work Plan as outlined in Schedule 19 –
Construction Safety.
(iii) Submission of a ninety (90) calendar days Mobilization and
Commencement plan detailing the mobilization and Work activities
that Contractor plans to complete within the first ninety days, to be
reviewed and approved by Metrolinx or the Metrolinx
Representative.
(iv) Mobilization of adequate number of workers and staff to meet the
Schedule requirements.
(b) Mobilization includes assembly and delivery to the Site of plant,
equipment, materials and supplies, the clearing of and preparation of the
Contractor’s work area; the complete assembly, in working order, of all
equipment necessary to perform the required work; and all other
preparatory work required to allow for the commencement of the Work.
3.3 DEMOBILIZATION
(a) Demobilization includes all activities associated with the safe and timely
removal from Site of personnel, equipment, supplies and materials not
used in the Agreement, including but not limited to the disassembly,
removal and transportation of the Contractor’s offices, buildings, and
other facilities including the Temporary Facilities.
(b) Demobilization includes submission and acceptance of final
documentation required to meet the requirements of the Agreement.
3.4 MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL OF DEMOBILIZATION MATERIALS

(a) Remove and dispose of materials resulting from Demobilization activities
from the Work Site within forty-eight (48) hours of Final Completion of the
Work.
3.5 HANDOVER
(a) Prior to the completion of Demobilization, the Contractor shall be
required to clear the Site of all Construction materials and Handover the
Site and Work in accordance with Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning
Schedule and Handover, to existing or better conditions, or as directed
by the Metrolinx Representative, acting reasonably.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Temporary Facilities
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Section addresses the temporary facilities and activities that will not
be incorporated into the final Work but are essential for the proper
execution and completion of the Agreement.

(a) Schedule 7 – Schedule of Values
(b) Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning and Handover

(a) Intentionally blank

(a) Work related to this Specific Section will be measured and paid in
accordance with Schedule 7, Item A.0.4 - Temporary Facilities.
PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Design, supply, erect/install, disassemble, and demobilize whenever and
wherever necessary for the safe and timely completion of the Works, the
following temporary work facilities:
(i) Scaffolding;
(ii) Temporary access platforms;
(iii) Rigging equipment and machinery;
(iv) Lifts for employees and/or lifts for equipment/material; and
(v) Fixed and mobile cranes.
(b) Ensure that all temporary facilities provided by Contractor comply with
the environmental, health and safety requirements of the Agreement and
all applicable requirements of OHSA, Environmental Protection Act, or
any other applicable legislation.
(c) In accordance with the requirements of Schedule 8 – Outline

Commissioning and Handover, some temporary facilities may remain on
Site following completion of the Work.
3.2 ACCESS
(a) Use designated entrances for access and egress to various portions of
the Site, maintain such roads for duration of the Agreement Term and
make good damage resulting from Contractor’s use. Repair and restore
parts of the access roads and property broken or damaged by operations
performed under the Agreement
(b) Contractor parties shall check-in and check-out at the gate.
(i) Contractor Parties may be required to demonstrate proof of training
and qualifications to be on Metrolinx property.
(c) Build and maintain temporary roads where required and provide snow
removal during period of Work.
(d) Access roads shall remain in state of good repair, and a well-graded
condition.
3.3 SITE OFFICES

(a) Within fifteen (15) Calendar Days following the Effective Date, provide
site office facilities (the “Site Office(s)”) with temperature maintained to
22ºC, lighted 750 Lx and ventilated, of sufficient size to accommodate
site meetings and furnished with drawing laydown table and telephone.
(b) Within the site Pape Station Work Site office, provide for the exclusive
use of Metrolinx and the Metrolinx Representative:
(i) An area to accommodate seven (7) workstations, 8 m2 each, in an
open plan arrangement
(ii) Three (3) enclosed offices with dimensions no less than 3.5m by
3.7m.
(iii) For each of the workstations and each of the enclosed offices,
provide the following furniture/facilities/accommodations:
A. lockable 2-drawer legal filing cabinet,
B. double pedestal executive desk with lockable drawers,
C. swivel armchair,
D. metal, lockable storage cabinet (one per enclosed office, and
one for every two workstations),
E. whiteboard,
F. Internet access, including wireless access (Wifi), providing

sufficient bandwith to facilitate video conferencing capability,
and
G. Three (3) double socket electrical power supply outlets.
(c) Provide cables for network, internet, and electrical power that are
properly routed and confined in a safe manner which eliminates tripping
hazards,
(d) Provide, within the Site Office at the Pape Station Work Site:
(i) a separate area to function as a meeting room that supports
teleconference capabilities, including internet connection,
teleconference equipment, a wall-mounted flat screen TV, and at
least ten (10) armchairs,
(ii) Two (2) 3-in-1 colour printer/scan/fax/copiers on sizes up to 11 x
17 inches (A3), connected to a joint network,
(iii) Provide a complete set of project IFC drawings in A1 size (2’ x 3’).
(iv) A kitchenette containing a sink, a cupboard, a source of drinking
water, a water kettle, a microwave, and a small fridge
(e) Within the Sammon Crossover Work Site office, provide for the exclusive
use of Metrolinx and the Metrolinx Representative:
(i) An area to accommodate two (2) workstations, 8 m2 each, in an
open plan arrangement.
(ii) For each of the workstations, provide the furniture/facilities
described in Section 3.3 (b) (iii)
(f) Clean site offices weekly, or sooner as needed.
3.4 PROVISION FOR TRAFFIC

(a) Notwithstanding the requirements of Section 01 55 26, the Contractor
shall at all times:
(i) Carry out the Work in a manner that will create the least
interference with traffic consistent with the performance of the
Work and following Ontario Traffic Manual (OTM).
(ii) Comply with the Metrolinx Health and Safety Department -
Construction/Public Interface – Guidance Advice document dated
March 2021 related to Provisions For Traffic.
3.5 STORAGE SHED

(a) Provide adequate weather-tight sheds with raised floors, for storage of
materials, tools and equipment which are subject to damage by weather
3.6 SANITARY FACILITIES

(a) Provide weatherproof sanitary facilities for Metrolinx and the Metrolinx
Representative in a discrete location suitable to Metrolinx for field staff in
accordance with governing regulations and ordinances. At a minimum,
but not limited to:
(i) Portable heated trailer type washrooms.
(ii) Regular maintenance and cleaning.
(iii) Consisting of flush toilets and wash basins.
(iv) Hot and cold running water.
(v) Designated Male and Female facilities.
(b) Post notices and take such precautions as required by local health
authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition.
(c) Regularly maintain sanitary facilities for the Term of the Project.
(d) Clean sanitary facilities and restock consumables on a weekly basis, or
sooner if needed.
3.7 PARKING
(a) Provide eight (8) parking spaces within the Pape Station Site near the
Site Offices for the exclusive use by Metrolinx and the Metrolinx
Representative. Provide one (1) parking space within the Sammon
Crossover Site laydown area near the Site Offices for the exclusive use
by the Metrolinx Representative. Contractor to confirm with the Metrolinx
Representative actual location of spaces. Contractor shall obtain off-site
parking for their own forces as needed. Metrolinx will not provide parking
for the Contractor, its Subcontractors, Suppliers and their forces.
3.8 SITE ENCLOSURES AND PROTECTION

(a) Provide full physical delineation and protection to the public for all Work
as per Section 01 56 33.
(b) Maintain all temporary fencing and hoarding in good repair and inspect
regularly for integrity.
(c) Compliance with the requirements does not relieve the Contractor from
the responsibility for the provision of protection and the adequacy of such
protection.
3.9 SECURITY
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the security and protection of the
Site during the construction period including, but not limited to, any
construction materials, equipment, storage areas, and site trailers

required to undertake the Work.
(b) Comply with the Metrolinx Health and Safety Department -
Construction/Public Interface – Guidance Advice document dated March
2021 related to Security.
(c) Provide and pay for security personnel to guard the Site and contents of
the Site after working hours and during holidays.
(d) Any security measures provided by Metrolinx is for the protection of their
interest in the Work on the Site and shall not relieve the Contractor of the
responsibility to protect the Site and the Work of the Agreement.
3.10 WATER SUPPLY

(a) Provide a temporary water supply and obtain all required permits.
Conversions or alterations to existing sources of water to meet
construction requirements are the responsibility of the Contractor.
(b) Provide and maintain all temporary lines, extensions and hoses as
required.
(c) Remove all temporary connections and lines upon completion of Work,
make good any damage, and restore area to pre-construction conditions
3.11 POWER SUPPLY

(a) Provide a temporary power supply during construction, including all
required permits, including providing temporary power required to install,
test and commission in compliance with Schedule 9 – Specifications and
Drawings, and the Agreement.
3.12 LIGHTING
(a) Provide temporary, portable lighting required to safely perform
Construction Work at night or in reduced visibility environments and in
accordance with the requirements of Schedule 10 – Environmental
Obligations.
3.13 HEATING & VENTILATION

(a) Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to:
(i) Facilitate progress of Work.
(ii) Protect Work and Products against dampness and cold.
(iii) Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces.
(b) Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage,
installation and curing of materials.
(c) Maintain minimum temperature of 10ºC or higher where specified as

soon as finishing work is commenced and maintain until acceptance of
by the Metrolinx Representative.
(d) Use of direct-fired heaters discharging waste products will not be
permitted unless prior approval is given by the Metrolinx Representative.
(e) Ventilating:
(i) Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours, or gases in
areas occupied during construction
(ii) Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in
harmful exposure to persons.
(iii) Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile
materials.
(iv) Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities.
(v) Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system after
cessation of work to assure removal of harmful contaminants.
3.14 SITE SIGNS AND NOTICES

(a) Comply with the Metrolinx Standard MX-STS-STD-001 “Temporary
Construction and Customer Experience Requirements for GO Facilities”
related to Site Signs and Notices.
(b) Contractor Signboard:
(i) Direct requests for approval to erect a Contractor signboard to the
Metrolinx Representative. Contractor must ensure sign conform to
governing By-laws.
(c) Safety and Instruction Signs and Notices:
(i) Signs and notices for safety and instruction shall be in clear
English and French language. Graphic symbols shall conform to
CAN3-Z321-77.
(d) Maintenance and Disposal of Site Signs:
(i) Maintain approved signs and notices in good condition for duration
of Project and dispose of offsite on completion of Project or earlier
if directed by Metrolinx Representative.
3.15 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES

(a) Remove temporary facilities and features from site when directed by the
Metrolinx Representative
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Material and Equipment
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Section specifies the requirements for materials and equipment
required for the execution of the Work.

(a) Schedule 4 – Review Procedure
(b) Schedule 5 – Quality Management
1.3 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conduct a quality control program to ensure all materials and equipment
meet the requirements of this Section, Schedule 5 – Quality
Management, and the requirements of other Specifications listed under
Schedule 9 – Specification and Drawings.

(a) The Contractor shall inspect material upon delivery to Site to ensure
conformance with the Specifications, and where required by Metrolinx,
arrange for material inspection by the Metrolinx Representative in
accordance with the requirements of the Article 2.5 of the Agreement.
1.5 ACTION AND INFORMATION SUBMITTALS

(a) Where a product is not specified, the Contractor shall submit the
proposed manufacturer/supplier and the material Product data to the
Metrolinx Representative for review in accordance with Schedule 4 –
Review Procedure. The submittal shall include, at a minimum, the
following:
(i) Material data sheets;
(ii) Test reports;
(iii) Certificates;
(iv) Previous project history;
(v) Intended area of use/application and reference to design drawings;
and
(vi) Any other information necessary to demonstrate the material’s
compliance with the corresponding Specification requirements.
(b) The Contractor shall not deliver material to Site without the prior review
of the Product data, including but not limited to those listed by the
(c) At no additional cost to Metrolinx, Contractor shall provide, when

requested by Metrolinx at its discretion, a sample of the proposed
material for the review of Metrolinx or the Metrolinx Representative as
part of the review process.

(a) Measurement and payment will not be undertaken for this Section. Work
related to this Section is incidental to the Work. Costs related to delivery,
handling and storage of material, products and equipment shall be
included within the appropriate Agreement item.
EXECUTION
2.1 GENERAL
(a) Provide new material and equipment of specified design and quality,
performing to published ratings and for which replacement parts are
readily available.
(b) Use products of one manufacturer for equipment or material of same
type or classification unless otherwise specified.
2.2 MANUFACTURER’S INSTRUCTIONS

(a) Unless otherwise specified, comply with manufacturer’s latest printed
instructions for materials and installation methods.
(b) Notify Metrolinx in writing of any conflict between these Specifications
and manufacturer’s instructions. In case such conflict exists thus
indicating noncompliance with the Specification requirements, the
Contractor shall propose a different material that complies with the
Specification requirements if so directed by Metrolinx.
2.3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

(a) Deliver, store, and maintain packaged material and equipment with
manufacturer’s seals and labels intact.
(b) Prevent damage, adulteration and soiling of material and equipment
during delivery, handling and storage.
(c) Immediately remove rejected material and equipment from the site.
(d) Store material and equipment in accordance with the manufacturers' and
suppliers’ instructions.
(e) Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Metrolinx satisfaction.
Use primer or enamel to match original. Do not paint over name plates.
2.4 ORIGIN OF MATERIALS

(a) Materials, plant and equipment supplied for Work shall be Canadian
manufactured to the extent possible, or as specified.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Project Specific Conditions
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Section covers project specific conditions as related to the
execution of the Work.

(a) Schedule 9 - Specifications and Drawings:
(b) Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations
(c) Schedule 11 – Communication and Public Engagement Protocol
(d) Schedule 12 – Lands
(e) Schedule 16 – Other Contractors
(f) Schedule 19 – Construction Safety

(a) No measurement and payment will be undertaken for this Work. Work
related to this Section shall be considered incidental to other Works.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

(a) ‘TTC Technical Review Submission Requirements (for Metrolinx Ontario
Line)’. See Attachment 2 of Schedule 4 – Review Procedures, Appendix
B.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS, ACRONYMS AND DEFINITIONS

(a) Support of Excavation (SOE): As defined in Schedule 9 - Specifications
and Drawings Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls.
1.6 QUALITY CONTROL



(a) Where the Contractor proposes to use equipment or vehicles that would
otherwise exceed the loading constraints identified in Clause
1.10(b)(iv)(b)(ii) of this Section, submit for review an alternate loading
arrangement plan which details the Contractor’s plan to meet the loading
constraints.
1.9 INTERFACE WITH OTHER CONTARCTORS

(a) Refer to Schedule 16 – Other Contractors, for interfacing and
coordination requirements with Other Contractors.
1.10 CONSTRUCTION CONSTRAINTS AND LATITUDES

(a) Project constraints and latitudes are detailed throughout the Agreement.
The Contractor is required to review and comply with all requirements
within the Agreement.
(b) A number of constraints have been identified throughout the Agreement.
Contractor shall comply with the following list of constraints, noting that
this list is not exhaustive and that Contractor shall review the entirety of
the Agreement, its Schedules, Specifications and Drawings to ensure
compliance with any other constraints not listed herein:
(i) Site access and egress constraints, and modifications required
through the Term are identified on the Drawings.
(ii) The SOE for the shafts at Pape Station and Sammon Avenue is
required to be supported by watertight slurry walls socketed into
bedrock a minimum depth in accordance with the requirements of
Schedule 9 - Specifications and Drawings, Section 31 56 00 –
Slurry Walls.
(iii) The use of Dewatering methods outside the perimeter of the Pape
Station and Sammon Avenue SOE’s is prohibited.
(iv) Construction and equipment loads between the Support of
Excavation headwalls, above TTC structures and on Pape Ave.,
Gertrude Pl. and Danforth Ave shall be limited to 9.6 kPa. If it is
determined that the use of construction equipment or vehicles
would exceed such limits, the Contractor shall submit an alternate
plan in accordance with the requirements of Clause 1.8(a) of this
Section or forego the use of the equipment within the areas noted.
(v) There shall be no stockpiling of soil above or within 4 m of Existing
TTC Infrastructure.
(vi) Access to the existing TTC East Headhouse from Eaton Avenue
shall be maintained throughout the duration of the Term.
(vii) Jet grouting at Lipton Avenue shall be performed after the
completion of the property demolition phase and before SOE
construction.
(viii) Groundwater must be maintained at a minimum of 1.0 m below the
bottom of the SOE excavation during the bulk excavation and 1.0
m below the bottom of the base slab at all time upon completion of
the bulk excavation works and base slab construction in
accordance with the requirements of Schedule 9 - Specifications

and Drawings, Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and
Groundwater Disposal.
(ix) Excavation requirements including restrictions on unbalanced
loading imposed on adjacent Existing TTC Infrastructure and within
SOE’s, and excavation sequencing requirements are identified on
the Drawings.
(c) A number of latitudes have been identified during Project development
and are summarised below:
(i) Support of Excavation;
A. Slurry wall panel length and reinforcement cage details as
identified in Schedule 9 – Drawings and Specifications Section
31 56 00 – Slurry Walls
B. Method(s) used to prevent groundwater inflow at the bases of
the shafts as identified in the Drawings and Section 9 –
Drawings and Specifications, Section 32 23 16 – Shaft
Excavation.
C. Tie back locations, layout and angles in accordance with the
requirements of Section 9 – Drawings and Specifications,
Section 31 51 00 – Tieback and Tie Anchors.
D. Strut type and section in accordance with the requirements of
Section 9 – Drawings and Specifications Section 31 53 00 –
Struts and Walers.
E. Strut and Waler connection details in accordance with the
requirements of Section 9 – Drawings and Specifications
Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers.
F. Some elements of the SOE design can be adjusted by the
Contractor to suit their means and methods. To adjust such
elements, the Contractor shall engage a designer (the
Contractor’s Design Engineer) to design and detail an
alternate design for that element. This includes elements of
the slurry wall, the SOE base slab, tiebacks and tie anchors,
and the struts and walers. The following Specification Sections
each include an Appendix A that presents the SOE elements
that the Contractor is permitted to change. If the Contractor
elects to change an element of the SOE, the design
responsibility and ownership for that element is transferred to
the Contractor. The Contractor is required to submit a signed-
and-sealed design by a Professional Engineer licensed in the
province of Ontario for review by Metrolinx Representative. For
the Pape Station SOE, Contractor design Submittal reviews for

the SOE elements will be subject to TTC Review in
accordance with the requirements of Schedule 4 – Review
Procedures, of the Agreement as directed by the Metrolinx
Representative.
(1) 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing
(2) 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
(3) 31 51 00 Tiebacks and Tie Anchors
(4) 31 53 00 Struts and Walers
(5) 31 56 00 Slurry Walls
(ii) Jet grouting
A. Jet grout column sequencing within any defined jet grouted
area can be revised to suit the Contractor’s means and
methods, provided no adjacent jet grout columns are
developed within 24-hours of each other in accordance with
the requirements of Section 9 – Drawings and Specifications
Section 31 43 00 – Jet Grouting.
B. Some attributes of the jet grouting works can be adjusted by
the Contractor to suit their means and methods. Specification
Section 31 43 00 – Jet Grouting, includes an Appendix A that
presents attributes of the jet grouting works that the Contractor
is permitted to change. If the Contractor elects to change an
attribute of the jet grouting design in a manner that differs from
the Drawings or Specifications, the responsibility and
ownership of such attribute(s) is transferred to the Contractor.
The Contractor is required to submit a signed-and-sealed jet
grout shop drawings by a Professional Engineer licensed in
the province of Ontario for review. Contractor design Submittal
reviews for the SOE elements will be subject to TTC Review in
accordance with the requirements of Schedule 4 – Review
Procedures, of the Agreement if required or as directed by the
(iii) Temporary Bridge designs in accordance with the requirements of
Section 9 – Drawings and Specifications Section 01 53 13 –
Temporary Bridges.
1.11 WORK AND DELIVERY HOURS

(a) Standard hours for the Contractor to perform Work, are Monday to
Friday, from 0600 to 1800 and Saturday 0800 to 1700. Contractor shall
not perform Work on Sunday.
(b) Delivery and muck haulage hours for the Contractor to receive deliveries
or haul away material or spoils, are Monday to Friday, from 0900 to 1500
and Saturday 0800 to 1700.
(c) Work outside of the standard hours detailed in Article 1.11(a) of this
Section must comply with all requirements of the Agreement, Schedule
10 – Environmental Obligations and Schedule 11 – Communication and
Public Engagement Protocol, and must be approved by the Metrolinx
Representative prior to commencement of the planned Work.
1.12 RESTRICTED DATES

(a) No work will be permitted on Danforth Ave on Days when the following
Municipal events are occurring;
(i) Taste of Danforth (one Working Day and two weekend days
annually in August)
(ii) Nuit Blanche (two weekend Days annually in September or
October)
1.13 ACCESS, STAGING, LAYDOWN AND STORAGE

(a) Access to the Lands, including obligations, restrictions, and constraints,
are further specified elsewhere in the Agreement including:
(i) the Drawings
(ii) Schedule 12 – Lands
(iii) Schedule 16 – Other Contractors
(iv) Schedule 19 – Construction Safety
(v) Schedule 9 - Specifications and Drawings:
A. Section 00 15 00 - Project Specific Temporary Facilities
B. Section 01 55 26 – Traffic Control
1.14 ACCESS AND EGRESS, HAUL ROUTES

(a) Operation requirements and traffic restrictions are specified in Section 01
55 26.
(b) Contractor’s construction vehicles, including delivery vehicles and
vehicles associated with Construction, shall plan work to reduce the
travel distance on municipal arterial and collector roadways.
1.15 SEASONAL RESTRICTIONS

(a) Intentionally Blank
1.16 HANDOVER
(a) The Contractor shall be required to clear the Site of all Construction
materials and Handover the Site and Work in accordance with Schedule
8 – Outline Commissioning Schedule and Handover, to existing or better
conditions, or as directed by the Metrolinx Representative, acting
reasonably.
SUPPLIERS
2.1 NOT USED
EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
END OF SECTION
Division 01 – General Requirements
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Temporary Bridges
Part 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) Work under this item shall consist of designing, fabricating, furnishing,
constructing, and maintaining the temporary bridges (vehicular and
pedestrian) of a clear span shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
Metrolinx Representative in accordance with these Specifications. The
bridge shall accommodate roadway and sidewalk criteria as shown on
the Drawings or as directed, including superstructure, substructure,
foundations, and all associated work.
(b) The work to construct, maintain, remove, and restore the approaches to
the temporary vehicular and pedestrian bridges is not included under this
item and shall be paid for separately under the applicable roadway items.

(a) 01 55 26 Traffic Control
(b) 01 56 33 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures
(c) 33 00 00 General Utilities
(d) Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning Program and Handover

(a) Measurement:
(i) This work will be paid for on a lump sum basis and will not be
measured for payment.
(b) Payment:
(i) Payment will be made for the following items;
A. Item B.0.4 - ‘Road Deck Danforth Avenue’
B. Item B.0.5 - ‘Road Deck Gertrude Place’
(ii) Each Item shall include;
A. Designing, fabricating, furnishing, installing, inspecting and
maintaining, the temporary bridge including the superstructure,
substructure and foundation including all equipment, labour,
material, and incidentals necessary to complete the work as
specified.
B. Materials and Labour associated with Temporary Work

Platforms, Falsework, Shoring, or any other temporary
structure required to construct the Temporary Bridges.
C. Designing, furnishing, and maintaining temporary protection of
existing and relocated utilities.
D. Any and all ancillary temporary pedestrian bridges required.
(iii) 20% upon acceptance of the Working Drawings, Shop Drawings
and Design Computations for the temporary bridge structures.
(iv) 70% once each temporary bridge is constructed, accepted and
opened to traffic.
(v) 10% for maintenance and inspections on a monthly prorated basis
over the Term commencing upon commission of the temporary
bridge and up to completion of Handover of the Work in
accordance with Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning Program &
Handover.

(a) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications and Drawings, Construction:
(i) OPSS 501 Compacting.
(ii) OPSS 902 Excavating and Backfilling – Structures.
(iii) OPSS 904 Concrete Structures.
(iv) OPSS 905 Steel Reinforcement for Concrete.
(v) OPSS 906 Structural Steel for Bridges.
(vi) OPSS 907 Structural Wood Systems.
(vii) OPSS 908 Metal Traffic Barriers and Metal Railings for Structures.
(viii) OPSS 909 Prestressed Concrete – Precast Members.
(ix) OPSS 919 Formwork and Falsework.
(x) OPSS 1860 Geotextiles.
(xi) OPSD – Ontario Provincial Standard Drawing
(b) Ontario Ministry of Transportation Publications:
(i) Structural Manual.
(ii) MTOD Ontario Ministry of Transportation Standard Drawings
(b) Government of Ontario
(i) O. Reg. 213/91 – Construction Projects

(c) CSA Standards:
(i) CSA S6-19 Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code (CHBDC).

(a) For the purpose of this specification, the following definitions apply:
(i) Certificate of Conformance means a document bearing the seal
and signature of a Professional Engineer that state that the
modular bridge has been constructed in general conformance with
the Working Drawings, procedures and Drawings, Specifications,
and Agreement.
(ii) Design Engineer means a Professional Engineer licensed in the
province of Ontario experienced in the design of temporary bridge
structures.
(iii) Checking Engineer means a Professional Engineer licensed in the
province of Ontario experienced in the design of temporary bridge
structures and who will perform a technical review and design
check of the Design Engineer’s output including analysis, design
and drawings. The Checking Engineer shall be an individual not
involved in the design but is not required to be employed by a
different organization.
(iv) Contractor’s Bridge Engineer means a Professional Engineer
licensed in the province of Ontario with experience in the
installation, inspections and maintenance of temporary bridge
structures. The Contractor’s Bridge Engineer shall have detailed
knowledge and experience in the methods and techniques for
bridge inspections in accordance with the MTO "Bridge Inspection
Manual", identification of damage and early indications of distress,
maintenance methods for steel bridges, and for structural details
and fixings for bridges.
(v) Temporary Bridge means a vehicular or pedestrian structure that
comprised of (superstructure and substructure) designed /
fabricated or procured / rented in accordance with the
requirements of the Drawings, Specifications, and Agreement.
(vi) Temporary Installation means an installation that maintains traffic
at a construction site for a length of time not exceeding 10-years.
(vii) Working Drawings means design drawings developed by the
Engineer who develops the temporary bridge design. The drawings
define the intended configuration of the temporary bridges and are

used as the basis of developing shop drawings.
1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

(a) When other authorities are involved in the review and approval process
for temporary structures, Shop Drawings in accordance with clause
1.7(c) of this Specification Section shall be submitted for each authority
at least 5 weeks prior to the commencement of Falsework construction.
(b) During Temporary Bridge construction, the Contractor shall have a copy
of the Shop Drawings at the site available for inspection by a
representative of the authority.

(a) Submit working drawings and design computations for the temporary
bridge superstructure, substructure, and foundations to the Metrolinx
Representative for review in accordance with the Specifications and the
Design Requirements given below. The submittal shall be signed and
sealed by a Design Engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario.
(b) Working Drawings:
(i) Working Drawings shall be submitted on 11” x 17” (Ledger/Tabloid)
sheets with an appropriate border and title block. Drawings in PDF
format shall also be provided.
(ii) All Working Drawings and design computations shall be signed
and sealed by a Design Engineer and a Checking Engineer, both
licensed in the Province of Ontario, who shall also be available for
consultation in interpreting the computations and drawings, and aid
in the resolution of any problems which may occur during the
performance of the work. The design calculations shall be
accompanied by a letter certifying that the temporary bridge has
been designed according to the Drawings, Specifications, and
Agreement.
(iii) Where any of the temporary bridge components are fabricated
outside of Canada, a letter shall be submitted certifying that the
materials used, and the fabrication of the temporary bridge
components are according to the Drawings, Specifications, and
Agreement.
(iv) Where the load carrying capacity of the temporary bridge or any of
its components has been established by testing, the load test
reports provided by the manufacturer of the temporary bridge
components shall be submitted confirming the bridge satisfies the

requirements of the Evaluation Section of CAN/CSA S6, using a
Reliability Index (β) not less than 3.75.
(v) Where previously used components are utilized in the temporary
bridge, a letter signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer shall
be submitted certifying that all used components are in good
structural condition and free from any damage or defects that could
adversely affect their load carrying capacity and performance.
(vi) The working drawings shall include the following minimum
information:
A. Type and grade of structural materials.
B. Design Code CSA S6-19 requirements
C. References for load data used for standardized, manufactured
components.
D. Specification references for design criteria.
E. The design Live Loads used.
F. The bearing value of the soil as determined by the Contractor
when footing type foundations are to be used.
G. The total design reaction at each substructure foundation.
H. Temporary Concrete Barrier details and connections to the
decking, in coordination with Specification Section 01 56 33
Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.
I. Connections to the existing Support of Excavation (SOE)
slurry wall panels, where appropriate.
J. Installation procedures, where applicable.
K. Roadway profile and cross-slope.
L. How roadway and sidewalk drainage will be maintained and
prevented from entering the shaft excavation.
M. Utility support details.
(c) Shop Drawings:
(i) General:
A. Design Engineer’s and Checking Engineer’s seal and
signatures shall be affixed on the Shop Drawings verifying that
the drawings are consistent with the Specifications and
Drawings.
B. Where multi-discipline engineering work is depicted on the

same Shop Drawing and the Design Engineer or Checking
Engineer or both are unable to seal and sign the Shop
Drawing for all aspects of the work, the drawing shall be
sealed and signed by as many additional Design Engineers
and Checking Engineers as necessary.
C. As part of the Temporary Bridge Shop Drawings, the
Contractor shall prepare an ice and debris mitigation plan and
submit to the Metrolinx Representative for review. This plan
shall outline methods of how the Contractor will prevent ice
and debris buildup from forming on any of the Temporary
Bridge elements as well as any associated monitoring and
removal methods that are expected to be used to prevent
buildup.
D. Revised Submissions:
(1) When design considerations or field conditions
necessitate amendments to the Substructure or
Superstructure, a revision shall be resubmitted according
to the Shop Drawings clause.
E. Record Drawings:
(1) Record Drawings of final Installation including any site
modification from Design drawings.
(ii) Superstructure:
A. The Contractor shall submit Superstructure Shop Drawings to
the Metrolinx Representative for review prior to
commencement of erection of the Superstructure.
B. The Shop Drawings for the Superstructure for each Temporary
Bridge shall include all details of all Falsework (if used) to
facilitate the erection of the Superstructure.
(iii) Substructure:
A. The Contractor shall submit Substructure Shop Drawings to
the Metrolinx Representative for review prior to
commencement of earthwork for the Temporary Bridges.
B. Interim Inspection after Construction of Substructures:
(1) Upon completion of the Substructure and prior to
installation of the Superstructure, the Contractor’s
Engineer shall conduct an interim inspection of the work
to verify that the Substructures have been constructed

according to the Drawings and Specifications.
(d) Design Computations:
(i) Design computations, procedures and other supporting data shall
be submitted on 8 ½” x 11” (Letter) sheets. Design computations,
procedures and other supporting data shall also be provided in
PDF format.
(ii) The design computations shall include inventory and operating live
load ratings for the temporary bridge.

(a) The Contractor shall retain a Professional Engineer with experience in
Temporary Bridge design of comparable complexity and scope, to verify
that the quality of the materials and workmanship employed in the
construction of the temporary bridge/s are consistent with that assumed
in the design.
1.9 CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMANCE

(a) Certificates of Conformance shall be submitted for all temporary works
for which Shop Drawings are submitted.
(b) A completed Certificate of Conformance shall be submitted to the
Metrolinx Representative upon completion of a Temporary Bridge
installation and before use of the Temporary Bridge takes place.
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

(a) Inspect site and verify with the Metrolinx Representative items
designated for removal and items to be preserved.
Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) The Contractor may use timber, steel, concrete or any other material or
combination of materials that are in sound condition, capable of safely
carrying the specified loads, and meet the approval of the Metrolinx
Representative. Materials for the temporary bridge shall confirm to the
applicable sections of Ontario Provincial Standard Specification (OPSS)
and in accordance with the following OPSS references:
(i) Concrete: OPSS 904.
(ii) Structural Steel: OPSS 906.
(iii) Wood: OPSS 907.

(iv) Railings: OPSS 908.
(v) Formwork and Falsework: OPSS 919.
(vi) Geotextiles: OPSS 1860.
2.2 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

(a) Design Computations: The Contractor shall be responsible for the
design, detailing and additional specifications required.
(b) Design Guidelines: The temporary bridge/s shall be designed according
to the Drawings, Specifications, Agreement, CAN/CSA S6 and MTO
Structural Manual.
(c) The following requirements of the CAN/CSA S6 are not mandatory:
(i) Designing floor beam and diaphragms for jacking.
(ii) Provision of a protective coating.
(iii) Fatigue shall be checked for the 10-year design life and the
number of fatigue cycles expected.
(iv) Accessibility for inspection and coating, the avoidance of pockets,
and the provision of drain holes in pockets and their filling with
waterproofing.
(v) Girders shall be cambered.
(d) SOE Strut and Waler Clearance – The bridge shall be a single span
structure with a minimum clear span as shown in the Drawings. No
portion of the structure’s shall encroach within a distance of 200 mm
from the struts and walers.
(e) Roadway Width – The bridge shall accommodate a roadway with width
as shown on the Drawings.
(f) Walkway Width – The bridge shall accommodate a walkway with a
minimum travel way width as shown on the Drawings.
(g) Alignment – The horizontal and vertical alignment of the temporary
bridges shall be as shown on the project Civil Drawings.
(h) Wearing Surface – Skid resistance of the temporary bridge wearing
surface shall match or exceed the approach pavement wearing surface.
The top of the wearing surface shall permit snow removal with snow
plowing equipment. The wearing surface shall be waterproof such that
all drainage shall be directed away from the SOE excavation. Deck
joints, if included, shall be installed flush with the top of the wearing
surface to provide continuous surface.
(i) Barriers – Vehicular concrete traffic barriers Type TL3 shall be provided
in accordance with the Ministry of Transportation Ontario standards.
(j) Railings – Handrails shall be provided on the pedestrian bridges
according to CSA S6-19 for handrails and combined rails.
(k) Substructures – The abutments and foundations shall be designed to
support the superstructure and retain the approaches. The temporary
bridge abutments and foundations may be located on top of the existing
support of excavation slurry walls.
(l) Footings – The Contractor shall be allowed the use of the slurry wall
panels or spread footings only as foundations for the temporary bridge.
For the design of the substructures and foundations, refer to the
geotechnical information in the Pape Station Support of Excavation
Geotechnical Data Reports. The design of the substructure foundations
shall be based on the provided geotechnical report and existing borings
or based upon additional borings done at this site by the Contractor at
his own expense for the purpose of the temporary bridge design.
Assumptions and methods used to determine the soil's capacity to
support the footing loads are to be developed by the design Engineer
based on the information given in the Geotechnical Data Reports.
(m) Anticipated footing settlement based on the allowable soil bearing
values.
(n) The bridge footing system shall adequately consider the bearing capacity
of the support structure including the slurry wall panels and the soil
bearing capacity of the applicable geological unit for any element of the
bridge that is founded in soil.
(o) Show method of draining water from the structure to prevent water from
entering the shaft excavation.
Part 3 PRODUCTS
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Construct the temporary bridge according to the applicable sections of
Ontario Provincial Standard Specification.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Upon the completion of construction of the temporary bridge, a
Certificate of Conformance bearing the seal and signature of a
Professional Engineer shall be submitted to the Metrolinx

Representative. The certificate shall state that the modular bridge has
been constructed in general conformance with the Working Drawings,
procedures and Drawings, Specifications, and Agreement.
3.3 MAINTENANCE
(a) For the duration of the Project, all temporary bridge components shall be
inspected, and have any deficiencies corrected, to ensure its structural
integrity, safety and performance are not compromised.
(b) Prior to opening the temporary bridge to traffic, the Contractor’s Bridge
Engineer shall perform an initial inspection of the bridge. After opening
the temporary bridge to traffic, the Contractor’s Bridge Engineer shall
perform routine inspections of the bridge at 3-month intervals. The initial
and subsequent inspections shall be performed and documented by
qualified personnel in accordance with MTO "Bridge Inspection Manual".
3.4 STRUCTURE REMOVAL

(a) Handover the Temporary Bridge structures and all associated ancillary
Work to Project Co. in accordance with the requirements of Schedule 8 –
Outline Commissioning Program and Handover
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Traffic Control
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This specification covers the requirements for temporary traffic
management, including partial and full road closures, sidewalk closures,
Site driveways and bus stop relocations.

(a) Section 01 53 13 – Temporary Bridges
(b) Section 01 56 33 – Temporary Barriers and Enclosures
(c) Schedule 11 – Communications and Public Engagement Protocol

(a) Measurement:
(b) Payment:
(i) Item A.1.1 – Traffic Control.
(ii) This Item shall include, but not be limited to:
A. Traffic management and traffic control persons.
B. Reimbursement of Toronto Parking Authority (TPA) in
compliance with TPA Policy 2-6 for loss of parking revenue
due to temporary closure of parking spaces. The length of an
on-street parking space shall be 6.7 metres for purposes of
determining the number of closed parking spaces.
C. Payment for renting parking spaces as required.
D. Pay for any required removal of bike share stations owned by
TPA.
(iii) Payment for this lump sum item will be made on a monthly
prorated basis over the Term according to a schedule of values
and associated milestones proposed by the Contractor and
accepted by the Metrolinx Representative.

(a) Ministry of Transportation, Ontario (MTO):
(i) Ontario Traffic Manual, Book 7.
(ii) Roadside Design Manual.

(iii) Temporary Conditions Traffic Management: Advance, Notification,
Advance Warning, and Alternative Route Signing (TC-64 Manual).
(b) Ontario Regulations:
(i) 213/91 (Construction Projects).
(ii) 191/11 (Integrated Accessibility Standards).
(iii) 332/12 (Ontario Building Code).
(c) City of Toronto:
(i) Accessibility Design Guidelines.
(ii) TS 1.00 (Construction Specification for Maintenance of Traffic).
(iii) TS 1.20 (Construction Specification for Garbage Collection).
(iv) TS 1.30 (Construction Specification for Steel Plates Used in
Connection with Roadway Utility Excavations).
(v) Multi-use Trail Design Guidelines.
(vi) Metrolinx/Third Party Traffic Control and/or Traffic Management
Device Handover Terms and Conditions.
(vii) City of Toronto, Construction Specifications and Drawings for Road
Works.
(viii) City of Toronto, Guidelines for the Preparation of Transportation
Impact Studies.
(ix) City of Toronto, Guidelines for Using Synchro 11 (including
SimTraffic 11).
(x) Specifications for Traffic Control Devices.
(xi) Pedestrian Timing at Signalized Intersections.
(xii) Traffic Signal Operations Policies and Strategies.
(xiii) Guidelines for the Design and Management of Bicycle Parking
Facilities.
(xiv) Requirements for Garbage, Recycling and Organics Collection
Services for New Developments and Redevelopments.
(d) Toronto Parking Authority:
(i) Policy Resolution 2-6: Cost Recovery - Street Occupancy Permits
at On-Street Meter Location.
(e) Transportation Association of Canada (TAC):

(i) Geometric Design Guide for Canadian Roads.
(f) Toronto Transit Commission (TTC):
(i) Design Manual DM-0412-02.

(a) The terms “traffic management” and “traffic control” are used
interchangeably.
(b) “Travelled way” is defined as the City of Toronto right-of-way.
(c) Abbreviations:
(i) OPSD: Ontario Provincial Standard Drawing.
(ii) OPSS: Ontario Provincial Standard Specification.
(iii) MTOD: Ontario Ministry of Transportation Drawing.
(iv) TPA: Toronto Parking Authority.
(v) TTC: Toronto Transit Commission.
(vi) TTMP: Traffic and Transit Management Plan

(a) Coordinate a Transportation Management Committee that will comprise
City of Toronto Transportation Services, the City of Toronto Emergency
Services, TTC, and the Metrolinx Representative that shall meet together
on a monthly basis.
(i) The purpose of the Transportation Management Committee shall
be to coordinate, plan, review, and recommend actions with
respect to current and future traffic and transit impacts that may be
caused by the Works, including public notifications and
consultations, traffic signage and detouring, and construction
staging areas.
(b) Coordinate with City of Toronto and provide information for the Road
Disruption Activity Reporting System (RoDARS) as required by the City
of Toronto.
(c) Coordinate Works with City of Toronto Parks, Forestry and Recreation
Division, City of Toronto Transportation Services, City of Toronto
emergency services providers, the Toronto Transit Commission, and any
other impacted stakeholder, as required.
(d) Coordinate with TPA any required removal or relocation of bike share
stations owned by TPA.
(e) Coordinate with TPA any closure of on-street parking spaces and
parking spaces in parking lots operated by TPA.
(f) Notify the Ontario Trucking Associations of any directional full closures of
roadways or vehicular turning movement restrictions 2 weeks prior to
implementation.
(g) For residences that cannot be accessed by the City of Toronto Solid
Waste Collection vehicles coordinate residential waste removal with City
of Toronto Solid Waste Management Services.

(a) Prepare, submit for review by Metrolinx Representative and approval by
the City of Toronto and implement a Traffic and Transit Management
Plan, which will include the following sections:
(i) Transportation accommodation.
(ii) Transit management.
(iii) Parking disruption management.
(iv) Emergency service providers access.
(v) Incident management plan.
(vi) Implementation.
(vii) Traffic impact assessment.
(b) Review and amend the TTMP from time to time, based on monitoring of
traffic and transit impacts until completion of the Work, such that the
TTMP at all times reflects the nature of the Work being performed,
including any changes in the Site, work methods, construction staging,
and project Work Schedule.
(c) Provide the following information in the transportation accommodation
section of the TTMP:
(i) Strategy for provision of safe and continuous access to and
passage for all impacted transportation modes, including transit
vehicles, pedestrians, bicycles, and vehicles, through or around all
Sites.
(ii) Strategy for maintaining continuous, safe, and efficient access to
all impacted properties.
(iii) Strategy for minimizing traffic diverted due to construction activities

from infiltrating into neighbouring communities.
(iv) Description of all safety hazards associated with lane closures,
detours and lane shifts, and the available mitigation measures.
(v) Description of the proposed construction phases and associated
traffic staging, identifying sequence and work to be facilitated in
each stage of construction.
(vi) Description of all required design drawings including the Traffic
Control Plan, supplementary temporary traffic signal design layout,
and associated PHM-125 drawings as per City of Toronto and
provincial standards.
(d) In the Transit management section of the TTMP identify the impacts to
transit operators and users, including the following:
(i) Closure and temporary relocation of transit stops.
(ii) Impacts to transit users with accessibility needs.
(iii) Temporary detour of transit routes with estimation of the increase
in transit travel time.
(e) Provide the following information in the parking disruption management
section of the TTMP:
(i) Identification and quantification of the impacts to all public parking
areas that will be affected by the Works.
(ii) Alternatives and recommendations for temporary replacement
parking within 400 metres distance for any permit parking spaces
closed during the Work.
(f) In the emergency services access section of the TTMP specify how
access for Emergency Service Providers vehicles to and through
affected sites will be facilitated during Construction Activities.
(g) Consult with the City of Toronto and Emergency Service Providers in
developing the emergency services access section and liaise closely
with them throughout the design and construction phases and via the
Transportation Management.
(h) Address the following in the incident management section of the TTMP:
(i) Procedures for dealing with traffic incidents and emergencies
impacting the public within or adjacent to the Site.
(ii) Procedures and timelines related to clearance of incidents.
(iii) The approach for dealing with incidents in an integrated manner

with partner agencies including the Metrolinx Representative, City
of Toronto, TTC, emergency services, and any other authorities
having jurisdiction.
(iv) The approach for coordinating with the City of Toronto Traffic
Management Centre in accordance with established
communication protocols.
(v) A process for assessment, reaction, communication, and staff
training related to traffic incident management.
(vi) A process for regularly reviewing incidents and proposing
modifications to the Works that shall reduce the severity and
frequency of incidents.
(i) Ensure that the Incident Management section addresses any incidents
that may occur and in particular the following incidents:
(i) Collisions involving motor vehicles, transit vehicles, pedestrians or
cyclists.
(ii) Emergency road repairs.
(iii) Emergency utility repairs.
(iv) Emergency road closures for fire, floods, gas leak, etc.
(v) Disabled vehicles.
(vi) Debris on the road.
(j) In the implementation section of the TTMP provide the following
information:
(i) Identification of traffic control supervisor(s) and traffic manager
who shall be responsible for implementation and monitoring of the
TTMP, along with the qualifications and experience of those
named individuals.
(ii) Processes to ensure that the TCPs and TTMP are developed and
implemented efficiently and appropriately, and that they are kept
up to date with necessary modifications during construction.
(k) In the traffic impact assessment (TIA) section of the TTMP identify and
quantify the multimodal traffic impacts of the Work with respect to all
impacted road users, including the impacts to motorists, transit
operators, pedestrians, cyclists and persons with accessibility needs,
and as follows:
(i) Prepare the traffic analysis for the TIA with the Synchro software
package in conformance with best practices and applicable
guidelines and policies of the City of Toronto, including Guidelines
for Using Synchro 11 (including SimTraffic 11).
(ii) Analyze weekday AM and PM traffic peak periods in the TIA, and
other time periods as required by the City of Toronto, for
intersections impacted by the Work, including intersections along
haul routes.
(iii) Update the TIA whenever changes to construction staging or work
zone layout results in changes to the public impacts of the Work.
(iv) Use turning movement counts for the TIA that are less than 2 years
old, except where the City of Toronto accepts use of older turning
movement counts and it can be shown that the older turning
movement counts are still representative.
(v) When updating the TIA consider all construction projects and
future modifications of roadway and intersection configurations that
impact the intersections included in the traffic analysis.
(l) Prepare and submit for review by Metrolinx Representative and approval
by the City of Toronto traffic control Drawings for Work impacting
travelled ways, bicycle facilities, multi-use paths and sidewalks, for which
the Specifications and Drawings do not provide traffic control Drawings,
and include the following information:
(i) Modification to existing road configuration, road structures, and
appurtenances.
(ii) The location, anticipated duration, and nature of each lane closure,
detour, and lane shift.
(iii) Road conditions prior to implementation shown in background
(greyed out), including street lighting, road configurations, roadside
barriers, and the locations of other existing street furniture or
features such as trees, fire hydrants, catch-basins, and other
furniture or features that will aid in the City’s understanding of the
traffic control drawings.
(iv) Work Zones, including ingress/egress points.
(v) Traffic control and protection devices (signage, PVMS, barriers,
traffic control persons, police control, TC-54s, etc.).
(vi) Traffic movements, pedestrian, and bicycle routes including
alternate routes where applicable.
(vii) Identification of all transit routes impacted by lane closures.
(viii) Traffic monitoring camera locations.

(ix) Locations of permanent and proposed temporary transit stops,
including the distance between them.
(x) Temporary traffic signal layout, PHM-125 and wiring drawings, as
required by the City of Toronto.
(xi) The approach to coordination of transportation accommodation
with City of Toronto works, other construction projects, and special
events on or adjacent to the Sites.
(m) Prepare and submit for review by Metrolinx Representative and approval
by the TTC all submittals required by the TTC for temporary relocation of
bus stops and temporary detour of bus routes.
(n) Prepare and submit for review by Metrolinx Representative and approval
by the City of Toronto’ Parks Forestry and Parks Division a public
information strategy and Drawings for installation and removal of trail
closure advance warning and warning signage in compliance with the
City of Toronto’s Multi-use Trail Design Guidelines.
(o) Prepare and submit for review by Metrolinx Representative and approval
by the City of Toronto a public information strategy and Drawings for
installation and removal of advance notification and warning signage in
compliance with the MTO TC-64 Manual for any directional road full
closures.
(p) Prepare and implement a Traffic Protection Plan in compliance with
O.Reg. 213/91, section 67(4), and submit to Metrolinx Representative for
information only.

(a) Continually maintain traffic control devices in use.
(i) Check signs daily for legibility, damage, suitability and location.
Clean, repair or replace to ensure clarity and reflectance.
(ii) Remove or cover signs which do not apply to conditions existing
from day to day.
(b) Develop and implement a checklist (a “Site Condition Rating Checklist”)
acceptable to Metrolinx Representative, for the purpose of facilitating
quality control and quality assurance relating to traffic management
during implementation of the Works, and at a minimum include the
following information:
(i) Storage of materials.
(ii) Traffic control devices.
(iii) Roadside barriers.

(iv) Pavement drop‑offs.
(v) Temporary pavement markings.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Intentionally blank.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
(a) Use only traffic control devices, including pavement markings, for which
there are active OPSS, OPSD, MTOD, City of Toronto Construction or
Material Specifications, City of Toronto Standard Drawings, or that are
authorized under the Highway Traffic Act or the Ontario Regulations
thereto.
(b) Energy attenuation with inertial module system (OPSD 923.302,
November 2006, revision 1) may be used.
EXECUTION
3.1 COMPLIANCE
(a) Comply with requirements of Acts, Regulations and By-Laws in force for
regulation of traffic or use of roadways upon or over which it is necessary
to carry out Work or haul Materials or Equipment.
(b) Do not implement Work impacting public roadways, bicycle facilities,
multi-use paths or sidewalks without review by Metrolinx Representative
and any required City of Toronto permits.
(c) Comply with requirements of City of Toronto Accessibility Design
Guidelines, Construction Specification for Maintenance of Traffic and
Multi-use Trail Design Guidelines.
(d) Comply as much as appropriate in urban conditions with Ontario Traffic
Manual Book 7, the TAC Geometric Design Guide for Canadian Roads,
MTO Roadside Design Manual and the City of Toronto Construction
Specification for Maintenance of Traffic.
(e) Implement traffic control with traffic control persons in compliance with
O.Reg. 213/91, section 69, and the Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7.
(f) Ensure that all Construction Activities comply with the TTMP and any
subsequent amendments or updates as agreed to by the Metrolinx
Representative, City of Toronto, and the TTC.
(g) Be advised that closures of traffic lanes, bike lanes, sidewalks and
parking spaces located within City of Toronto rights-of-way that have a
duration of more than 12 months require approval of the City of Toronto
Council.
3.2 DESIGNATED TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT STAFF

(a) Designate a traffic manager who shall be responsible for the following
activities:
(i) Developing, implementing, and managing the TTMP.
(ii) Ensuring that the Metrolinx Representative, City of Toronto, and
TTC are kept informed of all upcoming traffic activities and any
revisions to the TTMP.
(iii) Ensuring that appropriate modifications are made to the TTMP if
the specified traffic control measures are not achieving the
requirements.
(iv) Coordinating with persons carrying out work in areas adjacent to
the Work area.
(v) Co-chairing (with the Metrolinx Representative) the Transportation
Management Committee.
(vi) Ensuring the timing and organized delivery of public and
Stakeholder communication information.
(b) Designate traffic control supervisors, who shall have authority to
implement TCPs in the field and be responsible for the following
activities:
(i) Direct all traffic control operations on the Site and coordinating with
Other Contractors working on the Project.
(ii) Maintain direct line authority over Contractor’s traffic control
personnel and procedures on the Site.
(iii) Liaise with the Metrolinx Representative, City of Toronto, and TTC
as required.
(iv) Respond to traffic-related incidents resulting from Construction
Activities and Contractor’s traffic management activities. All major
incidents shall be documented within 48 hours of the incident and
provided to the Metrolinx Representative and the City of Toronto.
(v) Document traffic control measures and activities.
(vi) Oversee all requirements of this Contract that contribute to the

safety, convenience, and orderly movement of vehicular, cycling,
and pedestrian traffic.
(vii) Attend regularly scheduled traffic management committee
meetings.
(viii) Provide traffic control supervision on the Site during all
Construction Activities for which a traffic control Drawing is
required.
A. During non-work periods, the traffic control supervisor or
alternate mutually agreed upon by Contractor and the
Metrolinx Representative shall be on the Site within 30
minutes of being notified.
B. The traffic control supervisors shall have appropriate
personnel and equipment available on call, at all times.
3.3 PROTECTION AND CONTROL OF PUBLIC TRAFFIC

(a) Conduct Work in such a manner as to ensure the least interference with
pedestrians, cyclists, and vehicular traffic.
(b) Ensure pedestrian and cyclist safety at all times.
(c) Provide temporary sidewalks, bicycle facilities and multi-use paths in
compliance with the City of Toronto Construction Specification for
Maintenance of Traffic, where specified in the Agreement, Specifications
or Drawings.
(d) Maintain a minimum sidewalk width of 1.8 metres or the existing
sidewalk width if the existing sidewalk has a width of less than 1.8
metres.
(e) When working within the travelled way, place Equipment in position to
minimize interference and hazard to the travelling public.
(f) Ensure that haul routes are kept clean and free of construction dust and
debris.
(g) Remove all dirt and debris from roadways, bicycle facilities, multi-use
paths and sidewalks in the vicinity of the Site at the close of each
workday to City of Toronto standards.
(h) Promptly remove snow and ice to City of Toronto standards from
roadways, bicycle facilities, multi-use paths and sidewalks in the vicinity
of the Site and where alignment or configuration of roadways, bicycle
facilities, multi-use paths or sidewalks is temporarily modified.
(i) Repair damage to roadways, bicycle facilities, multi-use paths and

sidewalks resulting from Construction to existing conditions or better
prior to Substantial Completion.
(j) Do not close any sidewalks, bicycle facilities and multi-use paths except
as shown in the Specifications or Drawings or permitted in this Section
01 55 26.
(k) Implement trail closures in compliance with the Toronto Multi-use Trail
Design Guidelines and obtain approval by the City of Toronto prior to
implementation.
(l) Do not store any equipment or materials on any City of Toronto roads,
roadway shoulders or boulevards, unless the storage areas are identified
in the traffic control Drawings and appropriate traffic control devices have
been implemented to protect the equipment or materials.
(m) Implement steel decks intended as vehicular driving surface in
compliance with City of Toronto Construction Specification for Steel
Plates Used in Connection with Roadway Utility Excavations, and as
follows:
(i) Use high-friction plates for vehicular driving surfaces.
(ii) Treat pedestrian walking surfaces with anti-slip paint.
(n) Ensure that construction fences, hoarding, dust screens and antiglare
screens do not obstruct the visibility of traffic signs or driver sightlines at
driveways or intersections.
(o) Implement temporary pavement widenings and provide temporary
sidewalks as shown in the Drawings, and ensure that temporary
pavement widenings drain toward the road centreline unless the
Drawings indicate differently.
(p) Remove temporary pavement widenings and temporary sidewalks when
no longer required, and reinstate pavement, curbs, gutters and sidewalks
to existing condition or better in compliance with applicable City of
Toronto Construction Specifications and Standard Drawings, unless
instructed to the contrary in the Contract.
(q) Do not implement traffic lane closures during traffic peak periods, which
are Mondays to Fridays from 7 AM to 9 AM and from 3 PM to 6 PM.
3.4 TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES

(a) Install and maintain all regulatory, warning and temporary conditions
traffic signs, including those specified in the traffic control Drawings.
(b) Maintain and leave in place all existing traffic signs, information,
wayfinding and pedestrian wayfinding signs, and pavement markings
except where the Specifications and Drawings indicate removal.
(c) Promptly remove temporary traffic control devices when no longer
required upon completion of the Work, but hand over the following at
Contract completion to Metrolinx in accordance with the requirements of
Schedule 8 – Handover.
(i) Temporary traffic decks and associated barriers and traffic signage
on Gertrude Place and Danforth Avenue.
(ii) TCDs relating to the closure of Lipton Avenue and the closed TPA
parking lot.
(iii) Maintain temporary modifications of traffic signage installed on the
traffic signal at the intersection of Pape Avenue and Lipton
Avenue.
(iv) Curb modification and removal of flexible delineator posts at the
intersection of Eaton Avenue and Danforth Avenue.
(v) Signage modification relating to parking space closures on
Danforth Avenue, Eaton Avenue, Pape Avenue and Sammon
Avenue.
(vi) Closures and realignment of traffic lanes, temporary concrete
barriers and temporary sidewalk on Pape Avenue just south of
Sammon Avenue.
(vii) Sidewalk closure on Sammon Avenue.
(d) Provide and maintain signs, flashing warning lights and other devices
required to indicate construction activities or other temporary and
unusual conditions resulting from Work which requires road user
response.
(e) Use TC-64 signs and portable variable message signs for advance
notification and warning devices as required by the City of Toronto.
(f) Operate, maintain and modify traffic signals that are handed over by the
City of Toronto pursuant to the Metrolinx/Third Party Traffic Control
and/or Traffic Management Device Handover Terms and Conditions, if
any.
(g) Retain an Electrical Maintenance Contractor that is pre-approved by the
City of Toronto for all activities required for operating, maintaining and
modifying traffic signals, as required.
3.5 OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Be advised that measurements in this Section 3.5 are with respect to the
City of Toronto rights-of-way unless where stated otherwise.
(b) Close traffic lanes for the duration of the Work and only as follows:
(i) One southbound traffic lane on Pape Avenue between Kings Park
Boulevards and just south of Browning Avenue.
(ii) One northbound traffic lane on Pape Avenue between Canning
Avenue and Kings Park Boulevard.
(iii) All traffic lanes on Lipton Avenue.
(c) Be advised that additional lane closures may be requested through the
City of Toronto’s right-of-way permitting process.
(d) Implement the following vehicular turning restrictions when Pape Avenue
is reduced to one lane per direction in the vicinity of the work zone:
(i) Westbound left turn and southbound left turn at the intersection of
Sammon Avenue and Pape Avenue.
(ii) Northbound left turn at the intersection of MacPhail Avenue and
Pape Avenue.
(iii) Northbound left turn at the intersection of Fulton Avenue and Pape
Avenue.
(iv) Westbound left turn and southbound left turn at the intersection of
Aldwych Avenue and Pape Avenue.
(v) Northbound left turn at the intersection of Browning Avenue and
Pape Avenue.
(e) Close the sidewalk on the south side of Sammon Avenue between Pape
Avenue and the laneway east Pape Avenue, and only as required for the
Work.
(f) Provide a temporary sidewalk where the existing east sidewalk along
Pape Avenue cannot be maintained between Sammon Avenue and a
point 42 metres further south.
(g) Close the sidewalks on Lipton Avenue as follows:
(i) On the north side from east of the TTC property line to the east
terminus of Lipton Avenue.
(ii) On the south side from 33m east of Pape Avenue to the east
terminus of Lipton Avenue.
(h) Close on-street parking spaces only as required for the Work and as
follows:
(i) On Lipton Avenue.
(ii) On the north side of Sammon Avenue Pape Avenue and a point 30
metres further east (3 spaces).
(iii) On Pape Avenue where lane closures are implemented.
(iv) On the north and south sides of Danforth Avenue between
Langford Avenue and Pape Avenue.
(v) On Eaton Ave between Danforth Ave and a point 10 metres further
north.
(i) Provide replacement parking for any residential permit parking spaces
that are closed on Gertrude Place, Muriel Avenue or Eaton Ave by
renting parking spaces in the Green-P parking lot 90, located at 17 Eaton
Avenue.
(j) Implement the storm sewer Work, jet grouting and SOE installation on
Gertrude Place as follows:
(i) Maintain 1 traffic lane on Gertrude Place and Muriel Avenue.
(ii) Close on-street parking spaces on Gertrude Place and Muriel
Avenue only as required for the Work.
(k) Implement jet grouting and SOE installation on Danforth Avenue as
follows:
(i) Provide one westbound and one eastbound traffic lane with
minimum width of 4.0 metres adjacent to the Site.
(ii) Close bike lanes only as required for the Work, and paint sharrow
pavement markings when the bike lanes are closed.
(iii) Shorten westbound left-turn and right-turn lanes at the intersection
of Pape Avenue and Danforth Avenue when required for the Work.
(iv) Close the westbound left-turn lane and prohibit the westbound left-
turning movement at the intersection of Pape Avenue and Danforth
Avenue when required for the Work.
(l) Modify the curb at the intersection of Eaton Avenue and Danforth
Avenue only as shown in the Drawings, and adjust the sidewalk as
required to be AODA compliant.
(m) Install temporary road decks on Danforth Avenue and Gertrude Place to
cover open excavations within the City’s right-of-way.
(n) Handover the temporary bridges in accordance with Schedule 8 –

Outline Commissioning Program and Handover. Do not reinstate pre-
construction conditions for any temporary roadway modifications.
(o) Provide two parking spaces for the exclusive use of the Metrolinx
Representative at each Work Zone.
3.6 CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE MANAGEMENT

(a) Manage all construction vehicle movements at Site driveways with traffic
control persons.
(b) Be advised that the existing truck restriction on Sammon Avenue will be
rescinded between Pape Avenue and a point 40 metres further east for
the duration of the Work.
(c) Be advised that the existing truck restriction on Eaton Avenue will be
rescinded between Pape Avenue and a point 50 metres further north for
the duration of the Work.
(d) Ensure that construction vehicles do not enter or exit Sites by turning left
from or to a public roadway, except as follows:
(i) Where the Site driveway is located on a one-way street or a
signalized intersection.
(ii) Construction egress onto Sammon Avenue.
(e) Ensure that construction vehicles do not make the following vehicular
movements:
(i) Eastbound left-turning movement from Danforth Avenue to Eaton
Avenue.
(ii) Westbound left-turning movement from Sammon Avenue to Pape
Avenue.
(iii) Southbound left-turning movement from Pape Avenue into the
Pape Station bus loop.
(f) Use the driveway of the Pape Station bus loop as construction vehicle
access only as required for the Work and only until a construction vehicle
access cannot be provided on Eaton Avenue.
(g) Use Lipton Avenue as construction vehicle egress only as required for
the Work and only until a construction vehicle egress cannot be provided
on Gertrude Place or Danforth Avenue.
(h) Do not use the TTC bus loop and Lipton Avenue for construction vehicle
access or egress after 31 January 2024.
(i) Do not use the intersection of Lipton Avenue and Pape Avenue to enter
the Site.
(j) Manage all construction vehicle movements on Lipton Avenue, within the
Pape Station bus loop and at the walkway between the East Headhouse
and Eaton Avenue with traffic control persons.
(k) Do not permit construction vehicles to reverse within the Pape Station
bus loop or the travelled way.
(l) Install and maintain pavement markings on Lipton Ave to delineate the
space that is for exclusive use of TTC buses.
3.7 SURFACE TRANSIT OPERATIONS

(a) Do not obstruct bus movements within the Pape Station bus loop at any
time.
(b) Maintain Lipton Avenue as bus route for TTC buses exiting the Pape
Station bus loop.
(c) Install physical separation on Lipton Avenue between trucks and buses
where feasible by using TC-54 traffic barrels.
(d) Provide a paved pedestrian walkway that is compliant with AODA and
applicable City standards between the Pape Station’s East Headhouse
and Eaton Avenue when sidewalks on Lipton Avenue are closed and
illuminate the walkway in compliance with applicable design standards.
(e) Provide a paved pedestrian walkway that is compliant with AODA and
applicable City standards between Gertrude Place and Eaton Avenue
when permit parking spaces on Gertrude Place or Muriel Avenue are
closed and illuminate the walkway in compliance with applicable design
standards.
(f) Close the TTC bus loop only as required for the Work and not longer
than 12 weeks.
(g) Ensure that pedestrian movements are not obstructed at Pape Station
during closure of the TTC bus loop, and provide temporary bus stops as
required by TTC.
(h) Install temporary pedestrian wayfinding signage due to relocation of bus
platforms at the Pape Station bus loop as required by TTC.
(i) Temporarily relocate TTC bus stops and provide temporary bus stop
pads as required by TTC.
(j) Provide bus shelters at temporary bus stops if the existing bus stop has
a bus shelter.
(k) Ensure that temporary bus stops comply with TTC’s Design Manual DM-
0412-02.
(l) Provide an access route to the Pape Station East Headhouse in
compliance with O.Reg. 332/12, and particularly section 3.2.5.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Temporary Barriers and Enclosures
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for temporary barriers and
enclosures, including energy attenuators, hoarding, dust tight screens,
and barricades.

(a) Section 01 55 26 – Traffic Control

(a) Measurement:
(b) Payment will be made for the following items:
(i) Item A.1.2 - Concrete Barrier, Enclosures & Hoarding (temporary).
(ii) This Item shall include: temporary barriers and enclosures,
including energy attenuators, hoarding, dust tight screens, and
barricades.
(iii) Payment for this lump sum item shall be as follows:
A. 50% upon supply and installation of all concrete barriers,
enclosures & hoarding at the Work Sites.
B. 50% on a monthly prorated basis over the Term commencing
upon installation of concrete barriers, enclosures & hoardings
at the Work Sites.

(a) Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):
(i) CGSB 1.59-[97], Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel.
(ii) CAN/CGSB 1.189-[00], Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood.
(b) CSA Group (CSA):
(i) CSA-O121-[M1978(R2003)], Douglas Fir Plywood.
(c) Public Works Government Services Canada (PWGSC) Standard
Acquisition Clauses and Conditions (SACC)-ID: R0202D, Title: General
Conditions 'C', in effect as of: May 14, 2004.
(d) Ontario Ministry of Transportation (MTO):
(i) Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings (OPSD).

(ii) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications:
A. OPSS.MUNI 723 (Construction Specification for Energy
Attenuators).
B. OPSS 741 (Construction Specification for Temporary Concrete
Barriers).
(iii) Ontario Ministry of Transportation Drawings (MTOD).
(iv) Ontario Regulation 213/91 Construction Projects (Sections 66-
69,104-106, and 186-187)
(v) Ontario Regulation 851 Industrial Establishments (Section 20)
(vi) OTM-Book 7 Temporary Conditions – Office and Field Edition
(vii) Handbook for Construction Traffic Control Persons
(e) City of Toronto:
(i) Tree Protection Policy and Specifications for Construction Near
Trees.
(ii) Policy and Safety Procedures

(a) Acronyms:
(i) OPSS: Ontario Provincial Standard Specification.
(ii) OPSD: Ontario Provincial Standard Drawing.
(iii) MTOD: Ontario Ministry of Transportation Drawing.
(iv) TTC Non Operating Hours: Period during which TTC transit
services are not available to the public. The exact times and
duration of Non Operating Hours will depend upon the TTC
Operations Manager for the facility in question and may vary
depending on other TTC work activity, works train movements, de-
energization and other site specific factors.



PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
2.2 EQUIPMENT
(a) Use only traffic control devices, for which there are active OPSS, OPSD,
MTOD, City of Toronto Construction and Material Specifications, or City
of Toronto Standard Drawings, or that are authorized under the Highway
Traffic Act or the Ontario Regulations thereto.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) All work to be conducted in accordance with City and Ontario Provincial
permits and approvals.
(b) Obtain approvals from the City for traffic control programs.
3.2 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL

(a) Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously.
(b) Unless otherwise directed by the Metrolinx Representative, remove all
temporary traffic control devices, enclosures, and tree protection zones
at completion.
3.3 HOARDINGS
(a) Erect hoarding using practices that comply with O.Reg. 213/91 and
Section 4.2 of Metrolinx Stations Services Standard MX-STS-STD-001
“Temporary Construction and Customer Experience Requirements for
GO Facilities”.
(b) Erect hoarding using construction grade lumber framing and exterior
grade fir plywood conforming to CSA O121. Contractor to determine size
and spacing of posts and supports to ensure hoarding will remain intact
throughout the duration of construction.
(c) Apply plywood panels vertically with seams flush and butt jointed.
(d) Leave in place all hoardings at completion unless otherwise directed by
the Metrolinx Representative.
3.4 HOARDINGS FOR TTC FACILITIES

(a) Before commencing erection of hoardings around TTC facilities,
coordinate with TTC for access, installation and to ensure the erected
hoardings do not present any unanticipated access constraints to the
public or TTC personnel.
(b) Install hoarding, fencing, barriers and dust-tight partitions within TTC
structures during Non-Operating Hours, unless otherwise agreed with the
TTC representative. Install hoarding, fencing and barriers outside of TTC
structures as agreed with the TTC representative.
(c) Confirm the minimum setback of hoarding, fencing, barriers and dust-
tight partitions with the TTC representative prior to erection.
(d) Paint outside of hoarding grey or a colour compatible with the
background finish as approved by TTC and mark with POST NO BILLS
signs.
(e) Where a hoarding changes direction, avoid blind corners by constructing
hoarding on a 45-degree angle or providing shatterproof security mirrors
to provide proper sight lines around the corner.
(f) Immediately repair hoarding, fencing, and barriers that have been
deemed unsafe. Maintain hoarding and barriers graffiti-free. Immediately
remove or paint over graffiti. Wash the surface of the partitions when
required. Upon completion of the Work under the Agreement, remove
installed and existing hoardings, fencing, barriers, and dust tight
partitions unless otherwise noted during Non Operating Hours.
(g) Repair and restore to original condition any part of the structure or
equipment broken or damaged as a result of installation or removal of
hoarding and barriers.
(h) Any hoardings around TTC substations shall be constructed of non-
conductive material only and shall be self-supporting without any parts
driven or installed into the soil. Provide supports at 2.1 m to 2.4 m on
centre. with top, intermediate, and bottom horizontal rails.
3.5 HOARDING GRAPHICS

(a) Graphics will be added to the standalone hoarding as well as public
facing locations on chain link fence as indicated by the Metrolinx
Representative. Paint public side of hoarding in matte white color with
one coat primer to CAN/CGSB 1.189 and one coat exterior paint to
CGSB 1.59. Maintain public side of hoarding in clean condition. Metrolinx
will provide direction during construction on specific colors and graphics
to be applied to hoarding areas.
3.6 ENCLOSURES
(a) Provide secure, rigid guard rails, fencing, and barricades around deep
excavations, open shafts, open stair wells, open edges of floors and
roofs, and where indicated in the Agreement, Specifications and
Drawings in compliance with O.Reg. 213/91, or as required to ensure
worker safety.
(b) Provide as required by governing authorities and as indicated in the
Agreement, Specifications and Drawings.
(c) Provide temporary construction barriers and energy attenuators as
shown in the Specifications and Drawings and where required to ensure
public and worker safety.
3.7 CONCRETE BARRIERS

(a) Comply with the Roadside Design Manual, applicable OPSD and MTOD,
OPSS.MUNI 723 and OPSS 741 when implementing temporary
construction barriers and energy attenuators.
(b) Ensure that implementation of temporary construction barriers comply
with O.Reg.213/91, section 233.
(c) Provide concrete barriers at locations shown in the drawings.
(d) Relocate movable temporary concrete barriers with the appropriate
transfer machine.
(e) Protect approach ends of temporary concrete barriers with appropriate
energy attenuation devices.
3.8 DUST TIGHT SCREENS

(a) Provide dust tight screens or partitions to localize dust generating
activities, and for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and
public.
(b) Maintain and relocate protection until such Work is complete.
(c) Dust tight screens shall be securely fastened to all fencing, and to the
top of temporary construction guide rails and barriers, around the Site.
3.9 MAINTENANCE OF CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY

CONTROLS
(a) Use all means necessary to maintain temporary barriers and enclosures
in proper and safe condition throughout progress of the Work, including
all non-working times such as nights, holidays and weekends.
(b) In the event of loss or damage, promptly restore temporary barriers and
enclosures by repair or replacement at no cost to Metrolinx.
3.10 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY

(a) Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during
performance of Work.
(b) The Contractor is responsible for damage incurred and to make good
damaged private and public property.
3.11 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES TO BE LEFT IN PLACE

(a) Any temporary barriers and enclosures within the site area, or bordering
the site area and public or private property, shall be handed over to
Metrolinx in good physical condition unless otherwise directed by the
(b) Coordinate the permit transfer of ownership, if possible, with Metrolinx
and the Municipality.
END OF SECTION
Pape Segment Support of Excavation Section 01 71 23.16
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Construction Surveying
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements and criteria for control survey,
land surveys, and mapping necessary for the construction of the Works.


(a) Work related to this section is incidental to the Work. Costs related to
construction surveying shall be included within the appropriate
Agreement item to which they pertain most closely.

(a) Contractor shall provide all survey and mapping requirements and all
aspects of the Works comprising or connected with surveying and
mapping as per the following standards:
(i) Features, Symbology, and Conversion to InRoads Standards,
Metrolinx Specification 02 21 11.
(ii) Metrolinx Survey Control in a Transit Corridor Supplement ID
Code: MX-SURV CTRL-STD-2018.
(iii) CADD/ BIM Standards Manual CPG-DGN-PLN-084 Revision 2
04/09/2021.
(iv) Ontario Regulation 216/10: Performance Standards for the
Practice of Professional Land Surveying.

(a) GCS - Geodetic Coordinate System.
(b) OL2020 GCS - OL2020 Geodetic Coordinate System
(c) Mx MTMv6 GCS - Metrolinx CSRSv6 Geodetic Coordinate System
(d) TTC GCS - Toronto Transit Commission Geodetic Coordinate System

(a) Intentionally Blank.

(a) Submit a Survey Control Monument Inventory Report as per Section
3.3(d)(i).
(b) Submit an Initial Control Network Survey Report as per Section
3.3(d)(i)B(3).
(c) Submit a Control Network Letter of Acceptance as per Section
3.3(d)(i)B(4).
(d) Notify the Metrolinx Representative when survey control monuments and
benchmarks have been disturbed or destroyed as per Section 3.3(e)(i)B.
(e) Submit a Bi-Annual Survey Control Report as per Section 3.3(e)(i)C.
(f) Submit a Boundary Monuments Inventory Report as per Section 3.5(a).
(g) Submit a Final Boundary Monuments Inventory Report as per Section
3.5(b).
(h) Submit Field notes and Sketches as per Section 3.5(c).
(i) Submit a Record Drawings as per Section 3.6(a).
(j) All Survey Reports provided by Contractor shall include all details related
to field survey and office processing, including:
(i) Detailed survey methodology.
(ii) Office calculations.
(iii) Updated drawings.
(iv) A single least squares adjustment report in ASCII format.
(v) Dates of survey.
(vi) The list and the sketch of fixed survey control markers.
(vii) Mean measured values.
(viii) Specification of instrumentation used.
(ix) Calibration status of instrumentation used.
(x) Observational acceptance criteria.
(xi) List of final adjusted coordinates findings.
(xii) A conclusion.

(a) Qualifications:
(i) Surveyor:
A. Provides supervision for all surveying activities.
B. An Ontario Land Surveyor (OLS) or Professional Engineer
(P.Eng.), to supervise all surveys for construction of the
Works. The OLS or P.Eng. shall have at least 10 years of
professional experience as an OLS or P.Eng. with at least five
years’ experience in a similar role on projects of similar scale
and complexity and be familiar with coordinate transformations
between the various Geodetic Coordinate Systems as
described in Section 3.2
PRODUCTS
2.1 INTENTIONALLY BLANK.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Contractor shall:
(i) Submit its surveys, mapping, and construction works using the
OL2020 Geodetic Coordinate System set out in Section 3.2(a)(i).
(ii) Provide all required survey reports and submittals to the Metrolinx
Representative duly signed and sealed by the OLS or the P.Eng.
(iii) Review and validate the applied scale factor and geodetic
coordinates of all drawings, plans of survey, and coordinate and
elevation listings provided by Metrolinx in PDF, CADD, and other
formats, prior to acceptance.
(iv) Provide drawings in a ground chainage and dimension system as
per Metrolinx standards.
A. All CADD drawings referencing the Ontario Line Geodetic
Coordinate System the dimensions and Alignment chainages
shall be illustrated as ground measurements. Ground
measurements shall be derived from grid measurements by
applying the project scale factor where:
(1) Ground distance = grid distance / project scale factor, or
(2) Grid distance = ground distance x project scale factor.
(3) The project scale factor for the OL2020 GCS is 0.999886.
B. CADD drawings containing measurements shall display a

measurement note: “Measurement Note: All measurements
are ground and can be converted to grid measurements where
grid distance = ground distance x 0.999886 (OL2020 GCS).
(v) Allow the Metrolinx Representative’s assigned surveyors access to
the site for audit or independent verification surveys on behalf of
Metrolinx.
(vi) Adopt the Ontario Line Project Geodetic Survey Control Network
Report - Nov_2022 REV 2 that consists of horizontal and vertical
components including the datum transformation.
3.2 GEODETIC COORDINATE SYSTEMS

(a) Contractor shall adopt the defined GCS as provided by the Metrolinx
Representative in order to support the Works:
(i) The project-specific Ontario Line Geodetic Coordinate System
(OL2020 GCS), based on the best fit to the City of Toronto GCS,
which is described as follows:
A. Horizontal datum: OL2020_Hor described in the Ontario Line
Project Geodetic Survey Control Network Report - Nov_2022
REV 2.
B. Vertical datum: OL2020_Ort; defined as best fit to
CGVD28:Pre78adj, Ontario Line Project Geodetic Survey
Control Network Report - Nov_2022 REV 2.
C. Map projection: MTM, Zone 10.
D. The OL2020 GCS closely resembles City of Toronto GCS. The
OL2020 GCS Control network coordinates and elevations
were surveyed to a higher accuracy. Contracting Authority-
supplied OL2020 GCS supersede the City of Toronto’s
NAD27:74adj compatible published coordinates and
CGVD28:Pre78adj published elevations.
(ii) The Metrolinx Geodetic Coordinate System (Mx MTMv6 GCS) is
defined as follows:
A. Horizontal Datum: North American Datum of 1983, Canadian
Spatial Reference System Version 6 (NAD83 CSRS v6), also
referred to as NAD83 CSRSv6 epoch2010.
B. Vertical Datum: Canadian Geodetic Vertical Datum of
1928:1978 adjustment (CGVD28:78adj).
C. Map projection: MTM, Zone 10.

(iii) The TTC Geodetic Coordinate System is defined as follows:
A. Horizontal Datum: North American Datum of 1927:74adj.
B. Vertical Datum: Canadian Geodetic Vertical Datum of
1928:Pre1978 adjustment (CGVD28:Pre78adj).
C. Map projection: TTC modified MTM Zone 10 where the CADD
drawing Northing coordinates are reduced by 4,000,000 m.
3.3 PROJECT SURVEY CONTROL

(a) All drawings illustrating coordinates and/or elevations shall contain a
note defining the Horizontal Datum, Vertical Datum and Map projection
of the associated Geodetic Coordinate System.
(b) As described in the Ontario Line Project Geodetic Survey Control
Network Report:
(i) Metrolinx has established or selected existing horizontal control
monuments along the Alignment at approximately 200 m intervals.
(ii) Metrolinx has established or selected existing first order vertical
geodetic control benchmarks along the Alignment at approximately
1 km intervals with OL2020 GCS elevations.
(c) Contractor shall base all of its geodetic control network surveys per the
following accuracy class:
(i) Horizontal Control Network:
A. Network accuracy: 2 cm at 95 percent confidence interval.
B. Local accuracy: 1 cm at 95 percent confidence interval.
(ii) Vertical Control Network:
A. First order vertical accuracy: as described in MX-SURV CTRL-
STD-2018- REV0.
(d) Datum Transformation Parameters:
(i) Contractor shall implement the datum transformation parameters
described in the Ontario Line Project Geodetic Survey Control
Network to transform between the GCS’s as described in Section
3.2(a).
(e) Validation and Acceptance of the Project Geodetic Control Survey
Network:
(i) Contractor shall within the Works area:
A. Conduct a field inventory investigation of all survey control

monuments and deep benchmarks provided by Metrolinx and
provide, For Information, an investigation report titled “Survey
Control Monument Inventory Report” reporting all damaged
and destroyed survey monuments within 30 calendar days
following Financial Close.
B. Perform an initial control survey audit for the purpose of

validating and accepting the control survey provided by
Metrolinx.
(1) Perform all horizontal survey calculations and
adjustments in the Mx MTMv6 GCS and adjust survey
measurements (unconstrained and constrained) using
commercially available least square adjustment software
that supports variance/covariance propagation.
(2) Validate the classical two-dimensional Helmert conformal
transformation together with the elevation shift parameter
and the three-dimensional 7 Parameter Bursa Wolf
transformation parameters provided by Metrolinx in
Section 3.3.(c)(i) when transforming between Mx MTMv6
GCS and OL2020 GCS coordinates and elevations.
(3) Submit a comprehensive survey report titled “Contractor
Initial Control Network Survey Report.” This report shall
include the measurements, adjustments, and
comparisons to the Metrolinx survey coordinates and
elevations. If discrepancies or inconsistencies in the
control network are identified, Contractor shall
recommend solutions for implementation in the report.
The survey report must be submitted prior to construction
surveys or layout taking place.
(4) Provide the Metrolinx Representative with a control
network and datum transformation “Control Network
Letter of Acceptance” upon completion of the control
network and datum transformation validation and
resolution of any issues. Contractor shall state that the
horizontal and vertical control network and datum
transformations as provided by Metrolinx, has been
evaluated and meets the requirements of Contractor.
(f) Protection and Maintenance of the Project Geodetic Survey Control
Network:
(i) Contractor shall:

A. Protect all existing survey control monuments and benchmarks
for the duration of the Works.
B. Notify the Metrolinx Representative immediately if survey
control monuments and benchmarks are disturbed or
destroyed during the Works.
C. At 6-month intervals following the initial survey control audit
conduct a field survey of all existing control survey monuments
(including subsurface and supplementary survey control
monuments) and submit a Bi-annual Survey Control Report to
the Metrolinx Representative, for review.
D. Be responsible for establishing all site specific or subsurface
control networks that meet the accuracy requirements as per
Section 3.3(b).
E. Be responsible for maintaining, verifying, replacing and
updating all site specific and subsurface survey control and
perform a minimum and constrained least square adjustment
for this control.
F. The final adjusted site specific and subsurface horizontal
network survey control network shall be provided in both
OL2020 GCS and Mx MTMv6 GCS.
3.4 SITE SURVEYS

(a) Contractor shall conduct site surveys required for the construction of the
Works, including the following:
(i) Prior to start of works, a survey workplan shall be submitted to the
CA for review. This workplan should include the items outlined in
Section 1.7(j).
(ii) Clearance field surveys to identify areas of tight clearance in the
horizontal and vertical plane impacting construction works.
(iii) Topographic and pre-construction surveys to support mapping in
the areas that need additional information as determined by
Contractor.
3.5 PROPERTY LIMIT SURVEYS

(a) Prior to the start of the Works, Contractor shall engage a licensed OLS to
survey and inventory all legal survey property limits and monuments
defining property boundaries within the Lands. Legal survey monuments
include standard iron bars, iron bars, iron tubes, round iron bars, and cut
crosses. Contractor shall submit an inventory plan illustrating the position
of the monuments referenced to OL2020 GCS coordinates, and a
Boundary Monuments Inventory Report indicating the survey boundary
markers, condition, and types.
(b) Within 3 months of completion of construction and restoration work,
Contractor shall engage a licensed OLS to replace all legal survey
monuments shown on the inventory plan that have been destroyed or
disturbed and submit a Final Boundary Monuments Inventory Report to
(c) In the areas where design and construction activities take place within 1
m of a property limit, Contractor shall engage a licensed OLS to stake
out the property limit in the field and prepare field notes and sketches to
document the fieldwork.
3.6 AS-BUILT SURVEYS AND RECORD DRAWINGS

(a) Contractor shall submit all Record Drawings, for Information, in OL2020
GCS, Mx MTMv6 GCS and TTC GCS within 15 days after a Construction
Activity is completed.
END OF SECTION
Division 03 – Concrete
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Concrete Forming
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the design and construction requirements for
formwork, falsework, and temporary supports used in the construction of
concrete structures.
(b) Concrete forming will be required for construction of the concrete guide
walls and for construction of the cap beam on top of the slurry wall end
walls.
(c) Concrete forming will also be required for other concrete structures,
including, but not limited to:
(i) The SOE base slab at the transition between narrow and wide
sections.
(ii) To create sumps as provisions in the SOE base slab to
accommodate the permanent sumps of the future station structure.
(iii) For construction joints as required for the SOE base slab.
(a) Section 02 42 00 – Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials
(b) Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcement
(c) Section 03 21 21.11 – Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer Reinforcement
Bars
(d) Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
(e) Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill
(f) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

(a) Costs related to concrete forming shall be included within the appropriate
(a) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction:
(i) OPSS 906 – Structural Steel.
(ii) OPSS 1010 – Aggregates – Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, and
Backfill Material
(b) CSA Standards:

(i) S6:2019 – Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code.
(ii) CAN/CSA-A23.1:19/A23.2:19 Concrete Material and Methods of
Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Practices for
Concrete.
(iii) CAN/CSA A23.3:19 – Design of Concrete Structures.
(iv) G40.20-04/40.21-04 – General Requirements for Rolled of Welded
Structural Quality Steel.
(v) ASTM 123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized)
Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
(vi) O86-M84 (R1992) – Engineering Design in Wood.
(vii) O121-17 – Douglas Fir Plywood.
(viii) O122-16 – Structural Glued-Laminated Timber.
(ix) S157/S157.1-05 – Strength Design in Aluminum/Commentary on
CSA S157-05, Strength Design in Aluminum.
(x) S269.1-1975 (R2003) – Falsework for Construction Purposes.
(xi) S269.3-M92 (R2008) – Concrete Formwork.
(c) National Research Council (NRC):
(i) National Building Code of Canada – 2005.
(a) Definitions:
(i) Bearing Strata: The ground immediately below the mudsills that
supports the falsework or that portion of ground supporting the
falsework piles.
(ii) Engineer: A Professional Engineer licensed by the Professional
Engineers Ontario to practice in the province of Ontario.
(iii) Exposed Surface: All external formed surfaces not to be covered
by backfill material.
(iv) Falsework: Any temporary structural support, including bracing,
used to support all of part of the formwork or of the structure during
its construction or rehabilitation until it becomes self-supporting.
(v) Formwork: The mould into which fresh concrete is placed.
(vi) Grade (Material Grade):

A. For steel, designation of the quality of the steel that can be
determined by referring to the appropriate CSA standard or by
specimen testing.
B. For wood, the designation of the quality of a piece of wood that
can be determined by referring to the appropriate CSA
Standard.
(vii) Hardwood: Wood with a degree of hardness at least equal to a
species, such as hard maple, oak, or beech.
(viii) Joist: one of a series of horizontal members, usually with narrow
face up, to which form material is fastened.
(ix) Ledger: a horizontal flexural member usually supporting joists and
resting on vertical supports.
(x) Mudsill: A mat of timbers or a small footing on the ground used as
a base from which the remainder of the falsework structure is
erected.
(xi) Narrow Section: The section of shaft closest to the End Wall that is
used to receive or launch the TBM.
(xii) Shoring: A system of vertical or inclined supports for forms or
structure components. Shoring may be wood or metal posts,
scaffold-type frames, or various patented members or other system
of falsework.
(xiii) Stud: One of a series of usually vertical members used in framing
to support the plywood or formwork fastened to it.
(xiv) Timber: Felled trees or logs suitable for conversion by sawing or
otherwise or a piece of sawn lumber having a minimum nominal
dimension greater than or equal to 125 mm.
(xv) Wide Section: The section of shaft closest to the Head Wall that is
used to perform and accommodate the underpinning works for
tunnelling beneath the existing TTC structure.
(xvi) Wood: Lumber or timber.
1.7 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

(a) Shop Drawings:
(i) General:
A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Metrolinx
Representative for review for all falsework used in the
construction.
B. Shop Drawings are required for the following formwork:
(1) All walls or structures, 2.4 m or greater in height from the
surface that the formwork is seated on. This may include
formwork for the cap beam depending upon the elevation
of the bottom of the cap beam above the ground surface.
C. Shop Drawings for other formwork shall only be submitted
when specified in the Agreement.
D. Formwork and falsework shall not be supported by, braced to,
or come in contact with another structure unless written
permission is received from the owner of the other structure.
E. Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Professional
Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario, verifying that the
drawings are consistent with the Specifications and Drawings
and are sufficient to withstand the loads of fluid concrete.
F. During formwork and falsework construction, the Contractor
shall have a copy of the Shop Drawings on site.
(ii) Falsework:
A. The Shop Drawings for the falsework for each structure shall
include all details of all falsework to be erected.
B. Falsework Shop Drawings shall include at least the following:
(1) Longitudinal, lateral, vertical, live, impact, and anticipated
construction loads used in design.
(2) Allowable bearing capacity of the soil beneath the
mudsills, if a falsework structure will be bearing on the
ground.
(3) Maximum column loads.
(4) Deflection diagrams for beams having deflection of 10
mm or more.
(5) The grade and actual size of all structural materials.
(6) Posts, connections, bracing and welding sufficiently

detailed to demonstrate compliance with the structural
analysis and erection requirements.
(7) Fully detailed frame shoring.
(8) Type and mass of moving or stationary equipment to be
supported by the falsework, if applicable.
(9) Sequence, method, and rate of concrete placement.
(10) All proprietary equipment sufficiently identified to
demonstrate compliance with the structural analysis and
erection requirements.
(11) Full details and locations of all splices.
(12) Vertical stiffening details and lateral restraint for ledgers
and subledgers.
(13) Lateral restraint details for falsework supporting beams
spanning openings.
(14) Fluid concrete loads, assumed for design purposes.
(15) Location of screed rail supports and their design loads.
(16) Anticipated settlement of falsework, including settlement
of mudsill.
(iii) Formwork:
A. Shop Drawings required under Cl. 1.7 (a) (i) B shall be signed
and sealed by the Formwork Design Engineer, who shall be a
Professional Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario.
same Shop Drawings and the Engineer is unable to sign and
seal the Shop Drawings for all aspects of the work, the Shop
Drawings shall additionally be signed and sealed by the
Design Engineers for the other disciplines.
C. The Shop Drawings shall show all necessary design and
construction details, including the grade and size of materials
used and the pressure diagrams used in the design.
(b) Foundation Information:
(i) Falsework Foundation Design Report:
A. The Falsework Foundation Design Report shall be signed and
sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the province of
Ontario. The report shall include the rationale used to

determine the soil bearing capacity, and shall include the
following information:
(1) The soil bearing capacity.
(2) Site preparation details.
B. A Falsework Foundation Design Report is not required when:
(1) The mudsill bears on mass concrete poured directly on
bedrock
(2) The mudsill bears on compacted Granular A backfill of
depth 1.0 m or less placed directly on bedrock.
(3) The mudsill bears on a reinforced concrete structure that
is a structural member placed upon a suitably prepared
and inspected subgrade. The reinforced structure is part
of, and has been constructed for, the Works for which the
new concrete shall have achieved sufficient strength to
support the load as determined by the Falsework Design
Engineer.
(ii) Interim Inspection after Construction of Falsework Foundation:
A. Upon completion of the falsework foundation and prior to
installation of falsework, the Contractor’s falsework Design
Engineer shall conduct an interim inspection of the work to
verify that the falsework foundation has been constructed
according to the falsework Foundation Design Report and
issue the Contractor written permission to proceed with the
work.
(iii) Proprietary Shoring, Forms, and Accessories:
A. When proprietary shoring, forms, and accessories are used,
the manufacturers’ allowable loads with supporting test data
shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings.
(iv) Revised Submissions:
A. When falsework design considerations or field conditions
necessitate amendments to the falsework, revisions shall be
resubmitted according to the Shop Drawings requirements
required under this Specification Section.

(a) Retain a Professional Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario with
experience in formwork and falsework design of comparable complexity
and scope, to perform the following services as part of the Works:
(i) Design of formwork and falsework.
(ii) Review, stamp, and sign fabrication and erection Shop Drawings,
design calculations and associated amendments.
(iii) Conduct on-site inspections and prepare and submit inspection
reports verifying this part of work is in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
(a) Deliver, store, and handle materials safely and in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions and CAN/CSA A23.1:19/A23.2:19.
(b) Storage and Handling Requirements:
(i) Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and CAN/CSA A23.1:19/A23.2:19 in clean, dry,
well-ventilated area.
(ii) Store and protect formwork from damages.
(iii) Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
PRODUCTS
(a) Formwork Design:
(i) Formwork design shall be according to CAN/CSA S269.3.
(b) Falsework Design:
(i) Falsework design shall be according to CSA S269.1 and as
specified herein.
(ii) The wood design shall be according to CSA/CAN3-086.
(iii) The structural steel design shall be according to CSA S6.
(iv) Deflection of falsework beams supporting walls and roof slabs shall
be limited to L/270, where L is the span. The loading for deflection
shall be the weight of concrete and formwork.
(v) When deflection of a beam is 10 mm or more, provisions shall be
made to compensate for deflection. When a provision is made to
compensate for deflection, the deflection of the beams shall be

limited to L/240, where L is the span. The tolerance shall be
± 5 mm.
(vi) Aluminum components shall be designed according to CAN3-
S157.
(vii) Concrete components shall be designed according to CSA S6.
(viii) Where scaffolding, fabricated shoring, or patented accessories are
used, the design shall be according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
(ix) Where another authority is involved, any additional requirements
specified by the authority shall also be satisfied.
(c) Mudsills:
(i) Mudsills shall be designed such that the settlement of mudsills
shall not exceed 12 mm.
2.2 MATERIALS
(a) General:
(i) Forms and falsework shall be constructed of wood, metal, or
concrete.
(b) Wood:
(i) Wood shall be according to CSA/CAN3-O86.
(c) Plywood:
(i) Plywood for formwork shall be 7 ply, 17 mm minimum thickness
exterior grade Douglas Fir Plywood according to CSA O121.
(ii) For exposed surfaces, the finish side shall be medium density
overlay plywood.
(d) Metal:
(i) Structural steel shall be according to CAN/CSA G40.20/G40.21
and be of the grade shown on the Shop Drawings.
(ii) Aluminum shall be according to CSA-S157 and be of the alloy and
temper shown on the Shop Drawings.
(iii) Used metal shall be in good condition with all previous fabrication,
adversely affection the required strength corrected.
(e) Accessories:
(i) All accessories used shall comply with the details shown on the
Shop Drawings or with the recommendations of the manufacturer
of the specified accessory.
(ii) Hardware left in place, either exposed or embedded in concrete
within 20 mm of its surface, shall be hot dip galvanized.
(iii) Tie rods that are to remain in the walls shall be cut back 50 mm
from the face of the wall. Grout exposed form tie holes on all
exposed surfaces of the concrete. Cavities shall be filled with
cement mortar and the surface left sound, smooth, even and
uniform in colour. The maximum diameter of plastic cones for form
ties shall be 30 mm.
(iv) Hot dip galvanizing shall be according to ASTM 123.
(f) Granular A Fill:
(i) Granular A fill shall be in accordance with Specification Section 31
23 00 – Excavation and Fill, and OPSS 1010.
EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK
(a) General:
(i) Forms shall be smooth; clean; free from warps, splits, holes, and
bulges; and constructed and maintained to be mortar tight.
(b) Exposed Surfaces:
(i) Forms for exposed surfaces shall be new, except that forms may
be re-used for exposed surfaces providing their condition is such
as to produce a surface equal to one that would be attained using
new materials.
(ii) Where possible, plywood used on exposed surfaces shall be in full
sheets shall be so arranged that the face grain is perpendicular to
the studs or joists.
(c) Studs, Joists, and Decking:
(i) Studs and joists shall be spaced not more than 400 mm on
centres.
(ii) Edges of abutting sheets shall be nailed to the same stud or joist
with 50 mm nails at not more than 200 mm centers.
(iii) When prefabricated form panels are used, adjacent panels shall be
placed such that the joints are maintains flush.
(d) Form Release Oil:
(i) Non-staining form release oil shall be applied to the faces of forms
against which concrete is to be placed.
(ii) The form release oil shall be applied before placing reinforcement.
(e) Ties:
(i) When internal form ties are used, concrete cover to any metal left
upon removal of the forms shall be 60 mm minimum.
(f) Exposed Corners:
(i) All exposed corners on concrete work and shall be chamfered.
(ii) The chamfer shall have a vertical and horizontal dimension of 20
mm.
3.2 FALSEWORK
(a) General:
(i) Sound adjustable falsework shall be built such that the structure
remains true to line and grade after anticipated settlement.
(ii) Mudsills shall not be placed until the contractor has a set of
falsework Shop Drawings on site.
(b) Foundation Work:
(i) The falsework structure shall be supported on mudsills or structure
footings.
(ii) A leveling pad consisting of a minimum of 100 mm of compacted
granular fill, Type A, or of cast-in-place concrete shall be placed
under mudsills to provide a level surface.
(iii) Reduction of the bearing capacity of existing ground or compacted
fill, due to water or ice, shall be prevented by suitable drainage or
protection.
(c) Wooden Shoring:
(i) All wooden posts shall be solid, not built up.
(ii) Where splicing is necessary, the posts shall be cut square and the
two pieces shall be in full contact over the splice.
(iii) Scabbing shall be provided on all four faces of a post to be splices.
(iv) Each post shall be braced in two directions both above and below
the splice immediately adjacent to the scabbing.
(v) Splices on adjacent posts shall be staggered.
(vi) Splicing of round posts shall not be permitted.
(vii) Bracing material shall be at least 38 x 89 mm lumber except for
cross bracing for side forms where 19 x 138 mm lumber may be
used.
(viii) Bracing shall be nailed to each post with at least 100 mm nails for
38 x 89 mm lumber and two 75 mm nails for 19 x 139 mm lumber.
(ix) Splicing of bracing shall not be permitted.
(x) Wedges used for purposes of falsework adjustment or to facilitate
removal shall be hardwood.
(d) Metal Shoring:
(i) Erection of metal frame shoring shall be according to CSA S269.1.
(ii) The maximum extension of jacks shall not exceed the lesser of the
manufacturer’s recommendations or 600 mm.
(iii) Shims used for leveling mudsills shall be fir plywood or solid
lumber.
(iv) Wedges used to provide full bearing in U-heads shall be hardwood.
3.3 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS
(a) The construction of temporary supports shall be as specified in the Shop
Drawings.
3.4 REMOVAL OF FORMWORK, FALSEWORK, AND TEMPORARY SUPPORTS
(a) All formwork and falsework shall be removed.
(b) The method and sequence of removal of the formwork and falsework
shall be such that it permits the concrete to take up the stresses
gradually.
(c) Formwork shall not be removed until the concrete has attained a
minimum strength as follows:
(i) At 50% of the concrete design strength for walls, columns, sides of
beams and other vertical surfaces.
(ii) At 75% of the concrete design strength for horizontal surfaces of
beams and slabs and for overhangs extending more than 0.6 m.
(d) Removal of temporary supports or props for formwork shall be as

specified in the Shop Drawings, but not less than 1 week
3.5 QUALITY CONTROL
(a) For falsework designs, the Contractor shall submit a set of falsework
Shop Drawings to the Metrolinx Representative at least 1 Working Day
prior to commencement of erection of falsework, for information
purposes only.
(b) For falsework, when other authorities are involved, a set of Shop
Drawings shall be submitted for each authority at least 5 weeks prior to
the commencement of falsework construction.
(c) For formwork, the Contractor shall submit a set of formwork Shop
Drawings to the Metrolinx Representative at least 1 Working Day prior to
commencement of erection of formwork, for information purposes only.
(d) For formwork, when other authorities are involved, a set of Shop
Drawings shall be submitted for each authority at least 5 weeks prior to
the commencement of the formwork erection.
(e) The Falsework Foundation Design Report shall be submitted to the
(f) Inspections:
(i) The Contractor’s Engineer will conduct on-site inspections and
prepare and submit inspection reports to Metrolinx verifying the
Work is in accordance with the Shop Drawings. The Contractor’s
Engineer will perform inspections periodically.
(g) Interim Inspection after Construction of Falsework Foundation:
(i) The Contractor’s Engineer shall conduct an interim inspection of
the work and issue the Contractor written permission to proceed
with the work.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Concrete Reinforcing
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for the reinforcing steelwork
of cast-in-place concrete structures for the support of excavation (SOE).
This includes reinforcement for the slurry wall panels, including guide
walls and cap beams, and for the base slab.
(b) For details of SOE elements of the Contract and the elements that can
be adjusted by the Contractor versus what cannot be changed and must
remain as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications, refer to
Appendix A – SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change, of
this Specification Section.

(b) Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming
(c) Section 03 21 21.11 – Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer Reinforcement
Bars
(e) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

(a) Costs related to concrete reinforcing shall be included within the
appropriate Agreement item to which they pertain most closely.

(a) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Materials:
(i) OPSS 1440 – Steel Reinforcement for Concrete.
(ii) LS-434 – Method of Test for Mechanical Connectors Used to
Splice Steel Reinforcement.
(c) CSA Standards:
(i) G30.18-09 (R2019) – Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
(ii) CSA A23.3:19 – Design of Concrete Structures.

(iii) S6-19 – Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code.

(a) Definitions:
(i) End Anchor: A compact disc mounted onto the unreserved end of
reinforcing bar to provide anchorage to the bar in lieu of full
development length or hooked development length.
(ii) Engineer: Professional Engineer licensed by the Professional
(iii) Fabrication: The cutting, bending, storing, bundling, tagging and
delivery of stainless and uncoated reinforcing steel bars.
(iv) Mechanical Connection: A joining of two reinforcing steel bars, or
post-tensioning tendons by means of a mechanical connector.
(v) Reinforcing Steel Bars: Uncoated deformed steel bars made of
carbon steel as defined in CSA G30.18, used for the reinforcement
of concrete.
(vi) Slip: The axial displacement of the reinforcing bars measured
relative to the mechanical connector. Displacement is measured at
a rebar stress of 5% of specified yield after the mechanical
connection has been loaded to a rebar stress of 50% of specified
yield and then unloaded to a bar stress of 5% of specified yield.
(vii) Splice Bar: A reinforcing streel bar or stainless-steel reinforcing bar
that is further manufactured, other than by solely cutting threads, to
be compatible with a specific mechanical connector.
(viii) Steel Reinforcement: All types of steel reinforcement for concrete
including steel bars, stainless steel reinforcing bars and splice
bars.
(ix) Ultimate Tensile Strength: The breaking load of the material per
unit area established by tensile testing.
(x) Yield Strength: The stress at which the material exhibits a specified
deviation of proportionality of stress and strain.


(a) Product Data:
(i) Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and
data sheets for proprietary products used include product
characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish, and
limitations.
(b) Shop Drawings:
(i) Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings:
A. Shop Drawings shall be submitted to the Metrolinx
Representative for review for all steel reinforcement used in
the construction.
B. Shop Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Professional
Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario verifying that they
are consistent with the Specifications and Drawings.
C. The Shop Drawings shall include at least the following:
(1) Quantity, bar size, grade, mark number, location, and
spacing for all steel reinforcement.
(2) Detailed reinforcement schedule, including quantity, bar
size, grade, length, bending diagrams / dimensions and
weight.
(3) Locations of lap splices and mechanical couplers,
locations of spacers and chairs, and locations of non-
structural stabilizing secondary reinforcement.
(4) Details of reinforcement around openings or penetrations
in concrete structures.
D. When a metric to imperial bar size substitution is made, the
placing drawings shall include the quantity, bar size, grade,
location, and spacing of both the metric and the substitute
imperial bar.
E. The fabricator shall not commence fabrication until they have
received a set of steel reinforcement Shop Drawings, signed
and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the
province of Ontario.
(1) The Fabricator shall have a copy of the Shop Drawings at
the manufacturing plant during fabrication.
F. A sealed copy of Shop Drawings shall be kept at the site

before and during fixing of steel reinforcement.
(ii) Mechanical Connections Details:
A. A set of mechanical connection details shall be submitted to
the Metrolinx Representative for information purposes only at
least 5 Working Days prior to the commencement of
installation of the mechanical connectors. The submission
shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
licensed in the province of Ontario, verifying that the products
are consistent with the requirements of the Specifications and
Drawings.
B. The connections details shall contain the following information:
(1) The type or series identification of the connector.
(2) The grade and size of the reinforcement to be joined by
the connector.
(3) A copy of the manufacturer's catalogue giving complete
data on the connector material and installation
procedures.
(4) Location of splices, including type of splice.
(iii) End Anchors:
A. Submit details of end anchors, including all product data and
test reports. The submission shall be signed and sealed by a
Professional Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario,
verifying that the products are consistent with the
Specifications and Drawings.

(a) Quality Assurance Submittals:
(i) Mill Test Report: Submit to Metrolinx Representative a certified
copy of mill test report of Steel Reinforcement.
(ii) Upon request, submit in writing to the Metrolinx Representative the
proposed source of Steel Reinforcement.
(b) Sampling:
(i) Reinforcing Steel Bars:
A. Reinforcing steel bars shall be sampled for acceptance on a
lot basis.
B. A lot shall consist of reinforcing steel of the same grade, of a

single nominal size, and from the same mill and furnace.
C. Three 1.5 m long samples shall be selected on a random basis
at the site by the Metrolinx Representative and shall be
accompanied by the mill certificate for the lot.
(ii) Mechanical Connectors – Sampling for the Job Control Test:
A. Mechanical connectors shall be sampled for acceptance on a
lot basis.
B. A lot shall consist of all connectors of one size and type from
one supplier.
C. If a lot contains more than 300 connectors, it shall be divided
into sublots of a maximum of 300 connectors and be of
approximately equal size.
D. The Contractor shall assemble six sample connections per
sublot or six sample connections per lot if there are less than
300 connectors. The reinforcing bars from which the test
samples are to be fabricated shall be selected on a random
basis at the site by the Metrolinx Representative. The length of
each bar to be joined shall be at least 500 mm.
E. The same materials, position, location, equipment, and
procedures as those being used to make connections in the
reinforcing bars shall be used when making the sample
connections.
F. The Contractor shall complete Owner Standard Form, PH-CC-
812, Field Sample Data Sheet-Mechanical Connectors, for
each assembled sample.
G. The Contractor shall submit the samples and the completed
forms along with mill test certificates corresponding to the bars
used to the Metrolinx Representative for delivery to the
laboratory designated by the Metrolinx.
(c) Testing:
(i) Reinforcing Steel Bar:
A. The testing of reinforcing steel bar shall be according to CSA
G30.18.
B. Testing shall be carried out at the discretion of the Metrolinx
Representative.
(ii) Mechanical Connectors:

A. Testing for Torque:
(1) When required by the manufacturers’ installation
procedure, torque shall be checked on 5% of the splices.
(2) Formwork that limits access to connectors for testing
purposes shall not be placed until testing has been
completed.
B. Job Control Test:
(1) Three of the six sample connectors for each lot of sublot
shall be tested for acceptance and the remaining three
samples shall be retained by the testing laboratory for
referee testing, if invoked.
(2) The samples shall be tested for slip and tensile strength
according to LS-434.
(3) If one or more of the three test samples fails to meet the
requirements of this specification for either the slip or
tensile strength, the lot or sublot represented by the
samples shall be rejected.
(4) Individual test results shall be forwarded to the
Contractor, as they become available.
(iii) End Anchors:
A. Testing shall be according to ASTM A970.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Steel Reinforcement:
(i) Steel reinforcement shall be according to OPSS 1440 except yield
strengths shall be as specified in the Specifications and Drawings.
(ii) Standard reinforcing steel shall be Grade 400.
(b) Mechanical Connectors:
(i) Mechanical connectors may be the form saver type, the filled
sleeve type, the swaged sleeve couple type, the threaded couple
type, the hot rolled thread bar coupler type, or the forger bar
coupler type.
(ii) The mechanical connections shall be qualified by tests made on

sample splices according to the Job Control Tests requirement of
(iii) Mechanical connections for steel reinforcement shall develop, in
tension, the greater of 120% of the specified yield strength of the
bars or 110% of the mean yield strength of the actual bars used to
test the mechanical connection.
(iv) The total slip of the reinforcing bars shall not exceed the following
measured displacements between gauge points straddling the
mechanical connector:
A. For bar sizes up to and including No. 45M – 0.25mm.
(v) Splice bars shall be supplied by the manufacturer of the associated
mechanical connector.
(c) End Anchors:
(i) End Anchors for Steel Reinforcement may be attached to the
reinforcing steel bar by any of the means listed in ASTM A970M,
Section 1.1.
(ii) End Anchors shall conform to Annex A1, Requirements for Class
HA Head Dimensions, of ASTM A970M.
(d) Associated Hardware:
(i) Only hardware, including spacers and support devices, reviewed
by the Metrolinx Representative shall be used with steel
reinforcement; hardware shall meet the following requirements:
A. All supports or support systems shall be capable of
withstanding the loads to be placed on them.
B. Except for tie wire, embedded hardware within 50 mm of
exposed surfaces shall be stainless steel, galvanized steel, or
of a non-metallic material verified not to react with concrete
and reviewed by the Metrolinx Representative prior to use.
C. Tie wire shall be 1.2 mm or 1.6 mm in diameter and shall be
annealed ferrous wire.
D. Bar chairs for supporting steel reinforcement shall be non-
metallic.
E. Concrete chairs shall not be used to support steel
reinforcement except in footings and against granular
surfaces.
F. Concrete chairs shall be of the same class of concrete as the

Cast-in-Place concrete element.
G. Do not use wooden or aluminum supports.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) All steel reinforcement and accessories shall be kept clean of all mud,
oil, and other deleterious materials and stored clear of ground contact.
(b) All reinforcement shall be placed as shown in the Drawings and
according to the tolerances shown in the Drawings. Tolerances include
fabrication tolerances.
3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

(a) This section covers Steel Reinforcing Bars.
(b) Storage and protection of Steel Reinforcing Bars:
(i) Steel reinforcing bars shall be stored separately with the bar tags
maintained and clearly visible until ready for placement.
(c) Placing:
(i) Steel reinforcement shall be accurately placed in the positions as
specified in the Drawings and Specifications and held in the correct
location during the operations of placing and consolidating
concrete.
(ii) Bars shall be tied at least at every fourth intersection where the
maximum untied length of any bar shall be 1 m.
(iii) Do not place bars on fresh concrete, adjust bars during concrete
placement, or insert bars after placing concrete.
(d) Surface Condition:
(i) Steel reinforcement with tight surface rust, mill scale, or a
combination of both shall be acceptable, provided the minimum
physical properties including height of deformations and mass of a
wire brushed test specimen are not less than the applicable
specification requirements.
A. Loose scale shall be removed.
(e) Cutting:
(i) The cutting of reinforcing bars, and splice bars by oxyacetylene
torch may be carried out only when permitted in writing by the
(f) Bending:
(i) Field bending of reinforcing bars shall not be permitted.
(g) Welding:
(i) Welding, including tack welding, shall not be permitted.
(h) Splicing:
(i) Splices for reinforcing steel shall be made as specified in the
approved Shop Drawings.
(ii) Development lengths and lap splices shall be in accordance with
CSA A23.3-19.
(iii) Electrical continuity of reinforcement bars shall be accomplished
through mechanical ties. Use minimum 2 tie wires per every 400m
spacing minimum.
(iv) For hoisted reinforcement cages, use lap splice couplers consisting
of drop forged U-bolt and saddle type wire rope clips, or approved
equal, certified and tested for rebar used.
(i) Mechanical Connections:
(i) General:
A. Mechanical connections shall only be permitted as specified in
the Drawings, or as reviewed by the Metrolinx Representative
and detailed in the Shop Drawings.
B. The form saver type of mechanical connector shall only be
used at construction joints.
C. The mechanical connections shall be qualified by tests made
on sample splices according to the Job Control Tests clause of
D. All procedures and equipment for mechanical connections
shall be according to the manufacturer’s recommendations.
E. Ends of reinforcing bars to be joined shall be cut nominally
square.
F. Connector sleeves shall have the clear cover as specified for

the reinforcing steel in that location.
G. Stirrups, ties, and other reinforcement shall be adjusted or
relocated, if necessary, to provide the required clear cover to
the reinforcement.
H. Threads cut on the ends of the reinforcing steel bars shall
match the internal threads in the connector.
(ii) Job Control Tests:
A. When mechanical connectors are used, sample connections
shall be assembled at the work site in presence of the
B. Frequency of sampling and method of sample assembly shall
be according to the Quality Assurance section of this
Specification Section.
C. Sample connections for testing shall be assembled on site in
exactly the same manner as the connectors used in the Work.
D. Sample connections fully assembled anywhere other than on
site and in the presence of the Metrolinx Representative shall
not be submitted for testing.
E. Samples for testing shall be submitted at least 10 days prior to
intended start of concrete placement.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Metrolinx Representative
upon completion of the installation of the steel reinforcement and end
anchors, if any.
(b) The next operation shall nor proceed until a Notice to Proceed has been
received from the Metrolinx Representative.
END OF SECTION
OL North Civil Works Appendix A
Pape Segment Support of Excavation Applicable Sections: 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing; 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change
Appendix A – SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change
Legend for Notes and Tables:
 ‘(P)’ denotes Pape Station Shaft site,

 ‘(S)’ denotes Sammon Avenue Headhouse Shaft site
 ‘(B)’ applies to both of the sites
Notes (For Tables A1 to A5):
1. (B) Ontario Line Technical Advisor (OLTA) is the Engineer of Record (EOR) for the Project on behalf of Metrolinx and has prepared signed-and-
sealed Drawings.
2. (B) “Contractor’s ability to change” results in the design responsibility for that SOE element being transferred to the Contractor.
3. (P) Reference to Pape Station Shafts “Wide Section” and “Narrow Section” refers to both the North Shaft and South Shaft.
4. (P) Slurry Wall T-panels, Jet Grouting and Tiebacks are not applicable to Sammon Avenue Headhouse Shaft.
5. (B) For SOE elements that the Contractor proposes to change, the Contractor is required to consult with their Design Engineer and prepare a
“Narrative of Proposed SOE Changes” for provisional approval by Metrolinx prior to commencing detailed analysis and design.
6. (B) Changes to the design that are initiated by the Contractor shall be at no cost to Metrolinx.
7. (P) Changes to the Pape Station SOE design that are initiated by the Contractor are required to be submitted to TTC for their review and approval. If
the Contractor elects to proceed with an alternative design, this may introduce some degree of schedule risk and uncertainty. The Contractor will not
be granted any additional time to complete the analysis and design work resulting from additional TTC reviews due to Contractor initiated design
changes.
8. (B) Changes to the design performed by the Contractor’s Design Engineer shall be signed-and-Sealed by a Professional Engineer, licensed in the
9. (B) OLTA performing analysis and redesign, including issuing revised IFC drawings to suit the Contractor’s preferred arrangement / configuration of
SOE elements may be possible. This will require further discussion and negotiation regarding level of effort, cost and responsibility between
Metrolinx and the Contractor.
Specifications that Contain an Appendix A for SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change:
 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing (refer to Table A1)

 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete (refer to Table A1)
 31 43 00 – Jet Grouting (refer to Table A2)
 31 51 00 – Tiebacks and Tie Anchors (refer to Table A3)
 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers (refer to Table A4)
 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls (refer to Table A5)
Table A1: SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change : for Specification Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing and 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
(Table A1 is specifically for the SOE base slab)
SOE Element OLTA Contractor Contractor’s Conditions or Remarks
Design Design Ability
‘(P)’ denotes Pape Station Shaft site,
Responsibility Responsibility to Change ‘(S)’ denotes Sammon Avenue Headhouse Shaft site
(see Note 2) ‘(B)’ applies to both of the sites
SOE base slab thickness Yes No Yes  (B) Must support permanent structure (permanent structure NIC)
 (P) Must support infill concrete in Wide Section (infill concrete NIC)
 (B) Must support Slurry Wall compressive forcing acting axially into SOE base slab
 (P) Must support TBM passage through shafts (TBM works NIC)
 (P) Must support TBM break-in and break-out forces through End Walls (transferred to
base slab from TBM thrust frame). (TBM works NIC)
SOE base slab reinforcement design Yes Yes Yes, with  As above
and detailing (provided as a (for shop conditions
base design) drawings and
detailing)
SOE base slab connection to Slurry Yes Yes Yes, with  As above
Wall (or to an alternative support (provided as a (for shop conditions
element below base slab) base design) drawings and
detailing)
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer Reinforcement Bars
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for the fabrication, handling,
placement, and quality control of the Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer
(GFRP) reinforcement bars.
(b) GFRP reinforcement bars will be used in the Pape Station SOE slurry
walls for panels within the end walls and head walls.

(c) Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing

(a) Costs related to glass fibre-reinforced polymer reinforcement shall be
included within the appropriate Agreement item to which they pertain
most closely.

(a) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications:
(i) OPSS.MUNI 950 construction specification for glass fibre
reinforced polymer reinforcing bar.
(ii) Laboratory Testing Manual.
(c) CSA Standards:
(i) CAN/CSA-S807-19 (R2019) Specification for Fibre-Reinforced

Polymers.
(ii) CAN/CSA-S806-12 (R2021) Design and Construction of Building
Components with Fibre-Reinforced Polymers.
(iii) CAN/CSA-S6-14 (2014) Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code
Section 16: Fibre Reinforced Structures.
(d) American Concrete Institute:

(i) ACI SP-66 – Detailing Manual.
(ii) ACI 440.1R – Guide for the Design and Construction of Structural
Concrete Reinforced with Fiber-Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Bars.
(iii) ACI 440.6 – Specification for Carbon and Glass Fiber-Reinforced
Polymer Bar Materials for Concrete Reinforcement.
(iv) ACI 440.3R – Guide for Test Methods for Fiber-Reinforced
Polymer (FRP) Composites for Reinforcing or Strengthening
Concrete and Masonry Structures.
(e) ASTM International:
(i) ASTM D7205 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of
Fiber Reinforced Polymer Matrix Composite Bars.
(ii) ASTM D7617 – Standard Test Method for Transverse Shear
Strength of Fiber-reinforced Polymer Matrix Composite Bars.
(iii) ASTM D790, Standard Test Method for Flexural Properties of
Unreinforced and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating
Materials.
(iv) ASTM D2344/D2344M Standard Test Method for Short-Beam
Strength of Polymer Matrix Composite Materials and Their
Laminates.

(a) Definitions:
(i) End Wall: The section of slurry wall at each end of the shaft that
the TBM will mine through when being received into, and launched
from, the shaft.
(ii) Engineer: Professional Engineer licensed by the Professional
(iii) Fabrication: The cutting, bending, storing, bundling, tagging and
delivery of reinforcing steel bars.
(iv) Flexural strength: The stress at failure in bending.
(v) Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer: A composite material made from
glass fibers in a polymeric matrix. The fibers provide the main load
carrying capability of the material and the polymer serves to protect
the fibers and permit load transfer to them.
(vi) Head Wall: The section of slurry wall running parallel and
alongside the existing TTC structure and its previous SOE system.
(vii) Reinforcing Steel Bars: Uncoated deformed steel bars made of
carbon steel as defined in CSA G30.18, used for the reinforcement
of concrete.
(viii) Soft-eye: A discrete section of shaft wall designed to be excavated
through at the start of a tunnel drive from the shaft or for the
breakthrough of a tunnel drive into the shaft.
(ix) Steel Reinforcement: All types of steel reinforcement for concrete
including steel bars.
(x) Swaged: To apply circumferential pressure to a sleeve surrounding
a bar to deform the sleeve sufficiently to achieve bearing between
the deformed sleeve and the deformations on the bar.
(xi) Ultimate Tensile Strength: The breaking load of the material per
unit area established by tensile testing.
(xii) Yield Strength: The stress at which the material exhibits a specified
deviation of proportionality of stress and strain.


(a) Product Data:
data sheets for GFRP reinforcing bars and associated products
such as resin plastic mechanical couplers, if permitted.
(ii) Submit details of proprietary products used including product
characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish, and
limitations.
(iii) Submit details of GFRP reinforcing bar corrosion resistance and
UV resistance with certification documents and test reports.
(iv) Submit a copy of the material Safety Data Sheet (SDS).
(b) GFRP Reinforcement Shop Drawings:
(i) GFRP reinforcement Shop Drawings shall be submitted to
Metrolinx for review and approval. Shop drawings shall be signed
and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the province of
Ontario.
(ii) The Shop Drawings shall include the following:

A. Bar lists and schedules, and placement plans and details for
all GFRP reinforcement to be used.
B. Descriptions, details, dimensions, arrangements and
assemblies, and locations of GFRP reinforcement. Include
number of pieces, sizes, and markings of GFRP
reinforcement, laps and splices, supporting devices and
accessories, and any other information required for fabrication
and placement.
C. Check reinforcement drawings for anchors, hangers, inserts,
conduits, sleeves, grouting pipes, and any other items to be
cast in concrete for possible interference with GFRP
reinforcement. Indicate required clearances on Shop
Drawings.
(iii) When a metric to imperial bar size substitution is made, the placing
drawings shall include the quantity, bar size, grade, location, and
spacing of both the metric and the substitute imperial bar.
(iv) The fabricator shall not commence fabrication until they have
received a set of GFRP reinforcement Shop Drawings, signed and
sealed by a Professional Engineer and approved by the Metrolinx
Representative.
A. The Fabricator shall have a copy of the Shop Drawings at the
manufacturing plant during fabrication.
(v) A copy of the signed and sealed drawings shall be kept at the site
before and during fixing of the GFRP reinforcement.
(c) GFRP Reinforcement Schedule:
(i) GFRP reinforcement schedules shall be submitted.
(ii) A Professional Engineer’s seal and signature shall be affixed on
the GFRP reinforcement schedule verifying that they are consistent
with the Drawings and Specifications.
(iii) The GFRP reinforcement schedules shall include at least:
A. Quantity, bar size, type/grade, and length.
B. Bars manufactured with bends, fabricated as such during the
manufacturing process at the plant.
C. Other component used. Mechanical couplers shall not be
permitted.
(iv) When bar marks are shown on the Shop Drawings, they shall be
used in the schedule.
(v) A copy of the signed and sealed GFRP reinforcement schedule
shall be kept at the site before and during fixing of the GFRP
reinforcement.
(d) Procedures for installing, splicing and securing reinforcing cages in the
excavation including details on how to prevent GFRP reinforcement from
floating or moving from its designed location during cage installation and
concreting.
(e) Provide Quality Control Sheet using an approved form for each
placement location.
(f) Manufacturer’s Product Data:
(i) Chemical and physical properties.
(ii) Certificates of compliance.
(iii) Test reports.
(iv) Delivery, storage, and handling instructions.

(i) Submit to Metrolinx Representative a certified copy of test reports
of GFRP Reinforcement, minimum 4 weeks prior to beginning
reinforcing work.
(ii) Upon request, submit in writing to Metrolinx Representative
proposed source of GFRP Reinforcement.
(b) Sampling:
(i) GFRP Reinforcing Bars:
A. GFRP reinforcing bars shall be sampled for acceptance on a
lot basis.
B. A lot shall consist of GFRP reinforcing bars of the same type
(physical property) and of a single nominal size.
C. Three 1.5 m long samples shall be selected on a random basis
at the site by the Metrolinx Representative and shall be
accompanied by the fabricator’s certificate of compliance.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) GFRP bars shall be V-ROD bars manufactured by Pultrall Inc. GFRP
bars shall be V-ROD 60 for straight bars and V-ROD Bent Bars 50 for
the straight portion of bent bars, or approved equal.
(b) All GFRP reinforcement shall meet or exceed the materials properties
provided in CSA S807:19.
(c) Straight bar geometric and strength properties shall be as shown in the
table below (based on Pultrall V-ROD 60):
Bar size Effective Nominal Area Minimum
designation Diameter (CSA S807 Guaranteed
Table 1) Tensile
(V-ROD 60 or
Strength
approved equal)
mm2 mm2 MPa
#2 (6M) 6.9 32 1100
#3 (10M) 10.3 71 1100
#4 (12M) 13.6 129 1100
#5 (15M) 17.2 199 1100
#6 (20M) 20.4 284 1100
#7 (22M) 23.6 387 1100
#8 (25M) 27.0 510 1100
#9 (30M) 30.4 645 1000
#10 (32M) 33.7 819 1000
(d) Bent bar geometric and strength properties shall be as shown in the
table below (based on Pultrall V-ROD Bent Bars 50):
Bar size Effective Nominal Minimum Guaranteed
designation Diameter Cross- Tensile Strength
Section
(V-ROD Bent Straight Bent
Area
Bars 50 or Portion Portion
approved
mm mm2 MPa MPa
equal)
#3 (10M) 10.3 71 1022 460
#4 (12M) 13.6 127 1019 459
#5 (15M) 17.2 198 1001 450
#6 (20M) 20.4 285 1028 463
#7 (22M) 23.6 388 1005 452
#8 (25M) 27.0 507 992 446
(e) GFRP bars shall be imprinted with bar identification including fiber type,
size, grade, modulus of elasticity and batch number.
(f) The largest GFRP bar that shall be used in the slurry wall reinforcing
cage at the soft eye location in the slurry wall end walls shall be 32 mm
diameter.
(g) All GFRP reinforcement shall have a minimum tensile modulus of
elasticity of 60 GPa for straight bars and 50 GPa for the straight portion
of bent bars.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Deliver, store, and handle GFRP bars in compliance with manufacturer’s
instructions.
(b) All GFRP reinforcement and accessories shall be kept clean of all mud,
oil, and other deleterious materials and stored clear of ground contact.
(c) Store GFRP bars under cover to avoid direct sunlight and chemical
substances.
(d) All reinforcement shall be placed as shown in the Drawings and
according to the tolerances shown in Specification Section 31 56 00 –
Slurry Walls. Tolerances include fabrication tolerances.
(e) The concrete cover and placing accuracy tolerances shall be the same
as for steel reinforcing as required in the Drawings and Specifications.
Refer to Specification Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing.
(f) Due to the flexibility of GFRP reinforcing bars, use a spreader bar when
hoisting bundles of GFRP bars.
3.2 REINFORCING GFRP

(a) Placing of GFRP Reinforcing Bars:
(i) GFRP reinforcement bars shall be accurately placed in accordance
with Specification Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls and in the
locations and positions as specified in the Drawings and
Specifications.
(ii) All reinforcing cages shall be held in the correct location during the
operation of placing and consolidating concrete.
(iii) GFRP reinforcement bars shall be tied at least at every fourth
intersection where the maximum untied length of any bar shall be
1 m.
(iv) Spacers for spirals shall be equally spaced around the spiral and
shall be placed so that the specified pitch of the spiral is
maintained.
(b) Surface Condition:
(i) GFRP reinforcing bars shall be inspected before use for damage
such as cracking, splitting or splayed fibres at the ends. GFRP
reinforcing bars that are damaged shall have the damaged portion
cut off plus an additional 300 mm from the edge of the defect.
Cutting shall be in accordance with the requirement of tis
(ii) Dirt and debris shall be removed. Do not use chemical compounds
to remove dirt or debris.
(c) Cutting:
(i) Field Cutting: Field cut GFRP reinforcing bars with a high speed
grinding cutter, a circular saw, or band saw. Do not shear bars.
(ii) Make all cuts perpendicular to the axis of the bar. Inspect the end
of the bar after cutting to ensure there are no splayed fibres and
cracking of the bars propagating from the ends.
(d) Bending:
(i) Bending of GFRP bars shall be carried out only during the
fabrication process and must be carried out before the full curing of
the bars. Strictly no field bending / alteration shall be permitted.
(e) Splicing:
(i) Mechanical couplers shall not be used; only lapped splices and lap
splice couplers shall be used.
(ii) For hoisted reinforcement cages, use lap splice couplers consisting
of drop forged U-bolt and saddle type wire rope clips, or approved
equal, certified and tested for rebar used.
(iii) Lapped splice and embedment lengths for GFRP reinforcing bars
shall be in accordance with the greater of the manufacturer’s
requirements, ACI 440.1R or CSA S806-12 (R2021).
3.3 INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION OF GFRP REINFORCEMENT

(a) A Request to Proceed shall be submitted to the Metrolinx Representative
upon completion of the installation and fixing of all reinforcement prior to
placing concrete.
(b) Concreting, or any our subsequent operation to bar fixing, shall not
proceed until approval has been received from the Metrolinx
Representative.
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Quality Control Testing:
(i) Quality control shall be carried out under the requirements of an
ISO 9002 certified facility by testing GFRP bars before use to
ensure required material properties. The testing of GFRP
reinforcing bars shall be in accordance with:
A. ACI 440.3R – Guide for Test Methods for Fiber-Reinforced
Polymer (FRP) Composites for Reinforcing or Strengthening
Concrete and Masonry Structures.
B. ASTM D7205 – Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties
of Fiber Reinforced Polymer Matrix Composite Bars.
C. ASTM D7617 – Standard Test Method for Transverse Shear
Strength of Fiber-reinforced Polymer Matrix Composite Bars.
(ii) Perform the following quality control tests:

A. Tensile strength, tensile modulus of elasticity, and ultimate
strain
B. Fatigue strength
C. Bond strength
D. Durability in alkaline environments
(b) Any additional or random testing shall be carried out at the discretion of
the Metrolinx Representative
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Cast-In-Place Concrete
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for the construction of cast-in-
place concrete structures for the support of excavation (SOE) including
slurry wall guide walls, cap beams for top of the slurry wall end walls, the
mud slab at the bottom of the shaft excavation and the SOE base slab.
(b) Concreting of the slurry wall panels shall follow the requirement for
placement of concrete by tremie method in this Specification Section.
(c) For details of SOE elements of the Contract and the elements that can

(c) Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing
(d) Section 03 21 21.11 – Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer Reinforcement
Bars
(e) Section 26 05 26 – Primary Grounding System
(f) Section 31 05 17 – Aggregates
(g) Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal.
(h) Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal
(i) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls
(j) Section 07 10 00 – Waterproofing System

(a) Measurement:
(i) This following items will be paid for on a lump sum basis and will
not be measured for payment:
A. Base Slab - Mud Slab.
B. Base Slab.
(ii) Measurement of the following Items shall be cubic meters of

structural concrete placed inclusive of reinforcement, including
couplers and additional support bars:
A. Slurry Wall Cap Beam – Reinforcement & Structural Concrete.
(iii) With exception to Work related to Items included in Clause 1.3.a.i
and 1.3.a.ii all other Work related to this Section is incidental to the
Work. Costs related to cast in place concrete for other works shall
be included within the appropriate Agreement item to which they
pertain most closely.
(b) Payment:
(i) Payment will be made for the following items:
A. Pape Station North SOE:
(1) Item C.2.9 – ‘Slurry Wall Cap Beam – Reinforcement &
Structural Concrete’ (End Walls Only).
(2) Item C.2.18 – ‘Base Slab - Mud Slab’.
(3) Item C.2.19 – ‘Base Slab (Including Permanent Sump
Pit).
B. Pape Station South SOE:
(1) Item C.3.9 – ‘Slurry Wall Cap Beam – Reinforcement &
Structural Concrete’ (End Walls Only).
(2) Item C.3.17 – ‘Base Slab - Mud Slab’.
(3) Item C.3.18 – ‘Base Slab (Including Permanent Sump
Pit)’.
C. Sammon SOE:
(1) Item D.2.6 – ‘Slurry Wall Cap Beam – Reinforcement &
Structural Concrete’ (All Walls).
(2) Item D.2.11 – ‘Base Slab - Mud Slab’.
(3) Item D.2.12 – ‘Base Slab’.

(a) ASTM International:
(i) ASTM C 171-16 – Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
(ii) ASTM C 186-17 – Standard Test Method for Heat of Hydration of
Hydraulic Cement.
(iii) ASTM C 309 – Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-

Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete
(iv) ASTM C 1116/C 1116M – Standard Speciﬁcation for Fiber-
Reinforced Concrete.
(v) ASTM D 4259 – Standard Practice For Preparation Of Concrete By
Abrasion Prior To Coating Application
(vi) ASTM D 7508/D 7508M – Standard Specification for Polyolefin
Chopped Strands for Use in Concrete.
(b) AASHTO:
(i) M 182-05 (2017) – Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made
from Jute or Kenaf.
(c) ACI:
(i) 544.1 Report on Fiber Reinforced Concrete.
(ii) 544.3 Guide for Specifying, Proportioning, and Production of Fiber-
Reinforced Concrete.
(d) CSA Standards:
(i) CSA A23.1:19/CSA A23.2:19 – Concrete Materials and Methods of
Concrete.
(e) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Construction:
(i) OPSS 929 – Abrasive Blast Cleaning - Concrete Construction.
(ii) OPSS 932 – Crack Repair – Concrete.
(f) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Materials:
(i) OPSS 1002 – Aggregates – Concrete.
(ii) OPSS 1204 – Polyvinyl Chloride Waterstops.
(iii) OPSS 1302 – Water.
(iv) OPSS 1303 – Admixtures for Concrete.
(v) OPSS 1308 – Joint Filler in Concrete.
(vi) OPSS 1315 – White Pigmented Curing Compounds for Concrete.
(vii) OPSS 1350 – Concrete - Materials and Production.

(a) Definitions:
(i) Cold Joint: The interface surface other than at a formed joint that
occurs when plastic concrete is placed against concrete that has
taken its initial set.
(ii) Cold Weather: Those conditions when the ambient air temperature
is at or below 5°C. It is also considered to exist when the ambient
air temperature is at or is likely to fall below 5°C within 96 hours
after completion of concrete placement. Temperature refers to
shade temperature.
(iii) Construction Joint: The surface where two successive placements
of concrete meet or where new concrete is placed against old
concrete across which it is desirable to achieve bond between the
two concrete placements and through which steel reinforcement
may be continuous.
(iv) Form Finish:
A. Class 1 Finish: The basic finish to be provided on formed
surfaces not exposed to view unless a better finish is specified
or required in the Specifications or Drawings.
B. Class 2 Finish: The finish to be provided on formed surfaces
exposed to view from moderate distances, such as surfaces of
tunnel or noise barriers, and to any surface for which a Class 2
Finish is specified or required in the Agreement, Drawings, or
Specifications. A Class 2 Finish shall provide surfaces of
uniform colour and texture as viewed from a distance of 25 m.
C. Class 3 Finish: The finish to be provided on formed surfaces
exposed to view from close distances, such as surfaces of
building wall, and to any surface for which a Class 3 Finish is
specified or required in the Agreement, Drawings, or
Specifications. A Class 3 Finish shall provide surfaces of
uniform colour and texture when viewed from less than 15 m.
(v) Horizontal Surface Finish:
A. Float Finish: The finish to be provided on unformed surfaces to
remove imperfections and embed large aggregate but still
provide an open texture.
B. Trowel Finish: The finish to be provided on unformed surfaces,
as specified in the Agreement, Drawings, or Specifications or
unformed surfaces that must meet close tolerance

requirements, in order to obtain a dense, hard, smooth surface
free of toolmarks.
C. Broomed Finish: The finish to be provided on unformed
surfaces, as specified in the Agreement, Drawings, and
Specifications, with a brush or broom on a surface that has
been troweled in order to provide a non-slip surface texture.
(vi) Honeycombing: Rough and stony concrete surface with voids
where the mortar did not fill the spaces between the coarse
aggregate particles.
(vii) Mud Slab: A protective layer of concrete cast over the exposed
rock or bottom of excavation and may include a waterproof
membrane.
(viii) Other Concrete: Concrete that is not placed by tremie method.
(ix) Protective Concrete: A layer of unreinforced concrete cast on top
of the base slab and roof slab waterproofing membrane that allows
construction operations to continue unhindered by the necessary
protection required to the waterproofing membrane.
(x) R Value: The metric thermal resistance value that is a
measurement of the resistance to heat transfer of insulation.
(xi) Segregation: The visible separation of the mortar and coarse
aggregate particles in the plastic concrete resulting in concrete that
is not uniform in appearance or proportions.

(a) General:
(i) Verify prior to the first placement that the ready-mix concrete
supplier is available to deliver concrete and is aware of trucking
routes to and from the site, site facilities including permitted
delivery times, site entrance and exit locations, wheel wash
facilities, and concrete ticket protocols.
(ii) Verify with the concrete supplier the day prior to concrete
placement that they are able to provide the required concrete
volume for the placement and confirmation of mix design that the
supplier is required to batch.

(a) Product Data:
(i) Submit mix design for tremie concrete and other concrete not
placed by tremie method. If the concrete supplier is not prepared to
provide a mix design, the Contractor’s Concrete Design Engineer
must certify that all concrete mix designs shall meet all
performance and workability requirements. The Contractor’s
Concrete Design Engineer shall be a Professional Engineer
licensed in the province of Ontario with a minimum of 15 years of
experience in concrete mix design including at least 7 years’
experience in the design of concrete placed by tremie method.
(ii) Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and
data sheets for proprietary materials used in cast-in-place concrete
and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical
size, finish and limitations.
(iii) Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets
for concrete finishes and include product characteristics,
performance criteria, physical size, finish, and limitations.
(iv) Submit the WHMIS Safety Data Sheet (SDS) with all products.
(b) Request to Place Structural Concrete:
(i) The Contractor shall provide the Metrolinx Representative 24-
hours’ notice before the placement of any concrete. The Metrolinx
Representative shall confirm concrete placement can proceed by
the end of the day prior to the day of proposed placement.
(c) Temperature Control Plans:
(i) A temperature control plan shall be submitted to the Metrolinx
Representative prior to commencement of placing any concrete
that requires temperature control for review of compliance with the
requirements as specified in the Agreement. The plan shall include
methods for monitoring and controlling concrete temperature and
the temperature difference prior to, during, and after placement for:
A. Concrete subject to cold weather.
B. Large concrete components where the smallest dimension is
1.0 m.
(ii) The temperature control plan shall include, as a minimum, the
following:
A. Concrete element for which the plan applies.
B. Temperature monitoring system, including the locations and

depths, number of thermocouples, and frequencies of
recordings to be used in each placement.
C. Method of ensuring concrete temperature and temperature
difference are maintained for the duration of the protection
period.
D. Any alterations to work schedule, production, delivery
schedule, and time of placement for temperature control
purposes.
E. Any modification to mix design for temperature control
purposes.
F. Any other specific measures to be taken.
G. Method of withdrawal of protection.
H. Test concrete temperature in accordance with ASTM C186.
(iii) In addition, for concrete subject to cold weather the temperature
control plan shall also include the following:
A. Type of insulation, R value and number of layers, including
test data verifying the R value. The submission for cold
weather protective measures shall be accompanied by
samples of insulation, if requested by the Metrolinx
Representative.
B. Type and layout of heaters and type and extent of housing.
(d) Curing Compound:
(i) A minimum of 5 Working Days prior to the application of the curing
compound, the following shall be submitted to the Metrolinx
Representative, for information purposes:
A. Product data sheet which includes the manufacturer’s
recommended rate of application.
B. Description of the equipment to be used.
C. A statement from the manufacturer of the curing compound
approving the equipment.

(a) Acceptance:
(i) Testing and acceptance shall be according to OPSS 1350.07.05
and this specification, including satisfactory completion of all
remedial actions associated with surface tolerance, surface finish,

concrete cover, alignment, cracks, and any other deficiencies.
(ii) Testing will be completed by an independent accredited laboratory
selected by the Contractor and approved by the Metrolinx
Representative.
(b) Concrete Cover:
(i) The concrete cover shall meet the requirements as specified in the
(ii) Concrete cover determination may be carried out by the Metrolinx
Representative on all surfaces of structural elements to confirm
cover.
(iii) The Metrolinx Representative will provide the concrete cover
survey reports to the Contractor.
(c) Curing Compound:
(i) The Contractor shall be responsible for sampling of curing
compounds and handling, identification, and delivery of curing
compound samples to Regional Quality Assurance Laboratory for
Quality Assurance testing.
1.9 DELIVERY AND HANDLING

(a) Delivery shall be in accordance with OPSS 1350.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Tremie Concrete:
(i) Material supply shall be as per the requirements for Other
Concrete contained in this Specification Section.
(b) Concrete (Other Concrete, not placed by Tremie Method):
(i) Concrete shall be according to Metrolinx General Guidelines,
OPSS 1350, and CSA 23.1.
(ii) All structural concrete shall meet the requirements of CSA A23.1
Class F-1.
(iii) Sustainable Concrete:

A. Sustainable Concrete shall be used in all works including
slurry wall guide walls, slurry wall panels, slurry wall cap
beams and the SOE base slab.
B. Sustainable Concrete is defined as concrete with at least 25%
by mass of Portland cement substituted with Supplementary
Cementitious Materials (SCM).
C. SCM shall be ground granulated blast furnace slag, fly ash, or
silica fume or any combination of these materials.
D. Concrete supplier documentation shall confirm Sustainable
Concrete mix as delivered to site.
E. Concrete test certificates shall confirm that concrete strength,
quality and durability meet requirements of this specification.
(c) Grout:
(i) Unless otherwise specified, grout shall be non-shrink, non-metallic
type, and minimum 28-day compressive strength shall be 40 MPa.
(d) Cement:
(i) Unless otherwise specified, use Portland-Limestone Cement, Type
GUL, or sulphate resistant, Type MS, in all concrete. Cement shall
conform to CSA A3000.
(ii) Contractor shall submit certification that aggregates, and concrete
mix designs comply with the requirements of CSA A23.1-19 Clause
4.2.3.6 and A23.2-27A.
(e) Sand:
(i) Sand shall be according to OPSS 1002.
(f) Bonding Agents:
(i) Bonding agent shall consist of Portland-limestone cement, Type
GUL, and sand in the ratio of 1:1 by volume and sufficient water to
produce a consistency so that it can be applied with a stiff brush to
the existing concrete in a thin even coating that shall not run or
puddle.
(ii) Bonding agents shall not be used for cold joints or surfaces
between successive placements.
(iii) Bonding agents shall not be used in placed by tremie method.
(g) Burlap:
(i) The burlap shall be according to AASHTO M182, Class 4, and
shall be free from substances that are deleterious to concrete.
(ii) The burlap shall have no tears or holes.
(h) Water:
(i) Water used for curing and fog misting of concrete, including pre-
soaking of burlap, and for making bonding agents and mortar and
mixing proprietary patching materials shall be according to OPSS
1302.
(i) Moisture Vapour Barrier:
(i) The material shall be a white opaque polyethylene film according
to ASTM C 171, at least 100 μm thick.
(j) Curing Compound:
(i) Curing compound. A liquid membrane-forming curing compound,
that is in accordance with ASTM C309, Type 1 for concrete not
exposed to sunlight, and Type 1-D with white fugitive dye for
concrete exposed to sunlight, Class A or B as appropriate for the
use or location.
(k) Insulation Material:
(i) Insulation material shall be mineral wool, glass fibre, plastic foam
or other suitable material, having an R value not less than 0.02 m2
C/W per 1 mm thickness.
(ii) Straw insulation shall not be used.
(iii) Loose or absorbent insulation material shall not be used unless it is
completely contained within waterproof wrapping.
(l) Waterstops:
(i) Waterstops used for the slurry wall panels shall be in accordance
with OPSS 1204. Refer to Specification Section 07 10 00 –
Waterproofing System, for the waterstop product and requirements
for the waterstops to be installed between adjacent slurry wall
panels using panel stop ends.
(m) Joint Filler:
(i) Joint Filler shall be according to OPSS 1308.
(n) Joint Sealer:

(i) Joint Sealer shall meet the requirements as specified in the
Drawings.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
(a) General:
(i) Equipment made of aluminum material shall not come in contact
with the plastic concrete.
(b) Tremie Equipment:
(i) The tremie pipe shall consist of a tube, having a diameter of not
less than 250 mm, constructed with sections having flange
couplings fitted with gaskets. The discharge end shall have a
proper seal so that water will not enter the tube at any time.
(ii) The discharge ends at each end of the tremie pipe shall be
fabricated to allow for the full opening of the discharge ends by
slightly raising the pipe.
(c) Concrete Pump:
(i) The concrete pump shall be such design, size, and condition to
ensure a continuous and adequate supply of concrete without
segregation and without adversely affecting other properties of
concrete.
(d) Consolidating Equipment:
(i) Internal vibrators shall be of the high frequency type with 8,000
minimum to 12,000 maximum vibrations per minute when
immersed in concrete.
(ii) External vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 3,600
vibrations per minute.
(e) Mixer for Bonding Agents:
(i) The mixer for the bonding agent shall be a stationary mixer, power
driven, and capable of uniformly mixing the materials.
(f) Hand Finishing Tools:
(i) Floats shall be made of magnesium or wood.
(ii) Magnesium bull floats shall be commercially made.
(g) Straight Edges:

(i) Two straight edges commercially made of metal, one 3 m and one
500 mm long shall be used.
(h) Spray Equipment for Curing Compound:
(i) The curing compound shall be applied to the concrete surface by
means of motorized spraying equipment approved by the
manufacturer of the curing compound.
(ii) The equipment shall include a mechanical agitator.
EXECUTION
3.1 FORMWORK AND FALSEWORK

(a) Formwork and falsework shall be in accordance with Specification
Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming.
(b) Textile form liners shall not be used.
(c) Disturbing reinforcement, inserts and anchors during concrete placement
is prohibited
3.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT, MECHANICAL CONNECTORS, CAST IN

INSERTS/ANCHORS AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE, AND GROUNDING
SYSTEM
(a) Steel reinforcement, mechanical connectors, mechanical ties, and
associated hardware shall be in accordance with Specification Section
03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing.
(b) GFRP reinforcement and associated hardware shall be in accordance
with Specification Section 03 21 21.11 – Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer
Reinforcement Bars.
(c) Sleeves, Inserts and Blockouts: Blockouts and inserts will be required in
the slurry wall panels and shall meet the following requirements:
(i) Do not permit penetrations, sleeves, ducts, pipes or other openings
to pass through concrete sections, except where indicated on the
Drawings or reviewed by the Metrolinx Representative.
(ii) Where reviewed by Metrolinx Representative, set sleeves, ties,
pipe hangers and other inserts, openings and blockouts as
indicated or specified elsewhere.
(iii) Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate
hardware. If inserts cannot be located as specified, obtain
permission of modifications from the Metrolinx Representative

before placing of concrete.
(iv) Confirm locations and sizes of all inserts and blockouts shown on
Drawings.
(d) Before placing concrete, coordinate installation of bonding conductors,
bonding plates, and other grounding and bonding features per the
Drawings and Specification Section 26 05 26 – Primary Grounding
System.
3.3 PREPARATION AND PLACEMENT OF CONCRETE BY TREMIE METHOD

(a) Performance Requirements:
(i) Tremie concrete shall attain a minimum strength of 50.0 MPa at 56
days, using a slump flow (spread test) with a range of 400 to 550
mm, + / - 50 mm. Sufficient additional cement shall be added to the
mix in order to compensate for the dilution due to the depositing of
concrete in water.
(ii) Exposure class of tremie concrete for all the slurry wall panels and
for the cap Beam shall be F-1 for concrete exposed to freezing and
thawing in a saturated condition but not to chlorides.
(b) Concrete Placement for Slurry Wall Panels (Tremie Pipe Method):
(i) Concrete placement for slurry wall panels shall be carried out by
tremie pipe method in accordance with Specification Section 31 56
00 – Slurry Walls.
(c) Testing:
(i) Concrete testing shall follow the requirements of CAN/CSA
A23.1:19/CSA A23.2:19 – Concrete Materials and Methods of
Concrete.
3.4 PREPARATION FOR OTHER CONCRETE PLACEMENT

(a) Performance requirements:
(i) Concrete compressive strength and exposure class shall be as
follows:
Table 1: Exposure and minimum compressive strength of other concrete
Concrete class Exposure Minimum Compressive Strength

(CSA A23.1:19 / at 28-Days
CSA A23.2:19)
Structural Concrete – Base Slab F-1 35 MPa, unless otherwise noted
Structural Concrete – Cap Beam F-1 35 MPa, unless otherwise noted
Structural Concrete – Fill Concrete F-1 30 MPa, unless otherwise noted
Lean Concrete N 8 MPa
Mud Slabs N 10 MPa
Notes:
F-1 exposure class denotes concrete exposed to freezing and thawing in a saturated condition but not
to chlorides.
(b) General:
(i) All concrete surfaces against which new concrete is to be placed,
including formed and sawcut surfaces, shall be clean, laitance free,
and free from loose or unsound fragments, coatings, and any other
foreign substances. The surface shall be sufficiently rough to
ensure that a full bond is developed with the new concrete.
(ii) The concrete surface shall be uniformly roughened to a surface
profile of 5 ± 2 mm by means of wet abrasive blast cleaning to
ASTM D4259. Mechanical methods such as scabbling, chipping, or
bush hammering to expose the aggregates shall be hydroblasted
to remove all loose or bruised concrete from the surface.
(iii) Roughening is not required for new concrete substrate with a
roughened finish imparted at the time of placement meeting the
profile requirement but will require a hydroblast to provide a clean
laitance free surface.
(c) Cleaning:
(i) All concrete and structural steel surfaces against which new
concrete is to be placed shall be cleaned by power washing no
more than 24-hours prior to placing concrete.
(d) Pre-Wetting:
(i) Except for concrete placed by tremie method, all hard concrete
surfaces to receive fresh concrete shall be in a “saturated surface
dry condition” by the following:
A. Concrete surfaces shall be maintained in a wet condition for a

period of three hours prior to placing any new concrete.
B. Immediately prior to wetting the concrete surface, concrete
laitance, dust and loose material shall be removed from the
prepared surface by using compressed air.
C. Prior to placing concrete, excess water shall be removed from
the surface using compressed air.
(e) Bonding Agent:
(i) A bonding agent shall be used for exposed vertical surfaces of
concrete, less than 300 mm in height, against which new concrete
is to be placed.
(ii) A thin uniform coating of bonding agent shall be brushed onto the
prepared surface immediately prior to placing fresh concrete.
(iii) Bonding agents shall be mixed by means of a mixer.
(iv) Any bonding agent not used within 30 minutes of mixing shall be
discarded.
(v) Bonding agent that has dried shall be removed and replaced prior
to placing concrete against it.
(vi) Bonding agents shall not be used for cold joints or surfaces
between successive placements.
3.5 PLACING OF CONCRETE

(a) General:
(i) The method of transporting, placing, and consolidating the
concrete shall be such as to prevent segregation.
(ii) Concrete placing and transporting devices shall not be supported
by the steel reinforcement.
(iii) Concrete shall be deposited within 1.5 m of its final position.
(iv) Chutes shall have sufficient slope to deliver concrete of the
reviewed consistency and shall have a maximum length of 15 m.
(v) When concrete is to be dropped more than 1.5 m, fully enclosed
vertical drop chutes extending to the point of deposit shall be used.
(vi) Concrete shall be placed at a steady rate such that a monolithic
concrete is obtained without the formation of cold joints.
(vii) When there is an interruption in placing concrete greater than 20

minutes, the surface of the concrete shall be covered with wet
burlap.
(viii) The Contractor shall notify the Metrolinx Representative
immediately of any interruption resulting in a cold joint and shall
submit a proposal for remedial action for approval.
(b) Concrete Placing Restrictions:
(i) The placement of concrete shall not proceed until a Notice to
Proceed has been requested and received from the Metrolinx
Representative.
(ii) No concrete shall be placed until all curing material and, in cold
weather, all cold weather protection material has been delivered to
the site.
(iii) All surfaces against which concrete is to be placed shall be free of
standing water.
(iv) Fresh concrete shall be protected from contact with rain or snow.
(v) The temperature of formwork, steel reinforcement, or any other
material on which the concrete is to be placed shall not exceed
30°C.
A. Debris shall be removed from the area where concrete is to be
placed.
(vi) Ice and snow shall be removed from the area where concrete is to
be placed.
(vii) Deicing chemicals shall not be used.
(viii) Concrete shall not be placed on or against frozen ground.
(ix) Excavations prepared for concreting and any existing concrete,
steel reinforcement, structural steel, forms, or other surfaces
against which concrete shall be placed shall be at a minimum
temperature of 5°C for a period of 12 hours prior to
commencement of placing concrete.
(c) Consolidation:
(i) Internal or external vibrators or both shall be used to thoroughly
consolidate concrete at the point of deposit within 15 minutes of
placement.
(ii) Each layer of concrete shall be vibrated. Vibrators shall extend into
the previous layer to produce a homogenous mixture at the layer
interface.
(iii) Vibration shall not be used to make the concrete flow or to spread
the concrete more than 1.5 m from the point of deposit.
(d) Finishing of Formed Surfaces:
(i) All Classes of Form Finish:
A. All concrete finishing work shall conform to the requirements of
CAN/CSA- A23.1 / A23.2 except as specified herein.
B. All ties, bolts, nails, and other metal specifically required for
construction purposes shall be removed or cut back to a depth
of 50 mm from the surfaces of the concrete and the resulting
holes filled.
C. No dry ties shall be permitted; form tie rods shall remain
embedded and terminate not less than 50 mm from the formed
face of the concrete. Removable embedded fasteners on the
ends of the rods shall be such as to leave holes of a regular
shape for reaming and filling.
D. All ties, bolts, nails and other metal specifically required for
construction purposes shall be removed or cut back to a depth
of 50 mm from the surfaces of the concrete and the resulting
holes filled. Removable embedded fasteners on the ends of
the rods shall be such as to leave holes of a regular shape for
reaming and filling.
(ii) Class 1 Finish:
A. Formwork shall be mortar tight. Panel marks and texture are of
no importance.
B. Honeycombs and voids over 500 mm2 in area shall be filled.
(iii) Class 2 Finish:
A. Formwork shall be mortar tight and shall render a true surface.
Fins 3 mm wide (maximum) shall be allowed at the panel
joints; however, sheathing joints must be mortar tight.
Irregularities of 3 mm in height with areas of 50 mm x 75 mm
shall be allowed to a maximum of four such areas per 3 m2 of
formwork. Patches of dissimilar material will not be permitted.
Horizontal and vertical joints shall be aligned.
B. Honeycombs and voids 25 mm diameter shall be filled, and all

bug holes over 5 mm diameter shall be pointed. All fins and
projections shall be removed with a hand stone or power
grinder. The use of a power grinder shall be kept to a minimum
and confined to areas required.
C. When a rubbed finish is not called for, patches shall be
textured with a mortar float or lightly brushed after troweling
smooth.
D. Where more than 50 voids or bug holes over 5 mm diameter
occur per 1.0 m2, or if the surfaces are not acceptably uniform
in colour or texture, the entire area affected shall be given a
rubbed finish.
(iv) Class 3 Finish:
A. Formwork shall render a true smooth surface, free from fins
and projections. New plywood or steel is necessary to produce
required finish. Re-use of plywood forms will be permitted only
if in an “as-new” condition. Repairs to the forms shall be with
full panels of sheathing only. Horizontal and vertical joints shall
be aligned.
B. Honeycombs and voids 25 mm diameter shall be filled, and all
bug holes over 5 mm diameter shall be pointed. All fins and
projections shall be removed with a hand stone or power
grinder. The use of a power grinder shall be kept to a minimum
and confined to areas required.
C. When a rubbed finish is not called for, patches shall be
textured with a mortar float or lightly brushed after troweling
smooth.
D. Where more than 50 voids or bug holes over 5 mm diameter
occur per 1.0 m2, or if the surfaces are not acceptably uniform
in colour or texture, the entire area affected shall be given a
rubbed finish.
(e) Finishing of Horizontal Surfaces:
(i) General:
A. Unless specified otherwise on the Drawings, all unformed
exposed horizontal surfaces that are not intended to receive
additional concrete shall receive a float finish.
(ii) Float Finish:

A. Shall conform accurately, within specified tolerance limits, to
grades and elevations shown on the drawings
B. After the concrete has been placed, consolidated, struck off,
and leveled, the concrete shall not be worked further until
ready for floating.
C. Floating shall begin when the water sheen has disappeared
and when the surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit the
operation.
D. All high spots shall be cut down and all low spots filled during
this procedure to produce a surface within the specified
tolerance limits throughout.
E. The surface shall then be re-floated immediately to a uniform
sandy texture.
F. Special care shall be taken in finishing areas between inserts,
templates and other similar devices.
G. Finished surfaces shall be free from open texturing, plucked
aggregate and local projections.
H. Further trowel, broom or special finishes shall be performed as
specified and where shown or required
(iii) Trowel Finish:
A. Finishing concrete surfaces with a machine or hand trowel
fitted with metal blades.
B. Trowelling shall only be performed on a surface that has
previously been float finished. Two or more passes of the
trowel shall be made within suitable time intervals to obtain a
dense hard smooth surface.
C. Trowelling by hand shall be performed only if required to
remove irregularities where machine trowelling cannot be
executed to create a suitable smooth surface.
D. Tooled edges and joints shall be re-finished after trowelling to
maintain uniformity and true lines.
(iv) Broom Finish:
Fine, but slip-resistant, striated surface produced by brushing
the newly troweled surface with a soft bristled broom.
Brooming shall be performed when the concrete has been
previously float finished and troweled and is sufficiently hard to

retain the texture.
(f) Finishing of Construction Joints:
(i) Concrete surfaces against which new concrete is to be placed shall
be left with a roughed surface with a profile of 5 ± 2 mm. The
surface may be green cut by hydroblasting at time of finishing to
reduce future cleaning requirements.
(g) Curing:
(i) General:
A. Curing shall be applied immediately after finishing the concrete
surface.
B. Any concrete containing silica fume shall be wet cured for a
minimum of 7 Calendar Days in accordance with this
Specification.
C. The wet curing period shall be a minimum of 7 Calendar Days
for concrete subject to cold weather and concrete cured with
curing compound. For all other concrete, the wet curing period
shall be a minimum of 4 Calendar Days.
D. When the ambient air temperature is 0°C or higher at the time
of placing, components of structures shall be cured with burlap
and water, unless otherwise noted.
E. When the ambient air temperature is below 0°C at the time of
placing, components shall be cured with moisture vapour
barrier.
F. During cold weather, burlap shall be prevented from freezing.
(ii) Curing with Burlap and Water:
A. Burlap shall be pre-soaked by immersing it in water for a
period of at least 24 hours immediately prior to placing. Two
layers of burlap shall be applied to the surface of the concrete.
Burlap strips shall overlap 150 mm and shall be held in place
without marring the surface of the concrete.
B. The burlap shall be maintained in a continuously wet condition
throughout the curing period by means of a soaker hose. The
burlap shall be covered with a layer of moisture vapour barrier
within 12 hours of placing of the concrete in a manner that
shall prevent deformation of the surface of the concrete.
C. Air flow in the space between the moisture vapour barrier and
the burlap shall be prevented.
D. Water shall not be allowed to drip, flow, or puddle on the
concrete surface when placing the burlap or at any time prior
to the concrete has achieved final set.
(iii) Curing with Moisture Vapour Barrier:
A. Air flow in the space between the moisture vapour barrier and
the concrete surface shall be prevented.
B. The moisture vapour barrier strips shall overlap 150 mm and
shall be held in place at the edges and laps to prevent
displacement without marring the surface of the concrete.
(iv) Curing with Curing Compound:
A. Immediately prior to application, the curing compound shall be
agitated by mechanical means to provide a homogeneous
mixture and shall be applied to completely cover the surface of
the concrete.
B. A second application of curing compound shall be applied
within 30 to 60 minutes after the first application.
C. Each application shall be such that the membrane formed is
uniform in thickness and colour and free of breaks and
pinholes.
D. The rate of each application shall not be less than the rate
specified by the manufacturer of the compound.
(v) Curing Compound Sampling:
A. Curing compounds shall be sampled at the site from the spray
nozzle during application.
B. Samples shall be taken at a frequency of one sample per
Contract or one sample per 1,000 linear metres, whichever
provides the greater number of samples.
(vi) Curing Formed Surfaces:
A. Formed surfaces shall require no additional curing where the
formwork is left in place for the minimum specified curing
period.
B. Where the formwork is removed prior to the curing period is
completed, formed surfaces shall be cured with burlap and
water according to the Curing with Burlap and Water clause for
the remainder of the minimum curing period.
(h) Control of Temperature and Temperature Difference:
(i) General:
A. During the curing period, the concrete temperature shall not
fall below 10°C or exceed 70°C.
B. The temperature difference between the centre of the concrete
component at a location where the concrete is expected to
reach the highest temperature and the surface shall not
exceed 20°C, for:
(1) Large concrete components where the smallest
dimension is 1 m.
(2) Any concrete subject to cold weather.
(ii) Monitoring:
A. The Contractor shall monitor, record, and submit records for
the concrete and ambient air temperature:
(1) Large concrete components where the smallest
dimension is 1 m.
(2) Any concrete subject to cold weather.
B. The Contractor shall supply and install thermocouple wires
and associated instrumentation with a combined accuracy of
± 1.5°C capable of recording and displaying temperature.
C. The instrumentation shall include data loggers capable of
recording at hourly intervals or less and shall allow direct
reading of temperature.
D. The thermocouples for concrete temperature measurement
shall be installed as shown in Table 2 prior to placing concrete.
E. Thermocouples for monitoring ambient air temperature shall
be installed in the shade close to the surface of the concrete at
a minimum frequency of one thermocouple per stage.
F. Recording of concrete temperatures shall begin at the start of
placement.
G. The temperature shall be recorded automatically at intervals
no greater than one hour until the end of the monitoring period.
H. The monitoring period shall be seven days, or longer, when

necessary, in order to meet the requirements of the
Withdrawal of Protection clause.
I. The digital temperature indicators shall be left in place until the
end of the monitoring period.
J. The Contractor shall also physically monitor and verify
concrete and ambient air temperature readings every six
hours, or more frequently, for the first three days and every 12
hours for the remainder of the monitoring period.
K. The Contractor shall take necessary action to maintain the
temperature within the specified limits; the Metrolinx
Representative shall be provided access to verify temperature
readings.
L. If the datalogger does not have a digital display that allows the
Metrolinx Representative to verify temperature, the Contractor
shall provide the Metrolinx Representative with the necessary
instruments to allow the Metrolinx Representative to verify
thermocouple function and readings.
M. The Contractor shall prepare a record of temperatures for
each day during the temperature monitoring period and at the
end of the temperature monitoring period shall prepare
complete temperature records, including graphical plot of
temperature versus time.
Table 2: Minimum Number of Thermocouple Sets for Concrete Temperature Measurement

Number of
Number of
Concrete Elements Requiring Thermocouple Thermocouple Set
Purpose Thermocouples
Temperature Monitoring Sets in Each Locations
in Each Set
Element
At locations where
the concrete is
• The first 3 slurry wall panels placed at Minimum of 3
Cold Weather expected to reach the
each shaft site (see Note 1) per element or 2
Protection highest temperature
• 5% of all remaining slurry wall panels stages thereof.
and at the surface of
concrete.
• Elements with smallest dimension of
1.0m or more:
Large Concrete
• SOE Base Slab: First placement for At locations where
Components
Pape Station North Shaft, Pape the concrete is
Where the Minimum of 3
Station South Shaft and Sammon expected to reach the
Smallest per element or 2
Avenue Headhouse Shaft highest temperature
Dimension is not stages thereof.
• Cap Beam: First placement at each and at the surface of
less than
End Wall for the Pape Station shafts concrete.
1.0 m
• Cap Beam: West wall cap beam only
at Sammon Avenue Headhouse Shaft
Notes:
1. Pape Station North and South Shaft sites shall count as two separate shaft sites for this application.
2. Sammon Avenue Headhouse Shaft shall be included as a separate shaft site.
3. Cap beams for the Pape Station shaft End Walls are indicated on the Drawings as single placements. If Cap Beam
is separated into multiple placements, only the first placement at each End Wall requires thermocouples.
4. Guide walls do not require thermocouples.
5. Selection of elements to be installed with thermocouples shall be agreed with the Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) Submission of Temperature Records:

A. Datalogger temperature records and a record of any actions
taken to maintain control of temperature and temperature
difference shall be forwarded to the Metrolinx Representative
at the end of each business day during the temperature
monitoring period.
B. At the end of the temperature monitoring period, the
Contractor shall submit to the Metrolinx Representative a
complete temperature record.
(iv) Concrete Subject to Cold Weather:
A. For concrete subject to cold weather, a protection system shall
be designed for the worst conditions that can be reasonably
anticipated from local weather records, forecasts, site
conditions, and past experience for the time period during
which the protection is required.
B. The conditions shall be monitored and the protection system
modified as required.
C. For cold weather conditions, minimum protection of concrete

shall be as shown in Table 3 and shall be maintained for the
duration of the curing period.
D. This period may need to be extended in order to meet the
requirement of the Withdrawal of Protection clause.
E. Housing and Heating:
(1) The design of the protective housing shall take into
account the effects of construction activities such as
placing concrete, stressing, and grouting.
(2) Heating equipment of sufficient capacity to establish and
maintain the specified curing conditions shall be used
throughout the curing period and for such time thereafter,
as is necessary, for the completion of the work.
(3) Heating equipment used within the housing shall be
vented outside the housing.
(4) Heating equipment having an open flame shall not be
permitted.
(5) The ambient air temperature adjacent to the concrete or
formwork within the housing shall not be permitted to vary
by more than 8°C.
Table 3: Minimum Cold Weather Protective Measures
Anticipated Minimum Ambient Air Temperature Thickness
°C > 1.0 m 1.0 - 0.5 m < 0.5 - 0.25 m < 0.25 m
+5 to 0 PM1 PM1 PM1 PM2
-1 to -10 PM2 PM2 PM3 PM4
-11 to -20 PM3 PM3 PM4 PM5
< -20 PM4 PM5 PM5 PM5
Notes:
Protective Measures
PM1 - Cover components with a moisture vapour barrier as specified for curing with moisture vapour barrier.
PM2 - Cover components as for PM1, then cover the moisture vapour barrier with insulation having an R-Value of 0.67.
PM5 - Housing and heating.
All R-Values are metric.
The conversion factor from metric to imperial units is: Metric R-Value x 5.678 = Imperial R-Value.
(v) Withdrawal of Protection:

A. For concrete subject to cold weather and for large concrete
components where the smallest dimension is 1 m, the
protection shall be gradually removed or reduced in such a
manner that the maximum allowable drop of concrete
temperature, as shown in Table 4, for each 24-hour period is

not exceeded.
B. The protection shall not be totally removed, nor shall the
concrete be fully exposed to the air until the average concrete
temperature is within 10°C of the ambient air temperature.
Table 4: Maximum Allowable Drop in Concrete Temperature
Thickness > 2.0 m 1.0 – 2.0 m < 1.0 m
Maximum Allowable Drop in Concrete 10°C 15°C 20°C

Temperature per 24 hours
(i) Removal of Formwork and Falsework:

(i) The removal of formwork and falsework shall be in accordance
with Specification Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming and as
specified in the Specifications and Drawings.
(j) Construction Joints:
(i) Construction joints shall be formed at the locations specified.
(ii) No other construction joints shall be permitted, unless reviewed in
advance by the Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) A straight 20 mm V-groove shall be formed at the exposed face of
the concrete at all construction joints.
(iv) V-grooves shall not be used on top surface of bottom slabs.
(v) A bulkhead shall be used to form vertical or inclined construction
joints.
(vi) Surface Tolerance:
A. Formed and unformed surfaces shall be such that when tested
with a 3 m long straight edge placed anywhere in any direction
on the surface, there shall be no gap greater than 6 mm
between the bottom of the straight edge and the surface of the
concrete.
B. When the straight edge is placed across a construction joint,
the gap between the straight edge and the surface of the
concrete shall not be greater than 3 mm.
(vii) Contamination of Surface:

A. Contamination by oil or other deleterious substances shall be
prevented.
B. Contaminated concrete against which new concrete is to be
placed shall be removed according to OPSS 928, procedure
for Concrete Removal-Partial Depth, Type A, B, and C.
(k) Alignment of Components:
(i) The position of the inner and outer top edges of structural
components shall be set true to the elevations, alignment, and
camber as specified in the Drawings without visible deviation from
one end of the structure to the other.
(ii) All concrete items or structural components shall be constructed to
the specified geometry.
(iii) Variations from plumb or a specified slope shall not exceed
1H:400V.
(iv) Departure from specified alignment shall not exceed ± 25 mm.
3.6 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Testing for Early Strength:
(i) The Contractor may elect to prepare sets of cylinders for early
strength determination in addition to the cylinders required for
determination of strength at 28 Days.
(ii) The Contractor shall be responsible for all aspects of the
preparation, storing, and transportation of cylinders for early
strength determination.
(iii) Curing of cylinders for early strength determination shall consist of
storing the cylinders in or on the structure as near as possible to
the component that they represent.
(iv) The cylinders shall receive the same protection from the elements
on all surfaces as is given to the portions of the structure that they
represent.
(v) The Contractor shall identify the time of testing for early-break
cylinders and provide the Metrolinx Representative with one
finishes
(vi) Working Day advance notice to arrange testing.
(vii) The Contractor shall deliver cylinders for early strength

determination immediately prior to the time of testing.
(b) Compressive Strength Testing of Concrete
(i) The Contractor shall take cylinders during concrete placement for
compressive strength determination. Sample preparation and
testing shall be in accordance with CSA A23.1 / A23.2 – Concrete
Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and
Standard Practices for Concrete.
(c) Early Loading of Structural Concrete:
(i) Full design loads shall not be applied to the structure until the
specified 28-day compressive strength has been attained.
(ii) Early loading of a structural component is permitted, unless
expressly stated otherwise in the Agreement, subject to the
following conditions:
A. Prior to any early loading, the Contractor shall demonstrate
that the concrete has reached a compressive strength of 20
MPa by preparing, curing, and transporting early strength
cylinders according to the Testing for Early Strength
subsection.
B. Subsequent placement of reinforcement, formwork and
falsework on a footing, or base slab, shall not begin until at
least 24-hours after concrete placement, provided that
concrete can withstand the forces exerted.
C. Subsequent placement of reinforcement, formwork, falsework,
and concrete on all other structural components shall not be
carried out until the concrete has reached a compressive
strength of 20 MPa.
D. Early loading of concrete is not permitted where cold weather
protection is required.
(iii) Full curing is to be maintained at all times.
(d) Crack in Formed and Unformed Surfaces:
(i) Not used.
(e) Concrete Cover Testing:
(i) Not used.
END OF SECTION

sealed Drawings.
changes.

Table A1: SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change : for Specification Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing and 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
(Table A1 is specifically for the SOE base slab)
SOE base slab thickness Yes No Yes  (B) Must support permanent structure (permanent structure NIC)
 (P) Must support infill concrete in Wide Section (infill concrete NIC)
 (B) Must support Slurry Wall compressive forcing acting axially into SOE base slab
 (P) Must support TBM passage through shafts (TBM works NIC)
 (P) Must support TBM break-in and break-out forces through End Walls (transferred to
base slab from TBM thrust frame). (TBM works NIC)
SOE base slab reinforcement design Yes Yes Yes, with  As above
and detailing (provided as a (for shop conditions
detailing)
SOE base slab connection to Slurry Yes Yes Yes, with  As above
Wall (or to an alternative support (provided as a (for shop conditions
element below base slab) base design) drawings and
detailing)
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Shotcrete
Part 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) The Work described in this Specification includes shotcrete required for
use in repairs of any temporary concrete. The shotcrete described in this
Specification Section is intended for any substandard, damaged or
leaking slurry wall concrete, as defined in Section 31 56 00 – Slurry
Walls.

(a) Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
(b) Section 31 05 17 – Aggregates
(c) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

(a) Work related to this Section is incidental to the Work. Costs related to
shotcrete shall be included within the appropriate Agreement item to
which they pertain most closely.

(a) American Concrete Institute (ACI):
(i) ACI 506R, Guide to Shotcrete.
(ii) ACI 506.2, Specification for Materials, Proportioning, and
Application of Shotcrete.
(iii) ACI 506.1R, Guide to Fiber-Reinforced Shotcrete.
(iv) ACI 506.5R, Guide for Specifying Underground Shotcrete.
(b) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
(i) ASTM C31, Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete
Test Specimens in the Field.
(ii) ASTM C42/C42M, Standard Test Method for Obtaining and
Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete.
(iii) ASTM C94/C94M, Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed
Concrete.
(iv) ASTM C1436/1436M, Standard Specification for Materials for
Shotcrete.
(v) ASTM Cl73/Cl73M, Standard Test Method for Air Content of

Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method.
(vi) ASTM C231, Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly
Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method.
(vii) ASTM C260, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures
for Concrete.
(viii) ASTM C309, Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds for Curing Concrete.
(ix) ASTM C457, Standard Test Method for Microscopical
Determination of Parameters of the Air-Void System in Hardened
Concrete.
(x) ASTM C494/C494M, Standard Specification for Chemical
Admixtures for Concrete.
(xi) ASTM C642, Standard Test Method for Density, Absorption, and
Voids in Hardened Concrete.
(xii) ASTM C881/C881M, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base
Bonding Systems for Concrete.
(xiii) ASTM C1141, Standard Specification for Admixtures for Shotcrete.
(xiv) ASTM C1604 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing
Drilled Cores of Shotcrete.
(xv) ASTM Cl 141, Standard Specification for Admixtures for
Shotcrete.
(c) Canadian Standards Association (CSA):
(i) CSA A3001 Cementitious Materials for use in Concrete.
(ii) CSA A3002 Masonry and Mortar Cement.
(iii) CSA A3003 Chemical Test Methods for Cementitious Materials for
Use in Concrete and Masonry.
(iv) CSA A3004 Physical Test Methods for Cementitious Materials for
Use in Concrete and Masonry.
(v) CSA A3005 Test Equipment and Materials for Cementitious
Materials for Use in Concrete and Masonry.
(vi) CSA A23.1, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction.
(vii) CSA A23.2, Methods of Test for Concrete.
(viii) CSA G30.18-M, Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.

(a) Definitions:
(i) Engineer: A professional engineer licensed by the Professional
Engineers Ontario to practice in the Province of Ontario.
(ii) Shotcrete: Mixture of cementing materials, water, and aggregates
pumped through a hose and pneumatically projected at high
velocity upon an intended surface.
(iii) Dry Mix Process: Shotcreting process in which mix water is added
at the discharge nozzle.
(iv) Wet Mix Process: Shotcreting process in which mix water is added
before introduction of the shotcrete into the delivery hose.
(v) Rebound: Shotcrete material which bounces off a surface against
which it is projected and falls to the ground. Rebound materials are
not used nor incorporated into the Work.


(a) Qualifications of work crew, including supervisor, shotcrete nozzleman,
and shotcrete equipment operators.
(b) Manufacturer’s Certifications showing source and proof of conformance
of all shotcrete materials, including:
(i) Portland Cement.
(ii) Silica fume.
(iii) Fly ash and slag cement.
(iv) Water source.
(v) Chemical admixtures with material safety data sheets (MSDS).
(vi) Fiber reinforcement.
(c) Aggregate bulk density (specific gravity), and absorption. Gradation
curves and name of source of proposed aggregates along with
laboratory test results certifying that the amount of deleterious substance
in the aggregates is within the limits for exposure class F-1 specified in
Table 3, Limits for Deleterious Substances and Physical Properties, of

CSA A23.l.
(d) Proposed shotcrete mix designs, including batch quantities of fine
aggregate, coarse aggregate, cementitious materials, fibers, expected
water demand (to include all water from moisture in aggregates, water
added at batch plant, and water added on site), chemical admixtures,
accelerator, and all other shotcrete ingredients, in kg/m3 or liters/m3.
Fiber content of steel fibers or other fibers to be submitted in kg/m3.
(e) Proposed source of shotcrete and shotcrete mixture proportions,
including test data from experience with proposed mixture within the last
5 years. If no prior experience available, submit for information the
results of laboratory trial mix compressive tests no less than 28 Calendar
Days prior to mobilization of shotcreting equipment to project site.
(f) Proposed method for mixing, conveying, finishing, curing, and testing
along with a complete list of proposed equipment for each task.
(g) Product data for admixtures.
(h) Comply with all applicable health and safety reporting requirements,
provide reports as required by public authorities, and provide a copy of
each report prepared to the Metrolinx Representative within 24 hours
following preparation.

(a) Qualifications:
(i) Nozzle operator:
A. Minimum 12 months experience on shotcreting work similar to
Project.
B. Able to apply thin coats of shotcrete, even and uniform
thickness.
C. Certified in accordance with ACI 506.1R.
(ii) Foreman:
A. Minimum two years’ experience as a shotcrete nozzleman.
(b) Shotcrete Mixes:
(i) Shotcrete mix shall be pre-mixed bagged product from an
appropriate approved supplier. Supplier shall have a selection of
approved shotcrete mix(es) that have been developed by laboratory
tests and tested for typical field applied properties. Supplier shall be
able to provide product data sheets for proposed shotcrete mixes to

be used for the Work.
(ii) Specially developed shotcrete mixes will be permitted but shall be
developed and tested sufficiently in advance of shotcrete application
for the Work so as to allow for completion of 28-day strength tests
and flexural strength tests on laboratory test samples.
(iii) For specially developed shotcrete mixes, the laboratory trial mixes
shall use the same products, including the water and accelerator
that will be used in the Work.
(iv) Perform pre-production field testing of all proposed shotcrete mixes
for early age strength gain and compressive strength testing to
demonstrate that shotcrete mix(es) meet the strength requirements
stated in the product properties data sheet from the supplier.
A. Perform early age strength gain testing at 30 minutes and 1-
hour using a needle penetrometer.
B. Perform compressive strength tests on cores obtained from
sprayed panels at 3 Calendar Days, 7 Calendar Days and 28
Calendar Days.
(c) Shotcrete Test Panel Mock-ups:
(i) Not required for shotcrete used in the repair of slurry wall concrete
or the repair of any other temporary concrete.
(d) Independent Testing Laboratory Services shall:
(i) Not required for shotcrete used in the repair of slurry wall concrete
or the repair of any other temporary concrete.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver sand to site at least 2 Calendar Days before scheduled use to
permit excess water to drain off when using dry mix method. Protect
sand piles with tarpaulins or polyethylene sheets at all times.
(b) Maintain mix in a dry condition until the time of its use. Use pre-bagged
mix within three months of packaging.
(c) Store materials for use in shotcrete work, in accordance with
manufacturers' recommendations in a manner that will prevent
deterioration or contamination. If materials deteriorate or become
contaminated, remove them from the site.
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS

(a) Further to the requirements of CSA A23.1, provide adequate protection
of the shotcrete materials and finished shotcrete repairs.
(b) Cold Weather Conditions:
(i) Comply with the Cold Weather Requirements detailed in Section
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete, except as noted below.
(ii) Substrate surfaces to receive shotcrete material shall not be
frozen.
(iii) Do not commence shotcreting unless shotcrete material and
ambient temperature is 10 degrees C minimum.
(iv) Whenever ambient air temperature is, or is anticipated to be, 5
degrees C or lower, take precaution to protect shotcrete areas,
such as providing temperature-controlled enclosures, prior to,
during, and after the application of shotcrete.
(v) Maintain substrate surface and reinforcing steel, and ambient air in
contact with shotcrete area at a temperature above 10 degrees C
minimum prior to applying shotcrete and commencing
immediately following excavation.
(vi) Maintain finished shotcrete repairs at a temperature of at least 10
degrees C for five days, whichever is shorter. After the five days,
the shotcrete temperature may be lowered to ambient air
temperature at a rate of 0.5 degrees C per hour or 10 degrees C
per day.
(vii) Protect substrate surface applied shotcrete material from the
adverse effects of space heated enclosures, including local
overheating and combustion products. Vent combustion heaters
to outside of enclosures.
(viii) Heat the mix water, and pre-bagged shotcrete material, as
necessary when the ambient air temperature is, or is anticipated
to be, 5 degrees C or lower during the 24 hours following the
application of the shotcrete. Maintain mix water and shotcrete
material at a temperature between 10 degrees C and 65 degrees
C, and free from frozen material.
(ix) Remove and replace shotcrete that has frozen.
(x) Use thermometers to verify surface temperature during curing
period.
(c) High-Temperature Conditions:

(i) Comply with the Temperature Control Plans requirements detailed
in Section 03 30 00, Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Shotcrete: Either pre-bagged pre-mixed material suitable for use in the
Site-batched Wet-mix process, or Ready-mix material for use in the
Ready-mix Wet-mix process, conforming to the requirements of ACI
506.2, except as supplemented or amended by this Specification.
(b) Manufacturers: Microsil Shotcrete by King Packaged Materials
Company, Redkrete Deep Patch by Concrete Chemicals, or Jiffy Silica
Fume Enhanced Shotcrete by Jiffy Concrete Products.
(c) Portland Cement: CSA-A5, Type 10 except for total alkali content when
determined as mixed sulfates of sodium, potassium, and sodium oxide
shall not exceed 0.6 of 1 per cent.
(d) Silica Fume: CSA A3001, Type SF. Maximum 10 percent by weight of
Portland Cement.
(e) Aggregates:
(i) Clean, hard, natural, with sharp particles, free from organic matter,
and containing not more than 5 per cent by weight of deleterious
substances. Do not use aggregates that are known, or have the
potential, to produce deleterious expansion in the concrete as a
result of cement- aggregate reactions, when used in proposed
shotcrete mixes. Aggregates shall be normal density.
(ii) Coarse aggregate: Material conforming to grading requirement for
CSA A23.1, Table 11, Group I, nominal aggregate size 10 mm to
2.5 mm.
(iii) Fine Aggregate (Coarse Sand): Natural sand conforming to CSA
A23.1, Table 10, Grading FAl.
(iv) Moisture content 5 per cent maximum.
(v) Aggregate to be used shall be a combination of coarse and fine

aggregates conforming to the following combined gradation limits.
Canadian Metric Sieve Size Percent of Total Dry Weight

(Approximate Nominal U.S. Standard Passing Each Sieve
Square Mesh)
14 mm (1/2 inch) 100
10 mm (3/8 inch) 90-100
5 mm (No.4) 70-85
2.5 mm (No. 8) 50-70
1.25 mm (No. 16) 35-55
630 micrometers (No. 30) 20-35
Note: 1. US mesh sizes shown do not correspond exactly to the standard Canadian
metric sieve sizes shown. They are approximate equivalents given for
information only.
2. Gradations to be based on standard Canadian metric sieve sizes.
(f) Water:
(i) Clean and potable containing less than 5 ppm of chlorides, free
from oil, acid, alkali, organic matter, and other deleterious
substances.
(g) Admixtures:
(i) General: Admixtures shall be compatible with each other and with
other shotcrete materials. Calcium chloride, thiocyanate, or
admixtures containing more than 0.05 per cent chloride ions, shall
not be permitted. Use of admixtures shall be done in strict
accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.
(ii) Accelerating Admixture: Contractor shall follow requirements of
ASTM C494/C494M, Type C for the Wet- mix process.
(iii) Water-Reducers: Contractor shall follow requirements of ASTM
C1141.
(iv) Air-Entraining: Contractor shall follow requirements of ASTM
C1141.
(v) Superplasticizing (High-Range Water-Reducing) Admixture:
Contractor shall follow requirements of ASTM C1141.
(h) Accessories:
(i) Curing Compound: ASTM C309; Type 2 white pigmented.
(i) Fibers:
(i) Fibers shall not be used.
2.2 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

(a) Minimum compressive strength requirements:
Elapsed Time Minimum Compressive
from Application Strength
30 minutes: 0.35 MPa
1-hour: 0.7 MPa
12-hour: 4.5 MPa
24-hour 10 MPa
3-day: 15 MPa.
7-day: 25 MPa.
28-day: 40 MPa.
(b) Density – Boiled Absorption:

(i) Boiled Absorption less than or equal to 8 per cent, maximum, at
seven days, tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM
C642.
(c) Preconstruction Testing: Perform preconstruction testing on shotcrete
trial mixes, both with and without the proposed admixtures, to determine
the suitability of the proposed shotcrete mix design, materials and plant,
work methods, and competence of the shotcrete operators. Test panels
shall be used to verify the specified properties.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
(a) Conform to requirements of ACI 506R.
(b) Pre-moistening equipment: Self-cleaning equipment that can thoroughly
moistening shotcrete material and discharging mixed material without
carry-over from one batch to the next. Hydromix, or double water ring,
equipment will not be considered as pre-dampening equipment.
(c) Mixing equipment: Self-cleaning mixer that can thoroughly mixing sand
and cementing materials.
(d) Pumps shall be positive displacement pumps equipped with hydraulic or
mechanically powered pistons, with compressed air added at the
discharge nozzle.
(e) Delivery equipment: Equipment that can discharge a continuous smooth
stream of uniformly mixed sand and cementing materials free from
slugs through the hose to nozzle at required velocity.
(f) Discharge equipment: Nozzle, equipped with manually operated water

ring liquid injection system, that can deliver a uniform conical discharge
stream. Discharge equipment to provide uniform, non- pulsating, liquid
pressure at nozzle sufficiently greater than operating air pressure so that
liquid is thoroughly mixed with the other materials.
(g) Air compressor: Equipment that can provide uniform, non-pulsating,
supply of oil-free clean air adequate to maintain required nozzle velocity
for application of shotcrete.
(h) Blowpipe: Required to be used for all shotcrete applications.
(i) Weight measuring equipment: In accordance with ASTM C94/C94M
(j) Automated Delivery Equipment:
(i) Equipment parts shall be available for regular inspection and
replacement as required.
(ii) Air compressor capacity shall have minimum 11.5 cu m/min of air
available at nozzle, excluding air supplied simultaneously for other
purposes.
Part 3 EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Dry mix method and wet mix method are acceptable shotcrete
application methods for the Work.
(b) Wet Mix Process:
(i) Pressure for water supply pump shall be minimum 0.10 MPa
higher at discharge nozzle than air pressure at material hose
entrance.
(ii) Weight measuring equipment requirements and tolerances shall
be in accordance with ASTM C94/C94M. Do not measure by
volume.
(iii) Proportion cementing materials, aggregates, and admixtures
where applicable to produce shotcrete material meeting specified
performance requirements.
(iv) Mix ratio of moist sand and cement, by weight, shall be a
maximum of 2.6 for site batching.
(v) Total volumetric air content shall be 7 percent plus or minus 1
percent before placement as determined by ASTM Cl73/Cl73M or
ASTM C23l. Air-entraining agents shall be in accordance with

ASTM C260 and ASTM C457.
(vi) Mix shotcrete in either stationary plant, portable batch type, or
truck mixers.
(c) Dry Mix Process:
(i) Contractor shall submit details of the proposed dry-mix product and
details of the proposed equipment for approval if the Contractor
proposes to use dry-mix shotcrete.
3.2 SEQUENCE OF WORK

(a) Shotcrete shall be placed in shafts as required as excavation proceeds.
(b) Preparation of Existing Substrate Surface:
(i) Remove loose and unsound material, debris or other foreign
matter from shaft walls or other substrate surfaces receiving
shotcrete material down to sound substrate by mechanical
chipping or air / water jetting.
(ii) Chip surface area removing offsets that would cause abrupt
change in thickness without suitable reinforcement.
(iii) Where placing shotcrete over surfaces previously having shotcrete
placement, check prepared surfaces with the Metrolinx
Representative for fractured shotcrete, or loose aggregate.
Remove such material as directed by Metrolinx Representative.
(iv) Wet surface until damp immediately prior to applying shotcrete.
(v) Groundwater infiltration shall be controlled by means such as
grouting, installing drain pipes, or other means so that shotcrete
will be unaffected by the action of the water.
(c) Batching and Mixing of Shotcrete Material:
(i) Site-batched Wet-mix Process Using Pre-bagged Shotcrete
Material:
A. Mix the pre-bagged shotcrete material, admixtures, and water
in accordance with approved shotcrete mix design and
manufacturer's printed instructions. Limit time between
batching and complete discharge to 90 minutes maximum.
(ii) Ready-mix Wet-mix Process:
A. Mix the shotcrete material, admixtures, and water in
accordance with the approved shotcrete mix design and
manufacturer's printed instructions. Limit time between

batching and complete discharge 120 minutes maximum.
(d) Application of Shotcrete:
(i) General:
A. Apply shotcrete following guidelines of ACI 506R and in
accordance with ACI 506.2.
B. Apply shotcrete utilizing wet or dry mix processes.
C. Adjust shotcrete mix design if shotcrete fails to meet
compressive strength requirement.
D. If flow of shotcrete becomes intermittent, direct away from
Work until flow becomes constant.
E. Prior to applying shotcrete, pre-dampen substrate and air
blast surface to remove loose dirt and debris.
F. For the wet-mix process, the shotcrete material may be
retempered with the superplasticizing admixture to maintain
workability only where permitted by the admixture
manufacturer, and if required, in strict accordance with printed
instructions from the admixture manufacturer.
G. Apply sufficient layers of shotcrete to build up the required
thickness without sagging, sloughing, or separation. Slope
shotcrete to a trim edge. Before placing an adjacent section,
thoroughly clean this sloped portion by wire brushing, remove
laitance, and pre-dampen.
H. Remove and replace shotcrete that is inadequately bonded,
separated, porous, incorporates rebound material, contains
cracks which extend through the full depth of the shotcrete,
sags, sloughing, or other defects.
(ii) Rebound Removal:
A. There are no rebound requirements in the Specification
Section.
(iii) Nozzle Position:
A. Keep nozzle at uniform constant distance from surface,
always ensuring a right-angle spray of material to surface.
B. Modify procedure of shooting shotcrete to better direct
material around welded wire fabric.
C. Apply shotcrete material wet enough to ensure no buildup of

shotcrete to prevent voids.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

(a) General:
(i) Monitor the quality of in-place shotcrete during placement. Sound
surface layer with a hammer to verify the absence of voids,
rebound pockets, unbounded areas and other defects. If
objectionable areas are observed, voids behind shotcrete shall be
grouted or defective shotcrete removed and replaced.
(ii) Final acceptance of in-place shotcrete shall be determined by
observations of visual appearance, density and compressive
strength testing of core samples from the completed work.
(b) Air Content and Slump of Wet-mix Shotcrete Material:
(i) The air content and slump of each batch of Wet-mix shotcrete, or
as directed by the Metrolinx Representative, shall be verified using
methods in accordance with CSA A23.2.
(c) After set, check finished surface by sounding a hammer to locate hollow
areas and unbonded shotcrete. Set time will depend on cement type and
use of accelerator. Sounding should take place after 12 hours or as
otherwise directed by the Metrolinx Representative based on the mix
design and trial data.
(d) Remove and replace shotcrete found not meeting tests, or cut cores and
further test shotcrete, or repair and replace as approved by the
END OF SECTION
Division 05 – Steel Work
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Post Installed Anchors for Concrete
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification provides requirements for post installed anchors for
concrete used to install the strut support brackets to the slurry wall.

(b) Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing
(c) Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
(d) Section 31 51 00 – Tiebacks and Tie Anchors
(e) Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers

post-installed anchors for concrete shall be included within the
appropriate Agreement item to which they pertain most closely.

(a) This Specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or
publications:
(i) American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials (AASHTO):
A. TP 84, Standard of Method of Test for Evaluation of Adhesive
Anchors in concrete under Sustained Loading Conditions.
(ii) CSA Standards:
A. S16-19 – Design of Steel Structures.
B. A23.3-04 – Design of Concrete Structures.
C. A23.2-14 – Concrete materials and methods of concrete
construction/Test methods and standard practices for
concrete.
D. G30.18 – Carbon steel bars for concrete reinforcement.
E. G40.20.G40.21 – General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/ Structural Quality Steel.
(iii) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Materials:

A. OPSS 1440 – Steel Reinforcement for Concrete.
(iv) American National Standards Institute/American Welding Society
(ANSI/AWS):
A. D1.1 – Structural Welding Code – Steel.
B. D1.4 – Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel.
C. D1.6 – Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.
(v) American Concrete Institute (ACI):
A. ACI 318 19 – Building Code Requirements for Structural
Concrete and Commentary.
B. ACI 355.1R – State-of-the-Art Report on Anchorage to
Concrete.
C. ACI 355.3R – Guide for Design of Anchorage to Concrete.
D. ACI 355.4 – Qualification of Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors
in Concrete and Commentary.
(vi) ASTM International:
A. ASTM A153 – Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
Hardware.
B. ASTM A563 – Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
C. ASTM B633 – Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and
Steel.
D. ASTM C881/C881M – Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-
Base Bonding Systems for Concrete.
E. ASTM E488 – Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors
in Concrete Elements.
F. ASTM E1512 – Standard Test Methods for Testing Bond
Performance of Bonded Anchors.
G. ASTM F436 – Hardened Steel Washers.
H. ASTM F594 – Stainless Steel Nuts.
I. ASTM F1554 – Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel,
36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength.
(vii) International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation Service, Inc.,
Acceptance Criteria:
A. AC308 – Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive

Anchors in Concrete Elements.
B. AC193 – Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in
Concrete Elements.
1.5 ABBREVIATIONS, ACRONYMS, AND DEFINITIONS

(a) Definitions:
(i) Threaded Anchor Rod: Steel bar that is threaded and embedded in
to concrete using adhesive to support structural steel members.
(ii) Adhesive Anchor Rod: See Threaded Anchor Rod.
(iii) Certificate of Conformance: A document issued by the Contractor
confirming that the specified components of the Work are in
general conformance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents.
(iv) Concrete Breakout Capacity: The point at which an adhesive
anchor system can no longer be held by the concrete resulting in a
concrete tensile failure, typically due to cracking at a 35-degree
angle from the base of the anchor to produce a failure cone.
(v) Concrete Pryout Capacity: The point at which an adhesive anchor
system experiences failure due to the combined rotation and
tension force as a result of lateral deformation and eccentricity
between the acting shear force and the resultant resisting force in
the concrete.
(vi) Development Length: The length of embedment necessary to
develop the full tensile strength of the reinforcement, controlled by
pull-out in accordance with CSA A23.3.
(vii) Dowel: See Threaded Anchor Rod.
(viii) Engineer: A professional engineer licensed by the Professional
(ix) New Steel: Structural steel that has not previously been used.
(x) Post-installed: Fixings that are installed after the concrete base has
been set.
(xi) Shelf Life: The length of time for which an item or product remains
usable before its properties may be compromised.


(a) Design Requirements for Contractor’s Design and Shop Drawings:
A. The post-installed threaded anchor rod system shall be
designed to CSA A23.3-19 and tested in accordance with ACI
355.4.
B. The post-installed threaded anchor rod system shall be shown
on a Shop Drawing. The anchor type, size, maximum drill hole
depth and diameter, required development length, and
applicable distances shall be as shown on the drawing.
C. The design of the post installed threaded anchor rod system
and shop drawing shall be signed and sealed by a
D. The design shall include product data from the manufacturer
and written instructions for storage, handling, installation and
proof testing, including proof test loads and torques.
E. The design shall include approval documentation (Evaluation
Report) from the International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation
Service, Inc.
F. The design shall include independent test results for each
anchor type.
G. Mechanical anchor systems for the installation of the strut
support brackets will not be permitted.
H. Submit the design to the Metrolinx Representative for review
and approval in accordance with the submittal procedures.
(b) Construction Submittals:
(i) General:
A. The Contractor shall submit a Construction Work Plan for the
installation of the post-installed threaded anchor rod system
which shall include:
(1) Installation procedure based on the manufacturer’s
installation instructions.
(2) A list of approved installers who will perform the work.
(3) Evidence of training and certification by a representative
of the manufacturer for all installers.
(4) Details of testing requirements for post-installed threaded
rods.
(5) Details of how safe access can be maintained to the work

location and for performing the work.
(ii) Source Quality Control Documentation:
A. The Contractor shall submit source quality control inspection
and test reports.
(iii) Field Quality Control Documentation:
A. The Contractor shall submit field quality control inspection and
test reports.

(a) Installer Training:
(i) Post-installed anchor manufacturer or their representative shall
conduct training with the installers. Training shall consist of a
review of the complete installation process for drilled-in anchors, to
include but not limited to:
A. Hole Drilling, preparation, and cleaning.
B. Adhesive injection technique and dispenser training /
maintenance.
C. Rebar dowel preparation and installation.
D. Proof loading / torquing.
(b) Certifications:
(i) Threaded anchor rods shall have International Code Council (ICC)
Evaluation Service, Inc. Evaluation Report (ER) indicating
conformance with current applicable ICC ES Acceptance Criteria.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Steel Threaded Anchor Rods, Nuts, and Washers:
(i) Threaded anchor rod shall be in accordance with Specification
Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing and shall comprise
threaded steel rods or reinforcing dowels. The threaded steel
anchor rods shall conform to CSA G40.20/ G40.21 or ASTM
F1554.
(ii) High strength nuts, and hardened washers shall be suitable for use
with the types of anchor rods being specified and shall be in
accordance with ASTM A153.
(b) Epoxy Grout or Injectable Mortar Adhesive:

(i) Epoxy grout and injectable mortar adhesive shall meet the
requirements of ASTM C881, Type IV (load bearing applications)
with Grade 1, 2, or 3 viscosity ratings and the appropriate class for
the site temperature.
(ii) Epoxy grout and injectable mortar adhesive shall meet the
requirements of ACI 318 and ACI 355.
(iii) Grout and adhesive for threaded anchor rods shall be a polymer or
hybrid mortar adhesive injection system. Adhesive shall be HILTI
HIT-HY 200-R V3 ADHESIVE ANCHOR injectable mortar,
manufactured by Hilti North America, or approved equal.
(iv) Grout and adhesive shall be appropriate for base materials and
conditions.
EXECUTION
3.1 TRANSPORTATION, DELIVERY AND STORAGE

(a) Materials for the post-installed threaded anchor rod system shall be
stored and handles in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
(b) Adhesive shall be transported and stored at within a temperature range
of 5 degrees Celsius to 25 degrees Celsius.
3.2 INSTALLATION
(a) Post-Installed Threaded Anchor Rods:
(i) All anchors shall be installed in conformance with manufacturer's
instructions. Do not exceed manufacturer’s recommended
installation torque.
(ii) Locate / avoid existing steel reinforcing prior to anchor installation
using rebar location or drilling methods. The methods of locating
reinforcing and installing post-installed threaded anchor rods shall
ensure the slurry wall reinforcing steel is not damaged.
(iii) Holes drilled in the slurry wall concrete for the adhesive anchor
installation shall be located as shown on the Contractor’s approved
shop drawings. The drilled holes shall not conflict with the existing
reinforcement and shall provide the minimum cover. If reinforcing is
encountered during the drilling operation, the holes shall be
relocated and the uncompleted holes shall be filled with epoxy
grout or injectable mortar adhesive material and finished smooth

and flush with the adjacent slurry wall surface.
(iv) Drilled holes are not to be over drilled for depth.
(v) The diameter of the drilled hole shall conform to the manufacturer's
recommendations for the diameter of the adhesive anchor to be
installed.
(vi) Hole drilling methods shall not cause spalling, cracking, or other
damage to the slurry wall concrete.
(vii) Prior to placing grout or epoxy, drilled holes shall be cleaned of all
dirt, moisture, concrete dust and other foreign material.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) General:
(i) Adhesive anchors with sustained tensile load shall be tested in
accordance with AASHTO TP 84.
(ii) The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control
procedures and records for the installation and testing of the post-
installed adhesive threaded anchor rod system.
(b) Installation Records:
(i) The Contractor shall maintain installation records of all post-
installed adhesive threaded anchor rods. The records shall include
at a minimum:
A. Name of trained installer.
B. Date and time of installation.
C. Location identification and summary of the location of the
installation.
D. Weather and temperature during installation.
E. Type of anchor rod, type of adhesive and summary of
hardware including product name.
F. Date of expiry of adhesive.
G. Any relevant notes or observations.
(c) Field Testing:
(i) 10% of each type and size of post-installed adhesive anchor shall
be proof tested by an independent testing organization.
(ii) Adhesive anchors shall not be torque tested unless otherwise

directed by the Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) If more than 10% of the tested anchors fail to achieve the specified
torque or proof load within the limits as defined on the Contractor’s
design and the Contractor’s approved Shop Drawings, all anchors
of the same diameter and type as the failed anchor shall be tested.
(iv) The test load of post-installed adhesive anchors shall be a tensile
load equal to 80% of the specified anchor system capacity.
(v) Acceptance Criteria of a post-installed adhesive anchor shall be
deemed acceptable if the test load specified for the proof test is
attained without the following:
A. Slippage of more than 2 mm.
B. Anchor failure.
C. Visual damage to the surrounding concrete.
(d) Quality Control Inspections:
(i) The Contractor’s quality inspector shall carry out a full visual
inspection and be present during the following stages of the post-
installed adhesive anchor installation and testing:
A. At completion of drilling and cleaning out of the holes.
B. Upon completion of the installation.
C. During proof testing.
(ii) A test report shall be produced for each adhesive anchor that is
tested. Test reports and installations records shall be submitted to
the Metrolinx Representative on a weekly basis.
3.4 REPAIR AND RESTORATION OF DEFECTIVE WORK

(a) Remove and replace misplaced or defective adhesive anchors. Fill
empty and abandoned anchor holes and patch failed anchor locations
with high-strength non-shrink, non-metallic grout.
(b) Anchors that fail to meet proof load or installation torque requirements
shall be regarded as defective.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Structural Steel
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification provides requirements for structural steel used for the
SOE support members including, but not limited to, walers, pipe struts,
other steel struts, strut support brackets, waler brackets, waler jog
connections, stiffener plates, tieback bearing plates and trumpets, tie
anchor plates, slurry wall embedded sleeves and plates and any other
steel members, plates or brackets associated with the steel member
assembly or other steel components of the SOE system.

(b) Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
(c) Section 31 51 00 – Tiebacks and Tie Anchors
(d) Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers

structural steel shall be included within the appropriate Agreement item
to which they pertain most closely.

(a) This Specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or
publications:
(i) CSA Standards:
A. G40.20/40.21-18 – General Requirements for Rolled or
Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
B. S16-19 – Design of Steel Structures.
C. W47.1-19 – Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of
Steel.
D. W48-18 – Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc
Welding.
E. W59-18 – Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
F. W178.1-18 – Certification of Welding Inspection
Organizations.
G. W178.2-18 – Certification of Welding Inspectors.

(ii) American National Standards Institute / American Welding Society
(ANSI/AWS):
A. D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel.
(iii) ASTM International:
A. ASTM A36 – Specification for Carbon Structural Steel.
B. ASTM A123 – Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
C. ASTM A108-18 – Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon
and Alloy, Cold Finished.
D. ASTM A588/A588M-19 – High-Strength Low-Allow Structural
Steel, up to 50 ksi [345 MPa] Minimum Yield Point, With
Atmospheric Corrosion Resistance.
E. ASTM F3125/F3125M-21 – Standard Specification for High
Strength Structural Bolts and Assemblies, Steel and Alloy
Steel, Heat Treated, Inch Dimensions 120 ksi and 150 ksi
Minimum Tensile Strength, and Metric Dimensions 830 MPa
and 1040 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength.
F. ASTM A563/A563M-21 – Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.
G. ASTM F436/F436M-19 – Standard Specification for Hardened
Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions.
(iv) American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):
A. B46.1-19 – Surface Texture (Surface Roughness, Waviness,
and Lay).
(v) International Organization for Standardization/International
Electrotechnical Commission (ISO.IEC):
A. 17025-2017 – General Requirements for Competence of the
Testing and Calibration Laboratories.
(vi) SSPC Surface Preparation Standards:
A. SSPC-SP1-16, Solvent Cleaning.
B. SSPC-SP3-18, Power Tool Cleaning.
C. SPC-SP6/NACE No. 3-07, Commercial Blast Cleaning (NACE
No. 3).

(a) Definitions:
(i) Certificate of Conformance: A document issued by the Contractor
confirming that the specified components of the Work are in
general conformance with the requirements of the Specifications
and Drawings.
(ii) Contractor’s Inspector: An individual who is a Canadian Welding
Bureau (CWB) certified Level II or Level III inspector according to
the requirements of CSA W178.2 and has documented evidence of
professional knowledge, skill, and experience in the inspection and
erection of steel structures.
(iii) Engineer: A professional engineer licensed by the Professional
(iv) Erection Diagram: Drawings showing the dimensioned layout of the
steel structure, from which shop details are made, and that
correlate the fabricator’s piece markings with the location in the
structure.
(v) Faying Surface: The mating surface of a member that is in contact
with another member to which it is to be joined.
(vi) Flush: A profile of weld reinforcement in which there is a smooth
gradual transition between the base and weld metal involving
grinding where necessary. Weld reinforcement not exceeding 1
mm in height may remain on each surface unless the weld is part
of a faying surface when all reinforcement is removed.
(vii) Inspector: An individual who is a Canadian Welding Bureau (CWB)
certified Level II or Level III inspector according to the
requirements of CSA W178.2 and has documented evidence of
professional knowledge, skill, and experience in the inspection and
erection of steel structures.
(viii) New Steel: Structural steel that has not previously been used.
(ix) Non-Destructive Testing Technician: An individual who has
documented evidence of training professional knowledge, skill, and
experience in non-destructive testing of structural steel welds and
material, and has a valid certificate showing qualification to a Level
II or III according to CAN/CGSB 48.9712 and the CWB for the non-
destructive testing specified.
(x) Primary Tension Member: A member including attachments that
are subjected to tension stress.
(xi) Smooth: A profile weld reinforcement, in which the surface finish or

weld reinforcement has sufficient smooth gradual transition,
involving grinding where necessary. Weld reinforcement not
exceeding the following limits, may remain on each surface:
A. 2 mm for plate thickness ≤ 50 mm.
B. 3 mm for plate thickness > 50 mm.


(a) Design Requirements:
(i) Welding:
A. Welding design shall be according to CSA W59.
B. Welding procedures shall be according to CSA W47.1 and
CSA W59.
C. Symbols for welding and non-destructive testing shall be
according to CSA W59.
(b) Submissions:
(i) General:
A. The requirements of all review approvers and consulted
stakeholders shall be satisfied prior to commencement of
fabrication.
B. Shop Drawings shall be submitted for review to the Metrolinx
Representative prior to commencement of fabrication. Shop
Drawings shall be signed and sealed by a Professional
Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario.
C. A set of member design and connection design calculations
shall be submitted for review to the Metrolinx Representative
prior to commencement of fabrication. Calculations shall be
signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the
(ii) Erection Diagrams and Erection Procedure Drawings and
Calculations:
A. Erection Diagrams and erection procedure drawings and
calculations shall be submitted for review to the Metrolinx
Representative prior to commencement of erection.
B. Prior to making any submissions, the erection diagrams and

erection procedure drawings and calculations shall be signed
and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the
province of Ontario, verifying that the erection diagrams and
erection procedure drawings and calculations are consistent
with the Specifications and Drawings.
C. Erection Diagrams are erection procedure drawings and shall
include at least the following:
(1) Principal dimensions of the structure.
(2) Erection marks.
(3) Sizes of all members.
(4) Field welding requirements, including identification of
welds requiring non-destructive testing.
(5) Size and type of bolts.
(6) Bolt installation requirements, including the number of
fitting up bolts required at each connection and
identification of oversize and slotted holes.
(7) Bracing during erection of structural steel.
D. The Contractor shall not commence erection until he has
received one set of erection diagrams and erection procedure
drawings and calculations signed and sealed by a Professional
E. The Contractor shall have a copy of the Erection Diagrams
and the erection procedure drawings and calculations at the
site during erection.
(iii) Mill Test Certificates:
A. Prior to the use of any material in fabrication, mill test
certificates for that material shall be submitted to the Metrolinx
Representative, confirming that the material is according to the
B. Copies of the mill test certificates for all material to be used in
the fabrication shall be available for review at the fabricating
plant during fabrication. The certificates shall show that the
material is according to the Specifications and Drawings.
C. Material used in fabrication shall be directly traceable to the
mill test certificate. When material is divided, identification
marking shall be transferred to all pieces.
D. When mill test certificates originate from a mill outside of

Canada or the United States of America, the information on
the mill test certificate shall be verified by testing at a
Canadian laboratory. This laboratory shall be certified by an
organization accredited by the Standards Council of Canada to
comply with the requirements of ISO/IEC 17025 for the
specific tests or type of tests required by the material standard
specified on the mill test certificate. The Canadian laboratory’s
test certificate shall be identified with the name of the
laboratory and appropriate wording stating that the material is
according to the specified Contract requirements. The
certificate shall include the appropriate material specification
number, testing date (i.e., yyyy-mm-dd), signature of an
authorized officer of the Canadian laboratory, and be traceable
to the original mill test certificate. Material coupons to be
tested in the Canadian Laboratory for the purpose of verifying
mill test certificates originating from a mill outside of Canada or
the Unites States of America shall be taken from the material
sample once the material has arrived in Canada
(iv) Test Reports for Fasteners:
A. Proof that the bolts, nuts, and washers meet the chemical
composition, mechanical properties, dimensions,
workmanship, and head burst as required by ASTM F3125,
ASTM A563, or ASTM F436 shall be submitted to the
Metrolinx Representative. Verification of the acceptability of
assemblage of zinc-coated bolts, nuts, and washers delivered
to the job site shall also be submitted to the Metrolinx
Representative.
B. For bolts, nuts, and washers supplied from a manufacturer
outside Canada or the United States of America, the above
information shall be verified by testing at a Canadian
laboratory as outlined in the Mill Test Certificates clause
(v) Independent Testing Organization and Technician Information:
A. The name of the independent testing organization and the
non-destructive testing technicians, together with proof of
certification, shall be submitted to the Metrolinx Representative
prior to the commencement of fabrication, for information
purposes only.

(a) General:
(i) Visual inspection, non-destructive testing, and sampling shall be
carried out in the fabricating shop and in the field by Metrolinx’
inspector to confirm the material supplied, fabrication, and erection
has been performed as specified in the Specifications and
Drawings.
(ii) The Contractor shall supply electric power, scaffolding, protection
from the weather, and free access for inspection and testing of
material, to all aspects of the fabrication, delivery, and erection of
the structural steel.
(b) Certificate of Conformance Upon Completion of the Work:
(i) Upon completion of erection, the Contractor shall submit to the
Metrolinx Representative a Certificate of Conformance signed and
sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the province of
Ontario.
(ii) The Certificate shall state that the Work has been carried out in
general conformance with the signed and sealed shop details,
welding procedures, erection diagrams, erection procedure
drawings, and other relevant Specifications and Drawings.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Steel:
(i) Structural steel shall be new and of the grade and category
specified in the Specifications and Drawings. Structural steel shall
be according to CAN/CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W for rolled
shapes, Grade 350W for plate, and Grade 300 for miscellaneous
steel work.
(ii) Substitution of other material for size and grade is not permitted
unless reviewed by the Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) The steel shall be identified as specified in the Control of Material
clause.
(b) Bolts, Nuts, and Washers:
(i) Bolts shall be according to ASTM F3125M grade A325M, unless
otherwise noted. Bolt strength and assembly shall be in
accordance with CSA S16.
(ii) Nuts, and hardened washers shall be suitable for use with the
types of bolts being specified and shall be according to ASTM
F3125M.
(iii) The nuts, bolts and washers shall be supplied and shipped
together as an assembly from the same manufacturer.
(iv) Bolts nuts, and washers used with steel specified in the
Agreement, Specifications and Drawings shall be Type 1.
(c) Electrodes:
(i) Welding electrodes, electrode and flux or electrode and gas
combinations shall be low hydrogen (level H16 or less) and shall
be according to CSA W47.1, CSA W48, and Section 12 of CSA
W59.
(ii) Weld metal used with corrosion resistant steels shall have similar
corrosion resistance and colour to the base metal and shall be
according to CSA W59.
(d) Hot dip galvanizing: galvanize steel where indicated, to ASTM A123,
minimum zinc coating of 600g/m2.
EXECUTION
3.1 TRANSPORTATION, DELIVERY AND STORAGE

(a) Structural steel shall be stockpiled to avoid excessive stress deformation
or other damage while stored.
(b) The delivery schedule shall be provided to the Metrolinx Representative
not less than 5 Working Days before any shipping begins.
(c) Any steel that is damaged during transportation, delivery, storage, or
erection shall be reported to the Metrolinx Representative.
3.2 ERECTION
(a) General:
(i) Additional permanent material may be provided to ensure that the
member capacities are not exceeded during erection, if permitted
(ii) The additional material shall be shown in the erection diagram.
(iii) The Metrolinx Representative shall be notified in writing of the
starting erection date at least 14 Calendar Days prior to the
commencement of field operations.
(iv) Repairs to erected material shall only be permitted after the
Metrolinx Representative has reviewed the repair procedure.
(v) Welding shall not be used to fill misplaced holes.

(vi) Hammering that can damage or distort the members is not
permitted.
(b) Connections:
(i) Holes made in the field shall be drilled or sub-drilled and reamed.
(ii) Any error that prevents the proper assembly and fitting of parts
shall be reported and the proposed method of correction shall be
submitted to the Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) Corrective measures shall not commence until the submitted
proposal is accepted.
(c) Maintaining Alignment:
(i) The structures shall be erected to the alignment and elevations
specified in the Contract Documents.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) General:
(i) Welding to be performed by certified welders in accordance with
CSA W59. Certifications shall be provided for each welder, and
valid for each process, method, position, and steel member size
used.
(ii) An independent weld testing organization (Contractor’s Inspector),
retained and paid for by the fabricator, shall perform all structural
steel quality control.
(iii) The acceptance standards of CSA W59 for Section 12 Dynamically
Loaded Structures shall apply.
(iv) In addition to quality control measures instituted by the Contractor,
the Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control
procedures specified herein.
(b) Weld Connections:
(i) Weld Connections shall comply with CSA W59 for tolerances,
appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and
methods used in correcting welding work.
(ii) Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true
alignment of the member without exceeding tolerances in
ANSI/AISC 303 for mill material.
(iii) Any section of weld that does not meet the acceptance standards
shall be removed, re-welded, and re-examined.
(c) Control of Material:

(i) A record for each component shall be maintained to identify the
material as to heat number, corresponding mill test certificate, and
colour coding or other identifying markings.
(d) Visual Inspection:
(i) The Contractor’s Inspector shall carry out a full visual inspection of
all erected steel, connections and welds.
(ii) Inspection of bolted connections shall be in accordance with ASTM
F3125 and carried out as required.
(e) Inspection Reports:
(i) Inspection reports shall be sealed and signed by an Engineer.
A. Inspection reports shall be made available to the Metrolinx
Representative upon request.
B. Copies of all inspection reports shall be submitted to the
Metrolinx Representative for information within 7 Calendar
Days of inspection.
END OF SECTION
Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Waterproofing System
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification includes furnishing and installing a Waterstop (also
called Waterbar) within the concrete slurry wall panels across the
construction joint, for the entire vertical length of each panel, with the
exception of the bottom 2 m within the slurry wall socket length.
(b) Waterstop shall also be installed across any construction joints in the
SOE base slab.
(c) Waterstops shall be installed using steel stop end elements during slurry
wall construction in accordance with Specification Section 31 56 00.
(d) The Waterstops installed across the slurry wall panel joints and installed
across the construction joints of the SOE base slab are the only
waterproofing system component required under this Agreement and as
such, this Specification Section only covers this product.

(b) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

(a) Work related to this Section is incidental to the Work. Costs related
waterproofing systems shall be included within the appropriate

(a) ASTM International (ASTM):
(i) ASTM D 412 – Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and
Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers – Tension.
(ii) ASTM D 471 – Test Method for Rubber Properties – Effects of
Chemicals.
(iii) ASTM D 624 – Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional
Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomer.
(iv) ASTM D638 – Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics.
(v) ASTM D1238 – Standard Test Method for Melt Flow Rates of
Thermoplastic by Extrusion Plastometer.
(vi) ASTM D2240 – Test Method for Shore Hardness.

(a) Definitions:
(i) Certificate of Compliance – A formal record that the supplied
waterproofing product meets the requirements of the applicable
standards.
(ii) Installer: Person performing the welded splices in the Waterstop,
including inspection and destructive sampling, and who installs
Waterstop into the Stop End, trained and certified by a technical
representative of the Waterstop manufacturer or a certified
waterproofing systems specialist installer. For the Work under this
specification, the Installer is not required to be an independent
waterproofing systems specialist and is permitted to be an
individual in the Contractor’s organization, but must have received
appropriate training from a waterproofing systems specialist and
will have received a training certificate or letter of certification
demonstrating that they are trained in performing the installation,
splicing and sampling work contained within this Specification
Section.
(iii) Off Cuts: Excess lengths of Waterstop material removed during
installation processes.
(iv) PVC: Polyvinyl chloride – a manufactured synthetic polymer or
plastic.
(v) Stop End: A fabricated steel element used temporarily during slurry
wall construction as a joint former between the separate panels of
a slurry wall. The stop end allows a Waterstop to be installed
across the joint.
(vi) Waterstop (or Waterbar): A flexible waterproofing product installed
within a concrete structure prior to concrete placement at a joint
location to prevent the passage of water through the concrete joint.
Waterstops placed centrally provide a barrier to penetration of
water from either face of the structure / wall.

1.7 ACTION AND INFORMATION SUBMITTALS.

(a) Pre-construction:
(i) Samples and Product Data:

A. Product data and specifications for the Waterstop product to
be used.
B. Performance criteria for the Waterstop product to be used.
C. A material sample of the Waterstop.
(ii) Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions:
A. Confirmation from the Stop end fabricator / supplier that the
Stop end can receive the selected Waterstop
B. Installation details of the Waterstop into the Stop end.
C. Splicing procedure for the Waterstop field welds including
quality assurance criteria to be met.
D. Procedure for destructive sampling of welded splices based on
the manufacturer’s product data and requirements.
(iii) Shop Drawings:
A. Shop drawings that include details of the assembled
Waterstop in the Stop end.
B. Requirements or constraints, if any, for the location of welded
splice locations for the Waterstop along the length of the Stop
end.
(iv) Qualifications:
A. Submit a copy of the training certification, or letter of
certification, of the Installer received from the manufacturer of
the Waterstop or from a certified waterproofing systems
specialist installer, demonstrating the Installer is competent to
perform welded splices of Waterstops, is qualified to visually
inspect splices and perform destructive sampling of splices.
The training certificates, or letter of certification, shall indicate
if, or when, retraining is required.
(v) Certificates:
A. Manufacturer / Supplier: Certificates of Compliance for
Waterstop materials used.
(b) Construction:
(i) Test / Sampling and Evaluation Reports:
A. Field test / sampling reports specified herein signed and dated
by the Installer.
B. Installation records together with inspection reports of installed

Waterstops.
C. Prequalification test splice samples including destructive test /
sampling results.

(a) The waterproofing systems specialist who has trained and certified the
Installer shall be present on site during the first three (3) Waterstop
installations within the Stop ends performed by the Installer at the Pape
Station SOE site and the first three (3) Waterstop installations within the
Stop ends performed by the Installer at the Sammon Avenue SOE site.
(b) Field Inspection, Testing and Reporting:
(i) To be performed by the Installer of the Waterstop.
(ii) Inspect and report:
A. Welded splice locations in Waterstops, to be included in the
Slurry Panel Summary Report as per Specification Section 31
56 00.
B. Confirmation of visual inspection of welded splice.
C. Destructive sampling reports of Waterstop splice welds.

(a) Delivery, storage and handling of PVC Waterstops in accordance with
Manufacturer’s delivery, storage and handling instructions.
PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
(a) Provide Waterstop material that are free from damage and defects.
2.2 PRODUCTS / MATERIALS

(a) Waterstops (for slurry wall panel shear keys):
(i) Provide Sika Greenstreak waterstop, flat ribbed, Type 825 or
approved equal for Waterstops that will be installed across the
joints between slurry wall concrete panels via the use of Stop ends.
(ii) Stop end elements for slurry walls shall accept a Waterstop up to
19 mm thick. Refer to Specification Section 31 56 00.
(b) Waterstops (for base slab construction joints):
(i) Provide Sika Greenstreak waterstop, base seal, Type 771 or

approved equal for Waterstops that will be installed along the
construction joints between adjacent placements of the base slab.
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
(a) Installer shall inspect Stop end groove prior to installing Waterstop.
(b) Installer shall inspect Waterstop for damage and defects:
(i) If damage or defects are observed, cut out defective portion a
minimum of 250 mm from the edge of the damage or defect and
discard. Perform an approved welded splice to join Waterstop.
(ii) If multiple damage or defects are observed in a single roll requiring
multiple portions to be cut out, welded splices to join good portions
of Waterstop may not be more closely spaced than 10 m,
otherwise entire roll is to be discarded.
3.2 INSTALLATION
(a) Waterstop for Stops Ends:
(i) A suitable area to install Waterstop in the Stop ends and perform
splice welds in the Waterstop shall be provided:
A. Area shall be clean, free of debris and waste materials and
have sufficient space.
B. Area shall be covered where welded splices are performed.
C. Ambient temperature and material temperature for performing
welded splices shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations or requirements.
(ii) Installation of Waterstop in Stop end shall be performed by the
Installer and shall follow the recommendations and requirements of
the Stop end fabricator and the Waterstop manufacturer.
(iii) Waterstop in Stop end shall terminate 2 m above the bottom of the
Stop end to ensure proper concrete encapsulation around the
bottom of the Waterstop.
(iv) Welded splices for Waterstop shall follow the requirements of the
manufacturer and be performed only by the Installer.
(v) Splices in Waterstops shall be separated by at least 0.5 m from a
tie back penetration in the slurry wall.
(vi) Interval of splices in Waterstops shall not be closer than 10 m.

(b) Waterstop for Base Slab:
(i) Ambient temperature and material temperature for performing
welded splices shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations or requirements.
(ii) Installation of Waterstop for the underside of construction joints, or
any other formed joints in the base slab shall be performed by the
Installer and shall follow the recommendations and requirements of
the Waterstop manufacturer.
(iii) Continue installing Waterstop to return up the slurry wall at each
end of the joint in the base slab. Excess Waterstop material shall
be continued 0.5 m further than the top of the base slab.
(iv) Interval of splices in Waterstops shall not be closer than 10 m.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Destructive Sampling of Waterstop Splice Welds shall be carried out in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations or procedures:
(i) The work of the Installer, including installation, splicing and
sampling shall be supervised by the waterproofing systems
specialist who has trained and certified the Installer in accordance
with Clause 1.8 (a) of this Specification Section.
(ii) Destructive sampling to be carried out by the Installer.
(iii) Provide destructive sampling of Waterstop field welds. A minimum
of one (1) field weld at the beginning and end of each day shall be
sampled.
(iv) Perform destructive sampling by making 6 mm slices perpendicular
to the weld on one half of the Waterstop. Slice the remaining half
along the weld. Welded section shall exhibit consistency of
material, and lack of porosity and charring. Welded material shall
not be noticeably different in appearance from the parent material.
END OF SECTION
Division 22 – Plumbing
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Mechanical Systems
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) The Mechanical Specifications and Drawings specify complete systems,
including all labour and material required.
(b) This work shall include all labour, materials, tools, equipment,
transportation, etc., necessary for the removal of the complete systems
of plumbing, heating, ventilating, air conditioning, thermal insulation and
temperature control.
(c) The intent of these specifications is to provide complete demolition of the
existing building and while no attempt has been made to detail or list
each individual part required, it is the intent of these specifications to
include all parts and the furnishing of all labour reasonably implied by
these documents and which are required to deliver to the Owners, the
systems complete, and ready for operation.
(a) Work related to this Section is considered incidental to the Work and will
be measured and paid as part of the Items B.1.1 through B.1.7.
(a) Standards for this Division of the work, for materials and workmanship
shall conform to the latest edition of the Canadian Standards
Association, the Ontario Building Code and Ontario Plumbing Code, all
other applicable Codes, and local codes, which govern the work required
for completion of this project.
(b) Ensure that the watermain disconnect meets the City of Toronto
requirements, including but not limited to the following specs:
(i) TS 510 Construction Specification for Removal.
(ii) TS 7.40 Watermain and Water Service Tracer Wire.
(iii) TS 441 Construction Specification for Watermain Installation in
Open Cut.
(iv) TS 7.30 Procedure for Disinfecting Watermains.
(v) TS 7.70 Watermain Replacement and Connection Procedure
(c) Before commencing work, check and verify all sizes, locations, materials,
elevations, levels, and dimensions to ensure proper and correct
installation. Verify existing and municipal services.



PRODUCTS
2.1 EXAMINATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS
(a) Before commencing work, this Contractor shall examine all drawings and
specifications relative to this work. No allowance will be made for failure
to make such examination and to take into account all aspects which
may govern the execution and completion of the work.
2.2 SUBDIVISION OF WORK
(a) The work specified in the following sections of the specifications has
generally been divided into Trade Sections for the purpose of ready
reference.
(b) The division of the work among subcontractors and suppliers is solely
the responsibility of the Contractor and the Metrolinx Representative
assumes no responsibility to act as an arbiter to establish subcontractor
limits between any sections or divisions of the work.
2.3 EXISTING BUILDING SITE
(a) Examine site and local conditions and verify the dimensions.. Before
commencing work, examine the work of other Sections and report at
once any defect or interference affecting the work, its completion or
warranty. No allowance will be made later for any expense incurred
through failure to make these examinations or to report any such
discrepancies in writing.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL.
(a) The work shall include, but shall not necessarily be limited to the
following:
(i) General Mechanical demolition work as noted on drawings.
(ii) Demolition of all building grilles, registers, diffusers, ductwork and
all related accessories.
(iii) Demolition of all Mechanical equipment within the demolished
building complete with all related Electronic Controls.
(iv) Demolition of building Sprinkler System. Cut and cap existing water
main pipe near property line and remove water service and
disconnect at mainline in the street.
(v) Demolition of building Domestic water piping. Cut and cap existing
water main pipe near property line and remove water service and
(vi) Demolition of building drainage piping. Cut and cap existing drain
mains near property line and remove sanitary service and
(vii) Hazardous material (Ozone depleting substances) removal from
Air-
(viii) conditioning units, and other non-fixed small refrigeration
equipment that may contain refrigerants.
(ix) Demolition of building Storm drainage piping. Existing catch basins
external to building shall remain where indicated on contract
drawings. Site storm lines beneath building may be altered to
connect to existing catch basins. Redundant Storm lines not
connecting to Catch basins to be removed and capped to main line
in the street. Cut and cap existing redundant Storm drain mains
near property line and remove Storm service and disconnect at
mainline in the street where required by the City of Toronto Water
Department.
END OF SECTION
Division 26 – Electrical
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Electrical Systems
Part 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) The Electrical Specifications and Drawings specify complete systems.
Include all labour and material required.
(b) Contractor’s scope of services shall include, but not be limited to, the
decommissioning, removal and disposal of existing high voltage
transformers, high and low voltage equipment, removal and disposal of
lighting systems and sub-systems, disconnect and removal of all
electrical equipment including power systems, heating and cooling
systems, fire alarm systems and all sub- systems inside and outside of
buildings, removal and disposal of conduits and wiring associated with
existing buildings to be demolished; disconnection and removal of all
communication wiring and equipment as well as all wiring, conduits and
equipment related to mechanical equipment.
(c) Include for disposal of all electrical materials including disposal of
regulated substances (hazardous materials, Polychlorinated Biphenyl
(PCB), ballasts, PCB oil).
(d) All potential hazardous materials shall be identified, removed and
disposed of prior to building demolition in accordance with Ontario
Regulation 362 and as specified in other Sections.


be measured and paid as part of the Items B.1.1 through B.1.7.





1.9 FEES AND COORDINATION WITH UTILITIES

(a) Coordinate with local utilities for disconnection of hydro, telephone and
cable services to existing buildings.
(b) Pay any associated fees related to work done by utilities.
1.10 CONFLICTS AND PRECEDENCE

(a) Where such conflict, ambiguity, error or omission was discoverable at
time of Tender, the Metrolinx Representative's decision shall be final and
binding in such matters, and no right to additional compensation of the
Contractor shall arise.
1.11 CODES, PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS

(a) Comply with Ontario Electrical Safety Code, Electrical Safety Authority
(ESA), all local, provincial and federal laws, where applicable and with
requirements of the Canadian Standard Association when mandatory.
Any changes or alterations required by authorized inspector of the
authority having jurisdiction shall be made without adjustment to Contract
Price.
(b) In no instance shall the standards established by the Drawings and
Specifications be reduced by any of the codes referred to in this division.
Waivers or exceptions to Codes will NOT be accepted.
(c) Obtain and pay for permits and inspections required for Work performed
under this division.
(d) After completion of the Work, furnish to Metrolinx Representative a
Certificate of Unconditional Approval from inspection authorities having
jurisdiction.
(e) Payments for all permits, deposits, inspections and other fees necessary
for the Work shall be included in the Tender price.
1.12 WORKING DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS

(a) Do not deviate from design shown on the Drawings, or as herein
specified, unless prior written approval is obtained from Metrolinx
Representative.
Part 2 PRODUCTS
Part 3 EXECUTION
3.1 ELECTRICAL
(a) Prior to building demolition de-energize main electrical service to the
building.
(b) Coordinate with local utility.
(c) Prior to building demolition de-energize telephone service to the building.
(d) Coordinate with Bell Canada and/or any other communications Utility
supplier.
3.2 REMOVAL, TRANSPORT AND TREATMENT OF PCB TRANSFORMERS

(a) Transformer Draining:
(i) The Contractor shall ensure that the existing transformer is fully
de- energized and disconnected prior to initiating draining
procedures.
(ii) The Contractor shall establish work area for draining and set up
spill containment, empty drums, hose and pumping equipment.
(iii) A qualified PCB Contractor will have documented procedures with
the Ministry of the Environment, such as a Certificate of Approval,
listing materials required and methods to be followed when
pumping liquids from transformers into drums. The Contractor shall
provide this documentation with their submission.
(iv) The utmost care must be taken when transferring liquids containing
PCBs including the proper use of PPE and spill containment by
field staff.
(v) Any materials which have been used or came in contact with the
PCBs during the draining and removal operations such as hoses or
protective equipment shall be considered as PCB waste or PCB-
related waste and must be packaged, transported and treated as

such at the Contractor’s expense.
(b) Packaging, Labeling and Loading:
(i) The Contractor shall provide all labour, material and equipment
required to remove the PCB Materials from the current location to
the transport vehicle.
(ii) The Contractor shall ensure that all PCB Materials are properly
packaged and labeled in accordance with transport regulations.
(iii) The Contractor shall provide all labour and material to label and
placard PCB material and vehicles in accordance with transport
regulations.
(iv) The PCB Materials shall be secured inside the transport vehicle
and tarped or otherwise covered to prevent exposure to the
elements.
(v) No PCB transformer shall leave the site without being drained a
second time no less than 48 hours following the first drain.
(vi) The Contractor shall verify that the PCB Materials are secured and
verify serial numbers and label information prior to removal from
site.
(c) Transportation:
(i) The Contractor shall provide all labour, material and vehicles
required for transport of the PCB materials to the treatment facility.
(ii) The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all applicable
provincial, federal and municipal approvals and or permits required
for transportation of PCB material to the treatment facility at the
Contractor’s expense. This includes but is not limited to approvals
for transporting material into or through jurisdictions outside
Ontario.
(iii) Prior to any shipment leaving the site, the Contractor shall confirm
in writing that all required approvals have been received, and that
the required notifications of other jurisdictions have been made.
(iv) Prior to any shipments leaving the site, the Contractor shall
indicate in writing the final destination of all shipments, and the
route that will be used to reach that destination.
(v) Prior to any shipment leaving the site, the Contractor shall perform
an inspection of the vehicle(s). Any reloading or re-packaging
required to satisfy the regulation or to ensure the safe shipment of

the PCB Materials will be at the Contractor’s expense.
(vi) Prior to any shipment leaving the site, the Contractor shall prepare
all required waste manifests in accordance with TDG, ready for
signature by the site representative.
A. The Owner will supply a valid Ontario Waste Generator
number including waste class 243D - PCBs.
(vii) The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the waste
manifests are completed by the vehicle driver, and that copies are
distributed in accordance with TDG requirements within the
required time allowance.
(d) Waste Treatment:
(i) The Contractor shall provide details on the facilities proposed for
the treatment of waste from the site including applicable Ontario
Certificates of Approval or other permits.
(ii) The Contractor shall provide details on the treatment technology to
be used in this Agreement. This description shall include, but not
be limited to, any limitations on the nature or type of PCB Material
that can be treated or stored, and a description of all residual
waste streams and location for destruction of same.
(iii) Upon destruction of the PCB Material, the Contractor shall issue to
the generator a Certificate of Destruction for all the PCB Material
removed for destruction from the site. The Certificate of
Destruction shall reference the waste manifests for the location
from which PCB Material is removed.
(e) Regulations:
(i) The Contractor shall ensure compliance with all applicable Acts,
Regulations, Guidelines, Codes of Practice and By-laws. The
following is a partial list and the Contractor should ensure
compliance with all applicable legislation:
A. Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Environment Canada.
B. SOR/91-152, Chlorobiphenyls Regulation.
C. SOR/92-507, Storage of PCB Materials Regulation.
D. SOR/92-637, Export and Import of Hazardous Waste
Regulation.
E. PCB Transformer Decontamination, Standards and Protocols,

Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment (CCME
EPC-HW-105E).
F. Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), Transport
Canada.
G. Environmental Protection Act (EPA), Ontario Ministry of the
Environment.
H. R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 347, General Waste Management
Regulation.
I. R.R.O. 1990, Regulation 362, Waste Management – PCBs
Regulation.
J. Dangerous Goods Transportation Act (DGTA), Ministry of the
Environment.
(f) Qualifications:
(i) The Contractor shall ensure that all people involved in the
handling, loading, transportation and destruction of PCB Material
are appropriately trained and licensed to perform such work.
(ii) The Contractor shall provide documentation verifying up to date
Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) and
Transportation of Dangerous Goods (TDG) training for persons
involved in the execution of this project.
(iii) Copies of Certificates of Approval shall be included relevant to:
A. Transformer Draining.
B. Transportation.
C. Transfer.
D. Treatment.
(iv) The Contractor shall verify that their Electrical Sub-Contractor is in
good standing with all regulatory agencies and provide a current
WSIB Clearance Certificate.
(g) Liability:
(i) The Contractor shall be responsible for damages of any sort
caused during the dismantling, draining, packaging, loading,
transport and disposal of said PCB Material.
(ii) The Contractor shall be responsible for clean-up in the event of a
spill or leak of PCB contaminated material, caused by the
Contractor during the dismantling, draining, packaging, loading or

transport of PCB Materials from the current storage location to the
ultimate disposal site. This shall include, but not be limited to:
A. The disposal of contaminated clothing, tools, protective
equipment, etc., and any soil, concrete, structure, animal or
object which may come into contact with PCB’s and which is
deemed to be contaminated by the Owner, Provincial or
Federal inspectors, or Contractor.
B. The cost of sampling and analysis of material that is suspected
to have been contaminated as a result of a spill or leak.
END OF SECTION
OL North Civil Works Schedule 9 – Specification and Drawings
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Primary Grounding
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This specification describes the requirements for the procurement,
installation, and testing of an interconnected primary and auxiliary
ground electrodes system of Pape Station SOE and Sammon Crossover
SOE. This primary grounding systems shall be connected to the auxiliary
ground electrodes of Pape Station and Sammon Crossover permanent
structures and building for the purposes of equipment grounding, safety
grounding, neutral grounding, and mitigating the stray current induced
corrosion of underground metal structures, including the reinforcing
rebars. This grounding system works as an isolated primary ground
electrodes system for Pape Station Support of Excavation (SOE) and
Sammon Crossover SOE as well. These are considered buried-
underground or concrete encased (imbedded-in-concrete) grounding
systems.

(a) Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcement
(b) Section 31 22 13 – Grading
(c) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

primary grounding systems shall be included within the appropriate

(a) Construction work must be completed in accordance with the latest
edition of the reference codes and standards listed in this section of the
specification and any other local rules and regulations required by the
authorities having jurisdiction (AHJ).
(b) In the event of a conflict amongst the reference standards, the order of
precedence shall be as set forth in this section of this specification,
unless otherwise specified.
(i) Province of Ontario Regulations
A. O. Reg, 164/99: The Ontario Electrical Safety Code, consisting
of CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 - Safety
Standard for Electrical Installations AND Ontario Amendments

to CSA C22.1, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1.
B. OESC Bulletin 36-10-22, High voltage grounding and bonding
Rules 10-212, 26-300, 36-300, 36-302, 36-304, 36-306, 36-
308, 36-310 and 36-312.
(ii) Canadian Standards Association (CSA)
A. CSA C22.2 No. 41, Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
(iii) Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
A. IEEE 80-2013, IEEE Guide for Safety in AC Substation
Grounding.
B. IEEE 81-2012, IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity,
Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a
Grounding System.
C. IEEE 837-2014, IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent
Connections Used in Substation Grounding.
(iv) InterNational Electrical Testing Association- NETA
A. ANSI/NETA ETT, Standard for Certification of Electrical
Testing Technicians.
(v) American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
A. ASTM B3, Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper
Wire.
B. ASTM B8, Standard Specification for Concentric Lay-Stranded
Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium, or Soft.

(a) Abbreviations:
(i) AC; Alternating Current
(ii) AHJ; Authority Having Jurisdiction
(iii) AWG; American Wire Gauge
(iv) ASTM: American Society for Testing Materials
(v) CEC; Canadian Electrical Code
(vi) CSA; Canadian Standards Association
(vii) DC; Direct Current
(viii) ECP; Exposed conductive parts

(ix) EXCP; Extraneous conductive parts
(x) IEEE; Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(xi) NEMA; National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(xii) NFPA; National Fire Protection Association
(xiii) OESC; Ontario Electrical Safety Code
(xiv) SOE; Support of Excavation
(xv) XLPE; Crosslinked Polyethylene
(b) Definitions:
(i) Ground electrode: a conductor imbedded in the earth, or encased
in concrete, and used for collecting ground current from, or
dissipating ground current into, the earth.
(ii) Auxiliary ground electrode: a ground electrode with certain design
or operating constraints. Its primary function may be other than
conducting the ground fault current into earth. Typical auxiliary
electrodes include underground metal structures and reinforcing
bars encased in concrete, if connected to the ground grid. Auxiliary
ground electrodes may have a limited current carrying capability.
(iii) Primary ground electrode: a ground electrode specifically designed
or adapted for discharging the ground fault current into the ground,
often in a specific discharge pattern, as required by the grounding
system design. Typical primary electrodes include such things as
ground grids, ground ring/loop, counterpoise conductors, ground
rods, and ground wells
(iv) Equipotential Bonding: Provision of electric connections between
conductive parts, intended to achieve equipotentiality, or the
electrical connection between various exposed conductive parts
and extraneous conductive parts at an equal potential.
(v) Exposed conductive part (ECP): A conductive part, forming part of
electrical equipment, which can be touched (even if out of reach)
and not live, but likely to become live when basic insulation fails.
ECPs are required to be connected to the same earthing system
individually, in groups or collectively, via a protective conductor.
(vi) Extraneous conductive part (EXCP): A conductive part, not forming
part of the electrical installation, and liable to introduce an electric
potential, generally the electric potential of a local earth/ground.
(vii) Equipotential Plane at Ground potential: Connection of

equipotential bonded network to auxiliary ground electrodes and
primary ground electrode to minimize voltage differences within the
plane and between the planes, the grounded equipment, and the
earth.

(a) Pre-construction meeting, shall be set up prior to arrival at the work site,
before starting the Work, with participation from the representatives of
the Contractor (Contractor’s Design Engineer, staff executing the work)
and Metrolinx Representative to reach to a common understanding of
scope of primary grounding system and project requirements, and
addressing potential constructability issues and the related activities.
(b) Grounding installation/construction needs to be sequenced with civil and
structural installation/construction work. Therefore, coordinate between
the grounding, civil, and structural construction contractors on when
electrical grounding connections to civil and structural components are
completed.
(c) Pape Station and Sammon Crossover SOE’s grounding system to be
connected to Pape Station and Sammon Crossover permanent
structures’ grounding system.

(a) Product Data:
(i) Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications
and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance
criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
(b) Manufacturer's Instructions:
(i) Provide manufacturer's written installation instructions and special
handling criteria, storage, cleaning procedure, installation
sequence, and any specific test or measurement required after
installation.
(c) As-built drawings:
(i) All deviations from construction issued drawings are to be
approved by Contractor’s Design Engineer. Contractor shall sign
all as built drawings to certify that the installation is in accordance
with materials specified, installation requirements and meet or
exceed test measurement performance expectations.
(d) Ground tests results, and its evaluation report(s):

(i) Provide ground test results along with its evaluation report, as
described in Section 1.8(c).

(a) Contractor is responsible for preparing as built drawing details and
submitted according to Section 1.7(c).
(i) All deviations from construction issued drawings are to be
approved by Contractor’s Design Engineer. Contractor shall sign
all as built drawings to certify that the installation is in accordance
with materials specified, installation requirements and meet or
exceed test measurement performance expectations.
(b) Installation verification report/checklist along with corrective action list
and related time schedule:
(i) As the grounding systems are installed, quality assurance
procedures are to be administered to verify that components are
installed in accordance with the requirements of this specification,
safety codes, manufacturers' recommendations, and acceptable
installation practices. Quality assurance discrepancies shall then
be identified and added to a “remedial/corrective action list”.
Corrective measures shall be identified and be implemented within
acceptable time span before performing the ground tests.
(c) Ground tests results, and its evaluation report(s):
(i) The ground tests results must be reviewed by the Metrolinx
Representative, construction and grounding contractors, and
quality assurance personnel to evaluate if all required tests are
performed and to verify that the tests results are within the
acceptable range.
(d) Ground tests reviews:
(i) When the ground tests results are acceptable, the Metrolinx
Representative or the designated reviewal authority reviews the
ground tests. It should be noted that even though the ground tests
are reviewed, problems that arise during the test (or areas not
covered) must be addressed
(e) Contractor is responsible for completing the following test
measurements:
(i) Interconnected primary and auxiliary electrodes system ground
resistance measurement according to IEEE 81-2012 guide. The
calculated ground potential rise, based on the measured ground

resistance, during an AC ground fault, shall not exceed 5000 volts
and the calculated step and touch voltages shall be lower than the
tolerable limits specified in Table 52 of OESC. If measured ground
resistance does not fulfill these requirements, provide additional
ground electrodes and interconnections to the grounding system
until the above requirement is fulfilled.
(ii) Integrity tests shall be completed between all bonding plates of
base slab, between all bonding plates of SOE panels, between
bonding plates of base slab and SOE Panels, and between
bonding plates of SOE panels and test wells to ensure effective
ground connections exist through bonding plates. Integrity tests
shall be completed according to methods described in Section 10
of IEEE 81-2012.
(f) Engage a qualified independent testing agent to inspect grounding and
perform ground resistance test after grounding system installation.
(g) Perform test measurements prior to completing construction efforts. If
construction is completed during winter months, measurements are to be
deferred until summer soil exist.
(h) Submit test result, including the calculated ground potential rise and step
and touch voltages, and inspection certificate.
(i) The following measures shall be taken by the construction contractor to
assure field quality control related to construction activities.
(i) For exothermic welding and irreversible compression connection
installation:
A. Use suitable workmanship,
B. Use proper type of weld metal and properly stored welding
material,
C. Use properly sized, clean, and healthy molds, and
D. Properly clean the conductors prior to exothermic welding and
irreversible compression crimping.
(ii) All exothermic welds shall be inspected according to
manufacturer’s recommendations to ensure a suitable weld has
been completed.
(j) Qualifications:
(i) Contractor’s Design Engineer as referred to in this specification
shall be a licensed Professional Engineer in the province of
Ontario.
(ii) Contractors are responsible for ensuring that work is performed by
staff that are qualified and adequately trained in using the
necessary tools, equipment, materials, and machinery required for
grounding installation.
(iii) Grounding system testing shall be performed by Level III, or higher
level, Electrical Testing Technicians in accordance with
ANSI/NETA ETT standard.
(k) Test Reports:
(i) Provide certified test reports of integrity test and measured ground
resistance according to latest edition of industry accepted
standards IEEE 81-2012.
1.9 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING

(a) Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions.
(b) Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:
(i) Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with
manufacturer's name and address.
(c) Storage and Handling Requirements:
(i) Store materials in dry location and in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated
area.
(ii) Store and protect materials from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
(d) It is the responsibility of the Contractor to keep all materials secure at the
worksite.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Driven electrodes (or Ground Rods): Ground rod dimensions and
material shall be, 19 mm diameter, 3 m long, and copper clad steel.
Ground rods are to be CSA C22.2 No. 41 certified.
(i) Application: Use ground rods to establish a ground connection to

ground (or earth).
(ii) Material reference: ERICO, (3/4”), part number 613400, or similar.
(b) Bare #4/0, Copper Conductor: Bare copper conductor size, type, and
material shall be, 1/C, No. 4/0 AWG bare copper, class A stranded - 7
strands total, soft drawn or annealed copper wire. Single copper
conductor to be soft drawn or annealed copper according to ASTM B3.
Concentric lay stranding for soft drawn or annealed copper according to
ASTM B8.
(i) Application: Use of bare copper conductor for interconnecting
direct buried ground electrodes (rods) to form a primary grounding
system.
(ii) Material reference: Southwire catalogue, #4/0, 7 strand, class A,
or similar.
(c) Direct Buried Insulated #4/0, Copper Conductor: Insulated copper
conductor size, type, and materials shall be, 1/C, No. 4/0 AWG, 1000 V
RWU90, insulated copper, class A stranded - 7 strands total, soft drawn
or annealed copper wire with black insulation. Single copper conductor
to be soft drawn or annealed copper according to ASTM B3. Concentric
lay stranding for soft drawn or annealed copper according to ASTM B8.
Insulation type is cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) with 1000V, -40°C
minimum, 90°C maximum and sunlight resistant rating with standard
black insulation.
(i) Application: Use of direct buried insulated #4/0 copper conductor
in areas near underground pipes when applicable.
(ii) Material reference: Southwire catalogue, #4/0, 7 strand, class A,
or similar.
(d) Reinforcing Bars Encased in Concrete: Steel rebar used for grounding
systems that are encased in concrete must be greater than 13 mm dia.
with continuous length of at least 6 m.
(i) Application: Steel rebar when encased in concrete may be used
as auxiliary ground electrodes when connected to a buried
grounding system.
(ii) Application: When bonded together through tight connections or
welding (if applicable), rebar is used to provide an equipotential
surface.
(iii) Material reference: Refer to concrete reinforcing specification 03

20 00 for material details that are included in reinforced concrete
works.
(e) Grounding Connectors: Grounding connector materials are specified as
exothermic weld type for below and above grade installations. However,
optional irreversible compression connectors may be used in some
connection applications.
(i) Below Grade: Exothermic weld type connectors:
A. Conductor – to – Conductor: Required to splice connections
from bonded structures to the buried grounding system.
(nVent Erico, Type SS, PC, TA, XA, XB, or similar).
B. Conductor – to – Ground Rod: Required to connect a
conductor to a ground rod. (nVent Erico, Type GR, GT, GY, or
similar).
C. Conductor – to – Rebar: Required for connections from
conductor to rebar. (nVent Erico, Type RR, RD, RC, RH, RJ,
or similar).
(ii) Below Grade: Irreversible Compression Connectors (optional):
(Burndy, Type YGHC-C or similar).
B. Conductor – to – Rebar: Required for connections from
conductor to rebar. (Burndy, Type YGHP-C Figure 6
Connector or similar).
(iii) Above Grade: Exothermic weld type connectors:
(nVent Erico, Type SS, PC, TA, XA, XB, or similar).
conductor to rebar. (Burndy, Type YGHP-C Connector or
similar).
(iv) Above Grade: Irreversible Compression Connectors (optional):
(Burndy, Type YGHC-C or similar).

conductor to rebar. (Burndy, Type YGHP-C or similar).
(v) Mechanical connector for concrete structures:
A. Bonding plate: Required for establishing a ground location on
the surface of the concrete base slab or SOE panel. The
bonding plate will be connected to the rebar with exothermic
weld connections via #4/0 AWG bare copper conductor,7
strand, class A. For the bonding plate to be IEEE 837
certified, a heavy-duty compression connector that is also
IEEE 837 certified must be connected.
(1) Material reference: Erico B1642Q Earthpoint, Four Stud;
or Burndy YGF29-4N type grounding plate, or similar.
B. Heavy duty terminal: Required for establishing a ground
connection from conductor to bonding plate. Connector to be
an irreversible compression terminal designed to carry short
circuit load and withstand high mechanical stress. Comes
prefilled with Penetrox compound and strip sealed. The lug is
a two-hole lug which supports 0.5” hardware and is tin plated.
(1) Material reference: Example #4/0 AWG terminal, Burndy
YGHA28-2N-TN or similar.
C. ½ “ stainless steel hardware. Bolts, flat washers and lock
washers required to connect the heavy-duty terminal to the
bonding plate.
(vi) Concrete Embedded Connectors: Connections inside the concrete
could be exothermic weld or irreversible compression connectors.
A. Bonding plate – to – Conductor: Within the concrete, the
bonding plate is to be connected to #4/0 AWG bare copper
conductor.
(1) Material option: For a pre-manufactured assembly to
include a bonding plate with a #4/0 bare copper
conductor, specify Erico part number B530-D-2Q-72.
This includes a bonding plate that is exothermically
welded perpendicularly to a seventy-two (72) inch #4/0
bare copper conductor which contains one tail for single
connection applications. Or suitable alternate material
option would be acceptable.
(2) Material option: For field assembled connections
between a bonding plate and a #4/0 bare copper
conductor specify, Burndy part number YGF29-4N. This

bonding plate allows for field crews to specify copper
conductor length as well as the number of perpendicular
conductor tails for connection(s) to rebar at one or two.
This part requires ordering and specifying #4/0 bare
copper conductor as a separate material item. Or
suitable alternate material option would be acceptable.
B. Conductor – to – Rebar: Clamp to connect the #4/0 copper
conductor to reinforcing rebars.
(1) Material reference: Burndy, Type YGHP-C Connector or
similar.
(vii) Test Well: A cylindrical access well shall have a size and material
which includes, 686mm (27 inch) diameter, 915mm (36 inch) depth
and constructed of polymer concrete.
A. Application: Use a test well to facilitate a point of connection
to a grounding system for test purposes. Testing may include
but is not limited to continuity tests to equipment and
grounding system resistance measurements.
B. Material Reference: Thermoweld catalogue, cylindrical access
well, part number 38-8185-00 or similar.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
(a) It is the Contractor’s responsibility for defining all the required equipment,
tools, and machinery that may be required to complete the installation.
The following is a non-exhaustive list of equipment that is required – and
shall be expanded upon by the Contractor as required:
(i) Exothermic welding equipment and necessary accessories.
(ii) Irreversible compression connector crimping tools and necessary
accessories.
(iii) Cable reel stands and handling equipment for installing copper
conductors.
(iv) Ground resistance test equipment.
(v) Continuity test equipment.
EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
(a) Equipotential planes shall be established by tightly connecting all
longitudinal and transverse rebars together and bonding them to a #4/0
bare copper conductor, 7 strand, class A, at 6 m intervals. The means of
bonding to rebars shall be by listed compressive/pressure connectors of
brass, copper, copper alloy, or an equally substantial approved means.
Equipotential planes shall be bonded together and to the primary
grounding system.
(b) Install continuous grounding system including, electrodes, conductors
and connectors as indicated to requirements of local authority having
jurisdiction.
(c) Install irreversible connectors and exothermic welds in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.
(d) Protect exposed grounding conductors and connectors during and after
construction.
(e) Design provisions which require conductor or connector to be prepared
for future installation are required to be protected from dust and moisture
(i.e., covered and sealed with 20 mil puncture resistant material).
(f) All buried or concrete encased connections to electrodes (ground rod)
and flat structure steel to use Exothermic welding process which is in
accordance with IEEE 837.
(g) All buried or concrete encased connections to rebar or copper conductor
to use exothermic welding process or irreversible compression
connectors which is in accordance with IEEE 837.
(h) Connections to bonding plates mounted on concrete surfaces of base
slab and SOE panels to be completed using a tin plated two - hole heavy
duty terminal that is connected to a copper conductor via irreversible
compression connection. Use stainless steel hardware to bolt the
terminal to the bonding plate which is torqued to specifications suitable
for the bolt size. In order for the bonding plate to be IEEE 837 certified, it
must be connected with a heavy duty two-hole terminal which is also
IEEE 837 certified.
(i) Use tinned copper conductors for applications where buried ground
conductors are nearby steel structures belonging to others.
(j) Use insulated copper ground cable for applications where ground
conductors are installed nearby buried pipes.
(k) All connections (exothermic weld or irreversible compression connectors)

require suitable preparation. Thoroughly clean surface area of
conductor, rebar, or flat steel plate of dirt, grease, oil, or any other
material or contaminants.
(i) For irreversible compression connections:
A. Ensure that anti-corrosion compound is spread over conductor
prior to crimping.
B. Follow manufacturer recommendations on handling tools and
proper use of accessories for an adequate irreversible
compression connection.
C. Follow manufacturer recommendations for checking the
integrity of irreversible compression connections. Ensure the
integrity checks are completed prior to encasing in concrete or
direct burial.
(ii) For exothermic welds:
A. Ensure that the welding material and mold are compatible with
the connection that is to be welded.
B. Ensure that molds are cleaned thoroughly after each weld.
Confirm with the manufacturer how many welds can be
completed per single mold before replacing with a new mold.
C. Follow manufacturer recommendations on handling tools and
proper use of accessories for an adequate exothermic
connection.
D. Follow manufacturer recommendations for checking the
integrity of welded connection. Ensure the integrity checks are
completed prior to encasing in concrete or direct burial.
3.2 PRIMARY ELECTRODE INSTALLATION

(a) Primary electrode installation looped around the SOE must be at one
meter from the outer surface of SOE.
(b) Install copper clad steel ground rod electrodes vertically to a depth such
that the top of the ground rod electrode is 0.9 m below finished grade.
The minimum ground rod length specified is three metres. Connections
between ground electrodes and conductor shall be exothermic welds.
(c) Interconnect the ground rods with #4/0 AWG bare copper conductor, 7
strand, class A, installed 0.9m below final grade.
(d) Test wells to be installed around the ground rods as specified on

Drawings. Buried connections between conductors shall be exothermic
weld or irreversible compression connectors. The test well to be
installed around ground rod vertically such that the top of ground rod and
the connecting cables are accessible and test well collar and cover are at
finished grade level. Conductor connections to the test well ground rod
may be connected mechanically for this application and location only.
(e) All trenching, backfill and compacting requirements must meet project
specification 31 22 13 Grading.
3.3 SUPPORT OF EXCAVATION GROUNDING – SLURRY WALL PANELS

(a) Pape station and Sammon Crossover support of excavation (SOE) slurry
wall includes reinforced concrete panels with various types of cross
sections that will be installed as per structural Drawings and
Specifications. Pretied rebar structure is used for reinforcement of the
panels.
(b) All pretied steel rebars of all wall panels to be connected tightly together,
to maintain electrical continuity through reinforcing rebars, in order to use
the steel rebars as auxiliary ground conductor. For details refer to the
Drawings.
(c) To maintain electrical continuity in reinforcing bars, the following must be
implemented:
(i) Rebar surface condition preparation to follow requirements from
OPSS 905.07.02.03.
(ii) Minimum two tie wires per 400 mm spacing of each splice shall be
used.
(iii) Firm connection of rebars is required to maintain electrical
continuity.
(d) A #4/0 bare copper conductor, 7 strand, class A, shall be installed
through all panels of each shaft and shall be connected to the steel
reinforcement rebars of all panels. For details refer to drawings
(e) For Pape Station, the #4/0 bare copper conductor connecting the pretied
steel rebars of SOE north shaft panels shall be connected to #4/0 bare
copper conductor connecting the pretied steel rebars of SOE south shaft
panels at two points (minimum) near the corners of shafts by two #4/0
bare copper wire installed at 0.9m below grade. For details refer to
drawings.
3.4 SUPPORT OF EXCAVATION GROUNDING – BASE SLAB

(a) Steel rebars of base slabs at each shaft of Pape Station and Sammon
Crossover shaft shall be connected tightly to maintain electrical
continuity through reinforcing rebars,
(b) To maintain electrical continuity in reinforcing bars, the following must be
implemented:
(i) Rebar surface condition preparation to follow requirements from
OPSS 905.07.02.03.
(ii) Minimum two tie wires per 400 mm spacing of each splice shall be
used.
(iii) Firm connection of rebars is required to maintain electrical
continuity.
(c) 3 #4/0 bare copper conductor, 7 strand, class A, shall be installed, in
parallel and with maximum distance from each other and from the
parallel edges of the slab, through each base slab and shall be
connected to the steel reinforcement rebars of base slabs. For details
refer to drawings
3.5 INTEGRATION OF PRIMARY GROUND ELECTRODE WITH AUXILIARY

GROUND ELECTRODES
(a) The followings shall be met to integrate the auxiliary ground electrodes of
wall panels and base slabs of SOE shafts with the primary ground
electrodes and with the Pape Station and Sammon Crossover
permanent structures auxiliary ground electrodes:
(i) #4/0 bare copper conductor connecting the pretied steel rebars of
each SOE shaft panels shall be connected to the primary ground
loop around the shafts at 30-metre intervals.
(ii) #4/0 bare copper conductor connecting the pretied steel rebars of
each SOE shaft panels shall be connected to a grounding plate on
the surface of SOE wall, close to the inner surface of the wall, at
30-metre interval for connection to the auxiliary ground of Pape
Station and Sammon Crossover.
(b) The 3 #4/0 bare copper conductors connecting to rebars of base slab in
each SOE shaft shall be connected to a grounding plate on the surface
of base slab, close to the edges of base slab, for connection to the
auxiliary ground electrodes of Pape Station and Sammon Crossover
SOE walls.
3.6 MANAGEMENT OF EXCESS MATERIAL

(a) Management of excess material shall be according to the Specifications
and Drawings.
(b) Waste Management and Disposal:
(i) Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling.
(ii) It is the responsibility of the construction Contractor to dispose of
any waste resulting from work completed at site in a manner which
meets Municipal, Provincial and Federal regulations.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Temporary Street Lighting
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for design, supply,
installation, operation and maintenance of new temporary street lighting,
and the operation and maintenance of Street Lighting Assets on
municipal Right of Way.

(a) Section 02 41 13 – Site Demolition
(b) Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning Program and Handover

(a) Measurement:
(b) Payment will be made for the following items:
(i) Item B.0.3 – Temporary Street Lighting.
(ii) This Item shall include:
A. Detailed Design for the temporary and permanent street
lighting assets and associated approvals.
B. Supply and installation of temporary Street Lighting Assets
C. Disconnect, remove, and dispose existing Street Lighting
Assets.
D. Supply and installation of permanent Street Lighting Assets.
(iii) This item is inclusive of all operation and maintenance
requirements of Street Lighting Assets within the Area of Transfer,
including coordination with THES for any inspections, testing or
assessment of the Street Lighting Assets as required for execution
of the Statement of Area of Transfer, and all requirements for the
eventual handback to THES and execution of the Statement of
Area of Transfer Return with THES.
(iv) Payment for this lump sum item shall be as follows:
A. 50% upon installation and Commissioning of the temporary
street lights and disconnection, removal and disposal of
existing lights.
B. 50% upon installation and Commissioning of the permanent

street lights, completion of handover and execution of the
Statement of Area of Transfer Return by THES.

(a) Ontario Electrical Safety Code.
(b) American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
(i) ANSI/IES RP-8-21 - Lighting Roadway and Parking Facilities.
(c) Toronto Hydro Streetlight Standard Drawings and Construction
Standards.

(a) Definitions:
(i) “Area of Transfer” means the physical space for which a valid
Statement of Area of Transfer is in effect.
(ii) “Baseline Inspection” has the meaning given to it in clause 3.1(b).
(iii) “Monthly Report” has the meaning given to it in Article 1.7(a)(iv).
(iv) “Service Response Standards” has the meaning given to it in
clause 3.1(l).
(v) “Statement of Area of Transfer” has the meaning given to it in
clause 3.1(b).
(vi) “Statement of Area of Transfer Return” has the meaning given to it
in clause 3.1(o).
(vii) “Street Lighting Assets” means the physical assets constituting the
street lighting systems within the Area of Transfer, including all
poles, standards, luminaries, fixtures, wires, ducts, reflectors,
relays, handwells and related equipment.
(viii) “THESL” means Toronto Hydro Electric Systems Limited.
(ix) “THESI” means Toronto Hydro Energy Services Inc.
(x) “THES” means Toronto Hydro Electric Systems Limited and
Toronto Hydro Energy Services Inc. collectively. THES owns
certain Street Lighting Assets and THESI provides street and
expressway lighting services to the City of Toronto including the
design, installation, maintenance, management, and operation of
the Street Lighting Assets.
(xi) “THES Specifications” means the standards and specifications

relating to the materials, design, construction and installation of
Street Lighting Assets developed by THES.

(a) Only the approved Subcontractors authorized by THES are permitted to
perform the Work covered under this section. The Contractor shall obtain
approval from THES for the authorized contractors who will be engaged
to work on THES street lighting assets.

(a) Submission requirements:
(i) Provide a copy of the executed Statement Area of Transfer
including all inspection, testing or assessment reports prior to
commencing the Work under this Section.
(ii) Submit design calculations, illumination levels analysis and design
drawings for all temporary Street Lighting Assets to the Metrolinx
Representative for review.
(iii) Provide a work plan for installation, operation and maintenance of
Street Lighting Assets within the Area of Transfer.
(iv) Provide to THES and the Metrolinx Representative no later than 10
Working Days after the last day of any calendar month, a written
report (the “Monthly Report”), setting out with respect to such
month:
A. Descriptions of all Work on Street Lighting Assets undertaken,
including descriptions of assets and equipment permanently or
temporarily installed in connection with such work, and all
services performed in the Area of Transfer; and
B. A complete PDF set of As-Built Drawings together with the
corresponding electronic files for any temporary Street Lighting
Assets installed.
(v) Provide a copy of the executed Statement Area of Transfer Return
including all inspection, testing or assessment reports
(b) Product Data:
(i) Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications
and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance
criteria, physical size, finish and limitations for Street Lighting
Assets.
(ii) Submit a Shop Drawing for each luminaire specified, including

lamp.
(iii) Lamp submittals are to consist of manufacturer’s technical data
with respective luminaire shop drawing. Submittal to include
operating wattage, rated life, colour temperature, base type, lamp
shape, CRI, voltage and mercury content.


(a) Contractor shall coordinate deliveries and arrange for suitable storage
locations at the Site to prevent damage during handling and storage.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) All Materials and Labour shall be based on Toronto Hydro approved civil
and electrical standards.
(b) Use only Toronto Hydro-approved materials and obtain all such materials
only from a Toronto Hydro approved supplier.
(c) Obtain inspection and validation that delivered materials are all Toronto
Hydro-approved materials obtained from Toronto Hydro-approved
suppliers.
(d) Obtain inspection and validation of field-installed materials.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Execute a Coordination Agreement and a Street Lighting Service and
Work Agreement with THES prior to performing any Work on Street
Lighting Assets.
(b) Execute a Statement of Area of Transfer with THES prior to, and for the
full term for performing the Work covered under this section (the
“Statement of Area of Transfer”). Prior to executing the Statement of
Area of Transfer, coordinate with THES and jointly undertake any
inspections, testing or assessment of all Street Lighting Assets as
required to determine the condition, state of repair and any defects in the
Street Lighting Assets (the “Baseline Inspection”). The Baseline
Inspection for Statement of Area of Transfer shall provide the baseline

condition of the relevant Street Lighting Assets, for the purpose of
eventual handback to THES in a condition no worse than determined in
the Baseline Inspection.
(c) Perform all locate services in connection with the Street Lighting Assets.
(d) Coordinate with THES, City and any other stakeholders for the removal
of existing Street Lighting Assets.
(e) Prior to removal of any existing street lighting, provide temporary street
lighting for vehicular and pedestrian traffic, including the electrical power
feeds, to be designed and constructed by the approved Subcontractor(s).
The temporary street lighting shall meet the illumination standards of
ANSI/IES RP-8-21.
(f) Maintain the Street Lighting Assets within the Area of Transfer in a
reasonable state of repair which shall in no circumstances be worse than
the condition of such Street Lighting Assets as recorded in the Baseline
Inspection;
(g) Operate and maintain the Street Lighting Assets within the Area of
Transfer to meet the illumination standards of ANSI/IES RP-8-21.
(h) Comply with the standards described in Tables 1 and 2 below with
respect to response times relating to repair and maintenance of the
Street Lighting Assets within the Area of Transfer (such standards, the
“Service Response Standards”).
Table 1 - Priority and Response Times
Priority Response Time
High Priority Within One and One Half (1 ½) Hours
Medium Priority By End of Next Business Day
Low Priority Within Ten (10) Business Days
Table 2 – Service Priority List
High Priority Medium Priority
- Street Lights All Out — No Power - 3 or More Consecutive Lamps Out
- Pole Down — Reported Accident
- Davit Arm or Bracket Low or Loose
- Fixture Facing Up or Sideways Low Priority
- Fixture Loose or Falling Off - Pole Leaning (not a safety hazard)
- Overhead Wire Low or Loose - Pole Damaged — Non-Reported Accident
- Cabinet Hit or Damaged - Pole Handhole Cover Missing
- Cabinet Door(s) Open - Back Guy Loose or Damaged
- Pole Leaning — Safety Hazard - Handwell Lid Broken or Missing
- Exposed Wires - Lamp out
(i) Provide a 24-hour call centre service which can receive and process
calls from THES, the City and the public with respect to the performance
of any of the foregoing services.
(j) For each failure to meet any of the Service Response Standards,
conduct a root cause analysis of such failure and provide such analysis
together with a remedial plan to prevent the recurrence of such failure to
THES within 30 Calendar Days of the end of the month in which such
failure occurred.
(k) After completion of the Work in the Area of Transfer and all Street
Lighting Assets have been cleaned and re-lamped, provide to THES a
Statement of Area of Transfer Return form (the “Statement of Area of
Transfer Return”) no fewer than 30 Working Days in advance of the
proposed date of termination of a Statement of Area of Transfer. The
Statement of Area of Transfer shall not be terminated without consent of
THES.
(l) Upon issuing the Statement of Area of Transfer Return form, permit
THES to undertake any inspections, testing or assessment of all Street
Lighting Assets in the Area of Transfer, that THES deems necessary, in
its sole discretion; and provide THES all data, records (including
invoices), operational records, log books, charts, maps, plans, drawings,
lists of materials, supplies and equipment, contracts and supporting
documentation maintained by the Contractor with respect to the Street
Lighting Assets in the Area of Transfer.
(m) In accordance with Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning Program and
Handover, Handover all Street Lighting Assets in good working order to
THES after the final inspection, approval and acceptance of the Street
Lighting Assets and execution of the Statement of Area of Transfer
Return by THES.
END OF SECTION
Division 31 – Earthwork
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Aggregates
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification describes the Contractor requirements for the supply,
storage and use of granular A as backfill material.


use of aggregates shall be included within the appropriate Agreement
item to which they pertain most closely.

(a) American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):
(i) ASTM D4791-89 - Test Method for Flat or Elongated Particles in
Coarse Aggregate (2010).
(ii) ASTM D698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction
Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (600 kN-m/m3).
(b) OPSS.MUNI 1010 Aggregates - Base, Subbase Select Subgrade, and
Backfill Material.

(a) For the purposes of the Work of this Section 31 05 17, the following
definitions shall apply:
(i) “Independent Laboratory and Sampling and Testing Company”
means the qualified specialist consultant engaged by the
Contractor required to complete the testing and inspection works
and possessing a minimum of 10 years’ experience in maintaining
field quality control operations, performing testing in the laboratory
and preparation of test reports and other submittals, , and being
certified by the Canadian Association of Environmental Analytical
Laboratories.
(ii) “Qualified Personnel Documentation” means the submittal required
from the Contractor to the Metrolinx Representative for review to
demonstrate that the qualifications and licenses of qualified
personnel are sufficient to carry out the responsibilities described

in this Section.


(a) The Contractor shall submit Qualified Personnel Documentation for the
Independent Laboratory and Sampling Testing Company for Metrolinx
Representative review.
(b) The Contractor shall prepare and submit Sieve Analysis Test Reports
documenting aggregate sieve analysis and testing results for Metrolinx
Representative review. Reports shall be submitted for each aggregate
source utilized on the project.
(c) The Contractor shall submit samples for review by the Metrolinx
Representative.

1.9 SAMPLES
(a) The Contractor shall inform the Metrolinx Representative, at least four
weeks prior to commencing production, of the proposed source of
aggregates, and shall provide access for sampling.
(b) The Contractor shall submit the source information of materials to be
incorporated into the Work or stockpiled for Metrolinx Representative
review.
(c) If, in the opinion of the Metrolinx Representative, materials from the
proposed source do not meet, or cannot reasonably be processed to
meet, specified requirements, the Contractor shall locate an alternative
source or demonstrate that the material from the source in question can
be processed to meet specified requirements.
(d) Should a change of materials source be proposed during the Work, the
Contractor shall advise the Metrolinx Representative a minimum of 20
Working Days in advance of the proposed change and shall provide
access to allow sampling and testing.
(e) The Contractor is advised that review of a material at source does not
ensure future acceptance if it is subsequently found to lack uniformity, or
if it fails to conform to specified requirements.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Granular A material (19mm max) as per OPSS.MUNI 1010.
(b) The Contractor shall ensure the aggregate quality meets all of the listed
requirements: sound, hard, durable material free from soft, thin,
elongated or laminated particles, organic material, clay lumps or
minerals, or other substances that would act in deleterious manner for
use intended.
(c) The Contractor shall ensure flat and elongated particles of coarse
aggregate are in accordance with ASTM D4791.
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
(a) Processing requirements:
(i) The Contractor shall ensure aggregates are processed uniformly
using methods that prevent contamination, segregation and
degradation.
(ii) The Contractor shall ensure aggregates are blended, if required, to
obtain gradation requirements, percentage of crushed particles, or
particle shapes, as specified. The Contractor shall use methods
and Equipment satisfactory to the Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) The Contractor shall wash aggregates, if required to meet the
Specification requirements.
(iv) The Contractor shall, when operating in stratified deposits, use
excavation Equipment and methods that produce uniform,
homogeneous aggregate.
3.2 HANDLING
(a) The Contractor shall handle and transport aggregates to avoid
segregation, contamination and degradation.
3.3 STOCKPILING
(a) The Contractor shall stockpile aggregates on Site only within designated
staging areas. The Contractor shall not stockpile on completed pavement
surfaces.
(b) The Contractor shall establish stockpiling Sites to be level, well drained,
and of adequate bearing capacity and stability to support stockpiled
materials and handling equipment.
(c) The Contractor shall, except where stockpiled on acceptably stabilized
areas, provide compacted sand base not less than 300 mm in depth to
prevent contamination of aggregate. The Contractor shall stockpile
aggregates on the ground but shall not incorporate the bottom 300 mm
of pile into the Work.
(d) The Contractor shall separate different aggregates by structurally
adequate, full depth bulkheads, or stockpile far enough apart to prevent
intermixing.
(e) The Contractor shall not use intermixed or contaminated materials. The
Contractor shall remove and dispose of materials rejected by the
Metrolinx Representative within 2 Working Days of rejection.
(f) The Contractor shall stockpile materials in uniform layers of thickness as
follows:
(i) Maximum 1.5 metres for coarse aggregate and base course
materials.
(ii) Maximum 1.5 metres for fine aggregate and sub-base materials.
(iii) Maximum 1.5 metres for other materials.
(g) The Contractor shall uniformly spot-dump aggregates delivered to
stockpile in trucks and shall build up stockpile as specified.
(h) The Contractor shall not cone piles or spill material over edges of piles.
(i) The Contractor shall not use conveying stackers.
(j) The Contractor shall, during winter operations, prevent ice and snow
from becoming mixed into stockpile or in material being removed from
stockpile.
3.4 CLEANING
(a) The Contractor shall leave aggregate stockpile Site in a tidy, well drained
condition, free from standing surface water.
(b) The Contractor shall leave any unused aggregates in neat compact
stockpiles to the satisfaction of the Metrolinx Representative.
3.5 PLACING
(a) Place on a clean surface, properly shaped and compacted and free from
snow or ice.
(b) Place material in layers not exceeding 150 mm when compacted.

(c) Spread each layer uniformly using approved grading equipment and
methods to depths and grades indicated in the Contract Drawings.
3.6 COMPACTING
(a) Compact each layer to minimum 100% Standard Proctor Maximum Dry
Density to ASTM D698.
(b) Add water as required to maintain material at or near optimum moisture
content while compacting.

(a) The Metrolinx Representative will review field and laboratory tests for
control of moisture, density and aggregate gradation. Results will control
Contractor's operations.
(b) The Contractor’s Quality Management System shall address the
following:
(i) The Contractor is responsible for all quality control activities to
ensure all aggregates meet the requirements of this Section 31 05
17.
(ii) The Contractor shall retain services of an Independent Laboratory
and Sampling and Testing Company in accordance with the
requirements of this Section 31 05 17 to perform source material
testing and prepare test reports and other submittals.
(c) The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all required tests and provide
copies of all results to the Metrolinx Representative on a daily basis. The
Contractor shall be responsible for all corrective action and re-testing of
materials, if corrective actions are required.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification describes the requirements for geotechnical
instrumentation and monitoring during excavation and construction of the
Works.
(b) The Contractor shall engage an Instrumentation Specialist Contractor
who shall supply, install, take control of preinstalled instrumentation,
commission the IDMS, host data, baseline, monitor, report monitoring
results, protect, maintain, and handover of geotechnical and structural
instrumentation to the Contract 2 Contractor, unless decommissioned
under this Contract. Following the baseline monitoring period, the
Contractor shall routinely monitor the instrumentation and disseminate
the monitoring data in accordance with the frequency of monitoring set
out in this Specification Section.

(a) Section 01 71 23 – Construction Surveying
(b) Section 02 22 00 – Existing Conditions Assessment
(c) Section 02 23 03 – Noise Monitoring
(d) Section 02 23 06 – Vibration Monitoring
(e) Section 02 23 23 – Noise and Vibration Instrumentation
(f) Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
(g) Section 31 23 16 – Shaft Excavation
(i) Section 31 43 00 – Jet Grouting
(j) Section 31 51 00 – Tieback Anchors
(k) Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers
(l) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls
(m) Section 01 71 23.16 - Construction Surveying
1.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAY ITEMS

(a) Measurement:
(b) Payment:
(i) Payment for Geotechnical Instrumentation installation and
monitoring shall be included under:
A. Item C.1.4– ‘Geotechnical Instrumentation - GIMP, Installation
& Monitoring’ (Pape Station SOE).
B. Item D.1.4– ‘Geotechnical Instrumentation - GIMP, Installation
& Monitoring’ Sammon SOE).
(ii) Each Item shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
A. The preparation and submission of submittal documentation
detailed in Clause 1.7 of this Section.
B. Instrumentation installation and monitoring within and outside
the Site.
C. Monitoring of instrumentation within Existing TTC
Infrastructure.
D. Monitoring of building monitoring points.
E. Integration of monitoring data into the IDMS.
F. Replacement of damaged instrumentation.
G. Handover of the Work in accordance with Schedule 8 –
Outline Commissioning program and Handover.
(iii) Each item excludes:
A. The installation and baseline monitoring for instrumentation
installed by others as detailed in Schedule 16 - Other
Contractors
B. The installation and monitoring of OSTs (wall targets). This
Work is considered incidental to other Works and costs shall
be included within the appropriate Agreement item to which
they pertain most closely.
(iv) Payment for each lump sum item shall be as follows:
A. 20% upon acceptance of the Contractor’s Instrumentation and
Monitoring Plan.
B. 30% upon the installation of all Geotechnical Instrumentation
and commissioning of the IDMS and including web based
access.
C. 50% on a monthly prorated basis commencing upon

installation of all the Geotechnical Instrumentation up to
completion of Handover of the Work in accordance with
Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning Program & Handover.
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS.

(a) Government of Ontario, R.R.O. 1990, Reg. 903: Wells.
(b) Canadian Geotechnical Society:
(i) Canadian Foundation Engineering Manual, 2006:
A. Chapter 3 - Identification and Classification of Soil and Rock.
(c) City of Toronto, Construction Standards – Piling and Shoring GN117SS
(d) American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM):
(a) ASTM C778 Specification for Standard Sand.
(b) ASTM 1785 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Sch 40, 80, and
120.
(c) ASTM D2488 – Standard Practice for Description and Identification
of Soils (Visual-Manual Procedure).
(d) ASTM D5434 – Guide for Field Logging of Subsurface Explorations
of Soil and Rock.

(a) Alert Level: Values of movement or drawdown for a specific geotechnical
instrument that require specific actions to be taken. Alert Levels can
comprise other terms including Action Level and Maximum Level. If the
Alert Level is reached, the Contractor shall cease construction
operations, make the site and affected properties secure, and take
necessary and agreed upon measures to mitigate unacceptable
movements and to assure the safety of the Works and the public.
(b) Baseline Period: period of monitoring of instruments after installation to
be completed by the Contractor to confirm proper installation, typical
environmental noise and movement and assess error band of instrument
readings.
(c) Geotechnical Instrumentation: Devices measuring groundwater levels,
surface and subsurface movement, and movement of existing
infrastructure. Includes measurement devices and appurtenant
equipment; including ancillary facilities required for their operation, such
as boreholes, casings, housings, and covers.
(d) Instrumentation and Data Management System (IDMS): A web

interpretation of that data.
(e) Instrumentation Specialist Contractor: A specialist geotechnical and
structural instrumentation monitoring organization with personnel
experienced in the supply, installation, monitoring and maintenance of
instrumentation monitoring systems for buildings, excavations and
underground works and who have a technical understanding, by
qualifications, of expected ground deformation behaviour from
construction works. The Instrumentation Specialist Contractor does not
need to be a separate organization from the Contractor if the Contractor
operates a dedicated division of their organization that specializes, and
markets itself, as a geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring
contractor.
(f) Response Criteria: The movement criteria that consists of the "Review
Level" and the "Alert Level".
(g) Review Level: Values of movement or drawdown for a specific
geotechnical instrument that require specific actions to be taken. This is
the value at which the Contractor assesses the necessity of altering
methods, rate or sequence of construction to control the effects of the
construction.
(h) Survey Reference Point: Location established to monitor by optical
survey methods the occurrence and amount of displacement in the x,y
and z axes.
(i) Trigger Level: Intermediate value less than the Alert Level (or Action
Level or Maximum Level) for a specific geotechnical instrument that
serves as a trigger for additional remedial measures to be implemented.

(a) Archaeologic monitoring requirements are to be followed for all ground
disturbance activities in accordance with Schedule 10 – Environmental
Obligations of the Agreement.

(a) Submit an Existing Conditions Assessment Report, for the pre-
construction portion of the works in accordance with Specification
Section 02 22 00 – Existing Conditions Assessment.
(b) Submit an Instrumentation Installation Plan, which will include the

following:
(i) Summary table for all instrument installations by number and
location, showing date and time of installation.
(ii) Description of baseline reading procedures for each instrument
with intended baseline period.
(iii) Initial monitoring readings schedule to obtain baseline readings.
(iv) Manufacturer’s descriptive literature, including technical
specifications, installation procedures, and operating and
maintenance manuals, for proposed instrumentation. For vibrating
wire instruments, include manufacturer’s calibration testing results.
(v) Description of drilling method for inclinometers, vibrating wire
piezometers, extensometers and any other borehole instruments.
(vi) Sample of boring log.
(vii) Mix designs for grout backfill appropriate for instrumentation type.
(viii) Calibration certificates for each instrument.
(ix) Sample as-built record and baseline reports for each instrument
type.
(c) Action Response Plan, which will include the following:
(i) Provide details of actions to be taken in the case that settlement,
lateral movement, opening convergence, strains, or groundwater
drawdown exceed the Response Criteria indicated herein.
(ii) Clearly define division of responsibility between Contractor and the
(iii) A contact list of Stakeholders including daytime contact person and
nighttime contact person.
(iv) Operational changes to reduce the rate of ground or structural
movements, and groundwater drawdown.
(d) Qualifications for the following:
(i) Instrumentation Specialist Engineer.
(ii) Instrumentation Technician.
(iii) Surveyor.
(e) As built record including:
(i) location data (northing, easting and elevation)
(ii) installation details of each instrument after completion of

installation of each instrument.
(iii) Boring logs for instrumentation installed in after completion of
borehole, including recorded test data.
(f) Baseline reports, including data, for each instrument within after
completion of baselining.
(g) Data Reports including:
(i) Monitoring data collected through data loggers shall be uploaded
into the web-based instrumentation portal within 1 hour of the
reading.
(ii) Monitoring data collected through manual survey shall be uploaded
into the web-based instrumentation portal within 24 hours of the
reading.
(iii) A summarized weekly Monitoring Report is required for the
previous week regardless of exceedances. The report should have
a narrative that covers all anomalous readings and non functioning
instrumentation should also be summarized with a reason why the
instrument is not functioning and the tentative schedule for repair
or replacement.
(h) Instrument Replacement Plan: if an instrument is repaired, replaced, or
moved subsequent to installation record, submit new instrumentation
type, as-built location, and calibration sheets. Report the reason the
original instrument was altered and the date the new instrument was
operational.
(i) A plan for the transfer of ownership of instrumentation with including
borehole logs, all raw data and other completed forms and documents.

(a) Qualifications:
(i) Instrumentation Specialist Engineer:
A. Provides direct supervision (including full-time supervision in
the field) for all instrumentation activities described in this
Section, including procurement of all instrumentation and
accessories.
B. Professional Engineer currently registered in the Province of
Ontario with a minimum of 5 years of experience designing,
installing, and monitoring instrumentation systems similar to

those described in the Contract Documents.
C. The Specialist shall be available to attend site within 24 hours
and be available for calls within 2 hours during standard
working hours.
(ii) Instrumentation Technician:
A. Provides on-site support to the Instrumentation Specialist
Engineer for installation, monitoring, troubleshooting and
repair, protection and maintenance of geotechnical and
structural instrumentation.
B. Instrumentation Technician shall have not less than three (3)
years of recent experience working on projects of similar type,
size, and complexity, in a similar role.
(iii) Surveyor:
A. Provides supervision for all surveying activities.
B. Experienced monitoring surveyor with a minimum of 5 years
direct monitoring experience or a summary of works
acceptable to the Metrolinx Representative.
(b) Calibration:
(i) Field Calibration is not considered an acceptable practice and all
calibration works should be conducted by a suitably certified lab for
each instrument.
(ii) Records of calibration and instrumentation tolerances shall be
submitted as per Section 1.7.
(c) The Metrolinx Representative must be informed of all scheduled works
and may observe instrumentation installation, repairs, and
decommissioning activities.
(d) Confirm proper function of all instruments upon completion of installation.
(e) Provide and maintain readout units and monitoring equipment to the
Metrolinx Representative to verify proper function and monitoring of
instrumentation for the duration of the Project.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Cement-bentonite grout backfill mix for all instrumentation installations:
as per recommended instrument manufacturers’ recommendation or
otherwise recommended by the Instrumentation Specialist and approved

(b) Bentonite: Premium grade Wyoming sodium montmorillonite or approved
equal.
(c) Sand: Filter Sand to meet all necessary environmental requirements in
accordance with the Agreement, Schedule 10 – Environmental
Obligations.
(d) Water: Potable, clean, and free of impurities that will affect the strength
or gel development of the backfill mix.
(e) Concrete: Refer to Specification Section 03 30 00 for requirements.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
(a) General:
(i) Provide all instruments and accompanying equipment and
accessories, as specified herein. Metrolinx will retain all products
obtained for this Project.
(ii) Where instrument model numbers are given in this Section,
interpret them to represent models selected on the basis of factory
specifications.
(iii) Only use signal cables for instruments provided by the
manufacturer of the associated instrument and suitable for the
expected environment.
(iv) Store all instrumentation and related materials in a secured area
on site, within temperature and humidity limits recommended by
manufacturers, and protected from damage, dirt, dust, or other
foreign materials.
(v) All instrumentation locations are indicated in the Drawings.
(b) Inclinometers (In-Place Inclinometer System and Manual Probe
Inclinometer System):
(i) In-Place Inclinometer System:
A. Slope Indicator Co. (Division of Durham Geo), Serial HD In-
Place Inclinometer bi-axial sensor system, model 57804722,
or approved equal. Sensor wheels to suit 70 mm outer
diameter casing, sensor wheel model 57805342.
B. Gauge length: 1,000 mm.
C. Range: ±10 degrees from vertical.
D. Resolution: 0.04 mm per 1,000 mm / 9 arc seconds.

E. Repeatability: ±0.1 mm per 1,000 mm / ±22 arc seconds.
F. System Accuracy: ±2 mm per 25 m.
G. System components should include:
(1) MEMS (micro electro-mechanical systems) tilt sensor for
inclination readings (in-place inclinometer probe with
protective stainless steel tubing and waterproof
connectors, coupled to provide an in-place sensor string).
(2) Tubing, to suit gauge length, (model 57805321 for 1,000
gauge length).
(3) Bottom plug.
(4) Signal (jumper) cable.
(5) Top suspension kit.
(6) In-line suspension kit.
(7) Datalogger, Campbell Scientific CR1000.
(8) Data collection & transfer software.
(9) Data reduction software.
(ii) Manual Probe Inclinometer System:
A. Slope Indicator Co. (Division of Durham Geo), Digitilt Classic
Inclinometer System, model 50302510, or approved equal.
B. Wheel Base: 500 mm.
C. Range: ±30 degrees from vertical.
D. Resolution: 0.01 mm.
E. System Accuracy: ±6 mm per 25 m.
F. System components should include:
(1) Digitilt DataMate II Readout.
(2) Pulley Assembly / 70 mm cable grips.
(3) Control Cable, 100 m.
(4) Cable Storage Reel or Slip-Ring Reel.
(5) Silicone spray for probe / cable connectors.
(6) Data collection & transfer software.
(7) Data reduction software.

(iii) Casing:
A. Slope Indicator Co. (Division of Durham Geo), Model
51150210, or approved equal.
B. Material: Acrylonitrile/butadiene/styrene (ABS) with internal
grooves at 90-degree intervals.
C. Diameter: 70 mm outer diameter, 59 mm inner diameter.
D. Spiral misalignment: No more than 0.10 degree per metre.
E. Couplings, top and appropriate anchor: As provided by casing
manufacturer.
F. Casing cement (if used): As recommended by manufacturer
for temperature and humidity conditions at the site.
G. Ancillary equipment: As recommended by casing manufacturer
for a complete and functional system.
(iv) Tremie Tube:
A. Continuous polyethylene or approved equal.
B. Minimum ID: 19 mm.
C. Wall thickness: Sufficient to withstand external hydrostatic
pressure and internal grout pressure.
(v) Backfill: Grout backfill mix specified in Cl. 2.1 of this Specification
Section.
(vi) Traffic Covers: As shown in the Contract Documents.
(c) Settlement and Utility Monitoring Points:
(i) As shown in the Drawings.
(ii) System Accuracy Requirements:
A. The accuracy requirements established in this Section apply to
the final data, including the composite effects of reflectors,
readout instruments, measurement methods, temperature,
operator variability, and other contributing factors.
B. Accuracy – General:
(1) Within +/- 2 mm vertical and horizontal.
(iii) Traffic Covers: As shown in the Drawings. Must be rated for Road
Traffic.
(d) Building Monitoring Points:

(i) Use control points as shown in the Drawings, or alternative if
acceptable accuracies can be proven.
(ii) System Accuracy Requirements:
A. The accuracy requirements established in this clause apply to
the final data, including the composite effects of reflectors,
readout instruments, measurement methods, temperature,
operator variability, and other contributing factors.
B. Accuracy – General:
(1) Within +/- 2 mm vertical and horizontal.
(e) Vibrating Wire Piezometers:
(i) Slope Indicator Co. (Division of Durham Geo), Model 52611040, or
approved equal.
(ii) Housing: Stainless steel.
(iii) Include integral thermistors for temperature measurement.
(iv) Measurement requirements:
A. Resolution: Within 0.025 percent of full scale.
B. Accuracy: Within ±0.01 percent of full scale.
C. Minimum Range: 600 kPa (6 bar).
(v) Provide instrumentation cable for each vibrating wire piezometer
installed. Provide cable length equal to installed depth plus one (1)
metre.
(vi) Readings are made from each vibrating wire piezometer cable with
a datalogger.
(vii) Backfill: Grout backfill mix specified in Cl. 2.1 of this Specification
Section.
(viii) Traffic Covers: As shown in the Contract Documents.
(f) Multipoint Borehole Extensometers (MPBX):
(i) Use four-position MPBXs to measure subsurface settlement.
(ii) Anchors and Rods:
A. Four (4) groutable (made from rebar, 19 x 365 mm [0.75 x
14.5]) anchors per MPBX installation, set at depths as
indicated. Use Slope Indicator Co. (Division of Durham Geo),

Model 51815852, or approved equal.
B. Noncorrosive (stainless steel, or approved equal) rods
individually sheathed in protective tubing.
C. Rod spacers to space and support rods.
D. Provide anchors that can monitor at least 50 mm of heave and
150 mm of settlement.
E. All necessary couplings, caps, fittings, installation tools, and
accessories.
(iii) Vibrating Wire Displacement Transducers:
A. With integral thermistor.
B. Range: 200 mm.
C. Resolution: 0.0025 percent of full scale.
D. Calibration Accuracy: ±0.01 percent of full scale.
(iv) Traffic Covers: As shown in the Contract Documents.
(v) Backfill: Grout backfill mix specified in Cl. 2.1 of this Specification
Section.
(g) Tiltmeters:
(i) Slope Indicator MEMS Tiltmeter 57803102, or approved
equivalent.
A. Biaxial.
B. Range: ± 10 degrees.
C. Resolution 9 arc seconds.
D. Repeatability: ± 22 arc seconds.
E. Manufacturer designed mounting bracket.
F. Suitable anchor as approved by manufacturer or
Instrumentation Specialist.
G. Integral cable of sufficient length that the unit can be read
without splicing cable.
(h) EL Beam Sensors:
(i) Slope Indicator EL Beam Sensor, 1 m Horizontal Beam 56801312
or approved equivalent.
A. Uniaxial electrolytic tilt sensor designed to fit inside a

horizontal beam. The standard version of the tilt sensor works
with CR10X, CR800, CR1000 data loggers and uses a 3-wire
connection. The SC version of the tilt sensor works with other
data loggers and readouts.
B. Range: ±40 arc minute (±11 mm/m).
C. Resolution: 1 arc second or better, depending on the data
logger used. (0.005 mm/m or 0.00006 inch per foot).
D. Repeatability: ± 3 arc seconds (±0.015 mm/m or 0.00018 inch
per foot).
E. Adjustment Range: Sensor can be zero adjusted ±4° without
moving beam.
F. Operating Temperature: –20 to +50°C
(i) Data Loggers:
(i) Compatible with installed vibrating wire or MEMS instruments.
(ii) Vibrating Wire Piezometers:
A. Slope Indicator Co. (Division of Durham Geo) Mini Logger,
Model No. 52613310.
B. Complete with cable and software to connect to Windows-
based laptop computer.
(iii) Vibrating Wire Displacement Transducers:
A. Slope Indicator Co. (Division of Durham Geo) VW Quattro
Logger, Model No. 52614000.
B. Complete with cable and software to connect to Windows-
based laptop computer.
(iv) Ensure data loggers are capable of checking each sensor at least
once every 2 minutes.
(j) Optical Survey Targets:
(i) Surveyor’s prisms or reflectors compatible with the survey
equipment used and capable of providing measurements within the
specified tolerances.
(k) Convergence Reference Point (CRP) and Tape Extensometer:

(i) Provide permanent measurement points: eye bolts, expansion
anchors, or approved equal, suitable for the type of initial support
installed. Number as indicated in the Contract Documents.
(ii) Tape extensometers: sufficient length for the distances to be
measured. Accuracy to be ± 0.1 mm.
(l) Tell Tales and Crack Gauges
(i) Allows for Manual Reading of identified cracks.
(ii) Grid or other manual based measurement accurate to +/- 1 mm in
two (2) axes
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Geotechnical conditions to be anticipated are presented in the
Agreement: Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR) and the Geotechnical
Data Reports (GDRs).
(b) Engage an Instrumentation Engineer in accordance with Cl. 1.8 (a) of
(c) Characterize and dispose of all waste generated by the Work in
accordance with Specification Section 02 42 00 – Removal and Salvage
of Construction Materials, and Specification Section 31 20 01 – Muck
and Excavated Materials Disposal.
(d) Incorporate the Ontario Line Control network (OL2020) into the
Geotechnical and Instrumentation monitoring program.
(e) Incorporate the Deep Bench Marks that will be provided by Metrolinx into
the Geotechnical and Instrumentation monitoring program and other
applications where stable vertical benchmarks are required.
(f) Allow sufficient time for all instrumentation installation, baseline readings,
and associated work in the construction schedule.
(g) Inform Metrolinx Representative with a 36 hr minimum advanced notice
to allow the Metrolinx Representative to observe installation of any
instrumentation.
(h) Install all instrumentation complete and functional. Replace
instrumentation that does not meet specified requirements at own
expense.
(i) Do not begin construction activities requiring monitoring and

instrumentation until one (1) week after baseline measurements have
been approved by the Metrolinx Representative, and only following
written acceptance from the Metrolinx Representative.
(j) Contractor is responsible for locating utilities or other facilities before
installing instrumentation that involves digging and/or drilling.
(k) Provide at least one (1) week notification prior to the start of the
instrumentation installation work to the Metrolinx Representative.
(l) Regular Monitoring Meetings shall be scheduled at minimum of a
monthly interval with the Metrolinx Representative.
3.2 BOREHOLE INSTRUMENTATION – DRILLING, GROUTING,

PREPARATION, ACCESS AND PROTECTION
(a) Coordinate with Archeological Subject Matter Expert (SME) for
archaeologic monitoring for all ground disturbance activities in
accordance with the Agreement, Schedule 10 – Environmental
Obligations.
(b) For instruments installed in boreholes: drill cased boreholes in fills and
soil, or open / uncased holes in bedrock for installation of instruments.
Drill boreholes of different lengths and diameters as indicated in the
Drawings. Use drilling methods that are approved by the Metrolinx
Representative, including rock coring methods for the bedrock drilling.
(c) Redrill holes which are unacceptable to the Metrolinx Representative due
to misalignment or other irregularities as directed by the Instrumentation
Specialist. Backfill abandoned holes in accordance with current O.Reg.
903 standards.
(d) Prior to installing instruments, remove material adhering to inside of
casing or augers, and cuttings.
(e) When withdrawing drill casing or augers during instrument installation in
borehole, minimize length of unsupported borehole and rate of casing or
auger withdrawal. Do not permit collapse of boreholes. Withdraw casing
or auger without rotation. Casing or auger may be omitted, if accepted by
the Metrolinx Representative, only where it can be shown that instrument
installation without casing or auger will not cause collapse of borehole or
adversely affect instrument installation.
(f) Take precautions to protect instruments or devices during and after
installation. Replace instruments or devices that are damaged due to
performance of Work.
(g) Install protection to exposed parts of instruments, including traffic covers,

as indicated by manufacturer’s documents or as required by
Instrumentation Specialist.
(h) Mix grout using equipment capable of thoroughly mixing grout material to
uniform consistency. Place grout using tremie method, where applicable,
with side discharge ports on tremie pipe.
(i) Use cabling that is durable and suitable for the proposed locations, keep
splicing of cabling to a minimum by supplying appropriate lengths. Coil or
snake cabling to ensure adequate slack in the case of ground
movement. Protect cabling by burying or placing in conduit in areas
accessible to the general public or likely to be damaged by construction
activity.
3.3 INSTALLATION LOCATIONS AND BASELINING

(a) General:
(i) Install at locations as shown in the Drawings, unless otherwise
directed by the Metrolinx Representative.
(ii) Install all instruments and make operational, with acceptable
baseline readings as confirmed by the Instrumentation Specialist
and the Metrolinx Representative.
A. Provide baseline readings for all manually read instruments
by:
(1) By taking weekly measurements for a minimum of four
(4) months prior to the start of significant construction.
(2) Taking each baseline reading at least 3 Calendar Days
after the previous measurement.
B. Provide baseline data for autonomously collected instruments
by collecting 4 equally spaced daily data points for no less
than four (4) months.
(iii) Notify the Metrolinx Representative immediately if conflicts are
encountered during installation of any instrumentation.
(iv) Survey location of each instrument upon installation and provide in
the OL2020 GCS.
(v) Unless otherwise specified, install all instruments in accordance
with the manufacturer’s recommendations and requirements.
Follow manufacturer’s requirements for handling of instruments,
and alignment of instruments during installation.
(vi) For instruments installed in boreholes, perform the following:

A. Obtain continuous core through bedrock and preserve in wood
core boxes.
B. Describe rock samples in accordance with the Metrolinx
Representative’s logging requirements. Descriptions shall
include photographs of the wetted core samples and all
samples are to be retained until such time as the Metrolinx
Representative approves of its disposal.
(b) Inclinometers:
(i) Install inclinometer casings to the depths listed in the Drawings. 1.5
m into Type 17 bedrock and about 2 m from the base of the
panels.
(ii) Install inclinometer such that the bottom of casing is within 1
degree of vertical, referenced to the top of the casing at the ground
surface.
(iii) Install casing as recommended by casing manufacturer except
where otherwise specified.
(iv) Seal all joints and install bottom groutable anchor to prevent grout
entry.
(v) Attach tremie tube to outside of casing using wire or tape. Align
end of tube to be even with bottom of casing, to allow filling of
borehole from the bottom up. Block bottom of the tremie tube to
force grout through side ports.
(vi) Orient inclinometer casing so that the orthogonal grooves are
positioned parallel and perpendicular to the expected direction of
movement as directed by the Metrolinx Representative, typically
perpendicular to the long axis of the excavation, tunnel, or retaining
wall. Temporarily close top of casing to prevent entry of foreign
material.
(vii) Fill casing with water or other acceptable ballast and anchor casing
as required to prevent uplift during installation.
(viii) Fill the annular void between the drill hole and the inclinometer
casing with backfill grout in one continuous stage, pumped through
the tremie tube. Collect at least one sample of backfill grout in a
75 mm diameter jar at time of installation to verify setting time.
(ix) Do not install protective cap or otherwise disturb inclinometer for a

minimum of 24 hours after installation, or until backfill grout has
set.
(x) Remove water and silt / debris as completely as feasible. No
material or water should be allowed to interfere with
measurements. This includes but is not limited to soil debris and
frozen water.
(xi) Install traffic cover as shown in the Specifications and Drawings,
centering the inclinometer casing inside the cover.
(c) Utility Monitoring Points (UMP):
(i) Utility owner representative may be required on site during
installation. Coordinate installation with utility owners as required.
(ii) Remove pavement (if present) over utility by coring or cutting.
Minimize area of pavement removal.
(iii) If accepted by utility owner; excavate to top of utility using vacuum
truck, hand auger, or other suitable method (no mechanical
excavation). If not offset the UMP to the minimum acceptable
distance by the utility owner and excavate to the design or as-built
invert of the utility. Do not damage utility during excavation.
(iv) Install temporary casing, trench box, or similar protective
equipment as required to provide safe support and access for
installation of Utility Monitoring Point.
(v) Install as shown in the Specifications and Drawings.
(vi) Install traffic cover as shown in the Specification and Drawings.
(d) Ground Monitoring Points (GMP):
(i) Install as shown in the Specifications and Drawings.
(ii) Install traffic cover as shown in the Specifications and Drawings.
(e) Building Monitoring Points (BMP):
(i) Install as shown in the Specifications and Drawings.
(ii) Place Building Control Points directly on a structural column or
wall, and not on an architectural element (façade) or moving
element such as a door, gate, or window frame.
(iii) Coordinate installation with the Metrolinx Representative.
(f) Vibrating Wire Piezometers (VWP):

(i) Support all downhole components during installation to prevent
damage.
(ii) Measure the depth of the sensor by measuring the length of sensor
and signal cable in the casing, to the nearest 30 mm.
(iii) Soak piezometers in clean water at surface, for a period as
directed by the manufacturer prior to installation. Ensure
piezometers are not subject to freezing temperatures while soaked
prior to installation.
(iv) Install piezometers at the depths indicated in the Specifications
and Drawings or as directed by the Instrumentation Specialist with
the porous tip of the piezometer facing up with the borehole
backfilled with approved grout design.
(v) Keep accurate records of the depths of the piezometers and any
seals, and record readings at each stage of the installation to
ensure piezometer is working, prior to grouting.
(vi) Backfill around piezometer and boring with backfill grout mix, as
specified herein.
(vii) Install traffic cover as shown in the Specifications and Drawings.
(g) Multipoint Borehole Extensometers (MPBX):
(i) Drill borings for the extensometer of a diameter as recommended
by the instrument manufacturer to provide a borehole in which to
install the anchors and rods.
(ii) Install MPBXs into boreholes. Install borehole, anchor, rod, and
housing in a manner to ensure that the anchor is fixed and that the
rod and head are free to move independently of the anchor. Fix a
level survey point to the top of the reference head of the
extensometer to allow precise levelling back to a datum.
(iii) Bundle and install extensometer anchors in one installation at the
depths indicated in the Specifications and Drawings.
(iv) Backfill around extensometers and anchors with backfill grout mix,
as specified herein.
(v) Install traffic cover as shown in the Specifications and Drawings.
(h) Tiltmeters (TM):
(i) Install on face of wall or structure in location indicated in the
(ii) Install Tiltmeters directly on structural concrete not on façade or

overlain materials.
(i) Electrolevel Beam Sensors (ELB):
(i) Install on face of wall straddling the joint in location indicated in the
(ii) Install ELB directly on structural concrete not on façade or overlain
materials.
(j) Optical Survey Targets (OST):
(i) Install as shown on the Specifications and Drawings.
3.4 PROTECTION
(a) Execute the Work in such a manner that impacts to instrumentation are
avoided.
(b) Preventative – appropriate physical protections should:
(i) Be installed in a manner that does not hamper the function of the
instruments and allow for regular maintenance and communication
access.
(ii) Protect from typical construction activities and disturbances in the
area.
3.5 MAINTENANCE
(a) Maintain all instrumentation in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommended procedures and schedules.
(b) Replace installations if they are damaged, malfunctioning or if they
become inaccessible based on direction from Metrolinx Representative.
(c) Replacements shall be done at a maximum of one (1) week after
notification. Critical Instruments as directed by the Metrolinx
Representative shall be replaced within 2 Business Days or as approved
by Metrolinx Representative.
(d) Report all damaged or non-functional instrumentation to the Metrolinx
Representative immediately upon discovery, prior to attempted recovery
or restoration.
3.6 MONITORING
(a) General:
(i) Following the baseline period, the Contractor, under the guidance
of the Instrumentation Specialist and the Metrolinx Representative,
will monitor each instrument at the frequency specified herein.
During suspension of construction activities, frequencies may be
reduced as agreed upon with the Metrolinx Representative.
(ii) The Contractor or shall in no way impeded regular or emergency
access to all instrumentation, so as to not delay the monitoring
unnecessarily.
(iii) The Instrumentation Engineer shall provide instrumentation data to
the Metrolinx Representative within 24 hours of obtaining the data.
(iv) When instruments detect abrupt changes, as determined by the
Instrumentation Engineer, in measured values that exceed the
response criteria, or other notable conditions, the Contractor will
take additional readings as Directed by the Metrolinx
Representative.
(b) Response Levels:
(i) Response Criteria are listed on the Contract Drawings,
(ii) When instrumentation data exceed the Response Criteria,
implement the procedures specified herein.
(c) Exceeding Trigger Levels of Instrument:
(i) Upon Contractor notifying the Metrolinx Representative of an
exceedance the Metrolinx Representative will verify measurements
and notify the Contractor immediately of the verified results.
(ii) The Metrolinx Representative will inform the Contractor of any
increase in the frequency of future monitoring of that instrument
and adjacent instruments.
(iii) The Contractor shall undertake the increased monitoring until such
time as the Metrolinx Representative instructs otherwise.
(iv) Implement procedures as specified in the Corrective Action Plan to
limit further movements.
(v) Regular weekly meetings shall be coordinated by the Contractor
until regular unmodified monitoring resumes or otherwise
instructed by the Metrolinx Representative.
(d) Exceeding Response Criteria:

(i) The Instrumentation Engineer shall verify the exceeded
measurement and, upon verification notify the Metrolinx
Representative, immediately.
(ii) For all values exceeding Response Criteria, and depending on
conditions, the Metrolinx Representative may suspend excavation
and associated activities at that location, and require the
Contractor to submit alternative proposals for minimizing further
movements.
(iii) If work is suspended, obtain approval from the Metrolinx
Representative prior to restarting excavation at that location, under
approved procedures.
3.7 RESPONSE CRITERIA (REVIEW AND ALERT LEVELS)

(a) Refer to the tables of response criteria on the instrumentation drawings
for instruments installed at specific locations within or close to the Works
for the Review Level and Alert Level values.
3.8 MONITORING FREQUENCY

(a) Refer to the Monitoring Frequency Schedule in the Contract Drawings
document for the frequency, and expected duration of monitoring for
each instrument type.
3.9 DECOMMISSIONING
(a) Should it be requested by Metrolinx Representative decommission all
borehole instruments in accordance with provincial regulatory
requirements. Do not decommission instruments without written approval
from the Metrolinx Representative.
(b) The only anticipated instrumentation to be decommissioned is that which
is no longer serviceable due to damage or conflicted location.
(c) Restore the ground surface to match the surrounding ground surface.
(d) Handle and dispose of all waste, groundwater, and soil generated during
decommissioning in accordance with regulatory requirements, with the
Construction Agreement, Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations,
Specification Section 02 42 00 – Removal and Salvage of Construction
Materials, and Specification Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated
Materials Disposal.
3.10 INSTRUMENTATION HANDOVER

(a) Instrumentation shall be made ready to the subsequent user and all
installation, maintenance and measurement data shall be provided to the
(b) Data shall be supplied in the following formats, editable MS Excel
spreadsheets, comma separated values files (CSV) and printed and
formatted PDF files.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Tree Clearing and Grubbing
Part 1 GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for clearing that consists of
clearing and grubbing trees, brush, bushes, and other vegetation.
(b) The Contractor’s Work includes:
(i) Tree clearing, tree pruning and tree protection in accordance with
the Arborist Report, Drawings Specifications and Agreement.
(ii) Chemical vegetation control measures.
(c) Work locations - Work shall be performed as identified in the Arborist
Report, Contract Drawings, Specifications and Agreement.
(i) Area A – Pape Station Area:
A. Area between properties at Gertrude Place, Eaton Ave and
Lipton Ave.
B. Area between properties at Danforth Ave, Eaton Ave and

Lipton Ave.
(ii) Area B – Properties 885, 897 and 891 Pape Ave/Sammon Ave.

(a) Section 02 23 06 - Vibration Monitoring

be measured and paid as part of the Item C.1.3 – ‘Temporary Grading -
Site Preparation’ (Pape Station SOE) and Item D.1.3 – ‘Temporary
Grading - Site Preparation’ (Sammon Ave SOE).

(a) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS):
(i) OPSS.PROV 201 “Construction Specification for Clearing, Close
Cut Clearing, Grubbing, and Removal of Surface and Piled
Boulders”.
(ii) OPSS.PROV 1541 “Material Specification for Chain-Link Fence
Components”.
(b) Government of Canada:
(i) Migratory Birds Convention Act, 1994 (c. 22).

(ii) Species at Risk Act, 2002 (c.29).
(c) Province of Ontario:
(i) Fish and Wildlife Conservation Act, 1997, (c. 41).
(ii) Endangered Species Act, 2007 (c.6).
(iii) Erosion and Sediment Control Guide for Urban Construction,
Toronto and Region Conservation Authority, 2019.
(d) City of Toronto:
(i) City of Toronto Tree Protection Policy and Specifications for
Construction Near Trees, latest edition, available at
https://www.toronto.ca/data/parks/pdf/trees/tree-protection-specs.pdf
(e) Canadian General Standards Board - CAN/CGSB-138.2-96 Steel
Framework for Chain Link Fence.

(a) The following definitions apply to the Works of this Section:
(i) “Trees” includes trees of any diameter at breast height (1.35 m
above the ground at the tree's base), larger shrubs, and multi-stem
brush.
(ii) “Tree Clearing” means the cutting and felling of all standing trees
and grubbing of stumps and removal of rootballs.
(iii) “Pruning” means cutting of tree and shrub branches.
(iv) “Certified Arborist” means a person who is an ISA Certified
Arborist.
(v) “Certified Professional Forester” means a qualified person who is a
registered member in good standing with the Ontario Professional
Foresters Association and provides services within their
designated scope of practice.
(vi) “SAR” means Species at Risk.
(vii) “Tree-Protection Zone” means area surrounding individual trees or
groups of trees to be protected during the Contractor’s
performance of the Work.
(viii) “PFR” means The Parks, Forestry & Recreation Division of the City
of Toronto.
(ix) “ESC” means Erosion and Sediment Control.


(a) Submit Certified Professional Forester’s credentials for Metrolinx
Representative’s approval prior to conducting any Work on the Project.
(b) Tree Cutting Safe Work Practices Submit Hazard Assessment Plan to
Metrolinx Representative for tree cutting, the content for which shall
include, but not be limited to, the following:
(i) Process for felling trees under complex scenarios, such as when
trees are hung up or have intertwining branches, dead trees, trees
with excessive lean or unbalanced crowns, or where pull ropes are
required.
(ii) Response plan for dealing with tree felling causing injury or
damage to tracks or other property or infrastructure. Response
plan shall include communications, notification process, short-term
responses, and longer-term responses when these types of events
occur.
(iii) Plan for performing the Work in high winds or other extreme
weather, or if soil or slope conditions are unusual and may affect
tree felling (e.g., saturated soil and steep slope where tree may
slide towards feller after felling). Include process for identifying
when high winds or other extreme weather necessitate a
temporary stoppage of the Work for safety purposes.
(c) Work Implementation and Staging Plan:
Submit Work Implementation and Staging Plan to Metrolinx
Representative for each area demonstrating how requirements of this
Contract shall be addressed, including but not limited to:
(i) Necessary labour, materials and equipment.
(ii) Specific tasks for each area, including time required for each task.
(iii) Access point.
(iv) Safe use of City right of ways, laneways and site access routes.
(d) List of equipment to be on Site, including manufacturer's installation
instructions.
(e) The Contractor shall submit samples of each material for approval by the
Metrolinx Representative, before delivery of materials to Project Site.
(i) Tree wound paint: once liter can with manufacturer’s label.
(ii) Herbicide: one litre can with manufacture’s label.

1.9 HEALTH AND SAFETY

(a) Perform the Work in accordance with the Site-specific Health and Safety
Plan recommendations and the Agreement.
(b) Safety Requirements: worker protection.
(i) Ensure workers are wearing gloves, eye protection, protective
clothing, safety boots, and safety vests while performing the Work.
(ii) Ensure workers are wearing gloves, respirators, long sleeved
clothing, eye protection, protective clothing while applying
herbicide materials.
(iii) Ensure that workers are not allowed to eat, drink or smoke while
applying herbicide.
1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

1.11 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

(a) Ensure Work is performed in compliance with applicable Provincial and
Municipal regulations.
(b) Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
(c) Qualifications:
(i) Provide proof of qualifications when requested by the Metrolinx
Representative.
(ii) Tree Clearing: Tree fellers must hold the appropriate experience
and abilities for the felling they are carrying out, comply with
Applicable Laws in carrying out felling Work, and be regularly
audited to confirm they have those capabilities.
(iii) Each felling crew must be led by a designated Certified
Professional Forester.
(iv) Fellers must have a minimum of two years of tree felling
experience.

(a) Prevent damage to fencing, trees, shrubs, landscaping, natural features,
benchmarks, existing buildings, existing pavement, utility lines, site
appurtenances and any existing underground infrastructure which are to
remain.
(b) Repair/ Restore damaged items to approval of the Metrolinx
Representative and the property owner.
1.13 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Perform Work in accordance with the Agreement and as directed by the
(b) Complete Work near or in a designated natural area in accordance with
controls and protection measures in accordance with Schedule 10 -
Environmental Obligations and Drawings.
(c) No work shall be performed within any SAR or bat habitat outside the
active season from April 1 to September 30 without Metrolinx
Representative’s approval in writing. Tree removal is permitted to
proceed between October 1 to March 31.
(d) Keep spill kits in readily accessible location in the event of a deleterious
substance in accordance with the Schedule 10 - Environmental
Obligations.
Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Tree wound paint: bituminous based paint of standard manufacture
specially formulated for tree wounds.
(b) Herbicide: Conteva Garlon XRT by Corteva or approved equal.
(c) Silt Sock: 300mm SiltSoxx by Filtrexx or approved equal.
Part 3 CONSTRUCTION
3.1 RESTRICTIONS ON THE WORK

(a) The Contractor shall comply with the requirements outlined in the
Schedule 10 - Environmental Obligations.
(b) The Contractor shall comply with the following Work Conditions in City of
Toronto:
(i) The Contractor shall comply with The Noise Bylaw (Chapter 591,
City of Toronto Municipal Code) that permits operation of
construction equipment ONLY during Monday to Friday 7:00 a.m.
to 7:00 p.m., Saturdays 9:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m., and no construction
noise on Sundays and statutory holidays (amending bylaw 505-
2006).
(ii) The Contractor is responsible to keep site clean, tidy, and clear of
all debris to the satisfaction of the Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) The Contractor to advise when works have been completed so that
locations can be inspected.
(iv) Construction and other operations at the site must be properly
fenced off at all times and signed to prevent entry of or injury to,
the public. Legislated safety equipment must be worn at all times
by the workers on site.
(v) Copies of any Ministry of Labour Inspection reports or orders and
Joint Health and Safety Committee minutes must be available on
site.
(vi) Construction and other materials must only be stored in areas
approved by the Metrolinx Representative. No materials are to be
stored on City right of way, laneways, walkways, planted areas or
within the drip line circumference of a tree. When storing materials
in the vicinity of trees, the requirements of Toronto Specifications
of Construction near Trees must be adhered to.
(vii) All trees located on or close to a construction site or within any
Tree-Protection Zones must be protected from damage in
accordance with Toronto Specifications for Construction Near
Trees and any other tree protection measure as deemed
appropriate by the Parks, Forestry and Recreation (PFR) Division.
(viii) Roads and walkways must be kept clear of debris, excavation and
construction materials. The Contractor must clean roads and
walkways as often as necessary to ensure they are clear.
3.2 PROTECTION
(a) The Contractor shall prevent damage to trees, landscaping, benchmarks,
existing buildings, existing pavement, utility lines and site appurtenances
which are to remain as detailed in the Agreement.
(b) The Contractor must protect trees and plants on Site and adjacent
properties, where indicated, adhering to local by-laws, and as shown in
the Arborist Report.
(c) The Contractor shall install tree protection fencing prior performing the
Work.
(d) The Contractor shall ensure that all tree clearing and pruning is
completed under the direct supervision of the Contractor’s Certified
Arborist.
(e) Contractor shall notify the contract permitting authorities if any trees not
designated for removal are damaged as a result of Contractor’s or
Subcontractor’s activities. Contractor shall comply with the permitting
authorities’ requirements for tree repair and shall retain the services of a
Certified Arborist to repair trees identified to be retained that are
damaged as a result of Contractor’s or Subcontractors’ activities at no
additional cost to the Owner.
(f) If damaged tree is irreparable, Contractor shall be responsible for
removal and replacement of the tree and/or payment of compensation
and fees as required by the permitting agencies at no additional cost to
the Owner.
(g) Remove all protective fencing upon completion of Work.
(h) The Contractor shall be responsible for providing the appropriate utility
crossing protection measures as per utility companies' crossing
requirements and in accordance with the terms and conditions outlined in
the crossing agreement/permit.
(i) The Contractor shall repair any damaged items to the approval of the
3.3 PREPARATION
(a) The Contractor shall notify Metrolinx eight weeks in advance to
coordinate and schedule the Work.
(b) The Contractor shall inspect the Site and verify items designated to
remain or be protected.
(c) The Contractor shall locate and protect utility lines. The Contractor shall
preserve in operating condition active Utilities traversing the Site.
(d) The Contractor shall notify Utility authorities before starting the work.
3.4 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

(a) The Contractor shall comply with the requirements outlined in
3.5 ACCESS
(a) Tree clearing crews shall be required to access the Places of the Work
via existing public access points. Contractor shall be responsible for
Street Occupancy Permit if any lane closure and temporary laydown
areas are required from public right-of-way.
3.6 TREE CLEARING

(a) The Contractor shall remove, clear and grub trees indicated in the
Arborist Report.
(b) Tree felling shall not cause ground vibration exceeding value allowed in
Section 02 23 06 - Vibration Monitoring.
(c) All felled trees shall be kept within the approved clearing limits.
Contractor shall use rigging, blocking, and other tree felling methods to
ensure all felled trees remain within the clearing limits.
(d) The Contractor shall pull back any tree that accidentally falls outside the
clearing limits to within the clearing limits and shall repair damage to
adjacent property immediately at the Contractor’s own expense.
(e) The Contractor shall update Arborist Report to record all felled trees.
(f) Tree Clearing Safe Work Practices:
(i) Unless otherwise specified, perform tree clearing and felling in
accordance with Arborist Industry Safe Work Practices, Current
Edition.
(ii) Ensure an escape route clear of obstacles is provided at 45
degrees opposite the felling direction.
(g) The Contractor shall retain a Certified Arborist to prune back branches
from trees, which overhang the area to be cleared.
3.7 MANAGEMENT OF CUT VEGETATION

(a) Manage cut vegetation in accordance with recommendations and
requirements of the following Agreement:
(i) Arborist Report.
(ii) Drawings.
3.8 CHEMICAL VEGETATION CONTROL

(a) Apply herbicide treatment if required ideally within 5 to 7 Calendar Days
up to a maximum of 30 Calendar Days after trees are cut.
(b) Mix ratios and application rates in accordance with manufacturers written
instructions.
(c) Mix dye or colorant in with chemical to visibly mark treated areas.
(d) Apply chemical vegetation control using hand painting only (using spray
is not allowed).
3.9 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL

(a) The Contractor shall remove trees off site before April 1st, 2024.
(b) Trees shall be removed from site using method approved by the
(c) The Contractor shall not be permitted to bury or burn cleared materials
on the Site, including trees, shrubs, bushes, stumps, and logs.
3.10 RESTORATION
(a) Any fence removed or damaged during the work shall be restored with
the same type of fence that existed prior to construction.
(b) Any areas of tree removal voids shall be backfilled with granular A or
similar approved material as approved by the Metrolinx Representative.
3.11 CLEANING
(a) Perform cleaning in accordance with the Agreement.
(b) Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste
products and debris.
(c) Do not clean equipment where the wash-water can enter the stormwater
sewers.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Soil Stripping and Stockpiling
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for stripping and stockpiling
topsoil.

(b) Section 02 41 16 – Structure Demolition
(c) Section 02 42 00 – Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials
(d) Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal
(e) Section 31 22 13 – Grading
(f) Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill
(i) Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
(j) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

be measured and paid as part of the Item C.1.3 – ‘Temporary Grading -
Site Preparation’ (Pape Station SOE) and Item D.1.3 – ‘Temporary
Grading - Site Preparation’ (Sammon Ave SOE).

(i) Regulation 153/04 – Records of Site Condition.
(ii) Regulation 406/19 – On-Site and Excess Soil Management.

(a) Definitions:
(i) Grading: The work required to ensure a level base or specific
slope. Grade refers to the ground elevation, or the elevation at any
given point.
(ii) Spoil: Excavated materials consisting of topsoil or subsoils that

have been removed and temporarily stored during construction
activity.
(iii) Stockpile: A pile or storage location for bulk materials forming part
of the bulk excavated material handling process.
(iv) Stripping: The excavation of the upper layer of soil, that is
predominantly organic, too soft, or wet and otherwise unsuitable for
the construction that is done prior to and usually independent of
earth excavation or the placement of fill materials or both.
(v) Subgrade: The prepared in-situ excavated surface that will support
the loads upon it. It is the surface upon which engineered fill,
structures or roads will be constructed.



PRODUCTS
EXECUTION
3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

(a) The original ground shall be stripped across the entire site area as
shown in the Agreement. Contractor shall remove the existing surface
layer of soil to a depth of 150 mm prior to any other earthwork activities.
(b) The existing soil shall not be considered topsoil for reuse and shall be
removed from the site.
(c) An area outside of the main site boundary that is also required to be
stripped shall include the property at 10 Gertrude Place following
completion of the property demolition.
(d) The area to be stripped does not include areas within the Overall Site
Boundary as shown in the Agreement that will be temporarily occupied
by the Contractor for jet grouting works.
3.2 REMOVAL OF PAVEMENT

(a) Removal and disposal of asphalt and concrete pavement within the site
area shall be carried out in accordance with Specification Section 31 23
00 – Excavation and Fill, Specification Section 31 22 13 – Grading,
Specification Section 02 41 13 – Site Demolition, and Specification
Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal.
3.3 STOCKPILING SPOIL MATERIALS

(a) The maximum size of a stockpile shall not exceed 2,500 m3.
(b) Stockpiles shall not exceed 3 m in height.
(c) Stockpiling shall not be located near any open excavation, as per the
Drawings.
(d) Stockpiles shall be constructed neatly with uniform surfaces.
(e) When required, the top surface shall be dished.
(f) Soil stored must not be stored at a location:
(i) Within 10 metres of the property line (boundary), unless any of the
following apply:
A. 500 m³ or less of excess topsoil will be stored at any one time
on the project area.
B. Excess topsoil storage at the project area will be for a period
of time of less than 1 week.
C. The storage location has a physical barrier (e.g. concrete wall)
between the excess topsoil and the property boundary.
D. The storage is taking place in a public road.
(g) Stockpiles shall be protected from erosion by covering with tarps to
prevent soil erosion and contamination by weeds during storage.
(h) Stockpiles shall be completely surrounded by sediment barriers or
compost filter socks.
(i) Stockpiles shall not impede drainage of surface flows and drainage
swales.
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL

END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for handling, transporting,
and disposal of all muck and excavated materials from the bulk
excavation of the Pape Station Main Box and Sammon Crossover
headhouse, the tieback drilling, any material during demolitions and
utility relocations, and any material from the slurry wall construction
carried out within or for the support of excavation systems for Pape
Station Main Box and Sammon Crossover headhouse.

(b) Section 31 14 13 – Soil Stripping and Stockpiling
(c) Section 31 22 13 – Grading
(d) Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill
(e) Section 31 23 16 – Shaft Excavation
(f) Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal
(g) Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
(h) Section 31 51 00 – Tieback and Tie Anchors

handling, transporting, and disposal of all muck and excavated materials
from the bulk excavation of the Pape Station SOE and Sammon Ave
SOE, tieback and tie-anchor drilling, any material generated during
demolition and utility relocations, and any material from the slurry wall
construction shall be included within the appropriate Agreement item to
which they pertain most closely.

(a) Ontario Water Resources Act, R.R.O. 1990.
(i) Regulation 153/04 – Records of Site Condition, as amended.
(ii) Regulation 406/19 – On-Site and Excess Soil Management, as
amended.
(iii) Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, c.E.19 & R.R.O. 1990,
Regulation 347: General - Waste Management.
(c) OSOR Section 1370 – Environmental Control.
(d) Canadian and Provincial Statutes:
(i) Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, c.E.19 & R.R.O. 1990,

(a) Bulk Excavation: The removal of large amounts of soil, rock or other
material from a site that is required when providing large spaces below
ground for a structure or facility.
(b) Muck and Excavated Materials: All materials and spoils generated during
bulk excavation from within the support of excavation system.
(c) Slurry Wall: Reinforced concrete slurry wall panel constructed below
ground using the slurry method of trench stabilization. Slurry walls are
structural walls.
(d) Support of Excavation (SOE): A temporary earth retaining system
intended to control the ground to facilitate a safe and efficient space for
construction.
(e) Non-Hazardous Waste: Excess excavated soils which do not meet the
definition of reusable soils under Ontario Regulation 406/19, as
amended, and are not topsoil or crushed rock, must be managed and
disposed as waste in accordance with Ontario Regulation 347/00, as
amended. Where waste soils exceed Ontario Regulation 347/00, as
amended, Schedule 4 criteria for Toxicity Characteristic Leaching
Procedure (TCLP), they must be managed and disposed as hazardous
waste in accordance with Ontario Regulation 347/00, as amended.

(a) Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Agreement,
Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations, and Ontario Regulation
406/19 – On-Site and Excess Soil Management, as amended. In
particular:
(i) The Contractor’s Qualified Person (QP), as defined in O. Reg.
153/04, as amended, shall review the following provided project
specific excess soil planning documents, as specified in Ontario
Regulation 406/19, assess completeness and incorporate the
findings into the Soil Management Plan, and determine the need to
conduct additional investigations to fully meet regulatory

requirements and the requirements of its soil management facilities
or reuse sites:
A. Assessment of Past Uses (APU).
B. Sampling and Analysis Plan (SAP).
(ii) The Contractor shall retain responsibility for QP review of the
aforementioned documents for identification and filling of any data
gaps necessary to meet the Metrolinx’s obligations under O. Reg.
406/19, as amended, including the preparation of Soil
Characterization Reports (SCRs), when needed.
(b) General:
(i) Verify the designated spoil disposal sites are prepared to receive
spoil. Sites should be identified that are able to receive:
A. Clean spoils.
B. Contaminated, non-hazardous spoils.
C. Contaminated and hazardous spoils.
(ii) Verify the trucking contractor is available to truck spoils and is
aware of trucking routes to and from the site, site facilities including
permitted trucking times, site entrance and exit locations, wheel
wash facilities, truck loading procedures and haul ticket protocols.
(c) Notify and obtain approvals from all agencies required prior to
commencing work.

(a) Submit a Soil and Excavated Material Management Plan in accordance
with the Construction Agreement, Schedule 10 – Environmental
Obligations.
(b) Submit a Contingency Plan for Encountering, Testing and Managing
Contaminated Soil or Hazardous Waste.
(c) On a monthly basis, submit a Soil and Excavated Material Management
Monthly Monitoring Report in accordance with the Construction
Agreement, Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations. These regular
reports shall include the following:
(i) A record of type, quantity (by weight), physical characteristics of
each material.
(ii) Documentation from each disposal facility confirming acceptance

of materials including receipts, weight tickets, manifests, truck
tickets, and fees.
(iii) Certification for each disposal facility owner that all operating
permit conditions were met for the materials accepted.

PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
(a) Vehicles used for hauling and disposing of excavated material and muck
shall be properly muffled to minimize noise. Vehicles shall not impose
loads that will damage existing utilities and structures. Vehicles shall
include covers and liners to prevent infiltration, spills, leaks or release of
liquids.
(b) If a conveyor system is to be used, it shall be designed to operate safely
and quietly while withstanding all operating and wind loads. The systems
shall be designed to minimize spillage and control dust and noise. The
Contractor shall guard all idlers, pulleys, and drives that are accessible
unless specific safety procedures are established for work around
unguarded components.
(c) Street sweeping and dust control equipment will be required. The
Contractor shall be responsible to maintain the cleanliness of
surrounding roadways to the satisfaction of the City.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Conduct all operations to minimize the impact of noise in accordance
with the Agreement. Equipment shall be equipped with noise
suppressors such as silencers or mufflers.
(b) The temporary stockpile shall be of a manageable size; configured with
stable slopes and shall be designed to protect excavated materials from
precipitation, runoff, and erosion.
(c) Stockpiles shall not impede or interfere with natural site drainage.
(d) Temporary stockpile area shall be designed to prevent materials from
entering drains, utilities and manholes.
(e) Temporary stockpile area shall be designed to prevent materials from

covering or entering geotechnical instrument locations.
(f) Stockpiles shall be established, protected, and maintained in accordance
with applicable erosion and sedimentation control permits and
regulations, and with applicable storm water permits and regulations.
(g) Contractor shall provide appropriate berms, sumps, or ditches as needed
to prevent surface water runoff from contacting the stockpile, to prevent
infiltrating water from discharging off the stockpile area, to direct runoff,
and minimize erosion.
3.2 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) All haul vehicles are to be inspected for soil adhesion to wheels and
undercarriage. Soils shall be removed and properly handled by the
Contractor before the vehicle leaves the site.
(b) All rinse waters are to be collected and disposed of in accordance with
Specification Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater
Disposal and with the Construction Agreement, Schedule 10 –
Environmental Obligations.
(c) Transport vehicles shall not be allowed to leave the site if they are
leaking or spilling materials or there is evidence that leaking, or spilling
may likely occur.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Grading
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for grading, including earth
excavation and the management of excavated materials.

(d) Section 31 14 13 – Soil Stripping and Stockpiling
(e) Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal
(f) Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill
(i) Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
(j) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

(a) Measurement:
(b) Payment:
(i) Payment will be made for the following items following completion
of this Work:
A. Item C.1.3 – ‘Temporary Grading - Site Preparation’ (Pape
Station SOE).
B. Item D.1.3 – ‘Temporary Grading - Site Preparation’ (Sammon
Ave SOE).
(ii) Each Item shall include:
A. Removal, transport and disposal of topsoil / native material,
and site grading.
B. The installation of a sub-surface with load bearing capacity to

support the heavy equipment, inclusive of a crane pad (if
used).
C. Other preparatory activities to facilitate construction of the
SOE systems such as general grading, excavation, backfill,
compaction necessary to performing the Work.
D. Cut to fill, compaction, disposal of surplus cut materials.

(i) OPSS.MUNI 501 Compacting.
(ii) OPSS.MUNI 1010 Aggregates – Base Subbase, Select Subgrade
and Backfill Material.
(i) MTO Form: PH-CC-820 Certification of Grade Elevation –
Crossfall.
(c) Ontario Regulations:

(a) Definitions:
(i) Angle of Repose: The maximum angle measured from the
horizontal at which fill remains stable.
(ii) Clearing: The cutting of all standing trees, brush, bushes, and
other vegetation to a maximum height of 300 mm above original
ground level and the removal of felled materials and windfalls.
(iii) Earth: All soils and crushed rock. Excludes stone masonry,
concrete, and other manufactured materials.
(iv) Grading: The work required to ensure a level base or specific
slope. Grade refers to the ground elevation, or the elevation at any
given point.
(v) Grubbing: The removal of all stumps, roots, embedded logs,
debris, and secondary growth.
(vi) Mucking: The picking up of excavated materials prior to haulage.
(vii) Overbreak: Any broken, displaced, or loosened rock that originates

outside the designated rock excavation limits as specified in the
Specifications and Drawings, regardless of whether that rock has
been excavated, displaced, or loosened due to the inherent
character of the rock formation itself or due to any other cause.
(viii) Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) means the processed hot mix
asphalt material that is recovered by partial or full depth removal.
(ix) Reclaimed Concrete Material (RCM) means removed or processed
old Portland cement concrete.
(x) Regrading: The process of grading for raising and / or lowering the
elevation of the site. For the purpose of this Specification Section,
regrading shall be deemed the same activity as grading.
(xi) Rock: For the purposes of this Specification Section, rock shall be
defined as natural rock fragments, including cobbles and boulders.
Excludes stone masonry, concrete, and other manufactured
materials.
(xii) Rough-grading: The process of achieving the right overall shape
and slope of the site, where the ground surface approximately
conforms to the design grade. For the purpose of this Specification
Section, rough grading shall be deemed the same activity as
grading.
(xiii) Spoil: Excavated materials consisting of topsoil or subsoils that
have been removed and temporarily stored during construction
activity.
(xiv) Stockpile: A pile or storage location for bulk materials forming part
of the bulk excavated material handling process.
(xv) Stripping: The excavation of the upper layer of soil, that is
predominantly organic, too soft, or wet and otherwise unsuitable for
the construction that is done prior to and usually independent of
earth excavation or the placement of fill materials or both.
(xvi) Subgrade: The prepared in-situ excavated surface that will support
the loads upon it is the surface upon which engineered fill,
structures or roads will be constructed.
(xvii) Tolerance: The construction working tolerance only that is:
A. Minus when it is lower in elevation than the elevations shown
on the Drawings.
B. Plus when it is higher in elevation than the elevations shown

on the Drawings.


(a) Prior to slurry wall guide wall construction, submit a Grading Plan
showing proposed elevation of site around the shafts. Grading Plan shall
show guide wall elevation and required excavation and fill zones to suit
the slurry wall and capping beam, and to ensure bottom of guide wall is
at a minimum depth of 1 m below grade in accordance with Specification
Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls. Plan shall show compaction
requirements for any fill placed that is over 0.6 m in thickness over an
area of 100 m2 or greater.

(a) Any fill placement shall conform with the Quality Assurance requirements
contained in Specification Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill.
PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
(a) The type of earth moving equipment used shall be suited to the material
to be excavated, moved, placed and compacted, the degree of
compaction required, and space available.
(b) Street sweeping and dust control equipment will be required. The
surrounding roadways to the satisfaction of the city.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Removal of Ice, Snow, and Frozen Ground:
(i) The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all ice, snow, and
frozen material from all surfaces prior to placing fill and from all
materials being used for backfill or any other construction
purposes.
(b) Removal of Disturbed Material:
(i) The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all disturbed material
from all surfaces prior to placing fill in accordance with
Specification Section 02 42 00 – Removal and Salvage of
Construction Materials, Specification Section 02 41 13 – Site
Demolition, Specification Section 02 42 16 – Structure Demolition,
and Specification Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated
Materials Disposal.
(c) Compaction:
(i) Subsequent to completion of stripping and any required
excavation, any exposed soils which contain excessive organics
and other compressible, weak, and deleterious materials should be
excavated, removed, and replaced with engineered fill approved by
the Metrolinx Representative compatible with subgrade conditions.
(ii) Earth and granular materials shall be compacted according to
OPSS.MUNI 501 if the thickness of fill placed is greater than 0.6 m
over an area of 100 m2.
(iii) For compaction purposes, reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) or
reclaimed concrete material (RCM) or both shall be treated as
earth or rock when such material is respectively included in the fill.
(iv) Compaction load above TTC station shall not exceed the 9.6
kN/m2.
(d) Tolerances:
(i) Vertical tolerances for the elevation of the site as specified on the
Drawings after any required excavation or backfill:
A. + 50 mm.
B. - 50 mm.
3.2 DRAINAGE
(a) Provide effective drainage during all stages of the work.
(b) In stripping operations where there is excavation below subgrade and
when provision for surface drainage is impractical, backfill materials shall
be placed as soon as possible following excavation.
3.3 EXCAVATION AND GRADING

(a) Earth Excavation – Grading:
(i) General:
A. The work shall include excavating, hauling, handling and

placing, shaping, compacting, trimming of earth material, and
the management of excavated and excess materials as
B. Grading work shall also include the excavation and removal of
abandoned utilities where encountered, including cables and
pipes, located within the site area.
C. Suitable material shall be used in earth grading in accordance
with Specification Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill.
(ii) Removal of Pavement:
A. Removal of existing asphalt and concrete pavement shall be
carried out across the entire site area as shown on the
Drawings.
B. Removal of pavement shall include the property at 10
Gertrude Place following completion of the property
demolition.
C. Removal of pavement does not include areas within the
Overall Site Boundary as shown in the Drawings that will be
temporarily occupied by the Contractor for jet grouting works.
D. Removal of pavement can be completed after the shaft
excavation if the pavement suits the Contractor’s intended use
of the staging areas, provided the elevation of the pavement
does not interfere with guide wall and slurry wall construction
and elevations as shown on the Drawings.
E. Pavement materials removed shall be disposed of in
accordance with Specification Section 02 41 13 – Site
Demolition, Specification Section 02 42 00 – Removal and
Salvage of Construction Materials, and Specification Section
31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal.
(iii) Excavation Below Subgrade:
A. Unsuitable materials shall be removed below the subgrade if
encountered.
B. The resulting excavation shall be backfilled with acceptable
material and compacted in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 501.
(iv) Backfilling of Over-excavated Areas:
A. When over-excavation occurs, the over-excavated area shall
be backfilled with granular material in accordance with
Specification Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill and

compacted according to OPSS.MUNI 501.
(b) Management of Excavated Materials:
(i) Excavated materials may be used within the Work limits as shown
on the Drawings.
(ii) Excavated materials may be temporarily stockpiled in designated
areas as shown on the Drawings.
(iii) Excavated material can be used as backfill provided that it the
material is in accordance with OPSS.MUNI 1010.
(iv) If the Metrolinx Representative has deemed that the Contractor’s
sequence of operations, inadequate drainage measures, or
handling processes have caused materials intended for use as
backfill to become unsuitable for such purposes, or to have an
excessive moisture content, or determined to be contaminated,
then the Contractor shall replace the material with an equivalent
volume of suitable material at no additional cost to Metrolinx.
(v) Surplus materials that cannot be accommodated as above and
unsuitable materials shall be managed as excess material in
accordance with Specification Section 31 20 01 – Muck and
Excavated Materials Disposal.
3.4 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Grade Checks:
(i) The Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all quality
control grade checks to ensure the required site elevations and
vertical tolerances are met.
(b) Compaction Quality Control:
(i) The Contractor shall use Method A according to OPSS.MUNI 501
for quality control of compaction.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Excavation and Fill
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers requirements for excavation, backfill and
compaction for site formation, structures, trenches, drainage, lean
concrete backfill, and the footprint of demolished structures / properties.

(d) Section 31 05 17 – Aggregates
(e) Section 31 09 13 – Instrumentation and Monitoring
(f) Section 31 14 13 – Soil Stripping and Stockpiling
(g) Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal
(h) Section 31 22 13 – Grading
(i) Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal

(a) Measurement:
(i) This work will be paid for on a lump sum basis following completion
of this Work, and will not be measured for payment.
(ii) With exception to Work related to Items included in Clause 1.3.a.i
all other Work related to this Section is incidental to the Work.
Costs related to excavation and fill for other works shall be
included within the appropriate Agreement item to which they
pertain most closely.
(b) Payment:
A. Item C.1.2 – ‘Post Demolition Backfill and Site Grading; (Pape
Station SOE).
B. Item D.1.2 – ‘Post Demolition Backfill and Site Grading;
(Sammon Ave SOE).
(ii) Each Item shall include:

A. The backfill of mass excavations as required to demolish
existing properties and remove existing foundations.

(a) Canadian Standards Association:
(i) CSA-A23.2 Test Methods and Standard Practices for Concrete.
(b) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Materials:
(i) OPSS 401 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
(ii) OPSS.PROV 501 Construction Specification for Compacting.

(iii) OPSS.PROV 1004 Material Specification for Aggregates Misc.
(iv) OPSS.PROV 1010 Material Specification for Aggregates – Base,
Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material.
(c) City of Toronto Standard Specifications:
(i) TS 13.10 Construction Specification for Unshrinkable Fill.
(ii) TS 1350 Amendment to OPSS.MUNI 1350 – Material
Specifications for Concrete – Materials and Production.
(d) Ontario Regulations:

(a) Definitions:
(i) Bearing Strata: The portion of the ground below the structure base
or footings that supports the structure.
(ii) Construction Rubble: Excess Material resulting from demolition or
removal of structures, services, roads, curbs, and sidewalks. It
includes such items as concrete, reinforcing steel, asphaltic
concrete, brick granular road base, curbs, sidewalk, and base
materials. Material which has been placed as engineered fill is not
classified as Construction Rubble.
(iii) Earth: All soil and weathered rock except those defined as rock,
and excludes stone masonry, concrete, and other manufactured
materials.
(iv) Engineered Fill: Fill that is sourced, sorted and placed according to
a specification.
(v) Excess Material: Excess soil materials resulting from construction
related activities on site, may include impacted soils defined as
Waste, or Reusable Fill that can be used on site.
(vi) Granular Fill: Granular material that consists of a reasonably clean
sand or gravel (as per OPSS.PROV 1010), free from excessive silt,
clay, or clay balls.
(vii) Imported Fill: Fill imported to be used on site which meets the
standards for designated land use type, as specified in Table 1 for
contaminants contained within the soil, groundwater and sediment,
intended for use under Part XV.1 of the Environmental Protection
Act, published by the Ministry of the Environment, Conservation
and Parks (MECP). It is to be free of organics, topsoil, and
deleterious material such as Construction Rubble.
(viii) Lean Concrete Backfill: Mix of aggregate, cementing material and
water, with or without chemical admixtures, that reaches 8.0 MPa
minimum compressive strength at 28 days.
(ix) Native or Reusable Fill: In accordance with Ontario Regulation
153, soil excavated from the site which meets standards for
designated land use type, as specified in Tables 2 and 3 for
contaminants contained within the soil and groundwater, intended
for use under Part XV.1 of the Environmental Protection Act,
published by the MECP, and other environmental regulations.
(x) No-fines Concrete or Pervious Concrete: A concrete that is
designed with high porosity and allows water to pass though. No-
fines concrete typically consists of cement, fly ash, water and
coarse aggregate. It is commonly used in concrete pavement to
reduce surface runoff and allow the recharging of ground water.
The high porosity is achieved by a network of interconnected voids
since it has little or no fines and contains just enough cement paste
to cover the surface of coarse aggregates while maintaining the
interconnectivity of voids.
(xi) Rock: Natural beds or massive fragments, of the hard, stable,
cemented part of the earth’s crust, igneous, metamorphic, or
sedimentary in origin, and includes large boulders having a volume
of 1 cubic meter or greater.
(xii) Soil: Naturally occurring mineral particles and other naturally

occurring materials resulting from the natural breakdown of rock or
organic matter by physical, chemical or biological processes. Soil
is this definition has particle sizes equal to that of clay, silt or sand
and are smaller than 2 mm in size or pass the US #10 sieve.
(xiii) Soil with Gravel and Cobbles: As per the definition for Soil, but will
include larger particle (of gravel and cobbles) from 2 mm to 75 mm
and 75 mm to 300 mm respectively based on the USCS
classification system.
(xiv) Topsoil: Surface soil that supports plant life containing
considerable organic matter.
(xv) Waste: Excess excavated soils which do not meet the definition of
reusable soils under Ontario Regulation 406/19, as amended, and
are not topsoil or crushed rock, must be managed and disposed as
waste in accordance with Ontario Regulation 347/00, as amended.
Where waste soils exceed Ontario Regulation 347/00, as
amended, Schedule 4 criteria for Toxicity Characteristic Leaching
Procedure (TCLP), they must be managed and disposed as
hazardous waste in accordance with Ontario Regulation 347/00, as
amended.

(a) Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Agreement,
Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations, and Ontario Regulation
406/19.

(a) If engineered fill placement is required in any single placement area that
will exceed 1 m in thickness, submit an Engineered Fill Plan detailing
areas where engineered fill is to be placed. The plan shall include:
(i) Plans and sections of showing extent of engineered fill material.
Relevant topographic features, utilities, manholes, drainage points
and geotechnical and groundwater monitoring instrumentation
should be called out, including any protection measures in place or
to be implemented.
(ii) Details of total thickness of engineered fill material to be placed
across various sections of the filling zone.
(iii) Area of which the fill will be placed, in square meters, and volume
of material to be placed, in cubic meters (per area, if areas are
separated).
(iv) If required, confirmation by calculation that placed fill material does
not adversely affect existing structures or facilities due to the
additional loading.
(v) Type of engineered fill material to be placed with details of
geotechnical and, if required, chemical properties in accordance
with this Specification Section.
(vi) Details of proposed field compaction and testing requirements, in
accordance with this Specification Section.
(vii) Details of the source of the material proposed to be used.
(viii) Details of staging, handling and protection of the stockpiled
material on site.
(ix) Details of protection of the placed material on site.
(x) Details of dust and noise mitigation measures to be used.
(b) If lean concrete backfill is to be used on site, , submit details of the mix
design. Design requirements are given in TS 1350 Amendment to
OPSS.MUNI 1350 – Material Specifications for Concrete – Materials and
Production.
(c) Provide Metrolinx Representative certification that materials in lean
concrete backfill do not include contaminants to groundwater quality.
(d) For any material used as engineered fill, whether material is Reusable
Fill or Imported Fill, submit geotechnical laboratory test results with
grading curves and physical testing results.
(e) For Imported Fill, submit analytical chemical analysis of representative fill
samples.
(f) Prior to commencing the Work, submit an Existing Conditions
Assessment report in accordance with Specification Section 02 22 00 –
Existing Conditions Assessment, for property and structures that may be
affected by the Work. The assessment shall include adjacent properties,
buildings, structures and utilities where applicable.

(a) Provide documentation that material supplier has at least 5 years’ local
experience with the aggregate and material products, and associated
sorting, placing and transporting equipment.
(b) Native / reusable fill and imported fill materials shall be reviewed and
(c) All excavation works may be inspected by the Metrolinx Representative.

(a) Conform with all material manufacturer’s recommendations.
(b) Protect materials from weather, excess temperature, and handling.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Granular Fill:
(i) Granular material shall conform to OPSS.PROV 1010 and as
specified on the Drawings. Granular material shall be not lumpy or
frozen, and shall be free from slag, cinders, ashes, rubbish, or
other material that is objectionable or deleterious. Granular
material shall be free of boulders or flat rocks larger than 100 mm
in diameter and shall be sufficiently free of silt or clay that it cannot
be compacted into a ball by hand.
(b) Native / Reusable Fill:
(i) Material shall be free from frozen lumps, cinders, ashes, refuse,
organic matter, boulders encountered with size as defined in the
Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR), and other deleterious
material.
(c) Lean Concrete Backfill:
(i) Cement Type: Normal Portland GU, Portland Limestone GUL.
(ii) Minimum 28-day cylinder compressive strength: 8.0 MPa.
(iii) Maximum nominal size of coarse aggregate: 25 mm.
(iv) Minimum slump at point of discharge: 150 mm.
(v) Minimum density: 1900 kg/m3.
(vi) Maximum cement content: 90 kg/m3.
(vii) Class of exposure: N/A.
(viii) Chemical admixtures: as needed to modify performance properties
of strength, flow, set and permeability.
(ix) Water: fresh, clean, potable and free from oils, salts and impurities.
Water content shall facilitate a fluid workable mix without segregation.
(x) Sustainable Concrete with at least 20% by mass of Portland cement
substituted with Supplementary Cementitious Materials (SCM) such as
ground granulated blast furnace slag, fly ash and/or silica fume.
(xi) Flowable mix which does not need mobile equipment for placement.
(xii) Lean concrete backfill shall be unshrinkable with no subsidence.
(xiii) Lean concrete backfill shall conform to TS 13.10 “Construction
Specification for Unshrinkable Fill” except as defined herein.
(d) No-fines Concrete or Pervious Concrete:
(i) Aggregate Size Range: 10 mm to 20 mm.
(ii) Aggregate / cement ratio: 6:1.
(iii) Water / cement ratio: 0.30 to 0.40.
(iv) Density range: Between and 1600 kg/m3 2200 kg/m3.
(v) Target Strength Range: 1.5 MPa to 5 MPa.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
(a) Compaction equipment shall be according to OPSS.PROV 501.
(b) Lean concrete mixing equipment capable of proportioning aggregate,
cement and water shall conform with City of Toronto TS 1350. Lean
concrete backfill shall be transported to site by ready-mix trucks. Lean
concrete backfill shall be placed into the excavation using ready-mix
truck chutes or by pumping.
(c) Provide equipment conforming to manufacturer’s recommendations for
the lean concrete mix including additives and cementing materials.
(d) Street sweeping and dust control equipment will be required. The
EXECUTION
3.1 REMOVALS
(a) Removals shall be according to Section 02 42 00 – Removal and
Salvage of Construction Materials.
3.2 REMOVAL OF ICE AND SNOW

(a) All ice and snow shall be removed from all portions of the work area
before any excavation and backfill operations proceed.
(b) Frozen materials shall not be incorporated into the Work.
(c) Material shall not be placed over frozen ground, ice, or snow.
3.3 PROTECTION SYSTEMS

(a) Provide protection where stability, safety or function of an existing
structure, road, railway or other facility could be impaired by any
excavation or temporary slope required in order to place fill.
(b) Provide protection to permit excavation where there is a necessity to
retain the sidewalls of an excavation facilitating safe execution of work.
3.4 EXCAVATION
(a) For excavation within the support of excavation for the shafts at Pape
Station and Sammon Crossover Headhouse, refer to Specification
Section 31 23 16 – Shaft Excavation.
(b) Any other excavation work that may be required under this Contract is
expected to be limited to the following:
(i) Any required utility work or utility diversion work.
(ii) Removal of any unsuitable material in the subgrade and
replacement with a suitable engineered fill prior to placing a
concrete structure.
(c) Remove organics and compressible, weak and deleterious materials to
expose competent stable dry subgrade for structure foundations. The
sub-excavated material must be replaced by approved engineered fill.
3.5 GRANULAR BACKFILLING

(a) Do not place backfill against any new concrete structure until the
concrete has reached 70% of its design strength.
(b) Backfill voids and working areas around structures to the level of the
surrounding ground or to the grade specified in the Drawings.
3.6 GRANULAR BACKFILL COMPACTION

(a) Backfill shall be placed and compacted according to OPSS.PROV 501,
except the Modified Layer Compaction Method shall not apply.
(b) Granular backfill shall be compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Maximum

Dry Density, unless stated otherwise.
(c) Granular backfill beneath structures shall be compacted to 98% Standard
Proctor Maximum Dry Density (SPMDD).
(d) Use only hand-operated vibratory compaction equipment in sensitive or
restricted zones behind earth retaining structures.
3.7 LEAN CONCRETE AND NO-FINES CONCRETE BACKFILLING

(a) Lean concrete backfill shall be used in the following applications:
(i) For areas of over excavation in a sub-grade beneath a concrete
structure to be placed above.
(ii) Used for mud slabs and applications beneath a concrete structure
placed on a subgrade.
(iii) As a protection layer between the soil and a concrete structure, if
the soil is chemically altered such that it could affect the concrete.
(iv) If native soil or granular backfilling materials are considered
unsuitable.
(b) No-fines concrete backfill shall be used in the following applications:
(i) For areas of over excavation in a sub-grade beneath a concrete
structure to be placed above, but when a more porous backfill is
required as determined by the Metrolinx Representative.
(ii) For areas of over excavation within, or at the toe of, a slope.
(c) The use of lean concrete backfill or no-fines concrete backfill shall be
approved by the Metrolinx Representative.
(d) Lean concrete backfill and no-fines concrete backfill shall flow into the
excavation so that it fills the entire space without vibration and
segregation.
(e) Do not allow backfill voids at any locations in the excavation.
(f) Screed lean concrete backfill and no-fines concrete backfill top surface
while it is still sufficiently flowable to achieve the desired grades and
elevation.
(g) After placement, protect backfill surface from adverse weather and
construction equipment for at least 24 hours.
(h) Protect exposed backfill surfaces from premature drying, rain, running
water, wind, mechanical injury, and hot and cold temperature.
3.8 TRENCHING FOR WET UTILITIES.

(a) Notify the Metrolinx Representative of any unsuitable foundation
conditions.
(b) Place granular backfill in uniform layers not exceeding 200 mm thick.
(c) Do not use power tractors or rolling equipment until backfill has been
placed minimum 900 mm deep above the crown of the pipe.
(d) Trench work including excavation, backfilling and compaction shall
conform to OPSS 401 Trenching, Backfilling and Compacting.
3.9 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Carry out in-situ backfill material sampling and testing to confirm
conformance with requirements of this specification.
(b) Provide primary materials that are the products of one manufacturer.
(c) Lean concrete and no-fines concrete sampling and testing shall be
according to CSA-A23.2 Test Methods and Standard Practices for
Concrete.
(d) Compressive strength is the acceptance criteria for lean concrete
backfill.
(e) Visual inspection and conformance to the mix design requirements of
this Specification Section are the acceptance criteria for no-fines
concrete backfill.
(f) Carry out slump tests on lean concrete backfill strength test samples.
(g) Test lean concrete backfill strength every day during placement.
(h) Four concrete samples for test cylinders shall be taken from one ready-
mix truck for every 100 m3 of lean concrete placed.
(i) Lean concrete backfill samples and compressive strength testing shall be
as follows:
(i) Samples shall be 150 mm diameter by 300 mm long cylinder
samples protected in waxed cardboard moulds.
(ii) Test cylinders shall be demoulded on the same day of
compressive strength testing to minimize handling damage to
cylinder specimens.
(iii) Compression test machine shall have a precision of 0.1 kN or less.
The maximum loading rate shall be 0.11 MPa/second.
(j) Lean concrete backfill below 2.0 MPa compressive strength shall be
removed and replaced at no extra cost to Metrolinx.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Shaft Excavation
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers:
(i) The requirements for bulk excavation within the support of
excavation system.
(ii) The requirements to ensure that the excavation is carried out
evenly, such that the existing TTC structure is not subjected to
adverse loading caused by an unbalanced excavation.
(iii) The requirements for ensuring excavation does not advance
further than the elevation that other SOE support elements are
required to be installed, including strutting and tiebacks.
(iv) Requirements for excavating at the bottom of the excavation and
preparing the subgrade for the SOE base slab construction.
(v) Requirements for scaling adhered soil materials from the surface of
the slurry wall panels during bulk excavation.

(a) Section 00 17 30 – Project Specific Conditions
(b) Section 31 09 13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring
(c) Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal
(d) Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill
(e) Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal
(f) Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
(g) Section 31 51 00 – Tieback and Tie Anchors
(h) Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers

(a) Measurement:
(i) Measurement shall be based on the theoretical in-situ volume (m3)
of material excavated from within the SOE systems. Excavation
volumes for payment shall not exceed the total quantity identified in
Appendix A of Schedule 7 – Schedule of Values.
(b) Payment:
(i) Payment will be made for the following items according to
measurement of the completed work:
A. Item C.2.10 – ‘Mass Excavation – Soil’ (Pape Station North
SOE).
B. Item C.3.10 – ‘Mass Excavation – Soil’ (Pape Station South
SOE).
C. Item D.2.7 – ‘Mass Excavation – Soil’ (Sammon Ave SOE).
(ii) Each Item shall include the excavation, handling, transport and
disposal of excavated materials.

(a) Ontario Water Resources Act, R.R.O. 1990.
(b) Canadian and Provincial Statutes:
(i) Environmental Protection Act, R.S.O. 1990, c.E.19 & R.R.O. 1990,
(c) Ontario Regulations:

(a) Bulk Excavation: The removal of large amounts of soil, rock or other
material from a site that is required when providing large spaces below
ground for a structure or facility.
(b) Contractor’s Field Engineer: A field engineer employed by the Contractor
with typically over 5 years’ experience in site subsurface construction
and support of excavation work, who is present full time at the site(s) to
observe, monitor and coordinate field activities and trades and who
reports to the Contractor’s Project Manager, coordinating closely with the
site superintendents.
(c) Contractor’s Geotechnical Engineer: Interchangeable with Contractor’s
Field Engineer but with experience in a variety of geotechnical works in
soil and rock and with sound knowledge of support of excavation
elements including their installation. The Contractor’s Geotechnical
Engineer will have experience with the USCS soil classification system
(d) Muck and Excavated Materials: All materials and spoils generated during
bulk excavation from within the support of excavation system.
(e) Narrow Section: The section of shaft closest to the End Wall that is used
to receive or launch the TBM.
(f) Slurry Wall: Reinforced concrete slurry wall panel constructed below
structural walls.
(g) Support of Excavation (SOE): A temporary earth retaining system
construction.
(h) Strut: A brace or supporting member which resists thrusts in the direction
of its own length. May be diagonal or horizontal.
(i) Steel strand: A bundle of wires making a strand that forms one of several
strands that, in turn, makes up a tieback (or strand anchor).
(j) Tieback (also Strand Anchor and Tendon): An anchor consisting of
bundles of steel wire strands that are prestressed to support, and limit
the lateral movements, of an earth retaining structure. Tiebacks may be
anchored into rock, or into a suitable soil unit, at one end and anchored
to the earth retaining structure at the other. Tiebacks are typically
installed at a medium angle of inclination.
(k) Tie Anchor: Similar to a tieback but installed horizontally between two
earth retaining headwalls. Tie anchors are prestressed to limit movement
and deflection of the two walls they tie together.
(l) Unbalanced Excavation: An uneven load created when excavation takes
place on one side of a structure.
(m) USCS: Unified Soil Classification System. The Unified Soil Classification
System is a method to characterize and classify soils. The USCS system
was introduced by Casagrande and was adopted by the Corps of
Engineers. The USCS system is a globally recognized system to
characterize fine grained to coarse grained soils and organic materials.
(n) Waler: A horizontal beam used to brace or support vertical secant piles.
(o) Wide Section: The section of shaft closest to the Head Wall that is used
to perform and accommodate the underpinning works for tunnelling
beneath the existing TTC structure.

(a) Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the Construction
Agreement, Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations, and Ontario
Regulation 406/19.
(b) Geotechnical and Structural Instrumentation:
(i) At least 10 Working Days before commencing bulk excavation
works, ensure all geotechnical and structural instrumentation that
was previously installed is tested and deemed functional. Replace
and re-baseline any damaged instrumentation.
(ii) At least 3 Working Days prior to starting the bulk excavation work
within the support of excavation, perform a set of routine
monitoring readings for all instrumentation within the slurry wall,
around the slurry wall, within the TTC structure and for any
installed monitoring point that is within 60 m from the TTC structure
or 60 m from where bulk excavation will take place.
(iii) Ensure visible markers and protection are installed around
instrumentation points that will be in close proximity to truck and
equipment movements.
(c) Dewatering System and Observation / Monitoring Wells:
(i) At least 10 Working Days before commencing bulk excavation
works, ensure the dewatering system for extraction of entrapped
groundwater is functioning correctly. This includes, but not limited
to, the wells and associated submersible pumps, observation wells,
the water treatment system and / or collection tanks, control
systems, power and backup power systems.
(ii) Verify connections to the City storm or sanitary sewer connections
are compliant at discharge locations.
(iii) Verify the appropriate Permit To Take Water (PTTW) and
discharge permit have been obtained.
(iv) Ensure visible markers and protection are installed around
dewatering wells, observation wells and other dewatering facilities
and temporary sumps within the excavation footprint that will be in
close proximity to truck and equipment movements.
(d) Notify and obtain approvals from all agencies required prior to
commencing work.

(a) Prior to any bulk excavation, submit for review by the Metrolinx
Representative a Shaft Access and Egress Safety Plan. The plan shall
include the required primary and backup means to egress from the shaft.
This shall include provisions such as fixed ladders with cages and power
assisted hoisting capabilities.
(b) Prior to any bulk excavation, submit for review by the Metrolinx
Representative an Action and Contingency Plan for Adverse SOE
Deformations. The Action Plan shall:
(i) Address measures to be adopted when deformations reach and
exceed the Response Criteria (Review Level and Alert Level)
values contained in the Specification Section 31 09 13 –
Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring and the response
Criteria presented in Table 2.4 of the TTC Technical Review and
Submission Requirements that are contained in the Agreement,
Schedule 4 – Review Procedures, Appendix B, Attachment 2.
(ii) Outline the required coordination with TTC and the measures that
shall be taken if TTC structures shows adverse movement trends
or movements that exceed the Response Criteria
(iii) Include a flow chart of actions, coordinated with the geotechnical
and structural instrumentation monitoring data and the
requirements of the Specification Section 31 09 13 – Geotechnical
Instrumentation and Monitoring.
(iv) Include emergency contact details of the Contractor, the Metrolinx
Representative and TTC with consideration of daytime and
nighttime contact persons. Persons to be notified and the
circumstances when notifications shall be initiated shall be outlined
in the flow chart of actions.
(c) Prior to any bulk excavation, submit for review by the Metrolinx
Representative a Contingency Plan for Encountering, Testing and
Managing Contaminated or Hazardous Waste.
(d) Prior to any bulk excavation, submit for review by the Metrolinx
Representative a Bulk Excavation Work Plan. The plan shall include the
following:
(i) Expected sequence of bulk excavation work. The sequencing plan
shall include the following:
A. Sequence of work to demonstrating that the existing TTC
structure will not be subjected to unbalanced excavation.
B. How the bulk excavation works will be coordinated with the

installation of strutting and tiebacks.
C. The intended sequence of excavation between the North Shaft
and South Shaft and the Wide Section and Narrow Section
within each shaft.
(ii) Coordination between dewatering and bulk excavation to ensure
the entrapped groundwater level remains at least 1.0 m below the
lowest point of the bulk excavation at any time.
(iii) Quantity and type of all equipment to be used for the bulk
excavation including, but not limited to:
A. Equipment for excavation and material movements within the
shafts.
B. Equipment for removal of the excavated material from within
the shaft to surface.
C. Equipment to be used on surface to move material, stockpile
material and load trucks for the off-site disposal of excavated
material.
D. Exclusion and protection zone around crane operations and
load out operations on surface.
(iv) Details of the dewatering scheme and equipment, including but not
limited to wells, sumps and submersible pumps.
(v) Details of how to assess and remove protrusions in the wall due to
objects or boulders that have been cast into the slurry wall.
(vi) A plan on how to scale and clean the surface of the wall of adhered
soil debris during bulk excavation.
(vii) Details of how nuisance noise, vibration and dust control will be
controlled and managed.
(viii) Details of proposed stockpile and load-out locations.
(ix) Procedures for sorting of materials if applicable.
(x) Location plan of abandoned utilities within the excavation footprint
including a procedure to confirm the utility is no longer active and
has been abandoned.
(xi) Procedures to be undertaken if an unidentified utility, not previously
determined as abandoned, is uncovered or encountered during the
bulk excavation works.
(xii) Procedure for support in place utilities in the footprint of the support
of excavation.
(xiii) Plan for site illumination.
(e) Prior to any bulk excavation, submit for review by the Metrolinx
Representative an Excavation Contingency Plan for Compromised Slurry
Wall Integrity. The plan should include the following:
(i) Measures to determine and mitigate defective slurry wall panels
including zones where there is an open connection to the retained
soil behind the slurry wall, zones of defective concrete, and zones
of soil and / or water inundation.
(f) Prior to any bulk excavation, submit for review by the Metrolinx
Representative a Contingency Plan for Compromised Strut and Waler
Integrity. The plan shall include the following:
(i) Procedure for protecting struts and walers from damage due to
excavation and lifting activities, and remedial work plan in case of
damage to struts or walers including method of removing the
damaged element, installing a new element, monitoring localized
deformations, and providing measures to locally restrain the slurry
wall.
(g) Prior to any bulk excavation, submit for review by the Metrolinx
Representative a Crane and Lifting Equipment Package. This shall
include:
(i) Details of crane(s) to be used including clamshell buckets, muck
boxes and all other attachments. Specification data sheets shall be
provided for all crane equipment.
(ii) Copy of crane permit.
(iii) Design of crane pad, signed-and-sealed by a Professional
(iv) Impact Assessment Report to show that the crane load has no
adverse impact on adjacent structures including the existing TTC
structures and the support of excavation.
(v) Crane procedures for mucking including safety procedures for
working around a crane, and support personnel for crane
operations including Rigger-in-Charge, Rigger and Walker, and
other personnel involves in the safe operation of cranes.
(vi) Details for offload, erection and inspection procedures of the crane.
(vii) Procedures for powering down and lowering the boom ahead of
inclement weather or lightning storms, and for inspection and start-
up procedures upon resuming work.
(viii) Procedures for lowering heavy equipment safely and without
physical contact with installed bracing.
(ix) Critical lift procedures.
(h) Submit weekly Bulk Excavation Progress Reports that include:
(i) Excavation status for the North Shaft and South Shaft and the
Wide Section and Narrow Section within each shaft.
(ii) Status of bulk excavation complete and work remaining, with
weekly updated schedule information for the bulk excavation
estimate to complete.
(iii) Status of the entrapped groundwater drawdown status with respect
to the lowest excavation level.
(iv) Details of any contaminated or hazardous ground encountered.
(v) Details of boulders encountered with size as defined in the
Geotechnical Baseline Report (GBR).
(vi) Any other unexpected conditions.
(vii) Equipment utilization and equipment downtime summary.

(a) The bulk excavation work shall be under the supervision of the following:
(i) Superintendent(s) having not less than five (5) years of recent
experience working on projects of similar type, size, and
complexity, in a similar role.
(ii) Shift Supervisor(s) shall have not less than three (3) years of
recent experience working on projects of similar type, size, and
complexity, in a similar role.
(b) For cranes used on site, the operating personnel for crane operations
shall have the following qualifications and experience:
(i) Crane Operator shall be certified and shall have not less than five
(5) years of recent experience working on projects of similar type,
size, and complexity, in a similar role.
(ii) Crane Rigger-in-Charge shall have not less than five (5) years of
recent experience working on projects of similar type, size, and
complexity.
(iii) Crane Rigger shall have not less than three (3) years of recent
complexity.
(iv) Crane Walker shall have not less than three (3) years of recent
complexity.

(a) Protect excavated materials from weather, excess temperature, and
handling.
(b) Spoil load-out and hauling away of spoils shall be made in accordance
with the hours indicated on the Agreement and as stipulated in the
construction permit.
PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
(a) Equipment and vehicles used for excavation, hauling and disposing of
excavated material and muck shall be properly muffled to minimize
noise. Vehicles shall not impose loads that will damage existing utilities
and structures. Vehicles shall include covers to prevent infiltration, spills,
leaks or release of liquids.
(b) Crane equipment, and boom and jib configurations, shall be included in
the Crane and Lifting Equipment Package, with specification data sheets
provided for all equipment. Cranes to be used on site shall suit the size
of site, depth of excavation, expected working ranges and required loads
of equipment and materials. Crane shall be equipped with camera/s on
the boom, providing clear view for the crane operator.
(c) If a conveyor system is to be used, it shall be designed to operate safely
and quietly while withstanding all operating and wind loads. The systems
shall be designed to minimize spillage and control dust and noise. The
Contractor shall guard all idlers, pulleys, and drives that are accessible
unless specific safety procedures are established for work around
unguarded components.
(d) Street sweeping and dust control equipment will be required. The
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Cap Beam construction and the installation of a safety guardrail shall be
completed prior to bulk excavation.
(b) Tag-in / Tag-out board shall be established prior to bulk excavation
commencing so that the Contractor can ensure that above-ground
personnel can determine an accurate count of the number of persons
underground in the event of an emergency.
(c) Conduct all operations to minimize the impact of noise in accordance
with the Agreement. Equipment shall be equipped with noise
suppressors such as silencers or mufflers.
(d) The method of excavating within the support of excavation is at the
option of the Contractor.
(e) Ensure personnel within the support of excavation stay a minimum of
2 m away from the face of the slurry wall.
(f) Coordinate all bulk excavation activities with the installation works for the
walers and struts, installation of tiebacks, and installation of tie anchors.
(g) Excavate to the lines, grade, and dimensions shown on the Drawings.
Remove excavated materials in accordance with the requirements of this
Specification Section and Specification Section 31 20 01 – Muck and
Excavated Materials Disposal.
(h) Temporary stockpiles, whether on surface or within the support of
excavation, shall be of a manageable size; configured with stable slopes
and shall be designed to protect excavated materials from precipitation,
runoff, and erosion.
(i) Bulk excavation works within the support of excavation shall not cause
damage to dewatering wells for entrapped groundwater, observation
wells or any other geotechnical instruments including instruments
installed in the slurry wall or around the perimeter of the support of
excavation.
(j) Protect instruments from being inundated with spoils during bulk material
handling.
(k) Stockpiles shall be established, protected, and maintained in accordance

with applicable erosion and sedimentation control permits and
regulations, and with applicable storm water permits and regulations.
(l) The Contractor’s Field Engineer or Geotechnical Engineer shall record in
a daily log the soils encountered across the shaft sites including any
pertinent characteristic or observations regarding subsurface conditions
encountered, soil behaviour, unwatering issues, nested cobbles and
boulders and the occurrence of large boulders during the progress of the
bulk excavation.
3.2 ENCOUNTERING COMPROMISED SECTIONS OF SLURRY WALL

(a) The excavation shall be performed to prevent inflow of material and
groundwater from outside the support of excavation system. If a portion
of the slurry wall is identified as being compromised in either structural
integrity or soil and groundwater inundation is encountered, immediately
place excavated material against the slurry wall to form a robust soil
berm extending past and above the compromised wall and to temporarily
arrest zones of soil of groundwater inundation.
(b) Convene a meeting with the Metrolinx Representative for the slurry wall,
Metrolinx and, if required, TTC to review the contingency plan and
determine the following:
(i) The severity of compromised wall integrity and whether structural
repairs are required prior to proceeding with excavation.
(ii) Suitable options to arrest soil or groundwater inundation.
(iii) Options for localized repair measure for the wall, including but not
limited to grouting and shotcrete application.
(c) Immediately backfill voids that develop behind the slurry wall with grout,
lean concrete or no-fines concrete fill in accordance with Specification
Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill, and restrict access to the area.
3.3 EXCAVATION LIFT REQUIREMENTS AND PREVENTING AN

UNBALANCED EXCAVATION CONDITION
(a) TTC structures shall not be exposed to Unbalanced Loading from
excavation lifts within the Support of Excavation on either side of the
TTC structure.
(b) The Contractor shall perform excavation lifts within the Support of
Excavation in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings and the
submitted Bulk Excavation Work Plan.
(c) The maximum elevation difference of the excavation between the North
Shaft and the South Shaft shall not exceed 2 m and / or one row of
installed tiebacks or one row of installed tie anchors.
(d) The maximum elevation difference of the excavation contained within an
entire Wide Section shall not exceed 2 m and / or one row of installed
tiebacks.
(e) The installation of a level of struts, a row of tiebacks and a row of tie
anchors shall be fully completed and tested, if required, before
proceeding with the next lift of the excavation. This requirement applies
in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
(f) The maximum temporary slope angle within the excavation shall not
exceed 1V:1H. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the safety
and stability of excavated soil within the support of excavation.
(g) The Contractor shall ensure adequate dewatering of the entrapped
groundwater and surface run-off from precipitation within the support of
excavation is provided in accordance with Specification Section 31 23 19
– Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal.
(h) Protection around dewatering wells, associated pipework and
observation wells shall be provided.
(i) Protection around temporary sumps within the excavation shall be
provided.
3.4 SCALING OF SOIL MATERIALS FROM SURFACE OF SLURRY WALL

(a) Scaling:
(i) As bulk excavation progresses, soil material that is adhered to the
face of the wall shall be removed to prevent a falling debris hazard.
Material should be removed by scaling, pressure washing and
other approved methods.
(ii) Removal of adhered soil material shall be completed as excavation
progresses, ensuring no more than 2 m vertically of wall surface is
present prior to scaling and cleaning.
3.5 OBJECTS CAST INTO AND PROTRUDING FROM THE SLURRY WALL
(a) Objects Protruding from the Slurry Wall:
(i) When objects such as boulders are encountered that have been
cast into the wall and protrude past the surface of the wall,
document the location, nature and size of the protrusion and notify
(ii) The Metrolinx Representative shall determine if the protrusion is

considered to compromise to the structural integrity of the slurry
wall.
(iii) The Metrolinx Representative shall determine if the obstruction is
loose and risks dislodging and falling.
(iv) Contractor shall notify the Metrolinx Representative on how the
protrusion will be removed to the extent required to satisfy space
proofing requirements for the future structure and to satisfy
tolerance requirements for the slurry wall in accordance with
Specification Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls.
3.6 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) All haul vehicles are to be inspected for soil adhesion to wheels and
undercarriage. Soils shall be removed and properly handled in
accordance with Specification Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated
Materials Disposal.
(b) All rinse waters are to be collected and disposed of in accordance with
Specification Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater
Disposal and with the Construction Agreement, Schedule 10 –
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for the removal of entrapped
groundwater during the bulk excavation within the support of excavation,
maintaining the groundwater level below the base of excavation until
handing over the dewatering system to Metrolinx, and the discharge of
groundwater to the City of Toronto drainage system.
(b) To remove entrapped groundwater within the support of excavation, a
dewatering system may be required. Any such system, if required, shall
be designed, installed and operated by experienced professionals with
expertise in dewatering systems.
(c) This scope also covers the requirement for transitioning to managing
nuisance water upon completion of the bulk excavation within the
support of excavation and the discharge of water to the City of Toronto
drainage system.

(d) Section 31 23 00 – Excavating and Fill
(e) Section 31 23 16 – Shaft Excavation
(f) Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

(a) Measurement:
(b) Payment:
A. Item C.2.1 – ‘Dewatering’ (Pape Station North SOE).
B. Item C.3.1 – ‘Dewatering’ (Pape Station South SOE).
C. Item D.2.1 – ‘Dewatering’ (Sammon Ave SOE).
(ii) Each item shall include, but not be limited to:

A. The supply, assembly and commissioning of the Dewatering
Systems, Groundwater Control Systems and water treatment
systems.
B. Operating and maintaining the systems, pumping of
groundwater inflows, control and care of water, treating,
sampling, monitoring and discharging at the designated
discharge point or transport from Site where required.
(iii) Each item shall cover those pertinent Articles of Schedule 10 –
(iv) Payment for Each lump sum item shall be as follows:
A. 30% upon commissioning of all Dewatering Systems,
Groundwater Control Systems and water treatment systems.
B. 70% on a monthly prorated basis commencing upon
commissioning of all systems up until completion of Handover
of the Work.

(a) Ontario Regulations:
(i) Regulation 903 – Wells.
(b) OSOR Section 1370 – Environmental Control.
(c) Environmental Activity and Sector Registry (EASR) or Permit To Take
Water (PTTW) for construction dewatering.
(d) Ontario Water Resources Act (OWRA).
(e) O.Reg. 387/04, Water Taking and Transfer.
(f) O.Reg. 63/16, Registrations Under Part II.2 of the Act – Water Taking.
(g) Environmental requirements, including:
(i) Provincial Legislation:
A. Environmental Protection Act (EPA).
B. Ontario Water Resources Act (Ontario).
C. Clean Water Act (Ontario).
(h) Technical Reports prepared for this Project as referenced in Schedule 10
– Environmental Obligations.

(a) Definitions:
(i) Cut-off System: A generally watertight or very low permeability wall
system, typically toed into a very low permeability ground strata
used to prevent the passage of groundwater into an excavation
and to prevent groundwater drawdown and associated ground
movements outside of the excavation. A cut-off system will also
minimize the dewatering pumping demand.
(ii) Dewatering Installer/Operator: The legal entity or legal entities that
will install and operate the Dewatering System.
(iii) Dewatering Pump: An electric submersible pump installed within a
well to extract groundwater.
(iv) Dewatering System: The components required to control water to
permit construction work to proceed under specified conditions,
and may include a groundwater control system, diversion of storm
water and surface water, impermeable barriers, pumps and/or
equipment to carry out ‘unwatering’.
(v) Dewatering Well: A well which is part of a dewatering system to
lower the entrapped groundwater using a series of drilled wells.
(vi) Discharge Point: Location where water upon exiting the treatment
plant or storage tank, and after it has been sampled, is discharged
to the City of Toronto storm sewer, or sanitary sewer, system.
(vii) Drainage Water: Water from sumps and collectors from outside
and within the excavation and across the site. This also include
precipitation and run-off.
(viii) Engineer: A professional engineer licensed by Professional
(ix) Entrapped Groundwater: Groundwater entrapped within soil prior
to bulk excavation that is contained within the cut-off wall system.
(x) Environmental Activity and Sector Registry (EASR): A risk-based
approach used by the Government of Ontario, Ministry of the
Environment for managing environmental approvals through a
registry. The EASR is a public, web-based system that allows
businesses conducting certain activities to register them with the
ministry, rather than applying for an environmental approval.
Businesses engaged in select activities that meet eligibility
requirements are required to register the activity or sector. The
EASR is a tool that maintains environmental protection.

Registrants are required to follow eligibility rules and regulations,
and are subject to inspections and compliance penalties.
(xi) Flow Meter: An instrument that is used to indicate the amount of
liquid moving through a pipe.
(xii) Geoscientist: A professional geoscientist licensed by Professional
Geoscientists Ontario to practice in the province of Ontario.
(xiii) Groundwater: The water naturally present in the ground. Under this
Specification Section, it is the entrapped groundwater within the
footprint of the support of excavation that needs to be removed
during the bulk excavation.
(xiv) Groundwater Control System: Sump pumps, dewatering wells or
other systems used to lower the entrapped groundwater level by
means of pumping for extraction.
(xv) Manifold: A pipe system to connect a series of wells to convey
extracted groundwater in an inline system to a collection or
treatment system.
(xvi) Non-sewage Wastewater: Water generated after the use of
freshwater, raw water, drinking water or saline water in a variety of
deliberate applications or processes. Non-sewage wastewater
does not contain human or animal waste.
(xvii) Nuisance Water: Groundwater that penetrates a support of
excavation system and rainfall that directly falls into an excavation
that unless collected and removed will cause a nuisance and
interference with the Works.
(xviii) Observation Well / Groundwater Monitoring Well: A monitoring well
used for observing groundwater levels. The monitoring well may be
an open standpipe or installed with a piezometer.
(xix) Permit To Take Water (PTTW): A permit provided by the Ministry
of the Environment of the Government of Ontario upon processing
a successful permit application to take more than 50,000 litres of
water per day from the environment.
(xx) Piezometer: An instrument installed in a monitoring well capable of
measuring the pressure of a liquid to determine the depth of
groundwater.
(xxi) Sediment: Soil particles detached from an earth surface by
erosion.
(xxii) Sediment Control Measure: A measure to remove sediment from

water prior to discharge to the natural environment and sewer
systems.
(xxiii) Slurry Wall Shaft: A shaft constructed using slurry wall panel with a
groundwater cut-off system achieved by excavating and
constructing the bottom of the wall with a suitable length into Type
17 bedrock.
(xxiv) Temporary Flow Control Device: A valve or device used to control
water flow along any portion of a discharge line to and from a
treatment system.
(xxv) Temporary Discharge Line: Temporary flow pipes, and other
materials used to convey extracted groundwater from a series of
wells to an on-site treatment system.
(xxvi) Unwatering: Term used to remove entrapped groundwater where
there is no source of recharge due to the installation of a cut off
system.
(xxvii)Well Development: The drilling of a borehole to accommodate a
well and the completion of the well including the installation of the
slotted casing, pump, filter system and screen. A process forcing
the movement of water within the well is used to clear the well,
screen openings and perforations of fine sediment to ensure
successful operation of the well.


(a) Submit an Excavation Dewatering Plan which includes shop drawings
and engineering calculations, signed and sealed by a Professional
Geoscientist or Professional Engineer licensed in the province of
Ontario. Any required dewatering and on-site treatment systems,
including discharge from them and abandonment, are required to comply
with the requirements of Ontario Water Resources Act (OWRA) and
other relevant legislation. The plan shall include:
(i) A copy of the City of Toronto Sewer Discharge Agreement for
discharge of water to a City sanitary / combined sewer.
(ii) A copy of the PTTW or registration on the EASR to permit the
taking of water.
(iii) Design and Shop Drawings, including plans, sections and details,
installation details, and any other required details of the proposed
type of dewatering system, showing the arrangement, locations
and depths of components of the system including but not limited
to dewatering wells and pumps, observation wells, piping locations,
collection tank and treatment plant locations, and insulation and
heat trace requirements.
(iv) The system shall be designed to prevent ground loss or erosion
where water is removed, pumped, or discharged.
(v) Proposed pump specifications.
(vi) Proposed location(s) of points of discharge of water to the City
system.
(vii) Schedule for installation including well development, testing and
implementation of the dewatering system.
(viii) Testing and acceptance requirements.
(ix) Details of the operation of the system including sampling and
measuring requirements, and for monitoring water levels in the
observation wells.
(x) Chemical storage provisions with details on how safety and
security will be maintained.
(xi) Contingency plans to address potential emergencies such as
power failure, overflow and parameters exceeding OWRA
discharge limits for volumes or sampled chemicals or parameters.
(b) Prior to completion of the bulk excavation, submit a Dewatering
Transition Plan, which details how the system will be transitioned to
managing nuisance water once the bulk excavation has been completed.
Details shall also include the temporary period during which the SOE
base slab is being constructed and until the system is handed over to
Metrolinx in operational condition. Plan shall include:
(i) Equipment used to pump, treat and discharge the site or nuisance
water.
(ii) Proposed City discharge location.
(iii) Details of what portions of the dewatering system will be
decommissioned and removed and what will remain and be
repurposed.
(iv) Details of the operation of the system including sampling and
measuring requirements.
(c) Monthly Sampling and Monitoring Reports: Reports shall be submitted

monthly, before the 7th day of the month for the previous month. Reports
to shall be in accordance with the Agreement, Schedule 10 –

(a) Qualifications of Designer:
(i) Engage services of a Professional Engineer or Professional
Geoscientist, licensed in province of Ontario, with experience and
expertise in hydrology or hydrogeology to design and direct
installation and operation of dewatering system. Include in design
maintenance and operation of system. Have designer seal design
calculations and drawings of dewatering system.
(b) Qualifications of Dewatering Installer/Operator:
(i) The Dewatering Installer/Operator shall have a minimum of 10
years of expertise and experience in the successful installation and
operation of dewatering systems of similar scope and complexity.
(c) Permits:
(i) Coordinate with the Metrolinx Representative to obtain approvals
from the City for the permit to discharge into the City system.
(d) Contractor’s Quality Assurance Programme and Compliance:
(i) The Contractor must comply with the requirements of Schedule 10
– Environmental Obligations, of the Agreement.
(ii) The Contractor is responsible for conducting its own quality
assurance programme to ensure all materials and workmanship
meet the requirements of this Section and all Schedules of the
Agreement.
(iii) Measure and record, on a form, the total daily groundwater and
drainage water discharge to each City discharge point.
(iv) Submit to the Metrolinx Representative the chemical analysis of
water discharged into the City discharge point.
1.9 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

(a) Design of the shaft dewatering system including wells and treatment
system shall be designed for the ground conditions and groundwater
conditions described in the Geotechnical Baseline Report, the
Geotechnical and Hydrogeological Design Memorandum for Pape

Station and Sammon Avenue SOE, and other applicable documents.
(b) Dewatering system shall be designed, installed and operated to lower
the entrapped groundwater a minimum of 1 m below the lowest elevation
of the bulk excavation at all times as the excavation progresses in order
to control the condition of the muck and manage muck disposal.
(c) The dewatering system shall be designed to maintain the groundwater
level a minimum of 1 m below the base slab invert at all times upon
completion of the bulk excavation and construction of the SOE base
slabs within the shafts. Continuous pumping of groundwater is required
to prevent uplift of the base slab by maintaining the groundwater below
the base slab.
PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
(a) Provide materials that are new or in serviceable condition, free of defects
that could impair their performance.
(b) Materials and products shall comply with the design provided by the
Contractor’s Engineer for removal of entrapped groundwater and
managing disposal of on-site non-potable water.
2.2 MATERIALS
(a) All documentations for the materials required for the systems provided
for the removal of entrapped groundwater and managing disposal of on-
site non-potable water shall be submitted to the Metrolinx
Representative.
(b) Geotechnical and Water Level Monitoring equipment shall comply with
the Specification Section 31 09 13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and
Monitoring.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
(a) All documentations for the systems provided for the removal of
entrapped groundwater and managing disposal of on-site non-potable
water shall be submitted to the Metrolinx Representative. Any equipment
required shall be determined by the Contractor’s Engineer.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) All work to be conducted in accordance with all permits and approvals,
including Permit To Take Water or EASR registration, and Sewer
Discharge Agreement.
(b) Obtain approvals from the City for the permit to discharge into the City
system in accordance with the Construction Agreement, Schedule 10 –
3.2 PREPARATION
(a) Stormwater runoff and surface runoff shall be prohibited from entering
excavations.
3.3 INSTALLATION
(a) The water treatment system and / or collection tank, all associated
piping, controls, electricals works and back-up power provisions shall be
carried out by the Contractor’s Dewatering Installer / Operator for the
dewatering system.
(b) The designer is required to inspect the installation of the dewatering
system and certify that installation and operation is in accordance with
design during the testing and acceptance phase.
(c) Installation of all dewatering wells and observation wells to be carried out
in accordance with the drilling procedure for wells, the well installation
procedure and well development procedures submitted by the
Contractor’s Dewatering Installer/Operator for the dewatering system.
(d) During duration of operation, maintain dewatering systems safely to
prevent hazard to public and in accordance with regulations and
requirements of City authorities.
(e) Minimize obstruction to pedestrian and vehicular traffic during installation
of dewatering system, and during subsequent operation of system.
(f) For any installation provisions outside of the excavation, and in public
areas, install components such as pipes, headers and other dewatering
equipment in covered trenches, or protect by acceptable means, to keep
streets, sidewalks, walkways, driveways, fences and existing facilities
unobstructed for their intended use.
(g) Clearly identify locations of dewatering system installations and install
barricades and signs necessary to ensure safety to public, construction
personnel and as a measure to reduce damage to the system from

construction equipment.
(h) Prior to excavation and drilling works for the dewatering system, locate
existing underground utilities and make provisions in dewatering system
installation to accommodate such utilities. Coordinate the Work with
relevant utility companies and authorities.
(i) The location of all components of the dewatering system shall be
selected so that all construction activities until the end of construction of
the permanent structures can take place with no conflict issues.
(j) The dewatering system shall not be installed within the exclusion zones
shown in the Drawings.
3.4 DEWATERING
(a) Operate dewatering system in accordance with the operation procedures
and any other requirements listed in the Shop Drawings.
(b) Supply, install and operate additional dewatering measures or measures
to control nuisance water necessary to carry out Work.
(c) Store and / or treat water to allow sedimentation prior to discharge into
appropriate City system.
(d) The dewatering system shall:
(i) Maintain entrapped groundwater a minimum of 1 m below the
lowest excavation line at any time during the bulk excavation.
(ii) Maintain the groundwater level below the completed shaft
excavation a minimum of 1 m below the bottom of the SOE base
slab at all times until handing over the dewatering system to
Metrolinx.
(iii) Be kept in operational condition at all times to maintain a dry,
stable working condition and to prevent uplift pressure on the
completed base slab. Metrolinx will coordinate ongoing
management, operation and maintenance of the dewatering
system upon Final Completion. Contractor shall provide Metrolinx
will all manuals, certificates, procedures and records at Handover.
(e) The requirements of Clause 3.4(d)(i), (ii) and (iii) apply to both the Pape
Station shafts and the Sammon Avenue Headhouse shaft.
(f) Monitor intake water regularly for signs of high sediment and adjust
dewatering system as needed to prevent ground loss.
(g) Water taking rate shall not exceed the maximum rate indicated on any
applicable PTTW or EASR registration.
3.5 DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATED AREAS

(a) Maintain local sumps with submersible pumps within the excavation of
adequate size to intercept and collect surface and subsurface water and
any seepage which may enter excavation. Configuration of sumps and
associated pumps will need to be constantly adjusted as bulk excavation
proceeds.
(b) Grade bottom of excavation for water to flow to filtered sumps and
prevent water from ponding on excavation bottom.
3.6 DISCHARGE OF WATER

(a) Collection system shall be designed and installed to permit discharge
into a City sanitary / combined sewer that is located near to or within the
site.
(b) Sample and test water for discharge into sewers for parameters defined
in the Agreement, Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations.
(c) Prefilter discharge water to limit particulates being discharged to the
sanitary / combined system.
3.7 PORTIONS OF SYSTEM TO BE LEFT IN PLACE

(a) Any drainage water / nuisance water collection and treatment facilities
used for the collection and discharge of water that is present, or collects
within the completed SOE, and within the site area, shall be handed over
to Metrolinx at Handover in operational condition. Operation manuals,
maintenance records and a set of monitoring and sampling records for
the 12 months prior to Handover shall also be provided.
(b) Coordinate the permit transfer of ownership, if possible, with Metrolinx
and TTC.
3.8 PORTIONS OF SYSTEM TO BE REMOVED

(a) Upon completion of the bulk excavation, remove only the portions of a
dewatering system that will no longer be required to extract entrapped
groundwater. Maintain any facilities that will then be used to manage
nuisance water / drainage water. Demolish well casing, and
appurtenances, unless otherwise directed.
(b) Decommission existing wells including dewatering wells and observation
wells which are to be abandoned and which will not be fully removed by
the excavation such as any wells that extend beyond the elevation of the
SOE Base Slab.
(i) Decommission in accordance with Ontario Regulation 903 and
MOE's recommended method for plugging wells and to the
acceptance of the Metrolinx representative.
(ii) Prepare records for decommissioning of monitoring wells and
submit to Metrolinx.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for the installation,
maintenance, monitoring and removal of temporary erosion and sediment
control (ESC) measures.

(d) Section 31 05 17 – Aggregates
(e) Section 31 14 13 – Soil Stripping and Stockpiling
(f) Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal
(g) Section 31 22 13 – Grading
(h) Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill
(i) Section 31 23 16 – Shaft Excavation
(j) Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal
(k) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

(a) Measurement:
(b) Payment:
A. Item B.1.8 – ‘Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control’
(During Demolition Works).
B. Item C.1.1 – ‘Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control’ (Pape
Station SOE).
C. Item D.1.1 – ‘Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control’
(Sammon Ave SOE).
(ii) Payment for Each lump sum item shall be as follows:

A. 60% upon supply and installation of all erosion and sediment
control measures at the Work Sites.
installation of erosion and sediment control measures and up
to completion of Handover in accordance with Schedule 8 –
outline Commissioning Program and Handover.

(a) Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Construction:
(i) OPSS 182 – Environmental Protection.
(ii) OPSS 805 – Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control.
(b) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications, Material:
(i) OPSS 1860 – Geotextiles.
(c) Canadian and Provincial Statutes:
(i) Ontario Water Resources Act, R.S.O. 1990, c. 0.40.

(a) Definitions:
(i) Best Management Practice (BMP): Erosion control best
management practices are required during all ground disturbing
activity until permanent site ground cover is in place. A BMP for
ESC is a physical, chemical, structural or managerial practice that
prevents, reduces or treats contamination of water or which
prevents or reduces soil erosion.
(ii) Diversion Ditch: A temporary channel to intercept and convey
overland flow away from areas of disturbed or erodible soil and to
minimize erosion of slopes from sheet flow.
(iii) Earth: All soils and crushed rock. Excludes stone masonry,
concrete, and other manufactured materials.
(iv) Erosion: The physical removal or detachment of soil particles from
an earth surface, followed by the transport of detached particles to
another location by the action of a mobile agent including rain,
flowing water, wind, equipment and vehicles.
(v) Erosion and Sedimentation Control (ESC): Stabilization and

protection measures employed to limit erosion and sedimentation
during construction.
(vi) Fibre Roll: An assembled or commercially available flexible, tubular
structure that provides sediment control and may provide run-off
filtration and includes wattles, filter socks and filter berms.
(vii) Sediment: Soil particles detached from an earth surface by erosion.
(viii) Watercourse: A stream, creek, river, or channel including ditches,
in which the flow of water is permanent, intermittent, or temporary.


(a) Prior to commencement of any stripping, grading or earthworks, the
Contractor shall submit:
(i) ESC Plan:
A. The ESC Plan shall identify the applicable stabilization
strategies that will be employed to limit erosion and
sedimentation during construction. The ESC Plan shall identify
mandatory ESC requirements for the site based on the scope
of work together with the Contractor’s methodology to address
each requirement.
B. The ESC Plan shall include control measure BMPs to be
implemented and shall identify critical areas of monitoring
where there is an elevated risk of deficiency or failure to
comply where corrective action must be taken by the
Contractor. Control measure BMPs and critical areas of
monitoring shall each be presented on a sketch or series of
sketches.
C. The ESC plan sketches shall be updated and submitted at
least 3 Working Days prior to the removal of any measure to
suit the phasing of the demolition and excavation works. For
any ESC measures removed, the ESC plan sketches shall
identify the locations where alternative ESC measures will be
established.
D. The ESC Plan shall include a matrix of corrective actions to be
taken under each deficiency or failure to comply condition.
E. The ESC Plan shall include an inspection schedule including

times that inspections will take place, areas to be inspected,
and personnel responsible. Reporting of the inspections shall
be included on daily and weekly ESC Inspection Logs.
F. The ESC Plan shall include template forms for the ESC Daily
Inspection Log and the ESC Weekly Inspection Log.
G. Once accepted by Metrolinx Representative, the ESC Plan
shall be submitted to TTC prior to the start of the Work.
H. The ESC Plan shall include details of phasing of the
construction project and the scheduling of the proposed
construction works.
I. The ESC Plan shall include a description of the site’s access
and measures to be taken to prevent the transfer of sediment
off site via construction vehicle.
J. The ESC Plan shall include all stormwater discharge locations
are to be identified and detailed.

(a) Qualifications:
(i) All ESC inspections should be carried out by an Environmental
Inspector who meets the criteria of Qualified Erosion and Sediment
Control Inspector (QESCI) or QESCI in training (QESCI-IT) as
defined in the Canadian Standards Association Erosion and
Sediment Control Inspection and Monitoring standard (CSA, 2018)
and as defined in Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations.
(b) Monitoring / Inspection:
(i) All temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be
monitored during the inspections to ensure they are in effective
working order.
(ii) Monitoring shall be at a minimum:
A. Once a week.
B. Prior to significant rainfall events (minimum predicted 25mm
over 24 hours).
C. After every rainfall / snowmelt event.
D. Daily during extended rainfall periods.
(iii) Contractor to provide the Metrolinx Representative with ESC

monitoring and inspection documentation. At a minimum, this shall
include the completed TTC ESC Inspection Log, together with the
TTC Schedule E1 and Schedule E2 forms.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Straw and Straw Bales:
(i) Straw shall be either wheat or oat straw.
(ii) Straw bales shall be dry and firm, be tied tightly in at least two (2)
places, show no evidence of straw or tie decay, and be free of
sediment.
(iii) They shall be of agricultural, rectangular formation and dimensions,
as specified in the Specifications and Drawings.
(b) Geosynthetics:
(i) Geotextile:
A. Geotextile shall be free of holes, tears, and punctures.
(ii) Silt Fence Geotextile:
A. Geotextile for silt fence shall be according to OPSS 1860,
Table 3.
B. Geotextile for silt fence may be separate from the stakes used
to install it as a sediment barrier.
(iii) Berm Barrier and Rock Flow Check Dam Geotextile:
A. Geotextile for berm barriers and rock flow check dams shall be
woven, Class II geotextile according to OPSS 1860.
B. The filtration opening size (FOS) shall be no greater than
300 µm.
(iv) Filter Bags:
A. Geotextile for filter bags shall be non-woven, polypropylene,
Class I in accordance with Table 1 of OPSS 1860.
(v) Catch basin sediment traps:
A. Filter fabric for silt control shall be Terra Fix 270R or approved
equal.
(c) Plastic Sheeting:

(i) Plastic sheeting used to wrap berm barriers or other sediment
control measures shall be 6 mil polyethylene of maximum available
width.
(d) Control Measure Support:
(i) Posts:
A. Posts to support light-duty silt fence barriers shall be wood or
steel metal posts.
(ii) Stakes:
A. Stakes shall be of sufficient strength and length to satisfy
control measure installation, performance and maintenance
requirements.
(e) Berm Barriers:
(i) Berm barriers shall be constructed using earth, sand, gravel, brush,
or compost.
(f) Sandbags:
(i) Sandbags shall be made from heavy gauge plastic, agricultural
burlap, or silt fence geotextile.
(ii) Heavy gauge plastic shall contain stabilizers or inhibitors resistant
to deterioration by ultraviolet radiation.
(iii) Sandbags shall be filled with clean sand, 19 mm gravel, or 6 mm
pea gravel, containing no silt or clay.
(g) Fibre Rolls:
(i) Fibre rolls shall be of a consistent internal thickness with even fibre
distribution throughout the roll.
(ii) Fibre rolls shall be covered on the outside with an open-weave,
biodegradable and photodegradable mesh or netting that securely
contains the fibres within the rolls.
(iii) Fibre rolls shall be filled with 100% organic, biodegradable material
such as shredded straw, wood fibres or compost, and may contain
seed.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Erosion and sediment control measures shall be implemented prior to,
and maintained during all construction phases to prevent entry of
sediment into the existing sewer systems. All damaged erosion and
sediment control measures shall be repaired or replaced within 24 hours
of inspection.
(b) Filter fabric shall be placed under grates on all catch basins to trap
sediment. Silt traps shall be cleaned regularly and shall not be removed
until such time as the curbs are constructed and the boulevards are
sodded or landscape areas graded and sodded.
(c) All activities, including maintenance procedures, shall be controlled to
prevent the entry of petroleum products, debris, rubble, concrete, or other
deleterious substances into the water. Vehicular refueling and
maintenance shall be conducted a minimum of 30m from water coarses
or drainage swales.
(d) Street sweeping, catch basin cleaning, and dust control are the
responsibility of the Contractor and shall be maintained on all roadways
to the satisfaction of the City.
(e) Erosion and Sediment Control (ESC) Plan is to be implemented to
minimize erosion and prevent off-site sediment transport.
(f) Construction activities shall be limited to the work area, and, as
necessary, sensitive features shall be demarcated if they are located
immediately adjacent to the work zone.
(g) The contractor shall implement a Spill Prevention and Response Plan in
accordance with Schedule 10 – Environmental Obligations.
(h) Spill response kits shall be kept safe and accessible on site.
(i) All sediment and erosion control measures shall be in proper working
order prior to the removal of any topsoil.
(j) All construction shall be per OPSS 182 and OPSS 805. Where there is a
conflict between the OPSS and the Drawings and Specifications, the
Drawings and Specifications shall take precedence.
3.2 OPERATIONAL CONSTRAINTS

(a) Protection of Stockpiled Materials:
(i) All stockpiles of erodible construction materials and excess or
surplus materials shall be protected from erosion and sediment
transport within 48 hours of being built.
(b) Establishment and Removal of ESC Measures:
(i) The establishment of temporary erosion and sediment control
measures shall be prior to any stripping, demolition, excavation or
grading activities.
(ii) Removal for temporary erosion and sediment control measures
shall only take place to suit the phasing of the demolition and
excavation works. For any measures removed to facilitate a new
phase of work, alternative ESC measures shall be established to
ensure erosion is minimized and off-site sediment transport is
prevented.
(iii) There shall be no removal of temporary erosion and sediment
control measures at the end of this Contract. All ESC measures
shall be managed by Metrolinx at the end of this Work in
preparation for them being handed over to the Contract 2 PTUS
Contractor.
(iv) Prior to the end of this Contract, any soiled, worn or damaged ESC
measures shall be made good through removal of silt
accumulation, maintenance or replacement.
3.3 DEWATERING
(a) General:
(i) Dewatering effluent shall be controlled to prevent passage of
sediment into environmental features or onto adjacent properties.
Discharge of dewatering effluent to sediment traps for dewatering
shall be controlled to avoid exceeding trap capacity and to prevent
scour and washout.
(b) Sediment Traps:
(i) Sediment traps shall be constructed to prevent sediment passage
from the upstream to the downstream side of the trap and so that
the majority of the sediment is collected in the excavated basin.
(ii) Sediment traps shall be constructed as a single control measure
consisting of an excavated basin.
(iii) The shape of the excavated basin may be varied to suit the
characteristics of the area surrounding it.
3.4 LIGHT-DUTY SEDIMENT BARRIERS

(a) General:
(i) Light-duty sediment barriers are light-duty straw bale barriers, light-
duty silt fence barriers, or light-duty fibre roll barriers.
(ii) When the Light-Duty Sediment Barriers item is specified in the
Specifications and Drawings, any light-duty sediment barriers may
be used.
(iii) When a specific light-duty sediment barrier is specified in the
Specifications and Drawings, there shall be no option of
substitution for the control measure.
(iv) Light-duty sediment barriers shall include protection placed against
the downslope side at the low points of the barrier.
(b) Light-Duty Straw Bale Barriers:
(i) Light-duty straw bale barriers shall be constructed as specified in
the Specifications and Drawings.
(ii) When specified to be installed around catch basin, straw bales
shall be placed completely around catch basin and ditch inlets
without gaps.
(iii) When a double row of straw bales is specified in the Specifications
and Drawings, the straw bales shall be placed such that the joints
between the straw bales of each row are not in-line with the joints
of the straw bales of the adjacent row.
(iv) Stakes securing the bales shall be driven through the bales without
breaking the bale ties or otherwise disturbing bale firmness and
shape.
(v) Maintenance shall include the replacement of each bale at intervals
not exceeding 45 Calendar Days.
(c) Light-Duty Silt Fence Barriers:
(i) Light-duty silt fence barriers shall be constructed as specified in the
(ii) Light-duty silt fence barriers shall not be used for perimeter control
or property line delineation unless specified in the Specifications
and Drawings.
(iii) Light-duty silt fence barriers shall be installed within a trench

excavated along the contour of the ground such that the elevation
of the above ground portion of the fence is the same along its entire
length except at the ends. During frozen conditions the barriers do
not need to be trenched.
(iv) Light-duty silt fence barriers shall be installed without breaks or
gaps along their entire length and only be installed on flat ground
with a minimum offset of 2 m from the toe of slope being protected.
(v) When a longer sediment barrier is required, another light-duty silt
fence barrier shall be installed as specified in the Specifications
and Drawings.
(vi) The geotextile shall be attached firmly, without sagging, to the
upslope side of the stakes. Stakes shall be spaced to ensure the
geotextile remains vertical.
(vii) Where the geotextile is joined to provide a continuous run, the ends
shall be overlapped a minimum of 500 mm and securely fastened
to the stakes using cable ties or soft wire at the top of the geotextile
only.
(viii) The geotextile shall be angled upslope at the ends of each run in a
“J” pattern and so that the ends are at a higher elevation than the
bottom of the run.
(ix) When geotextile is supplied without stakes attached, the geotextile
shall be installed into the trench in the ground first, the stakes shall
be driven into the ground behind the geotextile, and the geotextile
shall be attached to the upslope side of the stakes using cable ties
or soft wire at the top of geotextile only.
(d) Light-Duty Fibre Roll Barriers:
(i) Light-duty fibre roll barriers shall be sized and constructed as
(ii) Light-duty fibre roll barriers shall be installed along the contour of
the ground into trenches that have been excavated into the soil
perpendicular to the slope face to a depth of approximately one half
the roll diameter and width across the width of the slope.
(iii) Any gullies shall be filled in where light-duty fibre roll barriers are to
be installed.
(iv) Light-duty fibre roll barriers shall only be installed on flat ground.
(v) When a longer sediment barrier is required, another light-duty fibre

roll barrier shall be installed tightly butted against the first one.
(vi) Light-duty fibre roll barriers shall be installed so that their base is in
continuous contact with the underlying soil along their entire length
without gaps and angled upslope at each end run in a “J” pattern.
(vii) The ends of the adjacent fibre roll segments shall be tightly butted
against each other and shall not be overlapped vertically or
horizontally.
(viii) A metal bar shall be used to make pilot holes through the centre of
the fibre rolls as specified in the Specifications and Drawings.
(ix) Pilot holes shall be made at the ends of each fibre roll segment
angled towards the next abutting fibre roll to hold adjacent rolls
together.
(x) Wooden stakes shall be driven into pilot holes as specified in the
3.5 MAINTENANCE
(a) All temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be
maintained in an effective, functioning, stable condition.
(b) All temporary erosion and sediment control measures in frozen
conditions shall be reconstructed once the ground has thawed to the
depth of the measure being placed.
3.6 SEDIMENT REMOVAL

(a) The Work shall consist of the removal and management of accumulated
sediment.
(b) Sediment that is accumulated by the temporary erosion and sediment
control measures shall be removed in a manner that avoids escape of the
sediment to the downstream side of the control measure and avoids
damage to the control measure.
(c) Sediment shall be removed to the level of the grade existing at the time
the control measure was constructed and be according to the following:
(i) For light-duty sediment barriers, accumulated sediment shall be
removed once it reaches a depth of one-half the effective height of
the control measure.
(ii) For heavy-duty sediment barriers, sediment traps, and sediment
traps for dewatering, accumulated sediment shall be removed once
it reaches one-half the effective height or depth of the control

measure.
(iii) For all control measures, accumulated sediment shall be removed
as necessary to perform maintenance and repairs.
(iv) Accumulated sediment shall be removed immediately prior to the
removal of the control measure.
3.7 CONTROL MEASURE REMOVAL

(a) Temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be removed and
associated excavations backfilled and compacted when the measures
are no longer required.
(b) Temporary erosion and sediment control measures shall be removed in a
manner that prevents release of sediment.
3.8 MANAGEMENT OF EXCESS MATERIAL

(a) Management of excess material shall be in accordance with Specification
Section 02 41 13 – Site Demolition, Specification Section 02 42 00 –
Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials, and Specification
Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal.
3.9 TTC ESC SCHEDULES:

(a) Schedule E1 – ESC Inspection and Photograph Checklist:
(i) Using the checklist attached to this Specification Section, the
Contractor shall conduct an inspection of all ESC measures
implemented on site each week and following any significant storm
event (12.7 mm of precipitation or greater), and daily during
extended rainfall or snowmelt periods. All maintenance to ESCs
shall be completed within twenty four (24) hours of inspection.
(ii) Inspections shall commence when the site is disturbed (i.e., when
site work begins), and carry through until final landscaping is
complete.
(iii) Provide a minimum of three (3) digital photographs of each ESC
measure implemented on Site. Record the date each photograph
was taken in the checklist. Photographs are required at the
following occasions:
A. Immediately following installation.
B. In-situ.
C. At the end of construction, or prior to removal, whichever

comes first.
D. When requested by TTC, submit the checklist and
accompanying photos.
(b) Schedule E2 – ESC Inspection Log:
(i) Complete the log attached to this Specification Section on a weekly
basis. The log shall commence when the site is disturbed (i.e.,
when site work begins), and carry through until the end of the
Contract.
(ii) The inspection log shall be completed for each inspection and must
document:
A. Deficiencies related to the measures listed in Schedule E1 –
ESC Inspection and Photograph Checklist.
B. Corrective actions taken to remedy the deficiencies.
(iii) Each deficiency must be initialed and each log signed after all
corrective measures have been completed and documented.
(iv) Submit an up-to-date copy of the log to TTC on a monthly basis.
(v) Submit a compilation of the completed logs to TTC after
construction and prior to Contractor demobilization.
END OF SECTION
Section 31 25 00
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
SCHEDULE E1
ESC INSPECTION AND PHOTOGRAPH CHECKLIST
Contract Name: Completed By:
Contract
Location: Company:
Conduct an inspection of all Erosion and sedimentation control measures implemented onsite each week and
following any significant storm event (12.7 mm (0.5") of precipitation or greater). Record any maintenance or
repair performed in Schedule E2 – ESC Inspection Log.
Photographs of each measure must be taken immediately following installation, in-situ, and at the end of
construction.
Date of Photo
ESC Measure Location Onsite #1 #2 #3
Silt Fence
Inlet Protection
Stabilized Construction
Entrance
Rolled Erosion Control
Products
Surface Roughening
Sedimentation Basin
Temporary Seeding
Outlet Protection
I hereby certify that the information provided is complete and correct:
Signature of Authorized Official Position Date

Section 31 25 00
EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
SCHEDULE E2
ESC INSPECTION LOG
Contract Name: Completed By:

Contract
Location: Company:
Erosion and Sedimentation Control Measures

Corrective Action
Date Observations Deficiencies Taken Initials
Heavy rain night Straw bale check dam New straw bale
Sept before. Measures in in northeast swale installed in northeast
Ex 17/06 good condition. deteriorated swale. G.L.
I hereby certify that the information provided is complete and correct:
Signature of Authorized Official Position Date

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Jet Grouting
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification provides the requirements for construction of jet grout
soil-cement columns in subsurface soils for the extent, both on plan and
in elevation, as indicated in the Drawings. Jet grouting will be required
for:
(i) The TBM break-in and break-out blocks at the Pape slurry wall
shaft end walls.
(ii) Vertical and inclined jet grout columns alongside and beneath the
existing TTC structure at Pape Station.
(b) Contractor is responsible for jet grout design, construction (jet grout
column development), quality testing, verification and corrective action to
achieve the performance criteria requirements.
(c) Contractor is responsible for spoil containment, collection and disposal.
(d) Pre-production verification in-situ jet grouting (trial jet grouting to develop
test columns) and a core drilling program will be required to verify jet
grouted column development and overlaps, perform in-situ testing, and
to recover cores for inspection and compressive strength testing.
(e) For details of SOE elements of the Contract and the elements that can

(d) Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and Ground Water Disposal
(e) Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Controls

(a) Measurement:
(i) This work will be paid for on a lump sum basis.
(b) Payment:
A. Item C.2.2 – ‘Jet Grouting - Alongside Head Wall and TTC
(Vertical)’ (Pape Station North SOE).
B. Item C.2.3 – ‘Jet Grouting - Beneath TTC / Underpinning Zone
(Inclined)’ (Pape Station North SOE).
C. Item C.2.4 – ‘Jet Grouting - TBM Break Out - Stage 1 & 2
(Gertrude Place)’ (Pape Station North SOE).
D. Item C.3.2 – ‘Jet Grouting - Alongside Head Wall and TTC
(Vertical)’ (Pape Station South SOE).
E. Item C.3.3 – ‘Jet Grouting - Beneath TTC / Underpinning Zone
(Inclined)’ (Pape Station South SOE).
F. Item C.3.4 – ‘Jet Grouting - TBM Break In - Stage 1 & 2
(Danforth Ave)’ (Pape Station South SOE).
(ii) Payment for each lump sum Item shall be as follows:
A. 10% upon review of the Work Plan, Shop Drawings, Soil-
Cement Column Submittals and upon acceptance of the test
program.
B. 70% on account of the number of jet grout columns (min. 2 m
diameter) installed and measured up to the total number of
columns shown in the Drawings or the number of columns
required to achieve the minimum jet grout block dimensions
within the theoretical limits shown on the Drawings (whichever
is greater). There will be no additional payment for jet grouting
column counts should the actual number of columns exceed
that indicated on the Drawings.
C. 20% upon receipt and acceptance of all quality control
documentation, field testing and daily production reports.

a) ASTM C1602/C1602M – Standard Specifications for Mixing Water Used in
the Production of Hydraulic Cement Concrete.
b) ASTM D1633 – Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded
Soil-Cement Cylinders.
c) ASTM D420 – Core Samples, Core Sample Testing Standard Guide to Site
Characterization for Engineering, Design and Construction.
d) ASTM D4832 – Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low Strength

Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders.
e) ASTM D7012 – Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength and Elastic
Moduli of Intact Rock Core under Varying States of Stress and Temperatures.
f) CAN/CSA-A3000 – Cementitious materials compendium.
g) CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2 – Concrete Materials and Methods of Construction/
Methods of Test for Concrete.
h) USBR 7310 – US Dept of the Interior, Bureau of Reclamation, Procedure
for Constant Head Hydraulic Conductivity Tests in Single Drill Holes.
i) ASCE G-I, Grouting Committee, Jet Grouting Task Force – Jet Grouting
Guide Specification, Revised August 2016

(a) End Wall: The section of slurry wall at each end of the shaft that the TBM
will mine through when being received into, and launched from, the shaft.
(b) Grout Spoil Return: Cement, soil and water discharged at ground
surface.
(c) Head Wall: The section of slurry wall running parallel and alongside the
existing TTC structure and its previous SOE system.
(d) Interstices: The points of overlap between theoretical soil-cement columns.
(e) Jet Grouting: The process of creating soil-cement columns with
stabilizing grout mix delivered under high pressure through nozzles
inserted in boreholes.
(f) Jet Grout: A uniform mix of cement grout and in-situ soils formed by jet
grouting.
(g) Jet Grout Column: A column of soil-cement formed by jet grouting.
(h) Jet Grout Structure: A single zone or block of ground indicated on the
drawings comprising soil-cement columns of sufficient spacing to
stabilize an entire mass of soil within limits to meet performance
requirements of this section.
(i) Request for Information (RFI): A piece of formally issued project
correspondence that makes a request for information concerning absent
details or clarification on the content within a contract document. An RFI
can also be submitted as a mechanism to request a Contractor initiated
field change for a material, product or method in executing the Work.


(a) Product data: The Contractor shall submit the Jet Grout Mix Design
submission including mix constituents, admixtures, sources of mix and
other material data.
(b) Material and in situ test reports.
(c) Qualifications and experience of jet grout contractor.
(d) Pre-production jet grouting and testing plan. The pre-production test
requirements shall include:
(i) Location of test columns
(ii) Layout of test pattern
(iii) Jet grouting parameters to be used
(iv) Jet grout equipment, jetting method and the configuration of the jet
grouting operation
(v) Jet grout properties to be tested for the pre-production test
program
(vi) A Quality Control / Quality Assurance Plan that shall be used in
both the pre-production testing and for the production jet grout
works.
(e) Contractor shall prepare a Work Plan with Shop Drawings indicating:
(i) Fluid discharge rates and pressures, rotation rate, grout mix,
returned spoil density, and withdrawal rate to monitor jet grouting.
(ii) Soil-cement collection, containment, and disposal measures.
Incorporate requirements of relevant regulatory authorities.
(iii) Conformance to compressive strength of drill cores extracted from
within a developed jet grout column.
(iv) Equipment and methods for jet grout installation.
A. This shall include detailed equipment specification /
datasheets for drilling equipment, grout mixers, pumps and
other equipment required for the jet grout column
development.
B. A plan view sketch of the jet grouting operation shall be
provided to enable planning of the Work and protection of the
public or third party property.
(v) Methods and equipment to measure jet grout parameters, including

drill string verticality and inclination, injection pressures, jet
rotation, withdrawal rates, volume of fluids injected, problems
encountered, and solutions implemented.
(vi) Means and methods to handle, treat and dispose of excess material.
(vii) Means and methods to prevent spills from entering storm and
sanitary sewers, including containment and actions if spills occur.
(viii) Demonstrate that spoil collection and disposal is in accordance
with all applicable Federal, Province of Ontario and City of Toronto
environmental standards and requirements.
(ix) Layout, tolerances, and overlap at each location to achieve
required coverage in both horizontal and vertical direction.
(x) Jet grout location plans to scale to illustrate layout details, including
sequence information for the different phases.
(xi) Measures to protect existing utilities and infrastructure in the vicinity of
the jet grouting works.
(xii) Desk study and field efforts to locate abandoned utilities prior to
start of construction. Note that abandoned utilities exist.
(xiii) Design calculations including:
A. Identified design parameters.
B. Design assumptions based on anticipated ground conditions.
C. Arrangement, spacing, and diameter of boreholes relative to
grout mix used, diameter of grout column, depth and thickness
of the grouted mass and including jetting parameters such as
pressures, nozzle types, withdrawal rates, water-cement ratio.
(xiv) Details, including output samples, of the software system that is
used to process jet grout rig telemetry and capable of processing
the data recorded in a graphical format.
(xv) Jet grout shop drawings shall be signed-and-sealed by a
(f) Soil-Cement Column Submittal(s):
(i) Submit prior to start of jet grouting the following:
A. Mix design and mixing procedures including cement type and
water-cement ratio by weight.
B. Plant, equipment, and material descriptions, including
performance records and manufacturer’s specifications.
C. Soil-cement column diameters, nozzle types (i.e., single,

double, triple fluid), injection pressures and rates, specific
energy, rotation speeds, and calculations to demonstrate full
continuous column dimension delivery in the expected soil.
D. Arrangement of grout mixing and injection equipment,
including schematic diagram showing layout of grout and
water line and directions of flow circulation.
E. Locations and identification numbering of grout holes for each
zone to be treated by jet grouting.
F. Methods and equipment for drilling and supporting grout holes,
including advancement through obstructions, cobbles, and
boulders.
G. Method to check hole verticality as the hole is drilled.
H. Method and sequence of grout installation, including proposed
jet grouting system, (whether the jet grouting operation will
utilize single, double or triple fluid jet grouting).
I. Proposed grout, air and air-water jetting pressures, rates of jet
monitor rotation and withdrawal as applicable for the type of
jetting system being used.
J. Layout and procedures for jet grout test programs, including
sampling and testing to determine dimensions and properties
of the developed jet grout columns.

(i) Certificates of compliance for materials used.
(ii) Daily jet grout summary reports.
(iii) Jet grout lab strength tests in accordance with ASTM D1633 and
ASTM D4832.
(iv) Jet Grout Contractor’s Project Manager and Superintendent
summary of experience on similar projects.
(v) Site team with full-time Project Manager, Superintendent and
Supervising Engineer. The Superintendent and Supervising
Engineer shall be present full-time at the work site during jet
grouting. The Project Manager shall be on site full time for the
initial start-up phase of the jet grouting, then shall visit site at least
twice per week during jet grouting operations. Qualifications and
experience of jet grouting staff shall be as follows:
A. Project Manager shall have not less than five (5) years of
recent experience working on projects of similar type, size,
and complexity.
B. Superintendent shall have not less than five (5) years of recent
complexity.
C. Supervising Engineer shall have not less than three (3) years
of recent experience working on projects of similar type, size,
and complexity.
(vi) Laboratory testing shall be performed by a firm with an established
record in the specific tests that are required for the jet grouting.
(b) Closeout Submittals:
(i) As-built drawings of all jet grout columns.
(ii) Coring process documentation and core sample test results.
1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

(a) Construct jet grout columns as indicated on the Drawings and in
accordance with Table 1 below:
Table 1: Jet Grout Properties
Target Value
Min. Min. Max.
Location Soil Type Elastic Compressive Compressive
Modulus Strength Strength
(MPa) (MPa) (MPa)
Vertical and
Granular 600 3.0 10.0
inclined jet grouting
around and under
TTC Station Cohesive 600 3.0 10.0
TBM break-in /
Granular 600 3.0 10.0
break-out blocks
(b) Design jet grout diameters and patterns to meet contract requirements.
The jet grout column diameter shall be 2.0 m nominal. Jet grout columns
shall have 30% overlap minimum.
(c) Jet grout testing and quality control shall demonstrate that soil-cement
elements conform to performance requirements stated herein.
(d) Monitoring of ground deformations shall be in accordance with

Specification Section 31 09 13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and
Monitoring.
(e) Core sampling and testing in jet grout shall demonstrate the following:
(i) Minimum core recovery in test borehole: 85%.
(ii) No specimen obtained by coring in-situ soil-cement shall have a
28-day compressive strength that is less than 3.0 MPa when tested
as per ASTM D7012.
(iii) Minimum average 28-day compressive strength for 10 consecutive
core samples greater than or equal to 3.0 MPa as per ASTM D7012.
(iv) Maximum 300 mm untreated length for core sample in any test
borehole. If coring is suspected of washing away grout, use optical
or acoustic televiewer to verify presence of grout in borehole.
(v) Vertical and horizontal location tolerance for columns ±100 mm.
(f) There are no performance requirements for permeability for the jet grout
columns that will be carried out as part of these works.

(a) Deliver materials to site in undamaged, unopened containers with
manufacturer’s original label.
(b) Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Materials shall be defined and supplied by the Contractor.
(b) Water: Potable and free of impurities that could affect grout gelling
characteristics and strength to ASTM C1602/C1602M.
(c) Admixtures: Non-toxic and compatible with other mix components.
(d) Cement: Type 1 ordinary Portland cement for general use.
(e) The ratios of the material components shall be proposed by the
Contractor and confirmed during the pre-production testing program.
Once accepted by the Metrolinx Representative, the grout slurry shall not
be changed unless requested in writing through project correspondence
or a field change request mechanism such as an RFI.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
(a) Provide equipment with proven satisfactory performance history.
(b) The field laboratory shall be equipped with two sets of Marsh funnel
viscometers and mud cups, fluid density mud balance scales and pH
testing tape.
(c) Drill bits capable of advancing through subsurface conditions including
concrete, asphalt pavement, clay, silt, sand, cobbles, boulders and
timber obstructions.
(d) Portable cement grout batch plant with storage cribs, weather protection,
sheds, calibrated scales, calibrated flow meters, pumps, mixers, valves,
gauges, and regulating devices required to measure and mix grout.
(e) Jetting system:
(i) Utilize radially oriented jet nozzles to separately inject cement
grout, water, and air.
(ii) Provides continuous positive return flow to ground surface using
sacrificial casing or retractable pipe casing.
(iii) Capable of variable rotation and withdrawal rates within ranges to
complete Work and produce continuous soil-cement columns.
(iv) Allows continuous monitoring and recording of data throughout jet
grouting. Automatically record pressures of cement grout, water
and air, rate of flow, total volume of grouting fluids for each
developed column, and rate of rotation and withdrawal versus
depth and time.
(v) RPM shall be set by the driller then automatically controlled by the
drill rig during the entire jet grouting process and recorded on the
jet grout installation log.
(vi) All the data monitored and recorded, as described in (above) shall
be made available to the Engineer in a format previously agreed to
prior to the Work.
(vii) The jetting system shall be compatible with software that is
capable of processing the data recorded in a graphical format.
Samples of output of the proposed software shall be included in
the Work Plan.
(viii) Capable of replacing hardened non-conforming columns.
(ix) Maintain jet grout equipment with spare parts.
(x) Able to work on existing ground surfaces without damage.
(f) Drilling:
(i) Use equipment of type and capacity able to drill holes of required
size and depth.
(ii) Use for lowering, raising, and rotating monitors to perform Work
within limits as indicated on drawings.
(g) Grout mixing and injection equipment:
(i) Provide required type and capacity for following:
A. Grout mixers.
B. Holding tanks and water supply tanks.
C. Air compressors.
D. Pumps: Sufficient capacity to supply grout, air, and water.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Jet grouting works may be completed prior to, or after, the construction
of the slurry wall at all jet grouting locations, except at the headwall area.
Vertical and inclined jet grouting at the headwall locations (Lipton
Avenue) shall be performed before SOE construction.
(b) Schedule and sequence shall be planned to suit Contractor’s desired
sequence and with coordination of partial street closures as required.
Partial street closures shall be limited to one traffic lane that is closed to
traffic at a one time.
(c) Jet grouting column sequencing within any defined jet grouted area can
be revised to suit the Contractor’s means and methods, provided no
adjacent jet grout columns are developed within 24-hours of each other.
The 24-hour period is defined as between the completion of one column
and the start of an adjacent column.
(d) Contractor is required to obtain partial street closure permits for jet
grouting works on Danforth Avenue, Lipton Avenue, Gertrude Place and
Muriel Avenue. Only one lane at a time may be closed on each of the
streets mentioned.
3.2 TEST PROGRAM

(a) Jet grout testing shall verify that the Contractor’s design, means and
methods and design parameters meet the performance requirements.
(b) Jet Grouting Test Program:
(i) Prior to construction, initiate a test program and construct a
minimum of three (3) overlapping pre-production test columns at a
location agreed with the Metrolinx Representative.
(ii) Pre-production test columns cannot be part of the production

columns, unless otherwise agreed by the Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) Test properties of the test columns for composition and
compressive strength.
(iv) Use test program to verify:
A. Proposed methods and design parameters.
B. Adjustments to design parameters.
C. Method statement for jet grout installations.
(v) Design to stabilize soils in accordance with the following:
A. At locations indicated on the drawings.
B. Demonstrate adequacy of design to meet performance criteria.
(vi) Perform tests using overlapping columns of target diameters
extending to the required depth of the jet grouted mass.
A. Use test program to verify various parameters including:
(1) Confirmation of type of selected jet grouting (single,
double, triple fluid).
(2) Necessity of pre-jetting grout mix composition with water.
(3) Fluids flows and pressures.
(4) Rotational speed and retraction rate.
(5) Grout effectiveness in soil conditions.
(6) Number and size of nozzles.
(7) In-situ soil-cement properties meet requirements.
(8) Column diameter, column overlap, and quality of the
product, such as uniformity.
B. Test program and results to be observed, reviewed, and
approved by a Professional Engineer of the jet grouting
subcontractor, licensed in the province of Ontario.
C. Each test section demonstrates feasibility and installed to
same bottom elevation specified for jet grout columns.
D. Carry out test coring by conducting a minimum of three (3)
overlapping test columns at a location agreed with the
(1) Drill four (4) cores through the jet grout columns to
confirm column development.
a) Implement core drilling procedures necessary to

reliably obtain specimens adequate for testing.
b) Drillholes shall be at 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 2.0 m
from the point of injection for any of the three test
columns, as determined jointly between Contractor
and the Metrolinx Representative. Drillholes are not
required to be drilled within the same column.
c) Provide documentation including location, date,
weather, driller, inspector, drill tooling including bit
type and size.
d) For each core run, provide the start and finish time
and depth, run length, total length of pieces longer
than core diameter, core RQD, sample description
and photos.
(2) Review and log the recovered core from each drillhole.
Assess RQD of the recovered core. RQD shall be 80% or
above and core shall visibly show cementation of the soil
mass. Submit the logs to the Metrolinx Representative.
(3) Send 3 representative samples from each column to an
independent laboratory to verify compressive strength
performance and the elastic modulus.
E. Confirm in writing that work meets performance requirements.
(1) Should testing reveal selected design parameters fall
outside of requirements, conduct additional testing and
perform remedial grouting until compliance is achieved.
(2) Metrolinx will observe and review tests and results.
(c) Soil-Cement Documentation for Review:
(i) Plan coverage over full depths and limits in accordance with Shop
Drawings, alignment tolerances, and soil-cement requirements.
3.3 JET GROUT COLUMN DRILLING

(a) Prior to drilling, verify location of utilities in the vicinity of the jet grouting
works.
(b) Perform jet grouting under active site superintendent direction and
supervision with trained shift personnel.
(c) Maintain clean work areas. Clean up debris, spills and waste.
(d) Use equipment with proven performance records to produce required
grout quality and column dimensions.
(e) Position equipment for mixing, holding, and pumping grout in secure
location, and operate to minimize spillage.
(f) No spillage permitted to enter storm drains.
(g) Prevent spoil return, stockpiled spoil or grout entering storm drains, or
extending past the site or work zone.
(h) Subsurface strata may contain mixed fill, timber, cobbles, boulders, and
other soil conditions that may cause difficult drilling.
(i) Prevent movement and damage to structures and utilities during drilling.
(j) When jet grout hole is lost, backfill with grout, and drill another hole.
(k) Jet grout hole is considered lost due to equipment failure, inadequacy of
grout, improper air or water supplies, or improper drilling or injection.
3.4 JET GROUT COLUMN INSTALLATION

(a) Install jet grout and avoid obstructions or other hindrances.
(b) Install jet grout in accordance with reviewed Shop Drawings.
(c) Sequence drilling to provide adequate distance between freshly grouted
columns prior to drilling and grouting adjacent grout columns.
(d) Carry out utility locates with visual confirmation using methods
acceptable to utility owners (for example, hydro-vacuum excavation).
(e) Replace and correct non-conforming grout columns.
(f) During jet grout construction:
(i) If jet grouting is interrupted during the development of a jet grout
column, the jet grouting shall restart a minimum of 0.5 m below the
point at which development stopped.
(ii) The Contractor shall monitor ground, structure and utility
movements as follows during all jet grouting operations:
A. The ground monitoring in the vicinity of the jet grouting
operation including monitoring points installed on buildings or
structures and any utility monitoring points.
B. In the vicinity surrounding the jet grouting operations shall be
defined as:
(1) Within a 20 m radius of the drilling or jetting location.
(2) For inclined jet grout columns, the 20 m radius is taken
from the drilling penetration point at ground surface.
C. Monitoring shall take place during both drilling and during jet
grout column development
(iii) When instrument monitoring points indicate ground, structure,

utility or TTC track movement has reached the Review Level or the
Alert Level, the Contractor shall implement measures identified in
the Contractor’s Action Plan to mitigate adverse movements.
(iv) All get grouting works shall be performed in the presence of the jet
grouting Supervising Engineer. The jet grouting Supervising
Engineer shall be responsible for logging of jet grouting operations,
drilling penetration, jetting withdrawl rates and any anomalies or
relevant notes on the subsurface conditions or ground behaviour.
(v) Maintain site and keep clear of wet spoil, debris, and water.
(vi) Pipe or channel spoil to tanks or other collection structures.
(vii) Dispose of waste materials in accordance with regulations.
(g) Subsurface strata may contain soil and groundwater contamination that
may be detrimental to jet grout materials.
3.5 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Sample grout mix by in-situ wet grab methods at top and bottom
1/4 points, and midpoint of soil-cement mass.
(b) Place samples in 75 mm diameter by 150 mm high cylindrical molds:
(i) Cure samples and perform unconfined compressive strength tests
at 3, 7, 14, and 28 Calendar Days to supplement data from core
samples tested.
(ii) Collect wet soil samples and molded cylinders (top and bottom
1/4 points and midpoint), and correlate with strength of core
samples and in-situ wet grab samples.
(iii) Take wet samples at frequency listed below:
A. Upon changing grout mix design or amount of in-situ mixing.
B. For every 500 m3 of grouted soil mass.
(c) Coring and Field Testing of Jet-grout Columns.
(i) Drill and test 3% of all jet-grout columns developed. Assess RQD
of recovered core. Core shall visibly show cementation of the soil
mass. RQD shall be 80% or above unless agreed otherwise by the
Metrolinx Representative, following a review of the pre-production
test columns.
A. Using core-drilling techniques, verify column development,
strength and permeability requirements:
(1) Core using wet rotary coring with triple tube core barrels,
face discharge coring bits, and low drilling fluid flow.
(2) Minimum core size: HQ (63 mm diameter) or larger.
(3) For production columns, perform coring at the
intersection of two or more columns.
(4) At completion of the core hole, fill entire test hole with
sand / cement grout of equivalent strength.
B. If rotosonic coring does not yield samples adequate for testing:
(1) Due to low drill fluid, flow rates may provide alternative
indicator of soil-cement continuity.
(2) Where grout is eroded and washed during coring, an
optical or acoustic televiewer borehole imaging may be
used to provide alternate means of assessing continuity,
subject to the approval of the Metrolinx Representative.
(d) Quality Control Submittals:
(i) Quality Control Plan prior to commencement of grouting.
(ii) Jet grout sampling and testing methods.
(iii) Soil-cement test laboratory certification.
(iv) Details for identifying, protecting and maintaining utilities.
(v) Calibration records for all pressure gauges, flow meters and scales
from an approved laboratory testing agency.
(vi) Methods and equipment to measure in real time jet grout
parameters including injection pressure, jet monitor rotation and
withdrawal rates, and grout volumes injected.
(vii) Equipment and procedures to drill and sample jet grout test holes.
(viii) Procedures to core and test completed jet grout columns.
(ix) Methods and equipment to manage return flow, including
collection, volume measurement, storage, transport and disposal.
(x) Forms to be used for recording jet grouting performance data.
(xi) Procedures and materials to remediate low permeability zones.
(e) Quality Control Plan shall include:
(i) Core sampling to confirm design compliance to ASTM D420.
(ii) Methods to confirm soil-cement compressive strength.
(iii) Methods to control and verify vertical limits and grout column overlap.
(iv) Procedure to remedy inadequate grout columns caused by

equipment failure, inadequacy of grout mix / delivery, or incomplete
columns caused by buried obstructions (boulders, timbers).
(v) Monitoring procedure to control drill string verticality, water-cement
ratio, cement-grout injection pressure and rate, rotational speed,
penetration and withdrawal rate, and construction operations.
(vi) Daily production reports to include:
A. Summary reports within 1 Working Day of performing work
including:
(1) Number and classification of labour and equipment used.
(2) Grout hole geometry, location, verticality, design column
diameter, diameter, spacing, depth, and casing.
(3) Quality control sampling and test results.
(4) Nature, causes, duration, impacts of delay.
(5) Real-time measurement of ground movements.
(6) Grout column information:
a) Start and finish times.
b) Grout hole reference number, geometry, size, length,
volume of grout used, and location.
c) Upper and lower elevation limits.
d) Grout mix, unit weight, density, grout take.
e) Air-water jet pressure to construct grout column.
f) Rates of rotation and jet pressures.
g) Water-cement ratio.
h) Flow rates.
i) Adjustments for obstructions.
j) Spoil return including colour, unit weight and density,
quantity, and continuity of flow.
k) Other observations (grout leakage, ground heave).
END OF SECTION
Pape Segment Support of Excavation Applicable Section: 31 43 00 Jet Grouting

sealed Drawings.
changes.

Pape Segment Support of Excavation Applicable Section: 31 43 00 Jet Grouting
Table A2: SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change : for Specification Section 31 43 00 – Jet Grouting
Jet grouting – Design Yes No No  (P) OLTA design includes jet grout column size and spacing / overlap
 (P) OLTA design provides performance requirements as per the Specification
Jet grouting – Installation Sequence No Yes, with N/A  (P) Vertical and inclined jet grouting at the headwall locations (Lipton Avenue) shall be
conditions performed before SOE construction
 (P) No adjacent jet grout columns can be developed within 24-hours of each other
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Tieback and Tie Anchors
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification provides requirements for construction of:
(i) Tieback anchors that support the SOE walls of the Pape Station
shafts.
(ii) Tie anchors between the Head Walls of the Pape Station South
Shaft and North Shaft, within the envelope for the future
underpinning (including the row above the underpinning pipe
canopy at EL 97.0 and the row below the underpinning pipe
canopy at EL 78.8). Underpinning works will be performed by
others.
(iii) For details of SOE elements of the Contract and the elements that
can be adjusted by the Contractor versus what cannot be changed
and must remain as indicated in the Drawings and Specifications,
refer to Appendix A – SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted
to Change, of this Specification Section.

(a) Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel
(e) Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers

(a) Measurement:
(i) Measurement shall be based on the linear meters (m) of Tiebacks
and Tie anchors installed. Measurement shall include the total
bonded and unbonded lengths.
(b) Payment:
(1) Item C.2.15 – ‘Tie Back Anchors (Soil)’.
(2) Item C.2.16 – ‘Tie Back Anchors (Rock)’.
B. Pape Station North & South SOE between North and South
Head Walls:
(1) Item C.2.17 – ‘Tie Anchors (between Head Walls)’.
C. Pape Station South SOE:
(1) Item C.3.15 – ‘Tie Back Anchors (Soil)’.
(2) Item C.3.16 – ‘Tie Back Anchors (Rock)’.
(ii) Where measured quantities exceed those in Items in Clause
1.3.b.i. payment will be made for the following Provisional Items:
A. Item F.1.1 – ‘Additional Tie Back Anchors’.
B. Item F.1.2 – ‘Additional Tie Anchors’.
(iii) No Unit Price adjustment will be made for the Provisional items
unless actual quantities vary from those shown in Appendix A of
this Schedule by greater than ± 25%.

(a) ASTM A53/A53M – Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and
Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless.
(b) ASTM A416/A416M – Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated
Twelve-Wire for Prestressed Concrete.
(c) ASTM A500/A500M – Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded
and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes.
(d) ASTM D1143/1143M – Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations
under Static Axial Compressive Load.
(e) ASTM D1248 – Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastics
Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable.
(f) ASTM D3350 – Specification for Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings
Materials.
(g) ASTM D4101 – Standard Specification for Polypropylene Injection and
Extrusion Materials.
(h) CSA A23.1/A23.2 – Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete
Construction/ Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete.
(i) CSA G40.20/G40.21 – General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
(j) US DoT FHWA – Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 4, Ground
Anchors and Anchored Systems, Report FHWA-IF-99-015.
(k) PTI DC35.1-14 – Post Tensioning Institute, Recommendations for

Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors.

(a) Alignment Load (AL): A nominal load maintained on an anchor during
testing that is sufficient to keep the testing equipment positioned.
(b) Anchor Grout: Portland cement grout that is injected into the anchor hole
to provide anchorage at the bond length of the tendon.
(c) Angle Adjustment Support Bearing Plate: The steel plate which
distributes the prestressed soil anchor force to the surrounding structure.
The plate allows the strand anchor bearing plate to be welded in position
at the appropriate angle to suit the Tieback inclination, typically 15
degrees to 35 degrees to the horizontal.
(d) Apparent Free Tendon Length: The length of tendon which is apparently
not bonded to the surrounding grout or ground, as calculated from the
elastic load extension data during testing.
(e) Bearing Plate: The steel plate that supports the Wedge Plate with the
end of the strands and is welded to the support bearing plate at the
desired angle. The bearing plate distributes the prestressed soil anchor
force to the surrounding structure via the Angle Adjustment Support
Bearing Plate.
(f) Bondbreaker: See ‘Sheath / Sheathing’. For tendon sheaths, smooth
sheaths can function as a bondbreaker, however corrugated sheaths
require a separate bondbreaker.
(g) Bonded Length: The length of the tendon which is bonded to the
surrounding ground that carries the load in the soil or rock.
(h) Centralizer: A device, made from PVC, to support and position the
tendon in the drill hole so that a minimum grout cover is provided.
(i) Coating: Material used to protect against corrosion or lubricate the
prestressing steel.
(j) Design Load (DL): The maximum anticipated load that will be applied to
the prestressed soil anchor during its service life after completing
stressing and testing. The design load shown on the Drawings are not
factored. Load factors according to the design codes shall be applied to
ensure that the overall structure has adequate strength for its intended
use.
(k) End Wall: The section of slurry wall at each end of the shaft that the TBM
(l) Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring Plan (GIMP): A plan

presenting geotechnical instrumentation locations and monitoring
requirements for the protection of existing structures, buildings and
utilities located within the construction zone of influence by monitoring
movements of the ground, support of excavation, utilities, structures and
groundwater regime, prior, during, and subsequent to construction in
order to assess the need for implementing of mitigation measures.
(m) Head Wall: The section of slurry wall running parallel and alongside the
(n) Lift-off: The load (lift-off load) in the tendon which can be checked at any
specified time with the use of a hydraulic jack, by lifting the anchor head
off the bearing plate.
(o) Lock-off Load: The prestressing force in an anchor immediately after
transferring the load from the jack to the stressing anchorage. Lock-off
load shall not exceed 70% of the specified minimum tensile strength of
the anchor.
(p) Narrow Section: The section of shaft closest to the End Wall and
perpendicular to the End Wall that is used to receive or launch the TBM.
(q) Minimum Apparent Free Length: The jack length plus 80% of the design
unbonded length.
(r) Performance Test: Incremental loading and unloading of a prestressed
production anchor recording the movement of the tendon at each
increment.
(s) Pre-production Testing: Load testing on Tiebacks installed prior to the
installation of the planned Tiebacks and used to verify the suitability and
capacity of the proposed Tieback anchor system. Pre-production
anchors do not form part of the working SOE elements.
(t) Pressure Grouting: Grouting carried out at pressure around the anchor to
increase the normal stress acting on the grout body (increasing the
confinement).
(u) Prestressing: The process by which a load is applied to strand anchor by
putting it in tension and then is locked off, causing the strand anchor to
apply a compression force to the surrounding structure as a way to limit
deflections.
(v) Primary Panel: Slurry wall panel excavated through soil and rock using
one or more passes of the slurry wall excavation equipment with no
adjacent panels.
(w) Proof Test: Incremental loading of a prestressed anchor recording the

movement of the tendon at each increment. In some cases, incremental
loading an unloading make be carried out. The Proof Test is intended to
quickly and economically determine whether the anchor has sufficient
load carrying capacity, that the apparent free tendon length has been
satisfactorily established, and that the rate of creep stabilizes within the
specified limits.
(x) Secondary Panel: Slurry wall panel excavated between two Primary
Panels or adjacent to the Primary panel with one or more passes of the
excavating equipment.
(y) Sheath / Sheathing (tendon sheath): A smooth or corrugated plastic tube
or smooth pipe used to protect the prestressing steel in the unbonded
length. A tendon sheath covers all prestressing elements and is
commonly pulled-on and filled with grout. Smooth sheaths can function
as a bondbreaker, however corrugated sheaths require a separate
bondbreaker. Tendon sheaths are typically only used for Class I
corrosion protection (as per US DoT FHWA Ground Anchors and
Anchored Systems, Report FHWA-IF-99-015).
(z) Sheath / Sheathing (for individual strands): Sheathing for individual
strands is tubing used to protect the prestressing steel in the unbonded
length. Individual strand sheaths commonly contain corrosion inhibiting
compound and are typically extruded hot melt tubing that is PT grease
filled or PT grease filled plastic tubing that is pushed-on or pulled-on.
Individual strand sheaths are used for both Class I and Class II corrosion
protection (as per US DoT FHWA Ground Anchors and Anchored
Systems, Report FHWA-IF-99-015).
(aa) Slurry Wall: Reinforced concrete slurry wall panel constructed below
structural walls.
(bb) Spacer: A device, made from HDPE, to support and position the strands
of the tendon in the drill hole so that grout may flow between the strands
to maximize the bond capacity of the anchor. The spacer will provide a
minimum grout cover to the strands.
(cc) Steel strand: A bundle of wires making a strand that forms one of several
strands that, in turn, makes up a Tieback (or strand anchor).
(dd) Support of Excavation (SOE): A temporary earth retaining system
construction.
(ee) Test Load: The test load that the stand anchor is taken to and represents
the anchor factored Design Load (DL). The factored design load will
depend upon type of test and whether the anchor is a production anchor
or a pre-production (sacrificial) anchor.
(ff) Tieback (also Strand Anchor or Tendon): An anchor consisting of
bundles of steel wire strands that are prestressed to support, and limit
the lateral movements, of an earth retaining structure. Tiebacks may be
anchored into rock, or into a suitable soil unit, at one end and anchored
to the earth retaining structure at the other. Tiebacks are typically
installed at a medium angle of inclination.
(gg) Tie Anchor: A strand anchor installed horizontally between the Head
Walls of the Pape Station South Shaft and North Shaft within the future
underpinning zone (including the row above the underpinning pipe
canopy at EL 97.0 and the row below the underpinning pipe canopy at
EL 78.8). The anchor is installed within permanent perforated steel
casing with a head assembly at each end and is prestressed from one
end prior to grouting..
(hh) Total Anchor Length: The unbonded length plus the tendon bond length.
(ii) Trumpet Pipe: Pipe cast into the wall intended to permit the installation of
a Tieback through the wall and the transfer of the Tieback load to the
wall. The trumpet pipe will be temporarily filled with a block-out material
during wall construction to prevent the ingress of concrete.
(jj) Unbonded Length (Stressing Length): The length of the tendon which is
not bonded to the grout and surrounding ground. This length is free to
elongate during stressing. The grout surrounding the unbonded length is
a void filler and provides corrosion protection.
(kk) Wedge: A wedge shaped sleeve that fits around the end of a single
strand anchor and is used to lock off the prestressing load. Each strand
anchor is fitted with a wedge and all wedges for the tendon once locked
off seat in the wedge plate to maintain the prestressing load in the
tendon.
(ll) Wide Section: The section of shaft closest to the Head Wall and
perpendicular to the Head Wall that is used to perform and
accommodate the underpinning works for tunnelling beneath the existing
TTC structure.
(mm) Zone of Influence (ZOI): An area in proximity to active construction
deemed to potentially have an effect on the movement of existing
structures, buildings and utilities. See Section 02 22 00 Existing
Conditions Assessment.

(a) Notify TTC at least 21 days in advance prior to starting the planned Tie
anchor installation work.

(a) The Contractor shall submit a Shop Drawings and work plan submittal for
the Tiebacks and Tie anchors. Shop Drawings shall be signed and
sealed by the Contractor’s design engineer who shall be a Professional
Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario. The Shop Drawings and
work plan submittal shall include:
(i) Multistrand Anchors: Physical properties, axial strength in kN, grout
design and materials, mix proportions, schedule of bonded length
and free stressing length for each Tieback, couplers, bearing plate
design and associated connectors and details with product data of
all prefabricated parts.
(ii) If the Contractor elects to use a different Tieback plate assembly
than is shown on the Drawings, submit details of the alternate
Tieback plate assembly conforming to the project requirements for
review and approval by the Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) Method of how the Contractor will manage uncontrolled water
ingress from tieback and Tie anchor drilled holes prior to grouting
the anchors and prior to the initial grout set.
(iv) Method of how the Contractor will perform remedial measures to
address water ingress from completed Tieback and Tie anchors.
(v) Method of how the Contractor will replace Tiebacks or Tie Anchors
that have experienced failure during performance testing or proof
testing.
(vi) Method of how the Contractor will seal the space around the Tie
anchor casing to prevent water inflows from between the OD of the
casing and the slurry wall.
(vii) Installation methods, work restrictions, schedule, work sequence.
(viii) Type and number of tests, and evaluation of test results.
(ix) Method of drilling anchor holes and maintaining hole stability.
(x) Drilling equipment including drill bit or auger diameter and lengths,
casing diameter and lengths, and drill slurry material.
(xi) Method of verifying the anchor hole length.
(xii) Method to verify rock condition for Tieback anchorage bonded into
Type 17 bedrock.
(xiii) Method of placing and centering anchors over design bond length.
(xiv) For Tie anchors:
A. Method of drilling through the slurry wall
B. Method demonstrating how slurry wall will be drilled without
conflicts with the slurry wall panel reinforcement bars.
C. Method for determining and maintaining drill alignment when
drilling the tie rods so as to minimize drill deviation.
(xv) Grout mixing procedure, installation method and grout pressures.
(xvi) Anchor stressing schedule, working loads and test loads.
(xvii) Anchor stressing equipment and test method.
(xviii) Anchor stressing calibration records of gauges and jacks.
(xix) Procedure to monitor load and movement during anchor testing.
(xx) As-built plans, elevations and sections showing anchor locations,
spacing, orientation, free stressing length, design load, unique
identification number for each anchor, couplers and components.
(b) Quality Assurance Submittals:
(i) Anchor mill test certificates for prestressing steel as delivered to
site.
(ii) Prestressing strand bond capacity test results prior to work
commencement.
(iii) Coupler strength capacity.
(iv) Strength testing results for anchor bond stress.
(v) Anchor hole construction and grouting information record.
(vi) Anchor repair methods if required during installations.
(c) Tieback anchor as-built record drawings must include:
(i) Unique Tieback identification number.
(ii) Anchor hole diameter, total length and free-stressing length.
(iii) Anchor bond length.
(iv) Soil, rock and groundwater conditions encountered.
(v) Time to drill the anchor hole.
(vi) Problems encountered.

(d) Professional Engineer’s seal and signature confirming that the anchors
have been constructed in conformance with the Specifications,
Drawings, and Agreement.

(a) Retain a Professional Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario with
over 5 years’ experience in Tieback anchor construction to perform the
following services:
(i) Check mill certificates, test gauges, jacks and anchor materials.
(ii) Monitor Tieback anchor performance and proof testing.
(iii) Review and stamp as-built Tieback shop drawings and
calculations.
(iv) Review quality control tests and compliance with contract.
(b) Check that steel mill test certificates meet design loads.
(c) Check that manufacturer strength certificates for couplers meet design
requirements.
(d) Check that test results demonstrate adequate steel-grout and grout-soil /
or rock bond strength.

(a) Upon delivery, store fabricated anchors, prestressing steel and hardware
in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
(b) Avoid mechanical damage, corrosion and contamination of components.
(c) Do not damage steel strand anchors during handling.
(d) Use rope or nylon slings to transport anchors on site.
(e) Store cement and grout additives under cover and protect against
moisture.
(f) Do not cause excessive bending that may debond steel components.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Preferred Tieback suppliers in Ontario:
(i) Multi-Strand Anchors by DYWIDAG Systems Inter. Canada Ltd.
(ii) BBR Cona Multi-Strand anchors by BBR VT International Ltd.

(iii) Multi-Strand Anchors by VSL International Ltd.
(iv) Other suppliers are subject to agreement by the Metrolinx
Representative.
(b) Corrosion Protection Requirements for Tiebacks:
(i) As a minimum, Tiebacks shall be designed and fabricated to
corrosion protection Class II requirements as per US DoT FHWA
Ground Anchors and Anchored Systems (Report FHWA-IF-99-
015).
(c) Tendons: Steel strands in multiple element tendons.
(i) Tendons: Tendons used shall consist of 15.7 mm diameter
prestressing steel strands Grade 1860 and complying with ASTM
A416/A416M. Steel strands used shall be continuous with no
splices, unless otherwise approved.
(ii) Care of stressing steel:
A. At the time of installation in the drill holes, all stressing steel
shall be clean and free from loose millscale, loose rust, mud,
oil, grease and any other deleterious coating. The steel shall
not be visibly pitted by rust.
B. Care shall be taken that the multi wire strands are not
damaged, kinked or bent.
(iii) Damaged or contaminated multi wire strands shall be rejected.
(d) Steel:
(i) Tiebacks: Uncoated tendon consisting of 7-strand anchors
(prestressing steel strands), each 15.7 mm in outside diameter, as
shown in the Drawings. Total pressure grouted tendon diameter of
150 to 200 mm.
(ii) Tie Anchors: Tendon consisting of 20-strand anchors (prestressing
steel strands), each 15.7 mm in outside diameter, as shown in the
Drawings. Total pressure grouted tendon diameter of 150 to 200
mm.
(e) Stress relieved steel grade 1860 MPa (minimum grade 1770 MPa).
(f) Centralizers: Centralizers shall be provided at maximum intervals of 3 m
with the deepest centralizer located 0.3 m from the end of the anchor
and the upper centralizer for the bond zone located no more than 1.5 m
from the top of the hole. Centralizers shall be made of PVC or other
suitable non-corrosive materials.
(g) Spacers: Spacers shall be used to separate elements of a multi-strand
tendons and shall permit grout to freely flow around the tendon and up
the drillhole. Spacers shall be fabricated from plastic, steel or material
which is nondetrimental to the prestressing steel. Wood shall not be
used. Spacers shall be provided at maximum intervals of 3 m and may
be combined with centralizers. Spacers shall be made of HDPE or other
suitable non-corrosive materials.
(h) Cement Grout:
(i) High minimum early compressive strength grout.
(ii) Minimum grout strength:
A. 40 MPa at 7 days.
B. 50 MPa at 28 days.
(iii) Resistant to water wash-out and dilution in wet ground conditions.
(iv) Pumpable and thixotropic to reduce loss in fractured ground.
(v) Resistant to bleeding and sulphate attack.
(vi) Cement type is suitable for the expected ground conditions.
(vii) Grout is neat, free of aggregates, with no accelerators.
(viii) Grout bleeds less than 2% when allowed to stand for 1 hour.
(ix) Use high speed mixer to ensure uniform grout-water mixture.
(x) Replace Type I cement in high sulfate ground to avoid grout
deterioration and steel corrosion. Replace with cement Types II, V,
and V with pozzolan, for sulfate contents 0.1%-0.2%; 0.2%-2.0%;
and +2%, respectively.
(i) Anchorage (Strand Anchors):
(i) Anchorage components meet guaranteed minimum ultimate
capacity.
(ii) Wedge anchor head for prestressing strands uniformly engages
strand with no notch or pinching effects.
(iii) Wedge plate, steel bearing plate, and angle adjustments shall
conform to CSA G40.20/G40.21 minimum Grade 350W.
(iv) Fabricate the trumpet from steel pipe to ASTM A53/A53M, or
tubing in accordance with ASTM A500/500M.
(v) Trumpet has minimum wall thickness of 3 mm for diameters up to

and including 100 mm, and 5 mm for larger diameters.
(vi) Watertight joints between trumpet and bearing plate, and between
the trumpet and sheath.
(vii) Trumpet is long enough to accommodate movement of the
structure and the tendon during stressing and testing.
(viii) Steel for Tieback bearing plates / support plates, Tie anchor plates,
and trumpets shall be in accordance with Specification Section 05
12 00 – Structural Steel.
(j) Sheathing (Individual Strand Sheaths):
(i) Individual strand sheaths shall be made from one of the following:
A. Polyethylene tube pulled or pushed over the prestressing
steel. The polyethylene shall be Type II, III or IV as defined by
ASTM D 1248 (or approved equal). The tubing shall have a
minimum wall thickness of 1.5 mm.
B. Hot-melt extruded polypropylene tube. The polypropylene shall
be cell classification B55542-11 as defined by ASTM D 4101
(or approved equal). The tubing shall have a minimum wall
thickness of 1.5 mm
C. Hot-melt extruded polyethylene tube. The polyethylene shall
be high density (HDPE) Type III as defined by ASTM D1248
(or approved equal). The tubing shall have a minimum wall
thickness of 1.5 mm.
(ii) Individual strand sheaths shall be PT grease filled.
(iii) Sheathing shall be fabricated from material non-detrimental to the
tendon and shall be capable of withstanding abrasion, impact, and
bending during handling and installation.
(iv) Sheathing shall enable the tendon to elongate during testing and
stressing; and allow the tendon to remain unbonded after lock-off
(v) Sheathing shall be resistant to chemical attack from aggressive
environments, grout, or corrosion inhibiting compounds.
(vi) Sheathing shall be resistant to aging by ultra-violet light
(k) Grout Tubes:
(i) Inside diameter to enable grout pumping to the bottom of drill hole.
(ii) Able to withstand 2.8 MPa pressure.
(iii) Post-grout tubes: Strong enough to withstand post-grout pressure.

(l) Drilling Equipment:
(i) Use top hammer, water flush, rotary-percussion type drilling
equipment for developing the drill holes. Use duplex drilling to
advance the drillhole such that the drill rods and casing are
installed simultaneously.
(ii) Drilling equipment shall be capable of drilling through the slurry
wall concrete and steel reinforcing, (although Tieback and Tie
anchor installations shall be located where reinforcement will not
be encountered during drilling).
(iii) Drilling equipment shall be capable of drilling through cobbles and
boulders that can be present in the soil units, especially above the
Type 16 bedrock.
(iv) Under-reaming drilling techniques may be used within the Type 17
bedrock.
(m) Grouting Equipment:
(i) Cement grout equipment shall produce a cement grout free of
lumps and undispersed cement. The pump shall be equipped with
a pressure gauge near the discharge end to monitor grout
pressures. Size the grouting equipment to enable the grout to be
pumped in one continuous operation without producing surges.
(n) Hydraulic Anchor Jack and Pump:
(i) The hydraulic anchor jack shall be by a manufacturer approved by
the tendon supplier.
(ii) A hydraulic jack and pump shall be used to apply the test load. The
jack and a calibrated primary pressure gauge shall be used to
measure the applied load. Testing cannot commence until the
calibration is approved. The primary pressure gauge shall be
graduated in 0.69 MPa increments or less. The ram travel shall be
at least 150 mm and preferably not be less than theoretical
elongation of the tendon at the maximum test load. If elongations
greater than 150 mm are required, restroking can be allowed.
(iii) Hydraulic jack and pump shall apply each load increment in less
than 60 seconds.
(iv) Hydraulic jack shall allow tendon to be stressed in increments for
load increase and decrease cycles.
(v) Hydraulic jack shall allow anchor to be lift-off tested to confirm the
lock-off load.
(vi) Provide current calibration curves for jacks.
(o) Anchor Testing Equipment:
(i) Furnish dial gauge, dial gauge support, load cell, hydraulic jack
and pump, stressing anchorage, pressure gauges.
(ii) A dial gauge or Vernier scale capable of measuring to 0.025 mm
shall be used to measure the anchor movement. The movement
measuring device shall have a minimum travel of 75 mm or equal
to the theoretical elastic elongation of the total anchor length at the
maximum test load and it shall have adequate travel so the strand
anchor movement can be measured without resetting the device at
an interim point.
(iii) A calibrated reference pressure gauge shall also be kept at the site
to periodically check the production (primary pressure) gauge. The
reference gauge shall be calibrated with the test jack and primary
pressure gauge. The reference pressure gauge shall be stored
indoors and not subjected to rough treatment.
(iv) Provide current calibration curves for all gauges.
(p) Stressing Equipment:
(i) All stressing equipment shall be preferably power driven, and shall
be accepted before use. The power unit shall be so adjusted that
the rate of stressing is within the limits recommended or directed.
(ii) The stressing equipment shall be capable of being placed over the
anchor tendon in such a manner that the jack, bearing plates, and
stressing anchorage are axially aligned with the tendon and the
tendon is centered within the equipment.
(iii) The stressing equipment shall be set up and used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer’s operating instructions.
(iv) Stressing equipment shall preferably be capable of stressing the
whole tendon in one stroke to the specified Test Load and the
equipment shall be capable of stressing the tendon to the
maximum specified Test Load within 75 % of the rated capacity.
The pump shall be capable of applying each load increment in less
than 60 seconds.
(v) The equipment shall permit the tendon to be stressed in
increments so that the load in the tendon can be raised or lowered
in accordance with the test specifications, and allow the anchor to

be lift-off tested to confirm the lock-off load.
(vi) Stressing equipment shall be recently calibrated within an accuracy
of plus or minus two percent prior to use. The calibration certificate
and graph shall be available on site at all times.
(q) Dial gauges shall be capable of measuring to 0.025 mm and aligned
perpendicular to the end of the tendon, or other plane of measurement.
Dial gauges with travels greater than 100 mm are not recommended.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Tiebacks:
(i) Vertical distance between two rows of Tiebacks shall not exceed
2.0 m or as shown on the Drawings. Horizontal distance between
two adjacent Tiebacks shall not exceed 2.3 m.
(ii) Height between lowest Tieback row to excavation bottom is a
maximum of 4.7 m (prior to the SOE base slab being placed).
(iii) The angle of declination for rock Tiebacks may be decreased to
accommodate construction conflicts with other SOE elements
provided the specified bonded length and preload is maintained,
which will depend upon the soil and rock unit that the Tiebacks are
located within). The angle of declination shall be within the range of
15 to 45 degrees. Tiebacks shall not have a bonded length within
the weathered bedrock unit (Type 16 Bedrock).
(iv) The Contractor shall submit any changes of Tieback location to the
Metrolinx Representative for their review and approval.
(v) Design load on drawings shall match the calculated design load
from the Contractor’s Engineer for each row of Tiebacks to ensure
that excessive Tieback force is not applied to the wall.
(vi) Tieback design load shall be specified on Shop Drawings with
safety factor 2.0.
(vii) Minimum distance from potential failure surface to anchor zone is
0.15 x excavation height.
(viii) Yield Load and Ultimate Load of a Strand:

Strand Maximum Loads Load
Yield Load (for a strand) 234 kN (2808 kN for 12 strand)
Ultimate Load (for a strand) 266 kN (3186 kN for 12 strand)
Per properties table of multi-strand anchors by DYWIDAG Systems International,
Canada Ltd.
(ix) Bonded Length Requirements:

Tieback Minimum Minimum
Unbonded Bonded
Length Length
Wide Section, South and North Shafts
Row 1 to 6 (Bonded Length Row 1 : 19.1 m 11.5 m
in Soil) Row 2 : 18.1 m
Row 3 : 17.1 m
Row 4 : 16.1 m
Row 5 : 15.1 m
Row 6 : 14.1 m
Row 7 to 10 (Bonded Length Row 7 : 20.0 m 7m
in Type 17 bedrock) Row 8 : 17.1 m
Row 9 : 14.2 m
Row 10 : 11.5 m
Narrow Section, South and North Shafts
Row 1 to 3 (Bonded Length Row 1 : 17.6 m 10 m
in Soil) Row 2 : 16.6 m
Row 3 : 15.6 m
Row 4 to 5 (Bonded Length Row 4 : 19.9 m 6m
in Type 17 bedrock) Row 5 : 17.0 m
(x) Tieback Loads:

Tieback Design Preload
Load (DL)
Wide Section, South and North Shafts
Row 1 to 6 (Bonded Length in Soil) 1565 kN 1480 kN
Row 7 to 10 (Bonded Length in Type 17 bedrock) 1625 kN 1580 kN
Narrow Section, South Shaft
Narrow Section, North Shaft
(b) Tie Anchors:

(i) Vertical distance between two rows of Tie anchors shall be:
A. Typically 2.0 m to 2.2 m within the future underpinning zone
and between Row 1 and 2.
B. 4.5 m between Rows 2 and 3; and 3.1 m between Rows 8 and
9 to accommodate the future underpinning by others.
(ii) Height between lowest Tie anchor row to excavation bottom (Wide
Section) is a maximum 2.15 m.
(iii) Design load on drawings shall match the calculated design load for
each row of Tie anchors to ensure that excessive Tie anchor force
is not applied to wall.
(iv) Yield load and ultimate load of a strand:
Strand Maximum Loads Load
Yield Load (for a strand) 234 kN (4680 kN for 20 strand)
Ultimate Load (for a strand) 266 kN (5310 kN for 20 strand)
Per properties table of multi-strand anchors by DYWIDAG Systems International,
Canada Ltd.
(v) Permanent Casing and Grouting Requirements:

Tie Anchor Casing Casing Grouting
(Permanent) Perforations Requirements
12 mm thick, perforated 10 mm diameter 3-stage grouting
steel casing, (200 diam. alternating pattern of process, carried out
OD / 175 diam. ID), left perforation holes for consecutively (without
in place. grouting. stoppages).
Perforated steel casing Perforations alternating Grouting target
shall be cut a minimum at 12 o’clock, 10 o’clock pressures of 2 to 4 bar.
of 30 mm short of the and 2 o’clock on 0.6 m
Grout refusal criteria of 1
rear face of the bearing c/c (1.8 m c/c between
liter/minute at 3 bar.
plate at each end of the perforation on the same
Tie anchor prior to clock orientation).
tendon installation and
Perforated casing zone
grouting.
extends between rear
face of each Head Wall.
(vi) Tie Anchor Loads:

Tie Anchor Design Preload
Load (DL)
Rows 1 to Rows 8 3165 kN 3000 kN
Row 9 (within SOE base slab level) 1100 kN 1000 kN
(vii) The Contractor shall submit any changes of Tie anchor location to
the Metrolinx Representative for their review and approval.

(a) The installation of a row of Tiebacks or a row of Tie anchors shall be fully
completed before proceeding with the next lift of the excavation. This
requirement applies in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
3.3 STORAGE AND HANDLING

(a) All materials for strand anchors (Tiebacks and Tie anchors) shall be
stored in an accepted manner under a weatherproof shelter and
supported at close intervals above the ground.
(b) All strand anchors and accessories shall be protected from damage or
corrosion until the completion of the works.
(c) Prestressing steel shall be protected from dirt, rust, or deleterious

substances.
3.4 FABRICATION
(a) Strand anchors shall be either shop or field fabricated from materials
conforming to the requirements in this Specification Section. The whole
assembly together with grout pipes and spacers shall be placed in the
sheath only after inspection and acceptance.
(b) Prestressing steel shall be cut with an abrasive saw or, with the approval
of the prestressing steel supplier, an oxyacetylene torch.
(c) All of the tendon bond length must be free of dirt, manufacturers'
lubricants, corrosion-inhibitive coatings, or other deleterious substances
that may significantly affect the grout-to-tendon bond or the service life of
the tendon.
3.5 DRILLING
(a) Drillholes shall be located so the longitudinal axis of the drillhole and the
longitudinal axis of the tendon are parallel. The drillhole shall not be
drilled in a location that requires the tendon to be bent to enable the
bearing plate to be connected to the structure.
(b) The Contractor shall be responsible for using a drilling method to
establish a stable hole of adequate dimensions. Holes may be drilled
with either percussion type drills or by rotary type diamond drills.
(c) Contractor shall use duplex drilling to advance the drillhole such that the
drill rods and casing are installed simultaneously.
(d) During drilling, continuous records of penetration rates shall be kept by
the Contractor. Any sudden advance in drilling or a sudden increase in
penetration rate shall be noted, together with the depth at which the
variations occur. The location of clay seams, open cracks, soft or broken
ground, water loss, water inflows and other relevant information shall be
recorded. Drilling records that contain a description of materials
encountered during drilling shall be included in the shift reports.
(e) Drillholes for strand anchors shall be drilled at the locations and to the
length, inclination and diameter shown on the Drawings.
(f) The minimum drill hole diameter shall be 200 mm for installation of
anchors consisting of the 15.7 mm diameter prestressing steel strands.
Drillhole diameters shall be selected to successfully install fully-
assembled anchors to the bottom of the drilled hole for the full length of
the anchor. The nominal diameter of the drillholes shall be in accordance
with the manufacturer’s instructions for the nominal diameter of the

tendon.
(g) After drilling, each drillhole shall be thoroughly cleaned of all drill
cuttings, sludge and debris by flushing with clean water.
3.6 SPECIAL DRILLING REQUIREMENTS

(a) For Tiebacks:
(i) Under-reaming drilling techniques may be used within the Type 17
bedrock.
(ii) Within 1 hour upon completion of drilling, if groundwater inflow
exceeds 4 liters/minute (measured from the top of the drillhole for
Tiebacks), wait for 24 hours and measure inflow again. If
groundwater inflow still exceeds 4 liters/minute, grout and redrill
hole.
(b) For Tie anchors (drilled between Head Walls):
(i) Contractor shall use a laser guided drilling system or similar to
maintain alignment of Tie anchor holes within tolerance.
(ii) Within 1 hour upon completion of drilling, if groundwater inflow
exceeds 4 liters/minute (measured from both ends of the drillhole
for Tie anchors), implement mitigation measures including but not
limited to patching around the casing with hydraulic cement
between slurry wall and end of casing.
(iii) The perforated steel casing shall be cut a minimum of 30 mm short
of the rear face of the bearing plate at each end of the Tie anchor
as shown on the Drawings prior to tendon installation and grouting.
3.7 DRILLING TOLERANCES

(a) For Tiebacks drilled in Wide Sections and Narrow Sections of the shafts:
(i) Drillhole centres shall be located within 75 mm of the set-out point
for all Tiebacks at the locations shown on the Drawings.
(ii) Tiebacks in the Wide Sections shall be located clear of the T-
portion of T-section slurry wall panels, with a minimum spacing of
400 m between edge of the T-portion and centerline of the
Tieback.
(iii) At the point of entry (in the slurry wall):
A. The Tieback drillhole shall be drilled within +/- one (1) degrees
of the design angle if declination.
B. The horizontal (plan) angle of the Tieback shall be within +/-

one (1) degrees of a line drawn perpendicular to the plane of
the structure (face of the slurry wall) unless agreed otherwise
(b) For Tie anchors drilled between Head Walls, a laser guided drilling
system shall be used to develop the drillholes within the allowable
tolerances:
(i) Tie anchor tolerance of +/- 75 mm horizontally and vertically. On
opposite Head Wall from planned horizontal centerline.
(ii) If deviation exceeds 200 mm radius from planned alignment,
consult with Metrolinx Representative.
(iii) Abort hole and redrill if deviation exceeds a 250 mm radius from
the theoretical planned alignment.
(iv) Aborted holes should be fully grouted.
3.8 STRAND ANCHOR ASSEMBLY PLACEMENT

(a) Tiebacks shall be installed as the excavation proceeds at the required
elevations shown on the Drawings. Install Tiebacks when the design
elevation does not exceed 1 m above the excavation surface in order to
control wall deformation.
(b) Before installation of the strand anchors in the drillholes, the holes shall
be washed clean using water or air and water jets inserted to the full
depth of the hole. Holes shall be effectively capped to prevent entry of
foreign material after washing until primary grouting and installation is
carried out.
(c) Assembled strand anchors shall be placed in accordance with the
Drawings and the recommendations of the tendon manufacturer or
specialist anchor contractor. The tendon shall be inserted into the
drillhole to the desired depth. When the tendon cannot be completely
inserted, the Contractor shall remove the tendon from the drillhole and
clean or re-drill the hole to permit insertion. Partially inserted tendons
shall not be driven or forced into the drillhole.
(d) The fabricated strand anchors and sheath assemblies shall be picked up
and installed into the drillholes immediately prior to primary grouting, in
such a manner as to prevent damage to the plastic sheathing in the free
length of the anchor, and the multi wire strands. In planning the method
of installation, the Contractor shall take due regard for the stiffness of the
anchor and the radius of curvature that it will accommodate without

damage.
(e) Spacers and centralizers:
(i) Spacers shall be provided at maximum intervals of 3 m.
(ii) Centralizers shall be provided at maximum intervals of 3 m
(iii) Spacers may be combined with centralizers.
(f) Each tendon shall be inspected and supervised during installation into
the drillhole or casing. Loose spacers or centralizers shall be
reconnected to prevent shifting during insertion.
(g) Stressing tails:
(i) Stressing tails shall be cleaned and protected from damage until
final testing and lock-off.
(ii) Maintain a minimum length of 1 m of the stressing tail after lock-off
for both Tiebacks and Tie anchors.
(iii) For Tie anchors, maintain a 1 m stressing tail at each end of the
tendon.
(iv) Any stressing tail that is required to be cut shorter than 1 m due to
field constraints requires approval from the Metrolinx
Representative. In such cases, do not cut shorter than 0.6 m.
(h) Protect the exposed stressing tail, bearing plate, wedge plate and wedge
assemblies from damage and corrosion during the Work so they can be
handed over to Contract 2 as per Schedule 8 – Outline Commissioning
Program and Handover, and pulled during the Contract 2 works to
properly destress the anchor.
3.9 GROUTING
(a) General:
(i) Confirm temperature conditions are acceptable for grouting. During
freezing weather conditions, grout shall not be allowed to freeze or
partially freeze until fully cured.
(ii) Provide grout tubes for proper grout injection and air venting. Grout
and vent tubes are to be kink free, unblocked and protected from
damage prior to grout installation.
(b) Tiebacks:
(i) Contractor shall determine the appropriate grout mix, submitted to
the Metrolinx Representative for approval.
(ii) All Tiebacks shall be pressure grouted with cement grout. Pressure
grouting shall be carried out such that the drillhole shall be sealed
and that the grout is injected until a minimum 3.5 bar grout
pressure (measured at the top of the drill hole) can be maintained
on the grout column for at least five (5) minutes.
(iii) Ensure the strand anchor remains centralized within the drilled
hole during grouting.
(iv) The strand anchor grout shall remain undisturbed after grouting for
a minimum of three days or until the grout has cured. Testing and
stressing of the anchors shall not be performed until strength tests
on the grout indicate sufficient curing has occurred.
(v) The grouting shall be carried out for the full length of the hole at
pressures directed by the Metrolinx Representative.
(vi) Grout shall be injected from the lowest point of the drillhole in one
continuous operation after installation of the assembled anchor.
The grout may be pumped through grout tubes. The grout tube
may remain in the hole upon completion of grouting if the tube is
filled with grout.
(vii) The quantity of the grout and the grout pressures shall be
recorded. The grout pressures and grout takes shall be controlled
to prevent excessive heave or fracturing.
(viii) After the tendon is installed, the drillhole may be filled in one
continuous grouting operation except that pressure grouting shall
not be used in the free length zone. The grout at the top of the
drillhole shall not contact the back of the structure or the bottom of
the trumpet.
(c) Tie Anchors:
(i) Tie anchors are not required to be pressure grouted since the
grouted tendon is not in contact with the surrounding native soil.
(ii) Contractor shall determine the appropriate grout mix, submitted to
the Metrolinx Representative for approval.
(iii) Perform three (3) consecutives stages of grouting (without

stoppages between each stage) to fully grout each Tie anchor.
A. Stage 1 – Grouting Around Tie anchor to Fill Pipe:
(1) Compute theoretical volume of annulus around Tie
anchor for reference.
(2) Maintain steady pressure of 3 bar to fill pipe.
(3) Monitor and record grout flow and pressure at start of
grouting stage, at 1 minute, 5 minutes, 10 minutes and
every 5 minutes thereafter while the grout flow is steady.
(4) Stage 1 grouting is complete when an approximate 50%
reduction in grout flow is observed.
B. Stage 2 – Annulus Grouting around OD of Pipe:
(1) Reduce pressure to 1.5 bar for 1 minute and record grout
flow and pressure.
(2) Increase pressure to 2.5 bar and record grout flow and
pressure at 2 minutes.
(3) Increase pressure to 3.5 bar and record grout flow and
pressure every 2 minutes thereafter while the grout flow
is steady.
(4) Stage 2 grouting is complete when an approximate 50%
reduction in grout flow is observed.
C. Stage 3 – Final Grouting Until Refusal:
(1) Continue pressure at 3.5 bar and record grout flow and
pressure every 1 minute.
(2) Refusal is reached when a grout flow of 1 liter/minute or
less is recorded over a constant duration of at least 2
minutes.
3.10 SECONDARY GROUTING (FOR TIEBACKS ONLY)

(a) No more than 3 Working Days after stressing the Tieback anchor, the
Contractor shall carry out secondary grouting of the free length of the
anchor. The secondary grouting stage shall consist of grouting of the
anchor hole over the free anchor length to completely encase the
Tieback anchor unbonded length.
(b) For secondary grouting, grout mixtures and grouting methods used shall
be in accordance with the following:
(i) Plastic, semi-rigid grout and air bleed tubes shall be used to grout
the Tieback anchor. The grout tube shall extent to the deepest part
of the hole and the bleed tube shall either be short or absent.
3.11 PRE-PRODUCTION TIEBACK AND TIE ANCHOR INSTALLATION

(a) Tiebacks: Tieback anchors with bonded length in soil:
(i) Within a Narrow Section of either shaft, at elevation between EL
99.0 and EL 94.0, install five (5) pre-production Tieback anchors
(non-working anchor) through the slurry wall as per a working
strand anchor, to determine soil / grout bond stress.
(ii) These Tieback anchors shall be sacrificial and shall not be
included as a working SOE element. Pre-production Tiebacks shall
satisfy the minimum requirements of the performance testing. Pre-
production Tiebacks shall be detensioned and cut off at the bearing
plate / head assembly after completion of testing. Additional
requirements may be provided by the Metrolinx Representative for
testing.
(b) Tiebacks: Tieback anchors with bonded length in rock:
(i) Within a Narrow Section of either shaft, at elevation between EL
86.0 and EL 82.0 and near to the End Walls, install five (5) pre-
production Tieback anchors (non-working anchor) through the
slurry wall as per a working strand anchor, to determine rock /
grout bond stress.
(ii) These Tieback anchors shall be sacrificial and shall not be
included as a working SOE element. Pre-production Tiebacks shall
satisfy the minimum requirements of the performance testing. Pre-
production Tiebacks shall be detensioned and cut off at the bearing
plate / head assembly after completion of testing. Additional
testing.
(c) Tie anchors (installed between Shaft Head Walls):
(i) Install two (2) pre-production tests (non-working anchor) to
determine Tie anchor / grout bond stress. Select suitable locations
that will avoid potential conflicts with future underpinning works on
the Head Wall that is drilled as well as on the opposite Head Wall.
(ii) These Tie anchors shall be sacrificial and shall not be included as
a working SOE element. Pre-production Tie anchors shall satisfy
the minimum requirements of the performance testing. Pre-
production Tie anchors shall be detensioned and cut off at the
wedge plate / head assembly after completion of testing. Additional
testing.
3.12 QUALITY CONTROL – TESTING FOR PRE-PRODUCTION TIEBACK AND

TIE ANCHORS
(a) General:
(i) Follow the requirements for strand anchor testing in Clause 3.13 of
this Specification Section for general requirements Cl 3.13(a) and
load testing setup Cl. 3.13(c).
(ii) Carry out testing in accordance with ASTM D1143 / D1143M.
(b) Maximum Test Loads:
(i) Maximum anchor load: 2.0 x design load (DL) of Tieback or Tie
anchor tendon.
(c) Load Test Procedure:
(i) Conduct pre-production test by cyclic and incremental loading and
unloading the strand anchor in accordance with schedule below, or
until the Tieback or Tie anchor fails:
Pre-production Test Load Steps
Load Cycle Applied Load
Cycle 1 AL 0.25 DL AL
Cycle 2 AL 0.25 DL 0.50 DL AL
Cycle 3 AL 0.25 DL 0.50 DL 0.75 DL AL
Cycle 4 AL 0.25 DL 0.50 DL 0.75 DL 1.00 DL AL
Cycle 5 AL 0.25 DL 0.50 DL 0.75 DL 1.00 DL 1.25 DL AL
Cycle 6 AL 0.25 DL 0.50 DL 0.75 DL 1.00 DL 1.25 DL 1.50 DL AL
Cycle 7 AL 0.25 DL 0.50 DL 0.75 DL 1.00 DL 1.25 DL 1.50 DL 1.75 DL AL
Cycle 8 AL 0.25 DL 0.50 DL 0.75 DL 1.00 DL 1.25 DL 1.50 DL 1.75 DL 2.00 DL* AL
Where:
AL = Alignment Load.
DL = Design Load of Tieback or Tie anchor.
* At 2.00 DL, maintain the load for a minimum of 2 hours.
(ii) Maintain each load for a minimum of 10 minutes or until the rate of
displacement is not greater than 2 mm per log cycle.
(iii) Record vertical and horizontal movement and tendon elongation

with respect to independent fixed reference point.
(iv) During load hold periods, anchor load shall not deviate from the
test pressure by more than 0.35 MPa.
(v) Do not exceed the test load during observation period.
(vi) When required, re-pump back to test load to compensate for small
movement, hydraulic oil seepage or temperature change.
3.13 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Strand Anchor Testing – General:
(i) The stressing procedure for all pre-stressed strand anchors shall
be in accordance with the recommendations of the US DoT FHWA
Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 4, Ground Anchors and
Anchored Systems or PTI DC35.1-14 – Post Tensioning Institute,
Recommendations for Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors.
(ii) Before stressing commences, the protruding end of the strand
anchor shall be cleaned of any contamination which may have
accumulated since placing. Each strand anchor shall be checked
before tensioning to ensure that it is free to move inside the
drillhole.
(iii) Care shall be taken during stressing to ensure the safety of all
personnel engaged on the work and of other persons in the vicinity.
(b) Grout Cubes:
(i) Take grout six (6) grout cubes for each pre-production Tieback and
Tie anchor. Test grout cubes only if anchor fails pre-production test
to aid in diagnosing the cause of an anchor failure.
(ii) Grout cubes are not required for production Tiebacks or Tie
anchors unless specified by the Metrolinx Representative.
(c) Load Testing Setup:
(i) Dial gauges shall bear on the pulling head of the jack and their
stems shall be coaxial with the tendon direction. The gauges shall
be supported on an independent, fixed frame, such as a tripod,
which shall not move as a result of stressing or other construction
activities during the operation. Special care shall be taken to set
the jack accurately in the line of the anchor.
(ii) Prior to setting the dial gauges, the Alignment Load (AL) shall be
accurately placed on the tendon. The magnitude of AL depends on
type and length of the tendon.
(iii) If the extension of the jack is not sufficient to fully stress the anchor
in one operation to locking off, the re setting of jacks shall be done
carefully to minimize damage to the strands.
(iv) Regripping of strands, which would cause overlapping wedge
bites, or wedge bites on the tendon below the anchor head, shall
be avoided.
(v) Stressing and testing of multiple element tendons with single
element jacks is not permitted.
(vi) Stressing shall not begin before the grout has reached the 28 day
strength of the grout as evidenced by test reports.
(d) Performance Testing:
(i) The first three (3) Tiebacks and the first three (3) Tie anchors,
followed by 5% of the remaining Tiebacks and 5% of the remaining
Tie anchors, shall be performance tested in accordance with the
procedures described in this Specification System. The Metrolinx
Representative shall select the anchors to be performance tested
and shall advise if additional Tiebacks or Tie anchors shall be
performance tested. The remaining anchors shall be tested in
accordance with the proof test procedures described in this
(ii) The performance test shall be performed by incrementally loading
and unloading the anchor to a maximum test load of 133% of the
DL in accordance with the following loading schedule.
From Table 8.1 – Performance Test Steps, of PTI DC35.1-14 – Post Tensioning Institute,
Recommendations for Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors
(iii) The load shall be raised from one increment to another

immediately after recording the anchor movement.
(iv) The anchor movement shall be measured and recorded to the
nearest 0.025 mm with respect to an independent fixed reference
point at the alignment load and at each increment of load.
(v) The load shall be monitored with the primary pressure gauge. The
reference pressure gauge shall be placed in series with the primary
pressure gauge during each performance test. If the load
determined by the reference pressure gauge and the load
determined by the primary pressure gauge differ by more than
10%, the jack, primary gauge and reference pressure gauge shall
be recalibrated.
(vi) At load increments other than the maximum test load, the load
shall be held just long enough to obtain the movement reading.
(vii) The maximum test load in a performance test shall be held for ten
minutes. A load cell shall be used to monitor small changes in load
during constant load-hold periods.
(viii) The jack shall be adjusted as necessary in order to maintain a
constant load.
A. The load-hold period shall start as soon as the maximum test
load is applied and the strand anchor movement (with respect
to a fixed reference) shall be measured and recorded at 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6 and 10 minutes.
B. If the strand anchor movement between 1 minute and 10
minutes exceeds 1 mm, the maximum test load shall be held
for an additional 50 minutes. If the load hold is extended, the
strand anchor movement shall be recorded at 15 minutes, 20,
30, 40, 50 and 60 minutes.
(e) Proof Testing:
(i) Proof testing shall be carried out on all production strand anchors
not subjected to a performance test.
(ii) The proof test shall be conducted using the same procedures as a
performance test, but without cycles of loading and unloading.
Proof testing shall be carried out in accordance with the following
loading schedule.
Proof Test Schedule

Step Load
1 AL
2 0.25 DL
3 0.50 DL
4 0.75 DL
5 1.00 DL
6 1.20 DL
7 1.33 DL (Test Load). Minimum 10-minute hold
8 Reduce to Lock-off Load
9 AL (Optional)
10 Adjust to Lock-off Load
From Table 8.2 – Proof Test Steps, of PTI DC35.1-14 – Post Tensioning Institute,
Recommendations for Prestressed Rock and Soil Anchors
(f) Anchor Lift-Off Test:

(i) Perform lift-off tests on all strand anchors. The lift-off tests shall
comprise an initial test following transfer of the stressing load to the
strand anchor assembly and prior to removal of the jack, and a
second lift-off test if directed by the Metrolinx Representative.
(ii) Loading of the strand anchors shall be increased until elongation of
the strand anchor occurs. At the point elongation occurs, the load
shall be held long enough for the load cell and jack pressure gauge
to be read.
(iii) Anchor stressing strands shall not be prepared for protection until
the Metrolinx Representative has determined no further lift-off tests
shall be performed.
3.14 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

(a) Acceptance criteria shall be as defined by the US DoT FHWA
Geotechnical Engineering Circular No. 4, Ground Anchors and Anchored
Systems.
(b) Creep Criterion:

(i) For performance and proof tests, the measured total movement for
the required load hold at the test load should not exceed 1 mm
between 1 and 10 minutes.
(ii) If the movements are less than the 1 mm for this period, the anchor
is considered acceptable with respect to creep.
(iii) If the measured total movement exceeds the criteria described
above, the load is held for an additional 50-minute period of time. If
the measured total movement over this additional time period does
not exceed 2 mm between 6 and 60 minutes, then the anchor is
considered acceptable with respect to creep.
(c) Apparent Free Length Criterion:
(i) The apparent free length is greater than the specified minimum
apparent free length.
(d) Lift-off Criterion:
(i) The initial lift-off reading shall be within plus or minus 5% of the
designed lock-off load. If this criterion is not met, the tendon load
shall be adjusted accordingly and the initial lift-off reading
repeated.
(e) Procedures for anchors failing acceptance criteria:
(i) Anchors that do not satisfy the minimum apparent free length
criteria shall be rejected and replaced at no additional cost to
Metrolinx. In this event, no further acceptance criteria are applied.
(ii) If the strand anchor fails during anchor testing, the Metrolinx
Representative shall modify the design and / or the Contractor
shall modify the construction procedures. These modifications may
include, but are not limited to, installing additional anchors,
modifying the installation methods, reducing the anchor design
load by increasing the number of anchors, increasing the anchor
length, or changing the anchor type. Any modification of design or
construction procedures shall be at no additional cost to Metrolinx.
A description of any proposed modifications must be submitted to
the Metrolinx Representative in writing. Proposed modifications
shall not be implemented until the Contractor receives written
approval from the Metrolinx Representative.
3.15 ANCHOR LOCK-OFF

(a) The load in the tendon shall be such that the specified lock-off load has
been applied to the tendon after seating losses (wedge seating).
(b) Lock-off load shall not exceed 70% of the ultimate strength of the anchor.
(c) The wedges shall be seated at a minimum load of 50% of the ultimate
strength of the anchor. If the lockoff load is less than 50% of the ultimate
strength of the anchor, shims shall be used under the wedge plate and
the wedges seated at 50% of the ultimate strength of the anchor. The
shims shall then be removed to reduce the load in the tendon to the
desired lock-off load.
3.16 INSTRUMENTATION AND MONITORING

(a) For monitoring of Tieback loads and Tie anchor loads, load cells and the
equipment required to indicate the stress in the strand anchor, shall be
supplied and installed by the Contractor as follows:
(i) At twenty (20) Tieback locations
(ii) At two (2) Tie anchor locations
(b) Locations of Tiebacks and Tie anchors to be instrumented with load cells
shall be agreed on site with the Metrolinx Representative.
(c) Load cells shall be read at a minimum daily until such time the Metrolinx
Representative agrees to relax the frequency.
END OF SECTION
Pape Segment Support of Excavation Applicable Section: 31 51 00 Tiebacks and Tie Anchors

sealed Drawings.
changes.

Pape Segment Support of Excavation Applicable Section: 31 51 00 Tiebacks and Tie Anchors
Table A3: SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change : Specification Section 31 51 00 – Tiebacks and Tie Anchors
Tieback and Tie Anchor – Design Yes No Yes, with  (P) Plan length shall consider easement constraints
conditions  (P) Contractor’s design shall ensure SOE deformations are maintained within TTC
deformation criteria
Tieback – Location Yes No Yes, with  (P) Tiebacks are specified in locations where Struts cannot be relied upon for support (all
conditions Struts at EL 87.5, Struts in the Wide Section at EL 93.5 and EL 83.5) because they will
be removed during Contract 2 works for the TBM passage, the pipe canopy installation
and the underpinning works
Tieback – Spacing Yes No Yes, with  (P) Minimum spacing (minimum, to prevent influence on adjacent Tieback), Narrow
conditions Section: 2.0 m spacing (horizontally) and 2.0 m spacing (vertically) with a maximum area
of 4 m2 per Tieback
 (P) Minimum spacing (minimum, to prevent influence on adjacent Tieback), Wide Section:
2.3 m spacing (horizontally, due to Slurry Wall T-section panels) and 2.0 m spacing
(vertically) with a maximum area of 4.6 m2 per Tieback
 (P) Number of Tiebacks per row shown on Drawings shall be taken as the minimum
number of Tiebacks at that elevation
 (P) Number of Tiebacks provided shall ensure SOE deformations are maintained within
TTC deformation criteria
Tieback and Tie Anchor – Design Yes Yes Yes, with  (P) Tieback and Tie Anchor design details such as Tieback sleeves, anchor plate and
Details (provided as a (for shop conditions Tieback seats as shown on the Drawings are indicative. Design details shall have the
base design) drawings and capacity for the forces that these components carry. Detailing shall be included in
detailing) Contractor’s Shop Drawings, signed-and-sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in
the province of Ontario
 (P) Tieback and Tie Anchor penetrations through the wall must prevent entry of water
and soil. Tieback and Tie Anchor temporary seal details and procedures shall be
included with the design details.
Tie Anchor – Location Yes No Yes, with  (P) Cannot be in envelope of top and bottom of the future Contract 2 pipe canopy, EL
conditions 96.5 to EL 93.5 and EL 81.5 to EL 79.5 (Pipe canopy is NIC)
 (P) Tie Anchor locations shall ensure SOE deformations are maintained within TTC
Tie Anchor – Spacing Yes No Yes, with  (P) Design assumes up to 2.8 m spacing (horizontally, due to Slurry Wall T-section
conditions panels) and up to 2.2 m spacing (vertically)
 (P) Number of Tie Anchors per row shown on Drawings shall be taken as the minimum
number of Tie Anchors at that elevation
 (P) Number of Tie Anchors provided shall ensure SOE deformations are maintained
within TTC deformation criteria
Tieback and Tie Anchor – Installation Partial Yes, with N/A  (P) Comply with requirements to not expose TTC structures to unbalanced loading from
Sequence (Establishing overall conditions the excavation sequence
sequence criteria
with respect to  (P) If there is a deviation from the from OLTA overall sequence criteria contained in the
excavation depth) Specification and shown on the Drawings, installation sequence must be considered in
Contractor’s analysis for excavation and support stages to ensure deformations are
maintained within TTC deformation criteria
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Struts and Walers
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification provides requirements for design, fabrication and
installation of walers and struts that provides an internal support system
to brace the SOE walls of the Pape Station shafts and Sammon Avenue
Headhouse shaft.
(b) For details of SOE elements of the Contract and the elements that can

(a) Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel
(e) Section 31 51 00 – Tieback and Tie Anchors
(f) Section 31 53 99 - Strut Temperature Control System
(g) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

(a) Measurement:
(i) This work will be paid for on a lump sum basis.
(b) Payment:
(1) Item C.2.11 – ‘Struts (Preloaded)’.
(2) Item C.2.12 – ‘Struts (Instrumentation)’.
(3) Item C.2.14 – ‘Walers & Connectors’.
(1) Item C.3.11 – ‘Struts (Preloaded)’.
(2) Item C.3.12 – ‘Struts (Instrumentation)’.
(3) Item D.3.14 – ‘Walers & Connectors’.

C. Sammon SOE:
(1) Item D.2.8– ‘Struts (Preloaded)’.
(2) Item D.2.9 – ‘Struts (Instrumentation)’.
(3) Item D.2.10 – ‘Walers & Connectors’.
(ii) Payment for lump sum Items C.2.11, C.2.14, C.3.11, C.3.14, D.2.8
and D.2.10 shall be as follows:
A. 20% upon the waler and strut fabrication and upon receipt of
verification of proof of purchase.
B. 10% upon delivery of struts and walers to the Site.
C. 70% upon installation of the strut and walers including jacking
systems, connections, real-time jack pressure / load
monitoring and any on-site control centre. Contractor to
propose a schedule of values for this portion of the lump sum.
Payment for this portion of the lump sum item will be made on
a monthly basis based on the schedule of values to be
developed.
(iii) Payment for lump sum Items C.2.12, C.3.12, and D.2.9 shall be
made following completion of Strut instrumentation installation.

(a) CSA G40.20/G40.21 – General Requirements for Rolled or Welded
Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel.
(b) CSA S16 – Design of Steel Structures.
(c) CSA W47.1 – Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel.
(d) CSA W48 – Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding.
(e) CSA W59 – Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
(f) ASTM A252-10 Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Steel
Pipe Piles.
(g) ASTM A108-18 Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy,
Cold-Finished.
(h) “TTC Technical Review Submission Requirements (for Metrolinx).” See
Attachment 2 of Schedule 4 – Review Procedures, Appendix B.

(a) Design Load: The Maximum load support member is designed to carry.
(b) Instrumentation and Data Management System (IDMS): A web
interpretation of that data
(c) Pre-Load: Load applied to the support member to activate the bracing
system.
(d) PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) – a synthetic fluoropolymer of
tetrafluoroethylene. PTFE is has non-stick properties, is hydrophobic,
non-wetting, of high density and resistant to high temperatures.
(e) Shop Drawings: Design drawings prepared by the Contractor’s designer.
(f) Strut: A brace or supporting member which primarily resists thrusts in the
direction of its own length. May be diagonal or horizontal.
(g) Waler: a horizontal beam used as a support member for bracing. Walers
will be installed along the wall of a support of excavation system.
(h) Zone of Influence (ZOI): An area in proximity to active construction
structures, buildings, and utilities. See Section 02 22 00 Existing
Conditions Assessment.


(a) The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and supporting calculations
of the bracing system, including the waler and struts details and the
hydraulic jacks to the Metrolinx Representative for review and approval
prior to start of strut installation. Shop Drawings shall include the
following and be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed
in the province of Ontario:
(i) Assembly and erection details of members and connections.
(ii) Struts and walers steelwork, including details of all stiffener plates,
stub columns, end plates etc.
(iii) Instrumentation to be installed to monitor strut performance and
pre-load adjustment. An automated real-time monitoring system is
required.
(iv) Weld details at connections.

(v) Struts and walers installation procedure, including method of
placing fill concrete between walers and slurry wall, mix design and
source of fill concrete.
(vi) Hydraulic jack details and specifications, including contingency
plan for swapping out a hydraulic jack.
(vii) Certified calibration charts for each hydraulic jack unit used for
preloading.
(viii) Preload method and sequence including jacking procedures.
(ix) Details of preloading systems and load measurement equipment.
(x) Proposed ongoing monitoring and adjusting of the loads in the
struts during construction for various struts in the bracing system.
(xi) Schedule of preloading and sequence of construction.
(xii) Geometry of support of excavation showing structure tolerances.
(xiii) Sequence of strut and waler installation.
(xiv) Field quality control measures for installation including field weld
inspection and acceptance.
(xv) Revised geometry resulting from the slurry wall panels being
constructed to out of the dimensions shown on the plans.
(xvi) Struts replacement procedure of a strut accidentally hit by a falling
object, including method of removing the damaged strut, installing
a new strut, monitoring localized deformations, and providing
measures to locally restrain the slurry wall.
(b) Submit a Structural Monitoring Plan showing how the support of
excavation and the bracing system will be monitored for movements and
loads in the bracing members. Coordinate with the Instrumentation
Specialist and Instrumentation and Data Management System (IDMS)
owner that are required in accordance with Specification Section 31 09
13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring.
(c) Submit Internal Bracing Installation Work Plan with the following:
(i) Bracing installation procedures detailing how installation will be
coordinated with tieback installation and excavation works.
(ii) Protection measures for existing structures and facilities as
required.
(iii) Method of preloading the struts and the amount of preload.
(iv) Instrumentation and monitoring to check performance of the

bracing system and adjusting the pre-load if needed.
(v) Strut and waler installation sequence.
(vi) Contingency plans for excessive wall movements.
(vii) Details of certified welders.
(viii) Weld inspection requirements. The Metrolinx Representative or
their representative from a testing and inspection services group is
required to be present during weld inspections.
(ix) Contingency plan to be implemented when instrumentation
readings exceed the specified Response Criteria for the Review
Level or Alert Level.
(x) Contingency plan for accident or emergency that requires
installation of additional struts, tiebacks or other support measures

(a) Structural Supervisor and Site Superintendent(s) shall have experience
with the installation of internal bracing using walers and preloaded struts,
on three (3) projects of a similar size and complexity within the last five
(5) years.
(b) Shop Drawings, calculations and test reports shall be signed and sealed
by a Professional Engineer with a background in structural design,
licensed in the province of Ontario.
(c) Contractor shall select a structural engineer with at least 10 years of
experience in design and construction of excavation support systems
and shall submit the engineer's resume to the Metrolinx Representative
demonstrating such experience.
(d) The Contractor’s structural engineer shall be present on site to witness
strut and waler installation, and demonstrate the support is within
allowable tolerances.

(a) Contractor shall furnish all tools, equipment, devices, appurtenances,
facilities, and services for the construction and removal of excavation
support systems.
1.10 DESIGN CRITERIA

(a) Contractor shall ensure struts, walers, connection, supports and the
jacking system is capable of supporting all bracing loads for the support
of excavation system in order to facilitate safe construction of the works.
(b) Contractor may elect to modify the strut and waler arrangement shown in
the Drawings, subject to all of the design criteria of the Specifications
and Drawings and all of the movement restrictions required by the TTC.
(c) The strut and waler lengths shall be adjusted in the Shop Drawings to
accommodate encroachments from the actual constructed inside faces
of the slurry walls.
(d) Strut lengths shown on the Drawings are based on the angle and
locations excluding the length of the stiffener plate bracket. If the length
of the connection plate changes, the Contractor must submit a revised
design.
(e) Contractor shall restrict settlement or movement of TTC structures,
buildings, structures and utilities during construction to allowable limits.
Refer to Schedule 4 Appendix B “TTC Technical Review Submission
Requirements (for Metrolinx Ontario Line).”
(f) Design shall include tolerance for variation in groundwater level (up to
0.5 m above design ground water level outside of the support of
excavation system).
(g) Design each support component to support the maximum loads which
may occur during all stages of construction.
(h) Internal bracing support shall be analyzed for all conditions which may
occur during construction, including installation, and relocation and
removal of struts, and concreting of the SOE base slab at the bottom of
the excavation.
(i) Design assumptions shall be indicated on the Shop Drawings.
(j) Design internal bracing support system for staged installation to conform
to construction and sequences.
(k) Struts shall be welded to walers. Weld design shall consider variable
load conditions.
(l) Provide intermediate vertical and horizontal support to prevent buckling.
(m) Provide diagonal bracing where needed for stability of the system.
(n) Preload struts by jacking to preload values shown on the Drawings.
(o) Should the Contractor elect to modify the strut and waler arrangement,
the modified design must consider stresses due to temperature
variations.
(p) Struts must be protected from stress variations induced by temperature
fluctuations. This shall be achieved by a system that can cater for, or
protect from, the effects of temperature changes. This can include the
use of smart jacks, insulation, or temperature control. Each strut must
have monitoring devices that can report the load in the strut jacks and
temperature through real time monitoring and datalogging, transmitted to
a cloud data and storage system that can be accessed through an
internet-based portal.
1.11 ALLOWABLE MOVEMENTS

(a) Refer to Drawings for the locations of geotechnical and structural
instrumentation and the Review Levels and Alert Levels of the support of
excavation system. Refer to Schedule 4 Appendix B “TTC Technical
Review Submission Requirements (for Metrolinx Ontario Line)” for the
Review Levels and Alert Levels of the TTC structure. The required
actions when the Review Level and Alert Level are reached are as
follows.
(i) Review Level: Excavation is allowed yet corrective measures are
required, including increasing frequency of readings and
procedural modifications that permit excavation to continue.
(ii) Alert Level: No further settlement / heave is acceptable. Settlement
or heave exceeding Alert Level requires immediate action to:
A. No further excavation is allowed unless otherwise directed and
corrective measures are taken.
B. Inspection of affected facilities and structures and performance
of acceptable corrective and restorative measures.
C. Submit modified plan for additional corrective measures to
assure no further settlement or lateral movement occurs.
D. If instrumentation indicates that ground movement continues
and damage to structures or utilities is increasing, take
measures to arrest ground movements and prevent damage.
E. Resume excavation only upon preventing further movement.
1.12 MONITORING OF MOVEMENT AND LOAD IN BRACING SYSTEM

(a) Monitor instrumentation to determine ground and structure movements,
including the TTC structure in accordance with the Geotechnical and
Instrumentation Monitoring Plan in accordance with Specification Section
31 09 13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring.
(b) Monitor the loads in the bracing members for struts that have been
agreed to be installed with load monitoring devices and movement /
strain monitoring as agreed with the Metrolinx Representative.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Structural Steel:
(i) Minimum Grade 350W, in accordance with CSA G40.20/G40.21.
(ii) Expansion Bearings - The PTFE layer in expansion bearings shall
be made from pure virgin PTFE resin satisfying the requirements of
ASTM D 4894. The PTFE layer shall be fabricated as reinforced
sheets containing random or woven glass fibres, uniformly blended
with PTFE resin. The maximum fiber content shall be 25%. Woven
PTFE shall be attached to a metallic substrate by a method which
will provide for a shear force resistance of at least 0.10 times the
applied compressive force.
(iii) Struts - ASTM A252-10(2018) Standard Specification for Welded
and Seamless Steel Pipe Piles – Grade 3 (modified to 345 MPa
yield strength). Pipe may be manufactured by ERW Stright Seam,
Spiralweld or Rolled & Welded processes.
(iv) Stud Shear Connectors - ASTM A108-18 Standard Specification
for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold-Finished.
(b) Pre-fabricated or Custom Fabricated Hydraulic Struts / Servo Struts:

(i) The Contractor is encouraged to use a reusable hydraulic strut
system that utilizes a series of extensions with a hydraulic unit at
one end. A hydraulic strut / servo strut can also satisfy the strut
performance monitoring requirements as specified in Cl. 1.7 (a) (iii)
and Cl. 1.7 (c) (iv) of this Specification Section.
(c) Welding Materials:
(i) In accordance with CSA W48 and CSA W59.
(d) Hydraulic Jacks:

(i) Jacks used for applying a preload to struts and corner bracing shall
be rated such that the maximum load is not more than 90% of the
jack capacity. Pressure gauges and the jack used for preloading
shall be calibrated within 12 months from the start of preloading
activities. Pressure gauges shall be graduated in no greater than 5
bar increments.
(ii) Minimum 450 ton cylinder jack, single acting with a 4-inch stroke
required, Enerpac HCG4004 or similar.
(e) Strut Design Loads and Preloads:
(i) Strut Preload requirements for all struts to be installed on the
project range from 600 kN to 4000 kN.
(ii) Strut Design Loads range from 5,500 kN to 20,000 kN depending
on the SOE wall and the bracing level.
EXECUTION
3.1 STRUT AND WALER INSTALLATION

(a) Establish Monitoring Point on Top of Slurry Wall:
(i) At a slurry wall panel at every strut location, establish a monitoring
point on the top of the slurry wall. Monitoring point must allow 3D
survey monitoring (x, y, z for coordinates and elevation). Points will
be monitored during preloading.
(b) Internal Bracing:
(i) Install walers and struts for the bracing system for that level as
follows:
A. After the excavation reaches a depth that is 1 m below the
installation elevation of the walers and struts.
B. In the case where a row of tiebacks is located 1 m below the
level of the walers and struts, excavation can proceed to 2 m
below the waler and strut level in order to install the tiebacks
prior to the walers and struts so as to minimize installation
conflicts.
(ii) Provide walers at each level of bracing.
(iii) Provide tight bearing between walers and slurry wall using
concrete packing, with ample bearing areas to provide uniform
transfer of loads.
(iv) Intermediate support to the struts is not permitted.

(v) For any Contractor initiated changes to the waler and strut design,
the Contractor shall ensure that the internal bracing system shall
be designed to prevent progressive failure if any one of the struts
fails.
(vi) For any Contractor initiated changes to the waler and strut design,
the Contractor shall ensure that diagonal bracing in the corner
sections of the shafts is provided in such a way as to maximize
open space into the excavation in order to facilitate removal of
muck and delivery of materials from the crane as well as for
lowering into the shaft a MTBM machine for installing the pipe
canopy as part of a follow-on interfacing contract.
(vii) Include web stiffeners, plates, angles, or bracing to prevent
rotation, crippling, or buckling of connections and points of bearing
between structural members.
(viii) The contractor’s design shall allow for eccentricities caused by field
fabrication and assembly.
(ix) Install and maintain internal bracing support members in tight
contact with each other and with the surface being supported.
(x) The Contractor shall keep additional walers and struts on site and
use them to supplement wall support if instructed by the Metrolinx
Representative. The additional walers and struts shall be adequate
to form one level of bracing for a 20m length along the slurry wall.
(xi) All welds shall be in accordance with CSA W59. Minimum weld
size shall be 6 mm. All welds shall be carried out be a certified
welder and inspected by the Metrolinx Representative.
(c) Preloading:
(i) Preload values in kN for all seven (7) levels of bracing for each of
the four (4) walls of the support of excavation of each shaft are
included in the Drawings for the Strut and Walers. The strut
preload (PL) values range from 500 kN to 5000 kN.
(ii) Provide stubs, brackets and seats for jacking preload into struts.
(iii) Preload internal bracing in accordance with the Shop Drawings.
(iv) Prestress and lock-off struts immediately and no more than 12
hours after the strut is installed.
(v) Use procedures that produce uniform loading on bracing members
without appreciable eccentricities or overstressing and distortion.
(vi) Make provisions for permanently fixing each member with steel
shims or wedges welded into place.
(vii) Include in preloading the means to determine, within 5% of the
amount of preload induced into bracing members.
(viii) Do not use wooden wedges to preload bracing member.
(ix) Strut height above excavation shall not exceed maximum vertical
distance above top of excavation indicated in the drawings.
(x) Reduce vertical distance between bracing levels when excessive
ground movement occurs.
(xi) Preloading procedure shall be as follows:
A. Do not start preload procedure until non-shrink grout between
structural support bracket and slurry wall has reached 7-day
strength of 35 MPa or 28-day strength of 40 MPa.
B. Take a reading of the slurry wall monitoring point(s) on the top
of the slurry wall panel(s) where the strut that is about to be
preloaded is located. Take reading within 24 hours of
commencing preload activity.
C. Apply alignment load (AL) and then apply an initial load of 5%
of the total preload (PL) value (AL + 0.05 PL).
D. Hold load increment for at least 2 minutes.
E. Apply 25% of PL (0.25 PL) and hold load increment for at least
2 minutes.
Continue load increments at 25% of PL to 0.75 PL, holding
each load increment a minimum of 2 minutes.
F. Apply final load increment to 1.00 PL and hold for 30 minutes.
Verify that the jack pressure remains steady and does not lose
more than 1% of the total applied preload, otherwise the load
shall be removed, the jack maintained / replaced, and the test
restarted.
G. After 30 minutes, take another reading of the slurry wall
monitoring point(s) on the top of the slurry wall panel(s) where
the strut is located.
H. Summary of load increments for preloading:
(1) AL + 0.05 PL, 0.25 PL, 0.50 PL, 0.75 PL, 1.00 PL.
I. Lock off jack at 1.00 PL.

(a) The installation of a level of bracing shall be fully completed before
proceeding with the next lift of the excavation. This requirement applies
in both the horizontal and vertical directions.
(b) The maximum elevation difference of the excavation between the north
shaft and south shaft shall not exceed 2 m and one row of installed
tiebacks.
(c) The maximum elevation difference of the excavation contained within an
entire wide section shall not exceed 2 m and one row of installed
tiebacks or one row of installed tiebacks.
3.3 QUALITY CONTROL

(a) For quality control requirements of installed steelwork, steel member
connections including brackets, plates and stiffeners, and for welding,
refer to Specification Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel.
END OF SECTION
Pape Segment Support of Excavation Applicable Section: 31 53 00 Struts and Walers

sealed Drawings.
changes.

Pape Segment Support of Excavation Applicable Section: 31 53 00 Struts and Walers
Table A4: SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change : Specification Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers
(Unless changed by (see Note 2) ‘(B)’ applies to both of the sites
Contractor)
Struts – Design and member sizing Yes No Yes, with  (P) For Pape Station Shafts, Strut design, location and configuration shall ensure SOE
conditions deformations are maintained within TTC deformation criteria
 (S) For Sammon Avenue Headhouse Shaft, ensure SOE deformations are maintained
within deformation criteria presented in the Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawings and
are to the satisfaction of the City
Struts – Location Yes No Yes, with  (P) Struts at EL 93.5m, 87.5m and 83.5m (Levels 5 to 7) in Wide Section cannot be
conditions changed. These Struts provide necessary stiffness prior to installation of the SOE base
slab. These Struts are to be removed during Contract 2 works due to space required for
pipe canopy (EL 96.5 to EL 93.5) and for Contract 2 TBM passage (EL 92.0 to EL 82.0)
 (P) Struts at elevation of 87.5m (Level 6) in Narrow Section cannot be changed. These
Struts provide stiffness prior to installation of SOE base slab for Contract 2 TBM passage
 (S) Contractor is recommended to follow the location and elevation of Struts as shown in
the Sammon SOE Drawings. The next contract may need to adjust bracing to suit their
SEM cross-cut cavern design and excavation sequence
Struts – Configuration Yes No Yes, with  (P) Strut design, location and configuration shall ensure SOE deformations are
conditions maintained within TTC deformation criteria
 (S) Strut design, location and configuration shall ensure SOE deformations are
maintained within deformation criteria presented in the Instrumentation and Monitoring
Drawings and are to the satisfaction of the City
 (S) Contractor is recommended to follow the configuration, location and elevation of
Struts as shown in the Sammon SOE Drawings. The next contract may need to adjust
bracing to suit their SEM cross-cut cavern design and excavation sequence
Walers Yes No Yes, with  (B) Can be changed, as long as the Waler strength (in terms of kN/m) and Waler total
conditions shear and flexural deflection are not reduced
Struts and Walers – Walers to Slurry Yes Yes Yes, with  (B) Connection design shall have the capacity for the forces and moments the connection
Wall Connections (provided as a (for shop conditions carries. Detailing shall be included in Contractor’s Shop Drawings, signed-and-sealed by
base design) drawings and a Professional Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario
detailing)
Struts and Walers – Strut to Waler Yes Yes Yes, with  (B) Connection design shall have the capacity for the forces and moments the connection
Connections (provided as a (for shop conditions carries Detailing shall be included in Contractor’s Shop Drawings, signed-and-sealed by a
base design) drawings and Professional Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario
detailing)
Struts and Walers – Detailing Yes Yes Yes, with  (B) Detailing shall be included in Contractor’s Shop Drawings, signed-and-sealed by a
(provided as a (for shop conditions Professional Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario
detailing)
Strut and Waler – Installation Partial Yes, with N/A  (P) Comply with requirements to not expose TTC structures to unbalanced loading from
Sequence (Establishing overall conditions the excavation sequence
sequence criteria
with respect to  (B) If there is a deviation from the OLTA overall sequence criteria, installation sequence
excavation depth) must be considered in Contractor’s analysis for excavation and support stages to ensure
deformations are maintained within TTC deformation criteria (Pape Station); or the
deformation criteria presented in the Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawings and are to
the satisfaction of the City (Sammon)
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Strut Temperature Control System
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the requirements for a Strut Temperature
Control System for the struts in the Wide Sections of the North and
South Shafts of Pape Station SOE intended to control strut thermal
movements and resulting restraint forces at locations adjacent to the
support of excavation (SOE) Head Walls.
(b) The Specification Section shall supplement the supply and installation of
the strut system required as SOE elements that are detailed under
Specification Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers.

(a) Section 00 15 00 – Temporary Facilities
(c) Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers
(d) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

(a) Measurement:
(b) Payment:
A. Item C.2.13– ‘Struts (Temperature Control Systems)’ (Pape
Station North SOE).
B. Item C.3.13– ‘Struts (Temperature Control Systems)’ (Pape
Station South SOE).
(ii) Payment for this lump sum item shall be as follows:
A. 50% upon installation and commissioning of the Temperature
Control Systems.
installation of all the Temperature Control Systems up to
Handover of the Work in accordance with Schedule 8 –
Outline Commissioning Program & Handover.

(a) ANSI – American National Standards Institute.
(b) ASHRAE – American Society of Heating and Refrigeration Engineers.
(c) CSA – Canadian National Standards.
(d) NEC - National Electrical Code.
(e) OBC - Ontario Building Code:
(i) Governing Sections.
(ii) MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1.
(f) UL – Underwriters LaboratoriesOESC -Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

(a) Definitions:
(i) Associated Appurtenance means as specified in the Agreement.
(ii) End wall means the section of slurry wall at each end of the shaft
that the TBM will mine through when being received into, and
launched from, the shaft.
(iii) Engineer: means a professional engineer licensed by Professional
Engineers Ontario to practice in the Province of Ontario.
(iv) Head Wall means the section of slurry wall running parallel and
alongside the existing TTC structure and its previous SOE system.
(v) Narrow Section means the section of shaft closest to the End Wall
that is used to receive or launch the TBM.
(vi) Temporary Installation means an installation that maintains strut
temperatures for struts constructed between in the wide section
shaft for a length of time not exceeding 10 years.
(vii) Wide Section means the section of shaft closest to the Head Wall
that is used to perform and accommodate the underpinning works.
(viii) Working Drawings means design drawings developed by the
Engineer who develops the strut temperature control system. The
drawings define the intended configuration of the temporary
bridges and are used as the basis of developing shop drawings.
(ix) Zone of Influence (ZOI) means an area in proximity to active
construction deemed to potentially have an effect on the movement
of existing structures, buildings and utilities.

(a) A completed Certificate of Conformance shall be submitted to the
Metrolinx Representative upon completion of Temporary Works
installation and before use of Temporary Works takes place.
(b) The Contractor’s Engineer’s seal and signature shall be affixed on the
completed Certificate of Conformance confirming that the Temporary
Works have been installed in general conformance with the Shop
Drawings and Specifications and Drawings.

(a) The Contractor shall prepare and submit working drawings and design
computations for the Strut Temperature Control System to the Metrolinx
Representative for review in accordance with the Specifications and the
design requirements given in Clause 2.3 of this Specification Section.
The submittal shall be signed and sealed by the Contractor’s Engineer.
(b) Working Drawings:
(i) Working drawings shall be submitted on 11” x 17” (Ledger/Tabloid)
sheets with an appropriate border and title block. Drawings in PDF
format shall also be provided.
(ii) All Working Drawings and design computations shall be signed
and sealed by a professional design licensed in the Province of
Ontario, who shall also be available for consultation in interpreting
the computations and drawings, and aid in the resolution of any
problems which may occur during the performance of the work.
The design calculations shall be accompanied by a letter certifying
that the Strut Temperature Control System has been designed
according to the Drawings, Specifications, and Agreement.
(iii) Where any of the Strut Temperature Control System are
manufactured outside of Canada, a letter shall be submitted
certifying that the materials used, and the fabrication of the
temporary bridge components are according to the Drawings,
Specifications, and Agreement.
(c) Shop Drawings:
(i) General:
A. Contractor’s Engineer’s seal and signatures shall be affixed on
the Shop Drawings verifying that the drawings are consistent
with the Specifications and Drawings.

same Shop Drawing and the design or design-checking
Engineer or both are unable to seal and sign the Shop
Drawing for all aspects of the work, the drawing shall be
sealed and signed by as many additional design and design-
checking Engineers as necessary.
(d) Design Computations:
(i) Design computations, procedures and other data that supports the
proposed design shall be submitted on 8½” x 11” (Letter) sheets.
Design computations, procedures and other supporting data shall
also be provided in PDF format.

(a) The Contractor shall retain an Engineer with experience in Heating and
Cooling Design, Industrial and Piping Insulation, Electrical Power Supply,
and Control Systems of comparable complexity and scope, to verify that
the quality of the materials and workmanship employed in the supply and
installation of the Strut Temperature Control System is consistent with
that assumed in the design.

(a) Arrange for delivery of equipment and components in wrapped in
opaque, water-resistant covers and fastened to substantial pallet-type
shipping supports prior to installation. Pack components with padding
materials of sufficient quantity and thickness to prevent damage.
(b) Store equipment and components under cover in dry areas protected
from the weather and all other hazards. Do not store assemblies in
contact with the ground.
(c) Handle equipment and components to prevent damage to surfaces and
to prevent other damage. Do not crowd or scrape components against
one another or against abutting surfaces.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Insulation and Jacketing:
(i) Insulation shall have a flame spread index of 25 and smoke-
development index not exceeding 450.
(ii) Required insulation thickness to be as determined by this supplier

so as to achieve the performance specified.
(iii) The strut insulation and jacketing shall be compatible with
temperature control piping and/or wiring proposed and be weather
resistant. Insulation system shall be robust enough for a
construction environment.
(b) Heat Transfer Pipes and Tubes (mounted on strut):
(i) Cross linked polyethylene (PEX) pressure pipe or equivalent
alternative.
(c) Heat Transfer Fluid:
(i) 40% Polypropylene Glycol.
(d) Heat Tracing:
(i) Self-Regulating Heating Cables.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
(a) System designer shall provide all equipment needed for a fully functional
system according to the proposed configuration. Equipment shall include
but is not limited to following:
(i) Heat Pumps.
(ii) Power Supply.
(iii) Temperature Sensors.
(iv) Pumps for Heat Transfer Fluid.
(v) Monitoring System for Strut Temperature Control System.
(vi) Back-up Generator(s).
(vii) Wireless Communication Components.

(a) The Strut Temperature Control System Design Criteria:
(i) System shall provide control of strut temperature to the required
operating setpoint regardless of variations in ambient
temperatures. Setpoint is determined by the system supplier for
the required theoretical strut loading.
(ii) Allowable Strut Temperature Variation above or below setpoint
shall be limited to a +/- 2 degrees Celsius.
(iii) Ambient temperature range to be used for design shall be the

MMAH Supplementary Standard SB-1, 2.5% maximum and
minimum exceedance temperatures of -18° and 31° degrees
Celsius.
(b) The Strut Temperature Control System shall be designed with
redundancy so that malfunction of a part of the system will not prevent
the continued functioning of the system.
(c) The Strut Temperature Control System shall have a generator backup to
provide continuing operation in event of a power failure.
(d) The Strut Temperature Control System shall have a monitoring system to
notify of system operating problems or irregularities.
EXECUTION
3.1 SHOP TESTING

(a) Provide shop testing for the proposed system to demonstrate the ability
to control the longest strut temperature to within the required limits.
(b) At Metrolinx’s discretion, shop testing shall be witnessed.
(c) Generate system data and provide corresponding reports verifying
compliance with the design criteria.
3.2 INSTALLATION
(a) Install and set-up, the strut system, strut temperature control system
including piping, heat tracing, insulation and associated controls and
equipment as required for the proposed system for the struts identified
on the Drawings.
3.3 FIELD TESTING

(a) Provide field testing and report for the proposed system after installation
to confirm the ability of the system to control temperature to within the
required limits as has been demonstrated in the shop testing but under
field conditions.
(b) Testing to consider each individual strut and total system after completed
installation.
(c) The Contractor shall design, supply, install and maintain a strut
temperature control system intended to control strut thermal movements
and resulting restraint forces at locations adjacent to the support of
excavation (SOE) headwalls. The following system options shall be
considered; however in all cases, the system proposed shall be proven
with examples demonstrating the contractor’s experience on similar

applications and the cost benefit of the system proposed:
(i) A control system that consists of insulation placed around the SOE
struts, heat transfer tubes wrapped around the struts under the
insulation, centralized heat pump unit(s) for heating or cooling,
heat transfer fluid, temperature sensors to monitor strut
temperature, a control system to maintain the strut temperature
above the minimum temperature specified, and shut off valves and
connections to allow the installation or removal of struts during
construction.
(ii) A temperature control system consists of insulation placed around
the SOE struts, electrical heat tracing wire wrapped around the
struts under the insulation, temperature sensors to monitor strut
temperature, a control system to maintain the strut temperature
above the minimum temperature specified and connections to
allow the installation or removal of struts during construction.
(iii) A temperature control system that consists of insulation placed
around the SOE struts, heating or cooling pipe connections to the
strut body for supply or heating or cooling air to the interior of the
strut, centralized air cooling and heating unit(s), temperature
sensors to monitor strut temperature, a control system to maintain
the strut temperature above the minimum temperature specified
and connections to allow to the installation or removal of struts
during construction.
(iv) A temperature control system that is a combination or modification
of the above options or a new option which is proven technology
that achieves the same result.
(d) Strut temperatures and loads will be monitored and recorded and shall
be available to the Geotechnical Information Monitoring System via a
wireless connection using standard protocols.
3.4 STRUT TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEM REMOVAL

(a) Handover of the Strut Temperature Control System and all ancillary
Work to PTUS Project Co. in accordance with the Requirements of
Schedule 8 - Outline Commissioning Program and Handover.
END OF SECTION
OL North Civil Works Schedule 9 - Specifications and Drawings
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Slurry Walls
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers requirements for the installation of reinforced
concrete support of excavation (SOE) walls constructed by the slurry trench
method (“slurry walls”) utilizing “hydrofraise”, (also known as “hydromill”)
techniques for the construction of the Pape Station SOE and Sammon
Avenue Headhouse SOE.
(b) Scope includes all Labour, Products, Equipment and services necessary
to construct reinforced concrete structural wall for the support of
excavation walls.
(c) Scope includes developing shop drawings for slurry wall details, and
other structural elements of the SOE system, including the bracing and
tiebacks and tie anchors. The shop drawings package shall be prepared
by the Contractor’s Design Engineer. The shop drawings and details
shall suit the Contractor’s preferred means and methods of construction,
working within the performance requirements stipulated in the Drawings
and Specifications, including the TTC movement criteria from the TTC
Technical Review Submission Requirements (for MetroLinx Ontario
Line), Table 2.4 which is contained in the Agreement under Schedule 4 –
Review Requirements, Appendix B, Attachment 2. All Drawings and the
Work Plan shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer
licensed in the province of Ontario.
(d) Ontario Line Technical Advisor (OLTA) is the Engineer of Record (EOR)
for the Project on behalf of Metrolinx and has prepared signed-and-
sealed Drawings. The Contractor shall develop fabrication and
construction details to suit their means and method of construction,
which shall be made as a shop drawings submittal to OLTA as the
Engineer of Record. Calculations will be required to accompany the
Shop Drawings for any structural elements. The Contractor’s SOE
submittals shall be made in accordance with the Drawing requirements
and the relevant Specifications and shall be signed-and-sealed by the
Contractor’s Design Engineer. During construction, the Contractor shall
be responsible for ensuring that the SOE remains within the deflection
criteria, supplementing the SOE with additional support elements if
required. After Contract award, OLTA will provide its modeling and
analysis files electronically to the Contractor if requested. OLTA will use
its modeling and analysis files for the review and checking process of the
Contractor’s SOE fabrication and construction details during the
submittal review period.
(e) For details of SOE elements of the Contract and the elements that can
(f) Jet grouting at Lipton Avenue along the SOE Headwall locations shall be
performed before SOE slurry wall construction in that location.
(g) Schedule and sequence of slurry wall construction shall be planned to
suit Contractor’s desired panel sequence and with coordination of partial
street closures on Danforth Avenue, Lipton Avenue, Gertrude Place and
Muriel Avenue.

(b) Section 02 42 00 – Removal and Salvage of Construction Materials
(c) Section 03 10 00 – Concrete Forming
(d) Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing
(e) Section 03 21 21.11 – Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer Reinforcement
Bars
(f) Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
(g) Section 03 37 13 – Shotcrete
(h) Section 05 12 00 – Structural Steel
(i) Section 26 05 26 – Primary Grounding System
(j) Section 31 09 13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring
(k) Section 31 20 01 – Muck and Excavated Materials Disposal
(l) Section 31 23 16 – Shaft Excavation
(m) Section 31 23 19 – Shaft Dewatering and Groundwater Disposal
(n) Section 31 43 00 – Jet Grouting
(o) Section 31 51 00 – Tiebacks and Tie Anchors
(p) Section 31 53 00 – Struts and Walers
(q) Section 31 53 99 – Strut Temperature Control System
(r) Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls

(a) Measurement:
(i) The following work will be paid for on a lump sum basis and will not
be measured for payment:
A. Slurry Wall Guide Wall.
(ii) Measurement of the following Items shall be cubic meters of soil /
rock excavated. Measurement shall be based on the theoretical in-
situ volume (m3) of material excavated from within the slurry wall
systems as verified by hydromill telemetry. Excavation volumes for
payment shall not exceed the volumes shown in Appendix A of
Schedule 7 – Schedule of Values for the Items listed in Clause 1.3
(b).
A. Slurry Wall Construction - Hydromill Excavation (Soil).
B. Slurry Wall Construction - Hydromill Excavation (Rock).
C. Additional Slurry Wall Hydromill Excavation (Soil).
(iii) Measurement of the following Items shall be cubic meters of
structural concrete placed inclusive of reinforcement (steel or
GFRP), including couplers and additional support bars:
A. Slurry Wall Construction – Reinforcement & Structural
Concrete.
B. Additional Slurry Wall Hydromill Excavation (Soil).
C. Additional Slurry Wall Construction - Reinforcement &
Structural Concrete.
(b) Payment:
(1) Item C.2.5 – ‘Slurry Wall Guide Wall - Reinforcement &
Structural Concrete’.
(2) Item C.2.6 – ‘Slurry Wall Construction - Hydromill
Excavation (Soil)’.
Excavation (Rock)’.
(4) Item C.2.8 – ‘Slurry Wall Construction – Reinforcement &

(1) Item C.3.5 – ‘Slurry Wall Guide Wall - Reinforcement &
(4) Item C.3.8 – ‘Slurry Wall Construction – Reinforcement &
C. Sammon SOE:
(1) Item D.2.2– ‘Slurry Wall Guide Wall - Reinforcement &
(2) Item D.2.3 – ‘Slurry Wall Construction - Hydromill
(3) Item D.2.4 – ‘Slurry Wall Construction - Hydromill
(4) Item D.2.5 – ‘Slurry Wall Construction – Reinforcement &
(ii) Where the top of the Type 17 bedrock is deeper than that shown
on the Drawings, as confirmed in writing by the Metrolinx
Representative, and additional slurry wall panel construction
depths are required to achieve the required minimum socket
depths, payment will be made for the following Provisional Items:
A. Item F.1.3 – ‘Additional Slurry Wall Hydromill Excavation
(Soil)’.
B. Item F.1.4 – ‘Additional Slurry Wall Construction -
Reinforcement & Structural Concrete.

(a) American Petroleum Institute (API) 1.API SPEC 13A – Specification for
Drilling-Fluid Materials.
(b) API RP 13B-1 – Recommended Practice for Field Testing Water-based
Drilling Fluids.
(c) CSA-A23.3.19 Design of Concrete Structures.
(d) CSA-G30.18, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
(e) CAN/CSA-S807-10 (R2015) Specification for Fibre-Reinforced Polymer

Bars.
(f) BTS / ICE Specification for Tunnelling.
(g) ‘TTC Technical Review Submission Requirements (for Metrolinx Ontario
Line)’. See Attachment 2 of Schedule 4 – Review Procedures, Appendix
B.

(a) Contractor’s Design Engineer: An Engineer who is experienced in
Support of Excavation design and is licensed in the province of Ontario
and engaged by the Contractor to provide design services and for the
preparation of Shop Drawing that shall be signed-and-sealed prior to
submission.
(b) Crosshole Sonic Logging (CSL) Specialty Engineer: The CSL Specialty
Engineer performing the CSL testing and who shall be a Professional
Engineer (in any Canadian province or US state) and have at least three
years of experience in CSL testing.
(c) EOR: Engineer of Record. The EOR is a licensed engineer responsible
for the final detailed design of the project and for reviewing and
approving the Contractor’s submittals.
(d) End Wall: The section of slurry wall at each end of the shaft that the TBM
(e) Geotechnical and Instrumentation Monitoring Plan (GIMP): A plan
presenting geotechnical instrumentation locations and monitoring
requirements for the protection of existing structures, buildings and
utilities located within the construction zone of influence by monitoring
movements of the ground, support of excavation, utilities, structures and
groundwater regime, prior, during, and subsequent to construction in
order to assess the need for implementing of mitigation measures.
(f) Guide Wall: A pair of walls constructed to establish the location of the
slurry wall and to prevent the top of the trench from caving in.
(g) Head Wall: The section of slurry wall running parallel and alongside the
(h) Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawings: Set of contract drawings that
present the instrumentation and monitoring requirements for the sites,
including locations and types of instruments as well as Response Criteria
and monitoring frequencies.
(i) Narrow Section: The section of shaft closest to the End Wall that is used
to receive or launch the TBM.
(j) NIC: Not in Contract.
(k) NTE: Not to Exceed.
(l) OLTA: Ontario Line Technical Advisor. The Engineer of Record for the
project, on behalf of Metrolinx.
(m) Primary Panel: Slurry wall panel excavated through soil and rock using
one or more passes of the slurry wall excavation equipment with no
adjacent panels. At the Pape shafts, for the Wide Section of the support
of excavation, Primary Panels will be T-sections panels.
(n) Secondary Panel: Slurry wall panel excavated between two Primary
Panels or adjacent to the Primary panel with one or more passes of the
excavating equipment.
(o) Side Wall: The sections of slurry wall running the length of the Pape
Station shafts (the sections of slurry wall running parallel to Pape
Avenue). Side Walls apply to both the Wide Section and the Narrow
Section slurry walls.
(p) Slurry: Water-based drilling fluid used to provide temporary earth support
during trench excavation for slurry walls.
(q) Slurry Wall: Reinforced concrete slurry wall panel constructed below
structural walls.
(r) Stop End: A fabricated steel element used temporarily as a joint former
between the separate panels of a slurry wall and to incorporate a
waterstop across the joint. Stop ends are often shaped to provide and
effective interlock between individual concrete panels. Stop end
elements are installed at both ends of the panel and have the same
width as the slurry wall panel thickness. During installation, they are
coupled together using stop end tubes. Stop end elements are typically
removed after the initial setting of the concrete.
(s) Support of Excavation (SOE): A temporary earth retaining system
construction.
(t) Theoretical Excavation Line (Slurry Walls): The theoretical line or plane
of the excavation to accommodate the design thickness of the slurry wall
without consideration of any allowances such as an excavation or
construction allowance or unintended over excavation.
(u) Tremie Concrete: Concrete placed by means of tremie pipe equipment,

for depositing concrete under water or slurry, the discharge end of the
pipe being kept submerged in the freshly deposited concrete so that the
concrete-water or concrete-slurry interface is not disturbed.
(v) Tunnel Boring Machine (TBM): A machine used to excavate tunnels with
a circular cross section through a variety of soil and rock strata.
(w) Wide Section: The section of shaft closest to the Head Wall that is used
to perform and accommodate the underpinning works for tunnelling
beneath the existing TTC structure.
(x) Zone of Influence (ZOI): An area in proximity to active construction
structures, buildings and utilities.

(a) 85 Working Days before commencing slurry wall installation and
associated works, install applicable instrumentation and monitoring
systems and complete acceptance testing and initial readings sets in
accordance with Section 31 09 13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and
Monitoring.
(b) Conduct a pre-installation readiness meeting. Attendees shall include the
Contractor, Subcontractors performing supporting works and the
Metrolinx Representative. TTC Representatives shall also be included.

(a) Submit the following for review:
(i) Action Plan in the event that movement ‘Response Criteria’
(Review Level and Alert Level) are reached as specified in the
(ii) Qualifications of slurry wall supervisory and operating personnel.
(iii) Procedure for removing cobbles and boulders during slurry wall
panel excavation.
(iv) A site plan showing the arrangement of stationary plant and
equipment associated with slurry wall construction, ground
treatment and excavation, and on-site traffic routes.
(v) Provisions for containment around the slurry separation plant and
slurry tanks, including slurry feed and return lines. Include details
for cleaning of spills from the slurry equipment.
(vi) Provide a comprehensive Method Statement detailing the overall

construction methodology and sequence for the slurry wall
construction. The following documentation shall be included in the
submittal:
A. Plans and Procedures for pre-excavation and backfilling and
compacting of pre-excavation, as applicable.
B. A pre-construction proof drilling plan in accordance with cl. 3.2
of this Specification Section.
C. Complete specifications for all equipment proposed to be used
for the Pape Station and Sammon Avenue Headhouse support
of excavation using the slurry wall method including maximum
depth capability and verticality control.
D. Hold points during the excavation and construction of slurry
wall panels, including sample Hold Point forms.
E. A sample ‘Slurry Panel Summary Report’ record sheet. At a
minimum, this shall include:
(1) Panel identification.
(2) Dates and times (for excavation start/finish, when the
reinforcing cages are lowered into the trench.
(3) Contractor’s personnel directing the work.
(4) Panel details and theoretical volume and actual volume
of concrete placed.
(5) Panel excavated depth.
(6) Key construction remarks including information on
production problems, geotechnical anomalies, other
anomalies or obstructions, equipment issues, delays and
other information that may be useful or referenced in the
future.
(7) Concrete placement details including batch ticket,
concrete quantity, any QC testing performed, tremie tip
depth, concrete depth, start and end times per truck
placement and key notes.
(8) A space / section for Remarks.
(9) Signature spaces for the Contractor’s Superintendent,
Contractor’s Project Manager or Supervising Engineer
and the Metrolinx Representative.
F. Location of and methods for slurry preparation, site

distribution, removal and disposal, including contingency
provisions should unplanned interruptions be encountered
during excavation.
G. Slurry mix design including required preparation procedures,
hydration time, and monitoring and testing procedures to be
used to assure compliance with approved quality control
requirements. Minimum hydration time shall be 8 hours.
Provide product material for slurry mix components and
admixtures. Mix design including required preparation
procedures and hydration time, shall be provided by the
Contractor for approval.
H. Procedures for maintaining stability of excavations in case of
sudden loss of a slurry.
I. Procedures for actions to be taken upon failure of a panel
excavation including filling with flowable fill, reassessing
bentonite slurry properties and retrenching procedures.
J. Procedures for real-time monitoring of deviation from vertical
of wall panels during excavation of the walls.
K. Procedures for slurry wall panel integrity testing, including
propriety equipment to be used and the timeframe of the test
to be undertaken after concreting and prior to subsequent
excavation of the shaft.
L. Methods to be used for checking the bottom of the excavation
for cleanliness and soundness of foundation material prior to
concreting.
M. NIC: Not in Contract.
N. NTE: Not to exceed.
O. Procedures for constructing joints between adjacent wall
panels including checking plumb and deviation, installing and
withdrawing stop ends and waterstops, and excavation
procedures of secondary panels.
P. Cold Weather Protection Plan (for concreting works)
Q. Methods and procedures for installing instruments in the slurry
walls including an instrument installation schedule, all in
accordance with Section 31 09 13 – Geotechnical
Instrumentation and Monitoring.
R. For submittals related to GFRP reinforcement bars, see

Section 03 21.21.11. For submittals related to steel reinforcing,
see Section 03 20 00.
S. Procedures for tremie placing of concrete.
T. Procedures for pumping and treating displaced slurry.
U. Procedures for excavating of slurry-filled trench panels through
any expected ground, and hauling, pumping, and disposing of
the excavated materials and waste slurry to an approved
disposal site.
V. Repair Plan: Materials and procedures for repairing bulges,
protrusions, or cavities that exceed tolerance or compromise
wall integrity or interfere with means and methods. The ‘Repair
Plan’ should provide prescriptive repairs for different types of
wall defects. The ‘Repair Plan’ shall contain actions to be
taken when a more significant defect requiring a complicated
repair is required.
W. Leak Repair Plan: Materials and procedures for the sealing of
any location where, on exposure of the wall, water leaks into
the excavation in excess of the watertightness criteria
specified herein. Leak repairs shall meet a 100-year design
life.
X. Corrective measures and detailed procedures to remedy the
following scenarios, at a minimum: instability of the slurry
trench, out-of-tolerance excavation, problems arising from stop
end installation and concreting, withdrawal of stuck stop end
element within a slurry trench, the integrity of a slurry trench or
concrete panel is not satisfactory, or defective concrete is
identified.
(vii) Provide Shop Drawings of the guide walls stamped by a
Professional Engineer licensed in the province of Ontario. Drawing
shall show at a minimum: the layout information, including survey
control points used, all required details and dimensions including
all reinforcing steel, and the construction tolerances.
(viii) Provide a slurry wall submittal that incorporates the requirements
of the slurry wall SOE system as presented in the Drawings and
Specifications. The Contractor shall develop fabrication and
construction details to suit means and method of construction
based on the Drawings. The Contractor’s slurry wall arrangement
and details shall be submitted as a shop drawings submittal to the
Metrolinx Representative. Calculations are required to accompany

the shop drawings for any structural elements. The Contractor’s
SOE submittals shall be made in accordance with the Drawing
requirements and the relevant Specifications and shall be signed
and sealed by the Contractor’s Design Engineer. During
construction, the Contractor will be responsible for ensuring that
the SOE remains within the deflection criteria stipulated in Table
2.4 of the TTC Technical Review Submission Requirements (for
Metrolinx Ontario Line)’. See the Agreement, Attachment 2 of
Schedule 4 – Review Procedures, Appendix B, supplementing the
SOE with additional support elements if required. For the Sammon
Avenue Headhouse Shaft, deformation criteria are stipulated in the
instrumentation and monitoring schedules that present Review
Level, Alert Level and the Maximum Allowable Level that are
contained in the Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawings. The
submittal shall include:
A. Details of panel blockouts including locations, materials and
means of securing them to prevent movement during
reinforcement cage installation and during concreting
operations.
B. Details of instrumentation installed within slurry wall panels
(including PVC reservation tubes for inclinometers) and other
provisions for verification of slurry wall concrete panel integrity
including PVC reservation tubes for cross-hole sonic logging.
C. Slurry wall temporary covers.
D. Manufacturer’s technical information and test data for threaded
inserts, couplers, waterstops, stop ends and other embedded
items.
E. Complete sequence of slurry wall panel construction.
F. Details of how T-section panels, L-Section panels and multi-
bite panels will be excavated and constructed.
G. Details of slurry wall joints, including detailed drawings of stop
ends and waterstops, or other panel joint alternatives.
H. Reinforcement details, including but not limited to connection
details between sections of assembled cages, lap splices,
couplers, staggering of bars and supporting bars.
I. If the Contractor elects to change elements of the slurry wall
design, details shall be included to demonstrate that the
alternative satisfies the intent of the original design shown in

the Drawings and Specifications.
(ix) Provide details of each utility service that shall require protection or
temporary / permanent diversion, the type and duration of
interruption to the service and provision for non-interruptible
services.
(b) During slurry wall construction, submit the following regular reports:
(i) Slurry Panel Summary Report: For each panel within 24 hours of
completion.
(ii) Excavation Report: Within 24 hours after each panel excavation
has been completed. Excavation report shall include complete and
detailed printed output from slurry wall excavation equipment data
recording device.
(iii) Verticality Verification Report: Submit within 24 hours after each
excavation pass for each panel completed.
(iv) Slurry Report: Submit daily. Report to provide confirmation of slurry
mix including additives and the volume of slurry used.
(v) Reinforcement Placement Report: Submit within 24 hours after
each panel is completed. The reinforcement report shall include:
A. Verification of reinforcement cage fabrication.
B. Confirmation of embedded items including provisions for
tiebacks. This will ensure the trumpet casing is adequately
sealed against concrete ingress.
C. Confirmation of block-outs for formed recesses.
D. Confirmation of instrumentation including CSL tubes and
inclinometer reservation tubes.
(vi) Concrete Placement Report: Submit within 24 hours after each
concrete placement.
(vii) The above listed regular reports shall also be included in an
appendix to the main ‘Slurry Panel Summary Report’.
(c) During slurry wall construction, submit the following records:
(i) Provide results of quality control tests performed on the slurry the
same day that test results are completed. Submit copies of job test
records to the Metrolinx Representative each week.
(ii) Records of over-excavation, obstructions, out-of-tolerance

excavation, or slurry loss during excavation.
(iii) Maintain and submit as-built records of slurry walls including:
A. Panel identification.
B. Plan dimensions of the excavation and elevation of guide
walls, and top and bottom of slurry wall panels.
C. Dates and times of panel excavation, reinforcing steel
placement, and tremie concrete placement. Indicate volume of
excavation, and theoretical and actual volume of concrete
placed.
D. Description of soils encountered, obstructions, and excavation
problems, if any.
E. Reference to reinforcing steel Shop Drawings and cutouts.
F. Details of instrumentation installed in the panels, if any, plus
instrumentation required adjacent to the panels, if any.
Measured as-built information of the instrumentation shall also
be recorded, including plumbness and deviation from plan
location as measured during installation of each panel.
G. Sketches showing locations of repaired areas in concrete
panels.
(iv) CSL integrity testing records.

(a) Preparation and Verification:
(i) Review installed geotechnical instrumentation and monitoring
drawings and current data to verify functionality and current
movement trends prior to the work starting.
(ii) Before commencing guide wall installation, verify setting out points
for the guide wall and slurry wall alignment.
(b) Qualifications:
(i) Slurry wall specialty contractor: Detailed qualifications of the
proposed specialty Contractor who undertakes the construction of
the slurry walls. Such specialty Contractor must have at least
fifteen years of experience on projects of a similar nature
particularly in the excavation and construction of deep slurry walls
using similar approaches to that proposed for this work.
(ii) Slurry Wall Superintendent: Slurry wall construction shall be

supervised by a Superintendent that has a minimum of ten years’
experience excavating and installing slurry concrete walls. Provide
documentation of successful completion of three similar projects,
including contact details of references.
(iii) Slurry Wall Hydromill Operator: Hydromill Operator shall have a
minimum of ten years’ experience operating hydromills to excavate
trench for slurry walls. Provide documentation of successful
completion of three similar projects, including contact details of
references.
(iv) Contractor’s Design Engineer: Design Engineer who has a
minimum of 15 years’ experience in Support of Excavation design
including at least one project involving the design of slurry walls.
The Contractor’s Design Engineer shall be licensed in the province
of Ontario. Contractor shall engage the Design Engineer to provide
design services and for the preparation of signed and sealed Shop
Drawings.
(c) Control testing of Slurry: Use suitable apparatus to control testing of
slurry to determine the density, Marsh funnel viscosity, pH, sand content
and where applicable fluid loss that conform to the requirements of API
RP-13A, of freshly mixed slurry as a check on the quality of slurry
produced.
(d) Calibration: Calibrate density measuring devices monthly, or more
frequently to an accuracy of 0.75 kg/m3.
(e) Test Equipment and Methods: Provide test equipment and perform tests
in conformance with the requirements of API RP-13B-1.
(f) Slurry Inside Trench:
(i) During Excavation: Perform tests as specified below under 1.5.E.3
to verify that properties of slurry inside trench excavations are
within the specified limits. Samples shall be obtained from the
mixing tank and from the panel during excavation and shall be
collected each 5 m of depth or at each change of soil type,
whichever is more stringent, on each panel.
(ii) Prior to Placing Concrete: Immediately prior to placing concrete in
any wall panel, take a sample of the slurry 300 mm from the
bottom of the trench, and test it for density, viscosity, fluid loss, pH
and sand content. Modify or replace the slurry in the trench if the
sample is found to exceed any limit specified herein, refer to this
Specification Section, Cl. 2.1 (c) for Slurry, or any limit specified by
the slurry manufacturer, whichever is more stringent. Do not place

any concrete in the trench until slurry parameters meet the criteria
defined in this Specification Section, Cl. 2.1 (c) for Slurry, and the
sand content has been found to be lower than the limit identified for
respective slurry.
(iii) Tests:
A. Density, by mud density balance. Specify density and Specific
Gravity.
B. Viscosity, by Marsh funnel method.
C. Fluid loss, by filter press, where applicable.
D. pH.
E. Sand content.
(g) Slurry trench testing: After each panel is excavated to required depth,
verify the exact three-dimensional location geometry of the panel. Verify
using an ultrasonic technology, e.g. Koden Ultrasonic Monitors, or
equivalent as applicable. Correct panels exceeding the permissible
tolerances by backfilling with lean concrete or cement stabilized sand,
and re-excavating panels to within the required tolerances before
placement of reinforcement and final concreting.
(h) Monitoring: Monitor placement and chart actual volume of concrete
placed versus theoretical volume required.
(i) Slurry panel integrity testing: For at least 30% of slurry wall panels for
headwalls and end walls, carry out cross-hole sonic logging tests utilizing
50 mm diameter embedded PVC casing for sonic tubes or approved
equal at no more than 1.8 m horizontal distance between adjacent tubes
and using associated industry standard equipment to confirm the
integrity of a concreted panel and to detect any deficiencies within a
panel joint prior to excavation adjacent to these walls. Use of a Thermal
Integrity Profiler (TIP) can be used to supplement cross-hole sonic
logging.
(j) Concrete Testing: Testing and inspection of concrete used in slurry walls
shall conform to Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIRMENTS

(a) Tolerances:
Tolerances for all elements of the of the slurry wall Support of Excavation
system are shown in Table 1.
Table 1: Slurry Wall Tolerances

Construction Criteria Allowable Tolerance Verification Requirements
Tolerance
Guide Walls Finished face of the guide wall on the side of the Vertical
trench
Inside face of guide wall Variation from a horizontal straight line (along
longitudinal axis of wall) +/- 10 mm over any 5 m wall
length
Clear distance between the inside faces of the A minimum of the required design width of the slurry wall
guide walls +25 mm
No greater than the required design width of the guide
wall +50 mm
Top of guide walls Horizontal, with the same elevation on both sides of the
trench.
Top elevation of the guide wall +/- 25 mm from the design elevation
Capping Beam Horizontal +/- 25 mm
Vertical +/- 25 mm
Slurry Wall, Verticality 1:200 During excavation, check telemetry of hydromill every 3 m of
Verticality and depth in each panel as a minimum.
Position
After each panel is excavated to required depth, by ultrasonic
three-dimensional location to verify geometry (e.g. Koden
Ultrasonic Monitors)
Waviness of inside face (local variations of the 50 mm, from the theoretical face of the panel (total Any bulges, protrusions, or cavities where there is insufficient
inside face of the wall at any point) horizontal dimension) cover to reinforcement in the wall that exceed this tolerance or
compromise wall integrity or interfere with means and methods
shall be repaired in accordance with approved Repair Plan
Toe of Panel Toe location (horizontal offset / step) relative to NTE 250 mm horizontal difference (based on 1:200)
design location
Grade differences between the bottom of No grade tolerances defined. Adhere to the following: After socket excavation, verify depth of socket by sounding to
adjacent panels • Rock socket must be a minimum of 5 m deep demonstrate 5 m in Type 17 bedrock has been achieved.
Grade differences along bottom of a single panel • Cover at bottom of cage must not be < 125 mm (NOTE: This may require over excavating to achieve the uniform 5 m socket depth
depending on methods such as tooling of the hydromill).
• Socket must be free of cuttings debris
• Socket must be sounded at multiple locations
Panel Stepping Stepping between adjacent pile – Inside face +/- 75 mm (between adjacent panels)
Reinforcement Horizontal, (along longitudinal axis of wall) +/- 50 mm
Cages Vertical +/- 25 mm
Nominal clear cover 125 mm
Overall width of reinforcement cage +/- 25 mm
Dowels, Formed Dowels (distance from indicated position) + / - 75 mm horizontally
Recesses and + / -75 mm vertically, relative to cage
Embedded Items (100 mm design elevation)
Embedded tieback bearing plate and trumpet + / - 75 mm horizontally
casing + / -75 mm vertically, relative to cage
(100 mm design elevation)
Formed recesses (horizontally and vertically) +/- 75 mm
(i) Guide Walls:

A. The guide walls shall be installed at locations as indicated on
reviewed guide wall submittals.
B. Groundwater and surface runoff shall be controlled by the
Contractor to maintain the trench in a stable condition during
construction of the guide walls.
C. The Contractor shall furnish and operate all appropriate
devices as necessary for removing water from the trench
during construction of the guide walls.
(ii) Slurry Walls:
A. During excavation the verticality of the wall panels shall be
checked every 3 m of depth in each panel as a minimum.
B. Local variations of the inside face of the wall shall be
measured by survey or scanning. Any bulges, protrusions, or
cavities where there is insufficient cover to reinforcement in
the wall that exceed the tolerance in Table 1 or will
compromise wall integrity or interfere with means and methods
shall be repaired in accordance with approved Repair Plan.
C. The toe elevation of the slurry wall shall not deviate more than
0.5 m from the depth shown on the Drawings and referenced
in the Geotechnical Baseline Report to accommodate field
conditions, unless accepted by the Metrolinx Representative..
D. Reinforcement cages shall be fabricated and placed to the
tolerances shown in Table 1, in accordance with CSA-
A23.3.19 Design of Concrete Structures:
(b) Watertightness Criteria:
(i) The slurry walls shall be considered watertight when the criteria
shown in Table 2 are met:
Table 2: Watertightness Criteria
Criteria Maximum Permitted Inflow Notes
Total inflow into the 200 liters per 100 m2 of the Total inflow is inclusive of the criteria for
excavation wall per day inflow from a single point and inflow
along a slurry wall panel joint.
From a slurry wall panel 0.5 liter per minute along the
joint entire joint length.
From any single point 0.5 liters per minute Single point is defined as a distinct
identifiable area, or a zone of up to 1 m2
Note: 1. Criteria also includes water ingress through the interface between the SOE base slab and the
slurry wall.
2. Water ingress from undrilled tieback trumpets shall not be included in this criteria
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Cast-in-Place Concrete:
(i) Proportion the mixes to achieve the following properties:
A. Guide walls: per Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
B. Slurry Walls: In accordance with CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09 and
per Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
(b) Reinforcement:
(i) Steel Reinforcement: As per Section 03 20 00 – Concrete
Reinforcing.
(ii) Glass Fibre Reinforcement: As per Section 03 21 21.11 – Glass
Fibre Reinforced Polymer Reinforcement Bars.
(iii) Spacers: industry-standard precast concrete spacers with
minimum concrete compressive strength of 35 MPa.
(iv) Lap splice couplers: Drop forged U-bolt and saddle type wire rope
clips, or approved equal, certified and tested for rebar used.
(v) Mechanical couplers: Lenton standard and transition couplers or
approved equal. Couplers on adjacent reinforcement mats shall be
staggered / offset or arranged such that they allow the placement
of concrete around the reinforcement.
(c) Slurry:
(i) Sodium bentonite (sodium montmorillonite) and water suspension
to API RP 13A, Section 4, meeting the following requirements:
A. Bentonite slurry shall be employed for excavation utilizing
hydrofraise / hydromill techniques.
B. Slurry additives: As approved by the Metrolinx Representative
through the submittal procedures.
C. Water: Water shall be as per API RP-13B-1 and shall exclude
saline water or water contaminated by salt.
D. Design Criteria:
(1) Initial Slurry Properties:
a. Minimum unit weight: 1,050 kg/m3.
b. Minimum apparent viscosity: 12.5 centipoise (36

Marsh seconds) at 20 degrees Celsius, as measured
by the direct-indicating viscometer.
c. Maximum filtrate loss: 30 mL in 30 minutes at 700
kPa, as measured by filter press (per API RP-13B).
(2) In-trench Slurry Properties:
a. Unit weight: Between 1,050 and 1,125 kg/m3.
b. Minimum apparent viscosity: 12.5 centipoise (36
Marsh seconds) at 20 degrees Celsius, as measured
by the direct-indicating viscometer.
c. Maximum filtrate loss: 30 mL in 30 minutes at 700
kPa, as measured by filter press (per API RP-13B).
d. pH: between 7.0 and 11.0.
e. Maximum sand content: 3 percent measured during
the excavation. and 2 percent measured from 0.3 m
from panel bottom and mid height of the panel, per
API RP-13B. prior to concreting.
(ii) The Contractor may submit proposals for additional or alternative
ingredients and admixtures to the wall support slurry as specified
herein. Samples and full details including the supplier and
manufacturer of such ingredients shall be submitted to the
Metrolinx Representative. Any such materials must not
detrimentally affect the concreting, or formed concrete. Ingredients
to counter the loss of slurry to the surrounding strata and
ingredients and admixtures to prevent slurry flocculation and
particles segregation shall be deemed to be covered by this
Specification Clause.
A. Alternative materials shall be tested as for slurry where
appropriate or alternative tests shall be proposed by the
Contractor to demonstrate the required properties. Storage
conditions will be as recommended by the supplier of the
material.
(iii) Stop ends: Stop ends shall be able to create a trapezoidal profile in
the concrete panel with a short edge width of at least 300 mm and
a depth of at least 200 mm extending from the joint surface. Stop
ends shall be able to accept a 19 mm thick flat ribbed waterstop.
(iv) Waterstops: PVC Waterstop shall be in accordance with

Specification Section 07 10 10 – Waterproofing System, with a
minimum width of 225 mm and thickness up to 20 mm.
(d) In-Wall Instrumentation Requirements:
(i) Instrumentation and testing provisions for in wall inclinometers and
cross hole sonic logging for slurry wall panels shall use Schedule
40 PVC reservation tubes at the locations shown in the Drawings.
(ii) For inclinometers, the PVC casing for the reservation tubes shall
be of a minimum diameter that allows for a 25 mm annular gap
between the outside diameter of the inclinometer casing and the
inside diameter of the PVC reservation tube to allow sufficient
space for grouting the inclinometer casing in place. The PVC
reservation tube shall extend the full length of the slurry wall panel.
The Contractor is not permitted to tie inclinometer casing to the
slurry wall panel reinforcement.
(iii) For cross hole sonic logging, 50 mm diameter PVC casing shall be
installed in selected panels based on the configuration shown in
the Drawings. A watertight PVC cap shall be installed at the top
and bottom of each end of the casing. Joints shall be watertight.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
(a) Slurry wall excavation equipment:
(i) General: The equipment used shall be capable of excavating
through the range of the expected ground conditions as described
in the geotechnical information contained in the Agreement.
(ii) Accuracy: equipment must have demonstrable capability of
excavating trench walls to a vertical tolerance of 1 in 200.
(iii) Slurry wall excavation equipment shall be equipped with data
recording equipment to record the horizontal and vertical position
of excavation equipment and operating parameters. The data
recording equipment shall be maintained in a fully operational state
at all times during slurry wall excavation.
(b) Slurry plant:
(i) General: All slurry plant and piping to be designed and located to
prevent leakage and spillage, and to facilitate handling of wet and
dry materials. Facilities shall include provisions to prevent slurry
plant operations from freezing. Facilities shall enable inspection
and sampling of the slurry by the Contractor and the Metrolinx

Representative.
(ii) Slurry mixing: Use equipment that produces a stable slurry along
with necessary mechanical agitation. Transport slurry via a
temporary pipeline system.
(iii) Bentonite Slurry separation (if bentonite is employed): Use
equipment that separates bentonite from excavated material
sufficiently to maintain the in-trench slurry properties at all times.
(iv) Slurry storage: Provide storage volume sufficient to enable
excavation and concreting to proceed on a continuous basis.
EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
(a) Contractor shall refer to Specific Section 00 17 30 – Project Specific
Conditions, and the Drawings for TTC surcharge constraints above and
in the vicinity of TTC structures
(b) Perform check, including utility locator check, to ensure all utility
relocations have been completed.
(c) Employ construction methods and procedures that prevent spillage of
excavated materials, slurry or concrete onto utilities, streets, sidewalks or
other facilities.
(d) Prior to the start of construction, ensure all environmental protection
measures are in place and functioning to ensure compliance with all
regulatory and specification requirements, especially measures related to
the capture and containment of excess slurry as well as measures
relating to the disposal of slurry.
(e) Contractor shall ensure that adequate resources and equipment are
provided to meet the Schedule Completion Dates defined in the
Agreement, Schedule 1 – Definitions and Interpretation.
(f) Contractor shall ensure that adequate resources are available, and
equipment is available and in good working order, prior to starting critical
operations. Do not start a critical operation unless it can be completed
with the available resources and equipment.
(g) Monitor settlements and heave in accordance with Section 31 09 13,
Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring. In the event that ground
movement reaches the Review Level or Alert Levels as specified in the
Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawings and as specified
in the GIMP, the Contractor is to implement the approved Action Plan

with coordination with the Metrolinx Representative.
3.2 PRE-CONSTRUCTION PROOF DRILLING FOR DETERMINING BEDROCK

AND TOP OF ROCK SOCKET
(a) Proof drilling for determining top of Type 17 bedrock for top of socket
shall be carried out for slurry wall panels prior to excavation. Rotary
drilling techniques using duplex drilling shall be utilized for all proof
drilling. Sampling and testing are not required in the soil portion.
(b) Coring shall be carried out from 1 m above the planned top of Type 17
bedrock based on the Drawings, with cores recovered for the full 5 m
required socket length of the slurry wall panel. Underreaming drilling
techniques can be used in the bedrock.
(c) No in-situ rock testing is required and no laboratory testing of rock
samples is required. Any additional testing that the Contractor elects to
perform shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
(d) Proof drilling shall be carried out for the first three slurry wall panels to be
excavated for each hydromill used on site.
(e) Perform proofing drilling in accordance with Table 3 as shown below.
Table 3: Proof Drilling for Determining Bedrock and Top of Socket
Location on Proposed Slurry Wall Number of Proof Drilling Holes
General 20% of all slurry wall panels
At a minimum, proof drilling shall be carried out as follows:
Each Headwall Three proof drilling holes
Each End Wall Two Proof Drilling Holes
Each side wall in each Wide Section Two proof drilling holes
Each side wall in each Narrow Section Three proof drilling holes
The proof drilling performed under the requirement for the first three slurry wall panels
to be excavated shall be included in the required total number of proof drilling locations
to be performed.
(f) Proof drilling locations to be agreed with the Metrolinx Representative

prior to starting any proof drilling.
(g) Notify Metrolinx Representative of proof drilling no less than 24 hours in
advance of the planned start time for each hole. Do no start proof drilling
earlier than scheduled without the Metrolinx Representative present to

witness.
(h) Proof drilling holes shall be drilled at any location along the proposed
slurry wall panel length (the face parallel to the excavation). For
proposed T-panel sections, proof drilling shall not be carried out in the
proposed stem location.
(i) Proof drilling holes shall either be filled, securely covered or protected
upon their completion to the satisfaction of the Metrolinx Representative.
3.3 GUIDE WALLS

(a) Pre-Excavation (Pretrenching):
(i) Prior to commencing slurry wall construction, the alignments of the
slurry walls shall be pre-excavated to a minimum depth of 3 m so
as to remove obstructions, rubble, loose fill and unsuitable
materials.
(ii) Upon completion of pre-excavation and removal of all obstructions,
the area excavated shall be backfilled with flowable fill, or other
approved suitable backfill material.
(iii) Construct guide walls on stable grade with suitable anchorages or
other stabilizing measures, as necessary, to prevent movement
during panel excavation, reinforcement installation and concrete
placement.
(iv) Excavation for the panels shall then proceed continuously from
ground surface to the required depth.
(b) Construct guide walls in accordance with the Shop Drawings, with due
provision for tolerances and clearances.
(c) Construct at an elevation that shall allow the lowest slurry level in the
trench to be maintained at least 0.3 m above the bottom of the guide wall
and no more than 1 m below the top of the guide wall, without leakage or
contamination.
(d) The depth of the guide walls shall be 1 m at a minimum.
3.4 SLURRY WALLS

(a) Slurry Preparation: Ensure sufficient quantity of slurry is prepared and
ready for use to complete the excavation operation as specified below.
(b) Excavation:
(i) Do not begin excavation of the slurry walls until all geotechnical
instrumentation for monitoring ground movements is installed and
baseline readings have been taken.
(ii) Excavate by Hydromill methods. Use such means that will
minimize over-excavation and loosening and caving of material
outside the designed trench width. Be prepared with equipment
such that if obstructions are encountered in excavating for panels,
the obstructions can be removed. Pump slurry containing
excavated material to a central processing plant.
(iii) Provide the number of hydromills and associated support
equipment to suit the sequence and construction schedule.
(iv) Perform excavation continuously from ground surface to the
required depth. Excavate in a manner that minimizes movement
and loss of ground
(v) Excavate panels to the dimensions indicated on the Drawings,
within allowances for vertical and horizontal tolerances
(vi) The depth of panel excavation shall extend to the toe level over the
full plan area of the panel. The Contractor must account for any
additional excavation required as a result of the equipment
selected
(vii) Perform excavation through the slurry, adding or replacing slurry
as necessary to maintain slurry within specified limits no more than
1 m below the top of the guide wall. Slurry level should be at least
0.3 m above the bottom of the guide wall
(viii) Do not commence excavation of a new panel until the concrete in
the adjacent panels has achieved sufficient strength, and not less
than 7 MPa, to enable it to withstand the effects of the excavation.
(ix) Unless otherwise accepted by the Metrolinx Representative, the
construction of any single panel shall be continuous once
excavation has commenced. Excavated panels or part panels shall
not be left open during weekends or statutory holidays.
(c) Reinforcement:
(i) Fabricate reinforcing assemblies in accordance with the Shop
Drawings, ensuring they are free from distortion. Assemblies
fabricated off site are to be checked for distortion prior to use. Add
additional bars, stiffeners and struts as required to resist distortion
loads associated with transporting and erecting the assemblies.
The front and rear of reinforcement cages shall be properly marked
on Site to identify them during placement.
(ii) Install guides and spacers to ensure minimum cover is maintained
between reinforcing steel and face of excavation. Maximum
spacing of spacers: 2.5 m vertical; 0.6 m horizontal.
(iii) Check location of, secure and protect blockouts to prevent damage
and displacement by flotation.
(iv) Use lap splice couplers to connect reinforcement assemblies when
both assemblies are in the vertical position. Use mechanical ties
per 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcing. Use a sufficient number of
couplers to ensure a factor of safety of five against slippage under
the dead weight of the reinforcing assembly or flotation where fiber
reinforced polymer reinforcement is used. Ensure correct vertical
alignment and lap lengths are maintained.
(v) Reinforcement shall be designed and erected to enable concrete
placement by tremie pipe without honeycombs, slurry-filled voids,
or other defects.
(vi) Clean the bottom of the trench of all loose material and inspect the
trench to determine that the required depth and width of excavation
has been achieved utilizing the following sequence or modified
methodology approved by the Metrolinx Representative. This is a
critical stage and required to be a Hold Point. Each step shall be
executed as noted below and documentation shall be submitted to
A. Three hours before placement of the reinforcing steel clean
the bottom of the excavation by air lifting, or other approved
method.
B. Verify that the required trench width and depth has been met.
C. Verify that the trench is clean, the thickness of the sediment at
the bottom of the slurry wall does not exceed 12 mm prior
concreting, and the slurry at excavation bottom has the
required properties and contains no impurities such as sand or
soil contamination by testing of the recirculated slurry from the

base of the trench.
D. Place reinforcing as soon as practicable after cleaning the
excavation bottom and testing requirements have been
successfully met.
E. The reinforcing assembly shall be placed no later than four
hours after excavation completion otherwise steps (A) through
(D) shall be repeated.
F. The reinforcement at the top of the slurry wall shall be made
continuous with the subsequent pours to provide monolithic
joints between the top of the slurry wall and the capping beam.
(vii) No welding of the reinforcement shall be permitted unless
authorized by the Metrolinx Representative.
(viii) Each installed PVC casing within the slurry wall reinforcement
cage, for both inclinometer reservation tubes or for CSL logging
tubes, shall extend over the full length of the slurry wall panel plus
a minimum of 0.5 m beyond the top of the panel. The casing shall
be joined using a method that provides a clean, dry and
unobstructed clear opening for the full length of the casing. Joints
in the casing shall be made watertight. The PVC casing shall be
securely tied to the inner most reinforcement of the slurry wall
panel in a straight and vertical alignment as far as practically
possible. PVC casing shall be filled with water prior to concreting
the slurry wall panel.
(d) Concreting:
(i) Before concreting, verify location of block out provisions including
tie back trumpets and block outs for shear keys for the base slab.
(ii) Before concreting, coordinate installation of bonding conductors,
bonding plates, and other grounding and bonding features per the
Drawings and Specification Section 26 05 26 – Primary Grounding
System.
(iii) Begin placing concrete by means of tremie pipe within 12 hours of
completing excavation, and within two hours of completion of
installation of reinforcing in the trench. Check the base cleaning via
sounding test immediately prior to concreting. If the two-hour limit
is exceeded remove the reinforcing, clean the reinforcing, over-
ream the exposed rock side wall, re-clean the excavation bottom,
re-check the base cleaning, and re-install the reinforcing.
(iv) Tremie pipe shall remain embedded in the concrete at all times.
The pipe shall be kept no less than 2.5 m below the concrete level
when the concrete level reaches 3 m above the slurry wall toe.
Equip the tremie pipe with a ball check valve or other device to
prevent mixing of the slurry with concrete inside the tremie pipe.
(v) Use a minimum of one tremie pipe for each 2.5 m of panel length.
Tremie pipes shall be evenly distributed along the panel length.
(vi) Concrete shall be placed in such a manner that the concrete
displaces the slurry progressively from the bottom and rises
uniformly to the surface, and that concrete and slurry do not
intermix. Ensure concrete / slurry interface remains horizontal.
(vii) Place concrete in a continuous operation until the slurry wall panel
is completely concreted to the required elevation.
(viii) The tremie pipe shall have an internal diameter of not less than
250 mm for concrete with 20 mm maximum size aggregate. The
tremie pipe shall have no internal projections and external
projections shall be minimized. The receiving hopper for the tremie
pipe shall have a capacity at least equal to that of the tremie pipe.
(ix) At all times the end of the tremie pipe shall be kept clear of the
reinforcement, any embedded steel section and box out and the
side of the foundation, to prevent segregation of the concrete
(x) Concrete shall be placed continuously to ensure that entrapment of
air within the tremie pipe is minimized and at all times a sufficient
quantity of concrete shall be maintained within the tremie pipe to
ensure that the pressure from it exceeds that from the slurry or
support fluid.
(xi) Construction joint at the top of the slurry wall shall be finished and
prepared to promote good bond and interlocking with the
subsequent concrete pours of the capping beam. Demolish poor
quality concrete at the top of the slurry wall back to sound
concrete.
(e) Stop ends and joints:
(i) Stop ends, inserted before placement of concrete in the panel,
shall be clean and have a smooth regular surface. Stop ends shall
ensure the installation of continuous waterstop along the whole
length of two adjacent panels as shown on the Drawings. Where
stop ends are inserted in sections, adequate joint connections
must be provided to ensure verticality of the complete stop end.
(ii) The extraction of the stop ends shall be carried out at such a time
in such a manner that no damage is caused to the concrete placed
against them, to the joint waterstop, or to the adjacent soil and
structures. Contractor to review concrete strength gain and pay
attention to changes any changes in mix design or concreting
operations to determine optimum time to remove stop ends.
(iii) Joint waterstops shall be installed over the whole panel length, less
the last 2 m within the socket length and secured by stop ends until
the panel geometry is checked and panel filled with in-trench slurry
and shall have a minimum width of 225 mm. Waterstops shall
maintain the minimum cover to the slurry wall reinforcement at all
times.
(iv) Where concrete is cast against previously completed wall panels,
the previously formed concrete shall be cleaned as much as
practically possible so that solid substances are removed before
the joint is formed.
3.5 SLURRY WALL FIELD INSPECTION

(a) Perform inspection as excavation progresses. Remediate any over-
excavation, obstructions, out-of-tolerance excavation, or slurry loss and
submit records to the Metrolinx Representative.
(b) Upon completion of excavation, use inspection devices in the presence
of the Metrolinx Representative to demonstrate that the trench has been
excavated to the specified width, depth and verticality, the cleanliness of
the trench bottom and that concrete from previous pours does not
encroach on the panel or into the joint.
(c) Immediately prior to placing concrete in any panel, sample the slurry 0.3
m from the bottom of the trench and test it for compliance with the
requirements for in-trench slurry properties, defined herein. Modify or
replace slurry if tests indicate non-compliance and re-test.
(d) Prepare ‘Slurry Panel Summary Report’ sheets and submit to the
Metrolinx Representative within 24 hours of completing a slurry wall
panel.
3.6 CROSS HOLE SONIC LOGGING (CSL) TESTING

(a) Perform CSL testing in accordance with ASTM D6760 - Standard Test
Method for Integrity Testing of Concrete Deep Foundations by Ultrasonic
Crosshole Testing.
(b) The Contractor shall propose which panels shall have sonic logging PVC
casing and this shall form part of the shop drawings submittal. At a
minimum, PVC casing for CSL testing shall be installed within the panels
shown in Table 4.
(c) The Contractor shall engage a CSL Specialty Engineer to perform the
CSL testing and shall be a Professional Engineer having at least three
years of experience in CSL testing.
(d) Perform CSL testing in accordance with Table 4 as shown below.
Table 4: Cross Hole Sonic Logging (CSL) Testing Requirements
Panel Type CSL Tube Installation Requirements
T-Sections All T-section panels in the headwalls

Two remaining T-section panels in the wide section for each shaft
L-Sections All L-section panels
Flat Panels At least three flat panels in the headwall of each shaft
At least three flat panels in the end wall of each shaft
No less than10% of all remaining flat panels
Other The total number of slurry wall panels installed with PVC casing for
Requirements CSL testing shall not be less than 30% of the total number of panels
per shaft.
(e) Perform CSL tests between 72-hours and 28 calendar days after slurry
wall concrete placement.
(f) Perform the CSL tests with the source and receiver probes in the same
horizontal plane. Continuously record CSL signals at depth intervals of
50 mm from the bottom of the tubes to the top of each panel.
(g) Concrete compressive strength shall achieve a minimum of 20 MPa prior
to CSL testing.
(h) Verify PVC casing is free of obstructions and in good condition at least
24-hours prior to CSL testing. If PVC casing does not provide access
over its full length, repair the casing or core a new hole for CSL testing.
(i) Perform CSL testing for all slurry panels where PVC CSL tubes are
installed or as directed by the Metrolinx Representative.
(j) The CSL tubes used for testing each panel shall be selected by the
Contractor and approved by the Metrolinx Representative. Selection of
CSL tubes shall consider the direct straight line path though the concrete
and the maximum horizontal distance of 1.8 m between CSL tubes.
(k) Depending on the results of the first ten CSL tests, the Contractor can
propose a reduction to the total number of CSL tests for the acceptance
by the Metrolinx Representative, but no less than 30% of all slurry wall
panels per shaft shall be tested using CSL testing techniques.
3.7 REPAIR AND RESTORATION

(a) Slurry wall panels will be considered defective if the panels are installed
beyond the tolerance limits specified or have defective concrete as
described below. The Contractor shall prepare and submit proposed
corrective measures for review by the Metrolinx Representative.
Corrective measures involving shotcrete shall meet the requirements of
Section 03 37 13 – Shotcrete.
(b) A panel shall be considered to have defective concrete when:
(i) There are areas of voids, honeycomb, excessive laitance
accumulation, aggregate runs, segregated aggregate, or exposed
reinforcement.
(ii) There are cold joints in a panel.
(iii) Areas of concrete are contaminated with slurry or dried bentonite /
sedimented polymer.
(iv) Under-strength concrete is used.
(v) If CSL logging results indicate the concrete is poor or contains
slurry encapsulation.
(c) All defective slurry wall panels shall be remedied in accordance with
approved corrective measures submitted in either the ‘Repair Plan’ or
‘Leak Repair Plan’.
3.8 FINISHING
(a) During excavation, after the placement of the slurry wall, clean the
interior wall face as it is exposed utilizing sand blasting, power washing,
or similar approved alternative cleaning methods to remove slurry
caking, soils, and film materials and expose a clean surface.
(b) Repair defects in accordance with the approved ‘Repair Plan’. Remove
bulges on the interior face of the wall to bring surface irregularities within
specified tolerances as excavation proceeds.
(c) Infiltration / Seepage:
(i) If during excavation, readings on any instrumentation indicate that
deformations, groundwater levels or porewater pressures are
outside the limits established, immediately take remedial steps to
arrest movement, groundwater levels or porewater pressures in

accordance with the approved ‘Action Plan’.
(ii) Repair of Leaks:
A. Ensure that the slurry wall meets watertightness criteria before
acceptance of slurry wall construction.
B. Stop leakage in accordance with the approved ‘Leak Repair
Plan’. Use materials that are permanent cementitious or resin,
materials. Submit material specifications for proposed repair
products for review and approval by the Metrolinx
Representative.
C. The finished wall surface shall be smooth and meet
watertightness criteria.
END OF SECTION
Pape Segment Support of Excavation Applicable Section: 31 56 00 Slurry Walls

sealed Drawings.
changes.

Pape Segment Support of Excavation Applicable Section: 31 56 00 Slurry Walls
Table A5: SOE Elements that Contractor is Permitted to Change : Specification Section 31 56 00 – Slurry Walls
SOE Method – Slurry Walls Yes No No  (B) For Pape Station Shafts, the use of Slurry Walls is a fundamental part of the TTC
design review and approval process. Secant piles are not a viable alternative. The same
method of SOE construction shall be used for the Sammon Avenue Headhouse Shaft
Slurry Wall – Shaft SOE Geometry Yes No No  (B) Contractor cannot vary as the shaft internal size is spaceproofed for Contract 2
Slurry Wall – Design Yes No Yes, with  (P) Contractor may propose different panel configuration and size for primary and
conditions secondary panels subject to the satisfaction of average gross uncracked stiffness
(uncracked moment of inertia per metre) values as follow (excluding corner panels):
o North and South Head Walls: 0.937 m4/m
o Side Walls, Wide Section: 0.937 m4/m, ± 7%. (Note that having T-panels in the
Wide Section sidewalls is important for resisting the Head Wall forces that push
the sidewalls toward the Narrow Section. Without the sidewall stems, the
movement and torsion in the L-panels between the Wide Section and Narrow
Section could be excessive).
o Side Walls, Narrow Section: 0.281 m4/m
o North and South End Walls: 0.281 m4/m
 (S) Contractor may propose different panel configuration and size for primary and
secondary panels subject to the satisfaction of average gross uncracked stiffness
(uncracked moment of inertia per metre): 0.281 m4/m (excluding corner panels)
 (P) Monolithic L-panels at corners and at transition locations from Wide Section to Narrow
Section for both South and North Shafts. Any changes in L-panel length / design will
require calculations that indicate Wide Section wall movements do not increase
 (P) Any change of design shall ensure SOE deformations are maintained within TTC
 (S) Any change of design shall ensure SOE deformations are maintained within
deformation criteria presented in the Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawings and are to
the satisfaction of the City
Slurry Wall – Panel Configuration Yes No Yes, with  (P) Rearranging and resizing of Slurry Wall panels shall:
conditions o Do not install Tiebacks and Tie Anchors within the panel joints
o Provide a minimum 500 mm clearance from the joints (based on the distance
between Tieback / Tie Anchor centreline and panel joint)
o Avoid installing Tiebacks and Tie Anchors into the stem of T-panels.
 (B) Any change of panel configuration shall ensure SOE deformations are maintained
within TTC deformation criteria (Pape Station); or the deformation criteria presented in the
Instrumentation and Monitoring Drawings and are to the satisfaction of the City (Sammon)
Slurry Wall – Reinforcement Design Yes Yes Yes, with  (B) Contractor is responsible for reinforcement detailing and can change bar arrangement
and Detailing (provided as a (for shop conditions (sizing, number and spacing) to suit means and methods, as long as overall capacity is
base design) drawings and maintained
detailing)
Slurry Wall – Watertightness at Joints Yes No Yes, with  (B) Different panel end stop system can be proposed
conditions  Milled Slurry Wall joints are not preferred but will be allowed provided the watertightness
performance criteria can be maintained
Slurry Wall – Socket Depth Yes No No  (B) OLTA design requires 5 m socket from the lowest elevation of Type 17 bedrock at
each panel location
Division 32 – Exterior Improvements
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Asphalt Paving Reinstatement
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the Contractor requirements for asphalt paving,
reinstatement and flexible pavement repairs, sealing of cracks and/or
cuts within Gertrude Place, Lipton Avenue, and Danforth Avenue
including bridge deck ramp locations.
(b) The Contractor shall reinstate all asphalt paving damaged during
construction within the City right of way. Reinstatement shall consist of
crack sealing or full replacement where significant damages and/or full
removal have occurred.
(c) The Contractor shall replace all pavement structure where removed
during construction with new pavement structure matching the existing
pavement structure.


asphalt paving shall be included within the appropriate Agreement item
to which they pertain most closely.

(a) OPSS 310, Construction Specification for Hot Mix Asphalt.
(b) OPSS.MUNI 1010, Material Specification for Aggregates - Base,
Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material.
(c) OPSS.MUNI 1101, Material Specification for Performance Graded
Asphalt Cement.
(d) OPSS 1103 Emulsified Asphalt.
(e) OPSS.MUNI 1150 Hot Mix Asphalt
(f) OPSS 1212, Material Specification for Hot Poured Rubberized Asphalt
Joint Sealing Compound.
(g) City of Toronto Aggregates Hot Mixed, Hot Asphaltic TS 1003.



(a) Product Data: The Contractor shall submit the following for information
30 days prior to the associated Work:
(i) Submit manufacturer’s Product data indicating:
A. Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference
standard, characteristics, and limitations for joint and crack
sealer.
(ii) The following written reports for each type of asphaltic concrete
from a Canadian Council Of Independent Laboratories (CCIL)
Certified Asphalt Laboratory for acceptance:
A. Mix designs for pedestrian walkway and platforms.
B. Extraction and gradation test reports.
C. Marshall test reports.
(b) Compaction test results in accordance with Clause 1.8 & 1.10 of this
Section.

(a) The Contractor’s Quality Management System shall address the
following:
(i) The Contractor shall submit asphaltic concrete report for
compaction testing in accordance with the testing method specified
in OPSS 310.
1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

(a) The Contractor shall not proceed with Work of this Section outside of the
following environmental ranges without written acceptance by Metrolinx
Representative and Product manufacturer:
(i) Ambient air and surface temperature: In accordance with OPSS
310.
(ii) Precipitation: None allowed within 24 hours prior to placement.
(b) If compaction tests indicate that the asphalt paving does not meet
specified requirements, the Contractor shall remove defective work,
replace and retest at own expense.
1.10 PROTECTION
(a) The Contractor shall protect all existing asphalt and concrete surface to
remain. Use of rubber tire equipment and machinery is recommended for
the project works. Any damage to any existing features due to
Contractor’s operation on site shall be rectified by the Contractor to the
satisfaction of the Metrolinx Representative.
PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Asphaltic Concrete: Shall be in accordance with the Specifications and
Drawings conforming with OPSS 1150:
(i) Coarse and fine aggregates: In accordance with OPSS 1010, TS-
1003 and OPSS MUNI 1150.
(ii) Fillers: In accordance with TS-1003.
(iii) Reclaimed asphalt concrete is not permitted.
(iv) Asphaltic emulsion: Type RS, in accordance with OPSS 1103.
(v) Asphalt cement: In accordance with OPSS.MUNI 1101.
(vi) Tack coat: SS-1 emulsified asphalt in accordance with TS-1103.
(vii) Asphaltic concrete surface joint and crack sealer: Hot-poured
rubberized asphalt in accordance with OPSS 1212.
EXECUTION

(a) The Contractor shall perform all work in accordance with the approved
quality procedures. The procedures, personnel, products, methods, and
submittals noted in this section shall be considered a minimum
requirement of that plan. Additional submittals, checklists, procedures,
and methods may be required to meet the requirements of the Contract
and fulfill the obligations of this Section.
3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION

(a) The Contractor shall perform testing and inspection of asphalt pavement
mixes and asphalt pavement by an independent firm retained by the
Contractor. Testing and inspection will be performed so as to minimize
disruption to the work.
(b) The Contractor shall allow the appointed testing firm access to the
mixing plant for verification of weights or proportions, character of
materials used and determination of temperatures used in the
preparation of asphalt concrete mix.
(c) The Contractor shall arrange the testing firm to perform laboratory tests
on proposed asphalt pavement mixes to determine conformity with
requirements.
(d) The Contractor shall arrange the testing firm to perform two (2) series of
compaction tests for each asphalt pavement course. Pay for costs of
additional testing as required due to improper performance of work.
3.3 PRIME COAT AND TACK COAT

(a) The Contractor shall prime coat surfaces with SS 1 emulsified asphalt
diluted with an equal part of water.
(b) The Contractor shall power-broom clean and air blast surfaces prior to
tack coat application for a clean, dry surface, free of dust and debris.
(c) The Contractor shall tack coated surfaces with SS 1 emulsified asphalt
diluted with an equal part of water.
(d) The Contractor shall apply tack coat in accordance with manufacturer's
recommended rate of application for continuous uniform thickness to
bonding surfaces.
(e) The Contractor shall allow tack coat to dry in accordance with
manufacturer's recommended thickness before placing hot mix.
(f) The Contractor shall prevent traffic from travelling upon tack coat.
3.4 LAYING OF ASPHALTIC MIXTURE

(a) The Contractor shall provide base and top course asphalt as indicated in
the Specifications and Drawings.
(b) The Contractor shall inspect for and clean prepared base free of foreign
matter prior to installation of asphaltic concrete.
(c) The Contractor shall place asphaltic concrete paving to finish lines,
grades, elevations, and compacted thicknesses.
(d) The Contractor shall prevent stationary loads and vehicular traffic on
newly paved areas until: 24 hours after placement and paving surface
lower than 38°C.
(e) The Contractor shall remove and replace defective and unacceptable
areas of asphaltic concrete Work. Cut out any low, dished, or defective
finish course areas. Replace with fresh hot asphalt concrete mixture and
re-compact.
(f) Asphalt emulsion: The Contractor shall treat all vertical concrete surfaces
in contact with asphalt pavement.
(g) Asphalt cement: The Contractor shall paint asphalt cement on all
exposed vertical asphalt surfaces of cut perimeter.
(h) The Contractor shall lay mixture only upon dry granular base in weather
conditions specified under OPSS 310.07.06. Immediately after spreading
and screeding, check surface and correct irregularities before
compaction is started.
(i) The Contractor shall adjust widths of courses so that longitudinal joints
above one another do not coincide. Feathering of joints is not
permissible. Form butt or keyed joints at locations where meeting existing
asphalt.
(j) At irregular sections, intersections, turn-outs, or driveways where it is
impractical to spread and finish mixtures by machine methods, the
Contractor shall use either acceptable spreading equipment, or hand
spread mixture.
(k) When hand spreading mixture, the Contractor shall dump loads only as
fast as they can be properly handled. When hand spreading adjacent to
machine-laid areas, carry out operation concurrently with machine laying
to obtain indistinguishable joints.
(l) The Contractor shall have resurfacing in accordance to OPSS 310
including power broom and tack coat.
3.5 MASKING
(a) The Contractor shall clean existing painted lines and adhered graphics
with solvent and remove loose debris. Abrade existing paint for bonding.
(b) The Contractor shall paint over existing lines to be eradicated with two
coats of asphalt sealer extending sealer 25 mm beyond edge of existing
paint.
END OF SECTION
Division 33 – Utilities
Issued for Tender

RFP-2022-CCPC-416 General Utilities
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the Contractor’s requirements for Work related
to Utilities and associated appurtenances.

(a) Section 01 55 26 – Traffic Control
(b) Section 26 56 00 – Temporary Street Lighting
(c) Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill
(d) Section 33 10 00 – Watermain
(e) Section 33 31 00 – Sanitary Sewerage Utilities
(f) Section 33 42 11 – Storm Utility Drainage Piping

(a) Measurement:
(b) Payment:
(i) Item B.0.1 - Utility Relocations & Protections (General).
(ii) This item includes coordination with Utility Owners, Utility locating,
surveying and inspections, preparation and submission of Utility
Plans and other submittals, relocation or removal Work, and the
repair of any utilities damaged during the Work.
(iii) This item does not include:
A. the relocation of existing utilities under the Danforth Avenue
and Gertrude Place Road Decking which shall be included in
Item B.0.4 & B.0.5.
B. the relocation of the existing storm sewer on Gertrude Place
which shall be included in Item B.0.2.
(iv) Payment for this lump sum item will be made on a monthly
prorated basis over the Term according to a schedule of values
and associated milestones proposed by the Contractor and

(a) The American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE):
(i) CI/ASCE 38-22.
(b) IHSA Ontario Traffic Manual Book 7.
(c) Contractor shall comply with utility companies’ standards, guidelines and
specifications for Work related to the respective utility company.
(d) City of Toronto:
(i) City of Toronto Standard Construction Specifications and Drawings
for Roads, which can be obtained from the City of Toronto website
at https://www.toronto.ca
(ii) TS 4.60 – Construction Specification for Utility Cut and
Restoration.
(e) Transport Canada Regulations:
(i) Regulation TC-E-10.
(f) CSA Group (CSA):
(i) CSA C22.3 No 7 Underground Systems.
(ii) CSA C22.3 No 1 Overhead Systems.
(iii) CSA S6 Canadian Bridge Design Code.

(a) Definitions:
(i) “SUE Quality Level” is defined as per CI/ASCE 38-02 as follows:
A. “SUE Quality Level D” means Subsurface Utility Engineering
information derived from existing records or verbal
recollections.
B. “SUE Quality Level C” means Subsurface Utility Engineering
information obtained by surveying and plotting visible above
ground utility features and by using professional judgement in
correlating this information to the Quality Level D information.
C. “SUE Quality Level B” means Subsurface Utility Engineering
information obtained through the application of appropriate
surface geophysical methods to determine the existence and
approximate horizontal position of the utilities.
D. SUE Quality Level A” means precise horizontal and vertical

location of subsurface utilities obtained by the actual exposure
and subsequent measurement of subsurface utilities.
(ii) “Utility” means a basic service such as electricity, gas, water, fibre
optic cable, telephone, rail signal cables, and includes snow melt
systems, storm sewers and sanitary sewers.
(iii) “Utility Infrastructure” means all infrastructure, equipment, supplies
and substructures required to support a Utility.
(iv) “Utility Work” means temporary and permanent installation,

protection, removal, relocation, upgrading, reinstatement,
restoration, downsizing, designing, and/or building works relating to
Utility Infrastructure carried out in connection with or as part of the
Works, including design, construction, installation, commissioning,
protection, removal and relocation of poles, pole lines, conduits,
gas pipes, oil pipes, sewers and tile lines, and related and ancillary
works.
(v) “Utilities Work Plan” has the meaning given in clause 1.7(b) of this
Section 33 00 00.
(vi) “Utility Authority” refers to the appropriate regional or municipal
utility operator(s) and/or private utility owner(s).
(vii) “Utility Owner(s)” means any private entity or public body that
owns and/or operates a Utility. Utility Owners in this Project
include:
A. Bell Canada (“Bell”).
B. City of Toronto.
C. Enbridge Gas Inc. (“Enbridge Gas”).
D. Rogers Communications Canada Inc. (“Rogers”).
E. Toronto Hydro-Electric System Limited (“THESL” Toronto
Hydro).

(a) The Contractor shall enter into direct agreements with Utility Owners, if
required by the Utility Owner.
(b) Utility Owners may require that all or portions of the Work undertaken on
their assets is performed by contractors acceptable to them. The
Contractor shall obtain approval from the Utility Owner for the authorized
contractors who will be engaged to work on the assets of the Utility

Owner. Where no authorized contractors are identified, this Work shall
be completed by the Contractor.

(a) Permits and Consents shall be submitted for information:
(i) Ensure a copy of valid approvals are present on site.
(ii) Prior to commencement of excavation, Contractor shall obtain
Utility Owners’ approval where support and protection in place of
their assets is required. Any changes to the provided support and
protection plans shall be resubmitted to the relevant Utility Owner
for review and approval.
(b) Utility Work Plan:
(i) Submit a Utility Work Plan prior to undertaking any Utility Work for
review by Metrolinx and Utility Owners. The Utility Work Plan shall
include:
A. Plans and method statements reflecting the Utility relocation
plan and protection plans, indicating all operational and
customer impacts for review, acceptance, permit, and
consents.
B. Plans that accommodate each Utility Work sequence as
indicated by the respective Utility Owner. Contractor shall
coordinate with each Utility Owner and the approved
subcontractors through the development of the work plan.
C. Monitoring plans that address at monitoring and Utility
deflection requirements. Refer to individual Utility Owner
Specification to comply with monitoring requirements.
D. Restoration details for any temporary surface reinstatements
and removals for Utilities and Utility services required to
accommodate the Contractor’s proposed schedule to provide
safe passage of public traffic over elements of all staged Work
affecting public traffic.
E. A schedule that addresses the Utility Works including:
(1) Durations and timelines for each Utility relocation and or
other strategies, by location.
(2) Identification of dependencies and conflicts with overall
Works Schedule.
(c) Utility Support Design:

(i) If any existing street poles, conduits, cables and/or duct banks that
are not being removed or relocated require support or relocation as
a result of the Contractor’s chosen means and methods for
performing the Works, it shall be undertaken following the review
and approval by the Metrolinx Representative and the Utility Owner
and at Contractor’s cost.
(ii) Existing utility pole foundations located within 1-meter to the
support of excavation (SOE) shall be maintained and protected.
Temporary SOE and supports at utility poles shall be designed to
include surcharge forces from a 16,500 kg maintenance truck.
(d) Utility Locates:
(i) Submit proof from OneCall or relevant private locate company of
current Utility locates at each renewal.


(a) The Contractor shall deliver, store and handle materials in accordance
with manufacturer’s written instructions.
(b) Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: The Contractor shall deliver
materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with
manufacturer’s name and address.
PRODUCTS
2.1 INTENTIONALLY BLANK
EXECUTION
3.1 UTILITY BACKGROUND INFORMATION

(a) The existing Utility details were collected by SUE mapping investigation
in accordance with CI/ASCE Standard 38-02 “Standard Guideline for the
Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utilities”. The
investigation included Utilities at the following Quality Levels (QL): QL-D
information derived from existing Utility records, QL-C information
obtained by surveying and plotting visible above-ground Utility features
and by using professional judgment in correlating this information to
Quality Level D information. QL-B information obtained through the
application of appropriate surface geophysical methods to determine the

existence and approximate horizontal position of subsurface Utilities. QL-
A test hole information was also collected for this project.
(b) The accuracy of this information is not guaranteed, and it is the sole
responsibility of the Contractor to determine the exact location of the
existing Utilities. Any discrepancies to be reported to the Metrolinx
Representative as soon as is reasonably practical upon confirmation of
the discrepancy and appropriate action taken to the satisfaction of the
3.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR UTILITY WORK

(a) The Contractor shall coordinate with the Utility Owners and their
approved subconsultants and/or subcontractors to protect, support in
place, remove and relocate the conflicted Utilities as identified on the
Drawings.
(b) All Utility relocation designs and treatment strategies as presented in the
Agreement, Specifications, and Drawings shall be reviewed by the
Contractor for suitability with its chosen means and methods for
performing the Works. The Contractor shall prepare and submit any
modifications to the proposed Utility Works to the Utility Owner in
accordance with clause 1.7(b) of this Section 33 00 00 for review and
approval.
(c) The Contractor shall establish and maintain direct and regular structured
contact with the appropriate Utility Owners and shall cooperate with them
in all phases of the Work.
(d) All Utility Work shall conform to all relevant codes and standards, of each
Utility Owner and with the requirements of all federal, provincial,
Municipal, and safety approving authorities/organizations, including
Metrolinx standards.
(e) All lane closures, detour routes, lane shifts, and diversions required to
undertake Utility Work shall be in accordance with Section 01 55 26.
(f) The Contractor shall coordinate with the Utility Owners to ensure that all
the necessary approvals and permits are obtained without delay to the
construction schedule.
(g) The Contractor shall coordinate with all other Utility relocations in the
same area.
(h) The Contractor shall ensure that the performance of the Utility Work
complies with the design and construction criteria and requirements of
the Utility Owners. The Contractor shall:
(i) Provide early identification, communication and approach to
mitigation of impacts to critical Utility construction Work.
(ii) Obtain approval for the impact of the Work on any Utilities with the
appropriate Utility Owners.
(iii) Manage service interruption to customers of the Utility Owners and
property owners to the satisfaction of the Utility Owner and the
(iv) Confirm all shutdown and blackout periods with the Utility Owners.
The timing of Utility Work, including relocations, is subject to
operational constraints. The Contractor shall coordinate the
scheduling of all Utility Work with the relevant Utility Owners
accordingly.
(v) Obtain permission for any outage, disconnection or interruption of
the Utility or customer service that may be required to complete the
Work. If permission is granted, the Contractor shall give a minimum
of 3 Working Days prior notice to those users or customers who
will be affected. The Contractor shall make interruptions at such
times and in such a manner as negotiated with the affected Utility
Owner.
(vi) Permit the Utility Owners, from time to time, to review and inspect
the progress of the Utility Work owned or to be owned by the Utility
Owner.
(i) If any Utility Owner requires access to their assets for any reason,
including emergency repair, the Contractor shall co-operate and grant
access to all facilities to the Utility Owner and to any contractor
appointed by the Utility Owner.
(j) Utility Owners may require having their own inspector on Site at all times
during construction or during the Work affecting their assets. The
Contractor shall contact Utility Owners and accommodate the Utility
Owners’ requirements.
(k) The Contractor shall obtain permission from the appropriate Utility
Owners before interrupting their Utility system or building services. The
Contractor shall verify schedule constraints associated with the Work
and shall schedule the Work accordingly.
(l) Coordinate Utility Work such that any planned operations, maintenance,
repair and/or replacement activities undertaken by the Contractor are
notified to Toronto Transit Commission (TTC) a minimum of 10 Business
Days in advance.
3.3 LOCATION AND CONDITION OF UTILITIES

(a) The Contractor shall verify the location and condition of existing Utilities
and shall report any defects to the Metrolinx Representative.
(b) The Contractor shall confirm locations of buried Utilities by using the
“Hydrovac Method” as required for the project prior to construction within
2 metres of any Utility. Refer to the existing conditions Composite Utility
Plans for existing Utilities known to be in the project area.
(c) The Contractor shall submit a Utility daylighting report for any daylighting
pit/trench which provides all relevant information on the exposed Utilities
including identity, size, material, depth, and plan position.
(d) Upon the discovery of Mislocated Utilities Infrastructure, the Contractor
shall notify the Metrolinx Representative in writing within 3 Working
Days. The Contractor shall contact and coordinate with the authorities
having jurisdiction (and property owners, when necessary) to determine
the source and owner of unidentified Utilities. Provide all labor, materials,
and equipment necessary to support this effort until such time the Utility
is either abandoned, removed, supported in place, or further instruction
is provided to reinstate the unknown Utility (if damaged). Methods to
support in place existing Utilities shall be approved by an authorized
agent of the Utility Owner, or as detailed in the Agreement,
Specifications, and Drawings.
3.4 SUPPORT AND PROTECTION OF UTILITIES

(a) The Contractor shall notify Utility Owners with appropriate advance
notification of any excavation within close proximity to their existing
Utilities.
(b) Where support or protect in place of a Utility is required, the Contractor
shall submit a detailed design for the proposed support or protect in
place method based on the Utility Owners’ standard for their review and
approval prior to commencement of the Work.
(c) The Contractor shall take all measures to protect existing Utilities from
damage during Construction to the satisfaction of the Utility Owner.
(d) In the case that any Utility is damaged during construction, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Utility Owner. The Utility Owner
may at its own discretion and at the Contractor’s expense repair or direct
the Contractor to repair the damaged Utility to the satisfaction of Utility
Owner.
(e) The Contractor shall replace, or pay the Utility Owner to replace, at the
discretion of the Utility Owner, all surface and subsurface features and
Utility Infrastructure disturbed, damaged or temporarily removed during
the activities related to Utility Work and reinstate in accordance with the
requirements of the Utility Owner’s standard practices.
(f) Where vibration protection is required, the Contractor shall confirm
vibration limits prior to start of the Work and obtain acceptance from the
appropriate Utility Owners for any monitoring and mitigation measures as
proposed by the Contractor.
3.5 SITE RESTORATION

(a) The Contractor shall restore all municipal and private Utility trenches
(temporary or permanent) and daylighting test pits to the satisfaction of
the Utility Owner and the Metrolinx Representative.
(b) The Contractor shall comply with the City of Toronto Standard TS 4.60 -
Construction Specification for Utility Cut and Restoration for any Work
within the City of Toronto right-of-way.
(c) The Contractor shall remove all Waste Material and debris, and correct
defects to the acceptance of the Metrolinx Representative.
(d) The Contractor shall restore all disturbed areas to an equivalent or better
condition than existing prior to the commencement of the Work
(e) The Contractor shall ensure that excavation and backfill if required shall
be in accordance with the requirements of Section 31 23 00 – Excavation
and Fill.
3.6 PROJECT UTILITY SERVICES

(a) Contractor is responsible for all Utility Work for all temporary and
permanent Utilities services for the Project necessary to comply with
requirements of relevant standards, codes and approvals.
(b) Coordinate with and comply with all requirements of the local hydro
distribution supplier for the main electrical supply.
(c) Storm service connections if required shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Section 33 42 11 - Storm Utility Drainage Piping.
3.7 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

(a) Utilities shall meet the requirements of the following standards; CSA
C22.3 No 7 Underground Systems, and CSA C22.3 No 1 Overhead
Systems. Structural Utilities including chambers, manholes, utility holes,
and handholes shall meet the loading requirements CL-625- Ontario
Truck Live Loading as per CSA S6 Canadian Bridge Design Code.
Utilities crossing railway tracks shall be designed for or protected with
liner/casing designed for Cooper E-80 railway loading plus diesel impact.
(b) Within the limits of open excavation, the Contractor shall:
(i) Remove and dispose Utility Infrastructure that is abandoned as a
result of the Utility Works.
(ii) Remove and dispose of existing abandoned Utility Infrastructure as
of the time at which it is exposed by the Contractor.
(c) The Contractor shall construct third party Utility Infrastructure as follows:
(i) Bell:
A. Breakout the existing Bell ducts, including its third-party tenant
Rogers, on the north sidewalk of Danforth Ave, protect the
exposed cables with new split ducts and support in place the
ducts as shown on the Bell design drawings. The Bell cables
shall not be moved more than 1 m from its current alignment.
The Rogers cable shall be retained in its current alignment.
B. Bell and Rogers require having their own inspector on Site at
all times during the Utility Work affecting their assets. The
Contractor shall coordinate with the respective Utility Owner
and provide a minimum of ten (10) business days’ notice prior
to commencing the work on the Utility Infrastructure.
(ii) THESL:
A. Relocate and remove all impacted street lighting assets on
municipal Right of Way as shown on the Drawings and in
accordance with Section 26 56 00 Temporary Street Lighting.
(d) The Contractor shall coordinate and provide unencumbered access for
third party works by Utility Owners in accordance with Schedule 16.
(e) The Contractor shall complete the permanent restoration for third party
works by Utility Owners as shown on the Drawings and in accordance
with clause 3.5 of this Section 33 00 00.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Maintenance Holes and Catch Basin Structures
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the Contractor requirements for maintenance
holes and catch basin structures.
(b) Labour, products, equipment, and services necessary for maintenance
holes and catch basin structure Work in accordance with the Agreement.

(b) Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill
(c) Section 31 05 17 – Aggregates

be measured and paid as part of the Item B.0.2 – ‘Storm Sewer
Relocation (Gertrude Place)’.

(i) ASTM A48/A48M-03, Standard Specification for Grey Iron
Castings.
(ii) ASTM A123/A123M-201, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip
Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.
(iii) ASTM C136-06, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine
and Coarse Aggregates.
(iv) ASTM C478M-13, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced
Concrete Manhole Sections (Metric).
(v) ASTM 3647, Standard Practice for Classifying Reinforced Plastic
Pultruded Shapes
(b) Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):
(i) CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series.
(ii) CAN/CGSB 41.22-93, Fibreglass-Reinforced Plastic Corrosion-
Resistant Equipment.
(c) CSA Group:

(i) CAN/CSA-A165 Series-04(R2009), CSA Standards on Concrete
Masonry Units (Consists of A165.1, A165.2 and A165.3).
(ii) CSA G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
(d) Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS):
(i) OPSS 407, Construction Specification for Maintenance Hole, Catch
Basin, Ditch Inlet And Valve Chamber Installation.
(ii) OPSD 404.02, Safety Platform.
(e) City of Toronto Publications:
(i) Construction Specifications and Drawings for Sewers and
Watermains.
(ii) TS-1350 Material Specification for Concrete.
(iii) T-1120.05-1, FRP Ladder.
(iv) T-1120.05-2, FRP Posts.



30 days prior to orderring:
data sheets for [maintenance holes and catch basin structures]and
include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size,
finish and limitations.
(b) Shop Drawings of all proposed maintenance holes and catch basins,
including prefabricated half-pipe bends for connection chambers.

following:
(i) Certifications: The Contractor shall submit the following:
A. Submit manufacturer's test data and certification at least 4

weeks prior to beginning Work. Include manufacturer's
drawings, information and shop drawings where pertinent.
B. Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer
certifying that materials comply with specified performance
characteristics and physical properties.
C. Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation
instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence,
cleaning procedures and technical data.

with manufacturer's written instructions.
(c) Storage and Handling Requirements: The Contractor shall perform the
following:
recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.
(ii) Store and protect maintenance holes and catch basin structures
from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
MATERIALS
2.1 MATERIALS
(a) Cast-in-place concrete:
(i) In accordance with TS-1350.
(ii) In accordance with section 03 30 00.
(b) Precast maintenance hole units: to ASTM C478M, circular or oval:
(i) Top sections eccentric cone or flat slab top type with opening offset
for vertical ladder installation.
(c) Precast catch basin sections: to ASTM C478M.
(d) Joints: made watertight using rubber rings.
(e) Mortar:
(i) Masonry Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3002.
(f) Ladder rungs: to CSA G30.18, No.25M billet steel deformed bars, hot
dipped galvanized to ASTM A123/A123M:
(i) Rungs to be safety pattern (drop step type).
(ii) Adjusting rings: to ASTM C478M.
(g) Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Safety ladder, handrail and Landing:
The contractor shall submit shop drawing detailing exact Maintenance
hole dimensions with ladder, hand rail and landing details.
(i) All FRP shall be manufactured according to CAN/CGSB 41.22-93
or ASTM 3647. Refer to T-1120.05-1 for FRP ladder.
(ii) All wall brackets and mounting brackets shall be molded FRP.
(iii) All bolts, nuts and washers shall be made of 316 grade stainless
steel.
(iv) Maintenance hole depth between 4.5m and 9.0m, landings shall be
placed at midpoint.
(v) Minimum clearance between the landing and benching platform to
be 2.5m.
(vi) Structures exceeding 4.5m in depth to include safety platform
every 4.5m as per OPSD 404.020.
(h) Concrete Brick: to CAN/CSA-A165 Series.
(i) Drop maintenance hole pipe: same as sewer pipe.
(j) Galvanized iron sheet: approximately 2 mm thick.
(k) Steel gratings, I-beams and fasteners: as indicated.
(l) Frames, gratings, covers to dimensions as indicated and following
requirements:
(i) Metal gratings and covers to bear evenly on frames.
A. Frame with grating or cover to constitute one unit.
B. Assemble and mark unit components before shipment.
(ii) Gray iron castings: to ASTM A48/A48M, strength class 30B.
(iii) Castings: coated with two applications of asphalt varnish.
(iv) Maintenance hole frames and covers: to OPSS 407.
(v) Catch basin frames and covers: to OPSS 407.
(m) Granular bedding and backfill: in accordance with Section 31 05 17-
Aggregates, and following requirements:
(i) Crushed stone, gravel, and sand.

(ii) Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM
C136. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.1.
Sieve Designation Percent (%) Passing

26.5 mm 100
19 mm 85 – 100
13.2 mm 65 – 90
9.5 mm 50 – 73
4.75 mm 35 – 55
1.18 mm 15 – 40
0.300 m 5-22
0.150 m -
0.075 m 2–8
(iii) Concrete mixes and materials: in accordance with Section 03 30

00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
(n) Lean concrete backfill: in accordance with Section 31 23 00 – Excavation
and Fill.
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
(a) Verification of Conditions: The Contractor shall verify that conditions of
substrate are acceptable for maintenance holes and catch basin
structures installation in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions.
(i) Visually inspect substrate in presence of Metrolinx Representative.
(ii) Inform Metrolinx Representative of unacceptable conditions
immediately upon discovery.
(iii) Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have
been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed
from the Metrolinx Representative.
3.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL

(a) The Contractor shall excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 31
23 00 – Excavation and Fill, and as indicated.
3.3 INSTALLATION
(a) The Contractor shall dewater excavation to approval of Metrolinx
Representative and remove soft and foreign material before placing
concrete base.
(b) The Contractor shall set precast concrete base on 150 mm minimum of
granular bedding compacted to 100% corrected maximum dry density.
(c) Precast units: The Contractor shall perform the following:
(i) Set bottom section of precast unit in bed of cement mortar and
bond to concrete slab or base.
(ii) Make each successive joint watertight with Metrolinx
Representative-approved rubber ring gaskets, bituminous
compound, cement mortar, epoxy resin cement, or combination of
these materials.
(iii) Clean surplus mortar and joint compounds from interior surface of
unit as work progresses.
(iv) Plug lifting holes with concrete plugs set in cement mortar or
mastic compound.
(d) For sewers: The Contractor shall perform the following:
(i) Place stub outlets and bulkheads at elevations and in positions
indicated.
(ii) Bench to provide smooth U-shaped channel.
A. Side height of channel to equal to diameter of sewer.
B. Slope adjacent floor at 1 in 8.(vertical to horizontal).
C. Curve channels smoothly.
D. Slope invert to establish sewer grade.
(e) The Contractor shall place lean concrete backfill in accordance with
Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill.
(f) Installing units in existing systems: The Contractor shall perform the
following:
(i) Where new unit is installed in existing run of pipe, ensure full
support of existing pipe during installation, and carefully remove
that portion of existing pipe to dimensions required and install new
unit as specified.
(ii) Make joints watertight between new unit and existing pipe.
(iii) Where deemed expedient to maintain service around existing

pipes and when systems constructed under this project are ready
for operation, complete installation with appropriate break-outs,
removals, redirection of flows, blocking unused pipes or other
necessary work.
(g) The Contractor shall set frame and cover to required elevation on no
more than [4] courses of brick.
(i) Make brick joints and join brick to frame with cement mortar.
(ii) Parge and make smooth and watertight.
(h) The Contractor shall place frame and cover on top section to elevation
as indicated.
(i) If adjustment required use concrete ring.
(i) The Contractor shall clean units of debris and foreign materials.
(i) Remove fins and sharp projections.
(ii) Prevent debris from entering system.
(j) The Contractor shall install safety platforms in maintenance holes having
depth of 5m or greater, as indicated.
3.4 ADJUSTING TOPS OF EXISTING UNITS

(a) Sectional units: The Contractor shall perform the following:
(i) Raise or lower straight walled sectional units by adding or removing
precast sections as required.
(ii) Raise or lower tapered units by removing cone section, adding,
removing, or substituting riser sections to obtain required elevation,
then replace cone section.
A. When amount of raise is less than 600 mm use standard
maintenance hole brick, moduloc or grade rings.
(b) Monolithic units: The Contractor shall perform the following:
(i) Raise monolithic units by roughening existing top to ensure proper
bond and extend to required elevation with cast- in-place concrete.
(ii) Lower monolithic units with straight wall by removing concrete to
elevation indicated for rebuilding.
(iii) When monolithic units with tapered upper section are lowered
more than 150mm, remove concrete for entire depth of taper plus
as much straight wall as necessary, then rebuild upper section to
required elevation with cast-in-place concrete.
(iv) Install additional maintenance hole ladder rungs in adjusted portion

of units as required.
(v) Re-use existing gratings, frames where required.
(vi) Re-set gratings and frames to required elevation on not more than
2 courses of risers.
A. Make joints and join risers to frame with cement mortar, parge
and trowel smooth.
B. Re-set gratings and frames to required elevation on full bed of
cement mortar, parge and trowel smooth.

(a) Leakage Test: The Contractor shall perform the following:
(i) Install watertight plugs or seals on inlets and outlets of each new
sanitary sewer maintenance hole and fill maintenance hole with
water.
(ii) Leakage not to exceed 0.3% per hour of volume of maintenance
hole.
(iii) If permissible leakage is exceeded, correct defects.
(iv) Repeat until approved by Metrolinx Representative.
(v) Metrolinx Representative will issue Test Certificate for each
maintenance hole passing test.
3.6 CLEANING
(a) Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
(b) Final Cleaning: Upon completion, the Contractor shall remove surplus
materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 Storm Utility Drainage Piping
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the Contractor requirements for Storm Utility
drainage piping.
(b) Labour, products, equipment, and services necessary for Storm Utility
Drainage Piping Work in accordance with the Agreement.

(b) Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill
(c) Section 31 05 17 – Aggregates
(d) Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Controls
(e) Section 33 44 51 – CCTV Inspection of Pipeline

(a) Measurement:
(i) This work will be paid for on a lump sum basis following completion
of the Work and will not be measured for payment.
(b) Payment:
(i) Item B.0.2 – ‘Storm Sewer Relocation (Gertrude Place)’.

(i) ASTM C12-09, Standard Practice for Installing Vitrified Clay Pipe
Lines.
(ii) ASTM C117-04, Standard Test Method for Material Finer Than
0.075 mm (No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing.
(iii) ASTM C136-06, Standard Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and
Coarse Aggregates.
(iv) ASTM C506M-10b, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete
Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe.
(v) ASTM C507M-10b, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete
Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe (Metric).
(vi) ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory

Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400
ft-lbf/ft3(600 kN-m/m3).
(vii) ASTM D3034-08, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl
Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.
(b) Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB):
(i) CAN/CGSB-8.1-M89, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series.
(ii) CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.
(c) CSA International:
(i) CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium.
(ii) CSA A257 Series-M92(R2009), Standards for Concrete Pipe.
(iii) CAN/CSA-B1800-06, Thermoplastic Non-pressure Pipe
Compendium - B1800 Series.
(d) City of Toronto Publications:
(i) Wet Weather Flow Management Guidelines (WWFMG).
(ii) Wet Weather Flow Management Policy.
(iii) Design Criteria for Sewers and Watermains.
(iv) Wet Weather Flow Management Master Plan.
(v) List of Combined Sewer Overflow (CSO)/Stormwater Control
Alternatives (Blue Book).
(vi) Storm Water Management Options for Roadway Reconstruction
Projects.
(vii) Toronto Green Street Guidelines.
(viii) Construction Specifications and Drawings for Sewers and
Watermains.
(e) Toronto and Region Conservation Authority (TRCA) Publications:
(i) Stormwater Management Criteria.
(ii) The Erosion & Sediment Control Guideline for Urban Construction
(TRCA, 2019).
(f) Contractor shall use the WWFMG if there is a conflict between any of
these standards.


(a) The Contractor shall schedule Work to minimize interruptions to existing
services and to maintain existing flow during construction.
(b) The Contractor shall submit schedule of expected interruptions for
approval and adhere to approved schedule.

30 days prior to ordering:
data sheets for pipes, and backfill and include product
characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and
limitations.
(b) Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit the following:
(i) Shop Drawings to indicate proposed method for installing carrier
pipe for under crossings.
(c) Test and Evaluation Reports: The Contractor shall submit manufacturer's
test data and certification for information at least 2 weeks prior to
beginning Work.


with manufacturer's written instructions.
(c) Storage and Handling Requirements: The Contractor shall perform the
following:
recommendations.
(ii) Store and protect pipes from damage.
PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE PIPE

(a) Non-reinforced circular concrete pipe and fittings: to CSA A257.01
(b) Reinforced circular concrete pipe and fittings: to CSA A257.02
(c) Reinforced concrete arch pipe: to ASTM C506M.
(d) Reinforced concrete elliptical pipe: to ASTM C507M.
(e) Lifting holes:
(i) Pipe 900mm and less diameter: no lift holes.
(ii) Pipe greater than 900mm diameter: lift holes not to exceed two in
piece of pipe.
2.2 PLASTIC PIPE

(a) Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC): to ASTM D3034 CAN/CSA-B1800.
(i) Standard Dimensional Ratio (SDR): 35.
(ii) Locked-in gasket and integral bell system.
(iii) Nominal lengths: 6m.
2.3 PIPE BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIAL

(a) Granular material in accordance with Section 31 05 17- Aggregates, and
the following requirements:
(i) Crushed or screened stone, gravel or sand.
(ii) Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136
ASTM C117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB- 8.1CAN/CGSB-8.2
(b) Table:

26.5 mm 100
19 mm 85 – 100
13.2 mm 65 – 90
9.5 mm 50 – 73
4.75 mm 35 – 55
1.18 mm 15 – 40

0.300 m 5-22
0.150 m -
0.075 m 2–8
(c) Concrete mixes and materials for bedding, cradles, encasement,

supports: in accordance with Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2.4 BACKFILL MATERIAL

(a) As indicated.
(b) Granular Type 3 in accordance with Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and
Fill.
(c) Lean concrete backfill: in accordance with Section 31 23 00 – Excavation
and Fill.
2.5 JOINT MORTAR

(a) Portland cement: to CAN/CSA-A3000, normal type 10.
(b) Mortar: one part Portland cement to two parts clean sharp sand mixed
with minimum amount of water to obtain optimum consistency for use
intended. Do not use additives.
EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
(a) Temporary erosion and sedimentation control shall be provided as per
Section 31 25 00 – Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
3.2 TRENCHING
(a) The Contractor shall do trenching Work in accordance with Section 31 23
00 – Excavation and Fill.
(b) The Contractor shall protect trench from contents of sewer.
3.3 GRANULAR BEDDING

(a) The Contractor shall place bedding in unfrozen condition.
(b) The Contractor shall place granular bedding material in uniform layers
not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness to depth as indicated.
(c) The Contractor shall shape bed true to grade and to provide continuous,
uniform bearing surface for pipe.
(i) Do not use blocks when bedding pipes.
(d) The Contractor shall shape transverse depressions as required to suit
joints.
(e) The Contractor shall compact each layer full width of bed to at least 95%
corrected maximum dry density, maximum density to ASTM D698.
(f) The Contractor shall fill excavation below bottom of specified bedding
adjacent to manholes or catch basins with lean mix concrete.
3.4 INSTALLATION
(a) The Contractor shall lay and join pipes to: ASTM C12.
(b) The Contractor shall lay and join pipe in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and to approval of Metrolinx Representative.
(c) The Contractor shall handle pipe using methods approved by Metrolinx
Representative:
(i) Do not use chains or cables passed through rigid pipe bore so that
weight of pipe bears upon pipe ends.
(d) The Contractor shall lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade
with pipe inverts smooth and free of sags or high points.
(i) Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bed
throughout its full length.
(e) The Contractor shall begin laying at outlet and proceed in upstream
direction with socket ends of pipe facing upgrade.
(f) The Contractor shall lay corrugated steel pipe:
(i) With outside circumferential laps facing upgrade and longitudinal
laps or seams at side or quarter points.
(ii) With longitudinal centre line of paved invert coinciding with flowline.
(g) The Contractor shall install joint deflection permitted within limits
recommended by pipe manufacturer.
(h) The Contractor shall have water to flow through pipes during
construction only as permitted by Metrolinx Representative.
(i) Whenever Work is suspended, the Contractor shall install removable
watertight bulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry of
foreign materials.
(j) The Contractor shall install plastic pipe and fittings in accordance with
CAN/CSA-B1800.
(k) Joints: The Contractor shall provide the following:
(i) Concrete pipe:
A. Install gaskets as recommended by manufacturer.
B. Support pipes with hand slings or crane as required to
minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity
until gasket is properly positioned.
C. Align pipes before joining.
D. Maintain pipe joints free from mud, silt, gravel and other
foreign material.
E. Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other
foreign material. Remove disturbed or dirty gaskets; clean,
lubricate and replace before joining is attempted.
F. Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe.
G. Minimize joint deflection after joint has been made to avoid
joint damage.
H. Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure that joint is
complete as outlined in manufacturer's recommendations.
I. Mortared joints:
(1) Pipe interior: circular pipes 700mm diameter and larger,
and arch or elliptical pipe equivalent to 900mm diameter
or larger shall have interior gap between ends of adjacent
pipes filled with mortar.
Apply mortar minimum 7 Calendar Days after
backfilling has been completed to allow pipe
settlement to occur.
Finish interior surface of joints smooth.
(2) Pipe exterior: for bell and spigot pipe, use mortar to seal
outside of joints. Press and bed mortar into place.
Allow mortar to set minimum of 1 hour before
backfilling.
(l) When any stoppage of Work occurs, the Contractor shall restrain pipes
as directed by Metrolinx Representative to prevent "creep" during down
time.
(m) The Contractor shall plug lifting holes with owner Representative
approved prefabricated plugs, set in shrinkage compensating grout.
(n) The Contractor shall cut pipes as required for special inserts, fittings or
closure pieces, as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without
damaging pipe or its coating and to leave smooth end at right angles to
axis of pipe.
(o) The Contractor shall make watertight connections to manholes and catch
basins:
(i) Use shrinkage compensating grout when suitable gaskets are not
available.
(p) The Contractor shall use prefabricated saddles or approved field
connections for connecting pipes to existing sewer pipes:
(i) Joint to be structurally sound and watertight.
(q) The Contractor shall temporarily plug open upstream ends of pipes with
removable watertight concrete, steel or plastic bulkheads.
3.5 PIPE SURROUND

(a) The Contractor shall place surround material in unfrozen condition.
(b) Upon completion of pipe laying, and after Metrolinx Representative has
inspected pipe joints, the Contractor shall surround, and cover pipes as
indicated:
(i) Leave joints and fittings exposed until field testing is completed.
(c) The Contractor shall hand place surround material in uniform layers not
exceeding 200 mm compacted thickness before subsequent layer is
placed.
(d) The Contractor shall place layers uniformly and simultaneously on each
side of pipe.
3.6 BACKFILL
(a) The Contractor shall place backfill material in unfrozen condition.
(b) The Contractor shall place backfill material, above pipe surround, in
uniform layers not exceeding 150mm compacted thickness up to grades
as indicated.
(c) The Contractor shall place lean concrete backfill in accordance with
Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Fill.
3.7 FIELD TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

(a) The Contractor shall repair or replace pipe, pipe joint or bedding found
defective.
(b) The Contractor shall perform mandrel testing as per City of Toronto
standards.
(c) The Contractor shall remove foreign material from sewers and related
appurtenances by flushing with water.
(d) Television and photographic inspections: The Contractor shall perform
the following:
(i) Carry out inspection of installed sewers by television camera,
photographic camera or by other related means.
(e) On completion of all new utility drainage pipe construction and as it is
placed into service, Contractor shall inspect the entire length by means
of CCTV in accordance with the requirements of this and Section 33 44
51 – CCTV Inspection of Pipeline.
3.8 CLEANING
(a) Progress Cleaning: Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
(b) The Contractor shall perform Final Cleaning: upon completion remove
surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END OF SECTION
RFP-2022-CCPC-416 CCTV Inspection of Pipeline
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
(a) This Specification covers the Contractor requirements for CCTV
inspection of pipelines Work.

(a) Section 02 22 00 – Existing Conditions Assessment
(c) Section 33 05 16 – Maintenance Holes and Catch Basin Structures

be measured and paid as part of the Item B.0.2 – ‘Storm Sewer
Relocation (Gertrude Place)’.

(a) The Contractor shall comply with City of Toronto Standard Specification
TS 409 Amendment to OPSS 409 – Construction Specification for
Closed-Circuit Television Inspection of Pipelines.
(b) The Contractor shall comply with Water Resource Centre (WRC),
Manual of Sewer Condition Classification.

(a) Definitions:
(i) “CCTV Camera Inspection of Pipelines Report” has the meaning
given in clause 1.6(a) of this Section 33 44 51.
(ii) “Measurement” shall mean the length of sewer between inside
faces of the adjacent maintenance hole. The dimensions of the
maintenance hole will be excluded from the measurement.
(iii) “CCTV” stands for Closed Circuit Television.

(a) The Contractor shall provide a minimum of 2 Working Days’ notice prior
to a required CCTV inspection in order that, if desired, the Metrolinx
Representative can arrange to be present for the CCTV inspection.

(a) The Contractor shall prepare and submit date stamped sewer CCTV
Camera Inspection of Pipelines Report with results for pre-construction
inspection, post Construction inspection and a final inspection before the
end of the Warranty Period for Metrolinx Representative review in
accordance with the requirements of this Specification Section 33 44 51,
Section 02 22 00 – Existing Conditions Assessment and Section 31 09
13 – Geotechnical Instrumentation and Monitoring. The submittal shall
include:
(i) Video file and player formatting, CCTV screen information,
“sewer.dat” records and submission requirements to be in
accordance with TS 409.
(ii) All observations shall be coded according to WRC standards and
presented in standard “sewer.dat” format in digital format and on
hard copy format. All digital data shall be submitted on industry
standard Microsoft Windows compatible CD ROM.
(iii) The Contractor shall ensure that all CCTV reports are stamped and
signed by a professional engineer licensed to practice in the
Province of Ontario.

following:
(i) The Contractor shall retain services of a pipeline CCTV inspector
in accordance with the requirements of this Specification Section
33 44 51 to perform and report the CCTV pipeline inspection
requirements for the Work of the Project.
MATERIALS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
(a) The Contractor shall ensure all camera Equipment, CCTV truck units and
cable requirements are in accordance with TS 409.
2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

(a) The Contractor shall re-perform sewer inspections where the specified
tolerance requirements have not been satisfied.
EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
(a) The Contractor shall verify the condition and dimensions of existing Work
upon which this Specification Section 33 44 51 depends and report
defects to the Metrolinx Representative.
(b) The Contractor shall perform a CCTV inspection prior to the start of any
Construction Work for all existing sewers and maintenance holes that are
within the Utility relocation zones of this Project, including sections
upstream and downstream to the next maintenance hole. The CCTV
shall establish the condition of the existing systems to ensure that they
will not be negatively impacted by the Work. The CCTV shall also identify
all the existing lateral connections which will require support and
replacement.
(c) Following connection of any new permanent sewer section, the
Contractor shall perform a CCTV inspection for the sewer and
maintenance holes, including sections upstream and downstream to the
next maintenance hole. The Contractor shall compare the pre- and post-
construction CCTV inspections and shall provide a written report to the
Metrolinx Representative confirming that the new sewers have been
properly constructed and the existing sewers have not been negatively
impacted. The Contractor shall ensure that the sewer condition is to the
satisfaction of Metrolinx and the appropriate regional or municipal
authority.
(d) The Contractor shall perform a CCTV inspection immediately prior to the
Warranty Period for all sewers as described above to ensure that the
sewers are functioning to the satisfaction of Metrolinx.
3.2 PREPARATION AND CLEANING

(a) The Contractor shall complete a full, thorough cleaning & flushing of all
pipes, clean the downstream maintenance hole and Catch basin prior to
CCTV inspection.
(b) The Contractor shall complete Preliminary (V1), Post Cleaning &
Preparation (V2), and Post Rehab Completion (V3) CCTV inspections in
accordance with TS 409.
(c) If required, the Contractor shall clean out all debris or deposits in
manholes to gain access to sewer sections and ensure complete
inspection surveys.
3.3 INSPECTION
(a) The Contractor shall ensure linear Measurements are accurate to 0.1%
of the inspected length. The Contractor shall ensure minimal amount of
slack in umbilical at all times. The Contractor shall correct the linear
position for the focal length of the camera.
(b) Contractor shall position camera at the central axis of the sewer +/- 10%.
(c) The Contractor shall inspect all sewers at a rate of camera travel not
faster than nine metres per minute.
(d) The Contractor shall provide sufficient lighting to illuminate the sewer at
least two metres beyond the focal point.
(e) The Contractor shall inspect sewers in the direction of flow unless a
reverse set up is required.
(f) The Contractor shall ensure that the start maintenance hole is clearly
visible at the start of the inspection and perform the inspection from the
centre of the start maintenance hole to the centre of the finish
maintenance hole. The Contractor shall ensure that the automatic
distance measurement is displayed on- screen at all times during the
inspection.
(g) The Contractor shall ensure the picture remains in focus during the
inspection. The Contractor shall stop the camera for a minimum of two
seconds at major defects, connections, junctions, and major branches.
The Contractor shall rotate and pan the camera to provide a
perpendicular view of all maintenance holes, major defects, connections,
junctions, and major branches.
(h) The Contractor shall follow all other conditions for sewer CCTV
inspection outlined in TS 409.
3.4 SITE RESTORATION

(a) The Contractor shall immediately repair all damage to road surfaces,
grassland or landscaped areas or curbs, gutters, and other utilities
resulting from the Work or negligence or upon completion of Work.
(b) The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the Site and travel
routes in a neat, clean and odour free condition. The Contractor shall
immediately clean up any spills of deposits of solids or semi-solids
because of the Work.
END OF SECTION

1414 Ps1 Ta1 NC PWD SPC Prm0 00001 Pape Soe Specifications 20230622 Rs02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

1414 Ps1 Ta1 NC PWD SPC Prm0 00001 Pape Soe Specifications 20230622 Rs02

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

1414 Ps1 Ta1 NC PWD SPC Prm0 00001 Pape Soe Specifications 20230622 Rs02

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ontario Line

North Civil Works

Schedule 9 – Technical Specifications

Issued for Tender

01 55 26 Traffic Control Stephan Schmidle

01 53 13 Temporary Bridges Craig Fairclough

Section No. Section Name Engineer of Record

02 22 00 Existing Conditions Assessment Robert Moen

26 56 00 Temporary Street Lighting Nicholas Pereira

Section No. Section Name Engineer of Record

02 41 13 Site Demolition Muhammad Zubair

Section No. Section Name Engineer of Record

31 14 13 Soil Stripping and Stockpiling Mohamed Hosney

31 22 13 Grading Saidal Akbari

Section No Section Name Rev. No. Rev. Date

DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS

Section No Section Name Rev. No. Rev. Date

03 21 21.11 Glass Fibre-Reinforced Polymer Reinforcement Bars Rev 0 Jun-2023

03 37 13 Shotcrete Rev 0 Jun-2023

DIVISION 07 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section No Section Name Rev. No. Rev. Date

31 25 00 Schedule E1 – ESC Inspection and Photograph Checklist Rev 0 Jun-2023

31 51 00 Tieback and Tie Anchors Rev 0 Jun-2023

31 53 00 Struts and Walers Rev 0 Jun-2023

31 53 99 Strut Temperature Control System Rev 0 Jun-2023

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

Issued for Tender

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

2.1 NOT USED

3.1 CONTRACTOR’S USE OF SITE

3.2 SETTING OUT OF WORK

3.3 CUTTING, FITTING AND PATCHING

3.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

Metrolinx Representative will prepare and issue an agenda prior to

(3) Look ahead schedule.

3.5 ADDITIONAL DRAWINGS

1.2. RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1.3. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

1.5. MAIN ELEMENTS OF THE SCOPE OF WORK

(ii) Provide Construction Certificates and Submittals in a timely

certifications/qualifications of its employees when requested by

(viii) Designing, supplying, installing, and removing all material and

(ix) Installation, temperature control and monitoring of pre-loaded

1.6. WORK HANDOVER

1.7. WORK BY OTHERS

(ii) Sammon Avenue Headhouse

1.8. WORK SITE LOCATION

1.9. NOT USED

1.10. NOT USED

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

1.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

(i) Contractor submission of insurance certificates in accordance with

(iv) Reinstatement of the Site on completion of the Works to the

2.1 NOT USED